Sop I2r5

Vietnam Airlines Corporation VIETNAM AIRLINES ENGINEERING COMPANY LTD.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES
A: Noi Bai International Airport, Hanoi, Vietnam T: 84-4-38843290 F: 84-4-38865176 W: www.vaeco.com.vn
VIETNAM AIRLINES ENGINEERING CO. LTD.

PART 1 GENERAL
PART 1
GENERAL
Issue: 02, Revision: 00, Date: 01 FEB 2012
Page 1-1

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 PART 1
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7
TABLE OF CONTENT GENERAL ................................................................................................... 1-1

TABLE OF CONTENT ........................................................................................... 1.1-1 RECORD OF REVISIONS .................................................................................... 1.2-1 SUMMARY OF AMENDMENT .............................................................................. 1.3-1 LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES ............................................................................... 1.4-1 DOCUMENT DISTRIBUTION................................................................................ 1.5-1 ABBREVIATION .................................................................................................... 1.6-1 DEFINITION OF TERMS ....................................................................................... 1.7-1
PART 2
2.1
MANAGEMENT........................................................................................... 2-1
ORGANIZATION CHARTS.................................................................................... 2.1-1
PART 3
3.1 3.2 3.3
PROCESSES .............................................................................................. 3-1

BASE MAINTENANCE PROCESS ....................................................................... 3.1-1 RAMP MAINTENANCE PROCESS....................................................................... 3.2-1 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE PROCESS.......................................................... 3.3-1
PART 4
4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9
GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS ...................................................... 4-1

GENERAL SAFETY .............................................................................................. 4.1-1 A/C ELECTROSTATIC SAFETY ........................................................................... 4.2-1 ELECTRICITY AND AIR POWER SAFETY .......................................................... 4.3-1 FUEL TANK SAFETY ............................................................................................ 4.4-1 HIGH AREA WORKING SAFETY ......................................................................... 4.5-1 OXYGEN SYSTEM HANDLING SAFETY ............................................................. 4.6-1 MAINTENANCE CLEANLINESS AND FOD PREVENTION ................................. 4.7-1 SAFETY FOR AIRCRAFT IN HANGAR ................................................................ 4.8-1 HANDLING, STORAGE AND DISPOSAL OF WASTES ....................................... 4.9-1
PART 5
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7
AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE CONTROL PROCEDURES .......................... 5-1

CONTRACT MAINTENANCE IMPLEMENTATION............................................... 5.1-1 AIRCRAFT WORK ORDER ISSUANCE AND CONTROL .................................... 5.2-1 WORK PACK PREPARATION AND REVIEW ...................................................... 5.3-1 CONTROL OF WORK PROCESS AND DOCUMENT DURING MAINTENANCE PROGRESS .......................................................................................................... 5.4-1 DOCK CONTROL .................................................................................................. 5.5-1 MAINTENANCE DOCUMENT COMPLETION ...................................................... 5.6-1 AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE RECORD ................................................................. 5.7-1
PART 6
6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6
RAMP AND BASE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ................................. 6-1

AIRCRAFT TOWING/ PUSHBACK ....................................................................... 6.1-1 A/C ARRIVAL AND DEPARTURE......................................................................... 6.2-1 AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE.................................................................................. 6.3-1 CONTINUITY OF MAINTENANCE (SHIFT/TASK HAND-OVER) ......................... 6.4-1 LANDING GEAR, FLIGHT CONTROL FUNCTIONAL TEST ................................ 6.5-1 RETURN OF AIRCRAFT PART/ MATERIALS TO STORE .................................. 6.6-1
Issue: 02, Revision: 05, Date: 25 APR 2013
Page 1.1-1

PART 1 GENERAL
PART 7
7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ........................................ 7-1

WORKSHOP WORK REQUEST ISSUANCE AND MANAGEMENT .................... 7.1-1 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE WORKSHEET ISSUANCE................................. 7.2-1 COMPONENT RECEIVING AND PRELIMINARY INSPECTION.......................... 7.3-1 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE ............................................................................ 7.4-1 COMPONENT FINAL INSPECTION AND RETURN TO SERVICE ...................... 7.5-1 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE RECORD HANDLING ........................................ 7.6-1 WORKSHOP SPARE PART & MATERIALS CONTROL ...................................... 7.7-1
PART 8
8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 8.8 8.9 8.10 8.11 8.12 8.13
MAINTENANCE SUPPORT PROCEDURES .............................................. 8-1

MAINTENANCE DATA CONTROL ....................................................................... 8.1-1 TRANSCRIPTION OF MAINTENANCE DATA...................................................... 8.2-1 MAINTENANCE DATA MODIFYING..................................................................... 8.3-1 NOTIFICATION OF MAINTENANCE DATA INACCURACIES AND AMBIGUITIES TO THE AUTHOR ....................................................................................................... 8.4-1 TECHNICAL SUPPORT ........................................................................................ 8.5-1 ENGINEERING ORDER ISSUANCE .................................................................... 8.6-1 TECHNICAL INSTRUCTION FOR PART FABRICATION .................................... 8.7-1 ACCEPTANCE OF TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT .................................................... 8.8-1 MANAGEMENT OF TOOL AND EQUIPMENT ..................................................... 8.9-1 CALIBRATION REQUIRED TOOL AND EQUIPMENT MANAGEMENT ............ 8.10-1 CALIBRATION AT VAECO CALIBRATION LABORATORY ............................... 8.11-1 MATERIALS PRODUCTION ............................................................................... 8.12-1 TRANSFER OF TOOL AND EQUIPMENT FOR MAINTENANCE ...................... 8.13-1
PART 9
9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7 9.8
LOGISTICS PROCEDURES ....................................................................... 9-1

PART/ MATERIALS INCOMING INSPECTION & RECEIVING ............................ 9.1-1 PART/ MATERIALS TAGGING, ARRANGEMENT, PRESERVING...................... 9.2-1 SHELF LIFE PART/ MATERIALS CONTROL IN STORE ..................................... 9.3-1 ROBBERY (CANNIBALIZATION) FROM STOCKED ASSEMBLY ....................... 9.4-1 PART/ MATERIALS ISSUANCE ........................................................................... 9.5-1 RECEIVING AND SENDING UNSERVICEABLE PARTS ..................................... 9.6-1 STOCK LEVEL AND STORE INVENTORY CONTROL........................................ 9.7-1 DISPOSITION OF CONDEMNED PARTS ............................................................ 9.8-1
PART 10 QUALITY SYSTEM PROCEDURES ......................................................... 10-1

10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5 10.6 10.7 10.8 INSPECTION AND RETURN TO SERVICE PERSONNEL ................................ 10.1-1 SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL QUALIFYING ..................................................... 10.2-1 QUALITY AUDITOR QUALIFYING ..................................................................... 10.3-1 JOB QUALIFICATION OF THE OTHER QUALIFIED EMPLOYEES .................. 10.4-1 AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE INSPECTION......................................................... 10.5-1 HIDDEN DAMAGE INSPECTION ....................................................................... 10.6-1 INSPECTION OF REQUIRED INSPECTION ITEM (RII) .................................... 10.7-1 CERTIFICATE OF RETURN TO SERVICE/ MAINTENANCE RELEASE ISSUANCE (FOR AIRCRAFT) ................................................................................................ 10.8-1
Page 1.1-2

PART 1 GENERAL
10.9 10.10 10.11 10.12 10.13 10.14 10.15 10.16 10.17 10.18 10.19 10.20 10.21 10.22 10.23 10.24 10.25 10.26
CONTINUITY OF INSPECTION .......................................................................... 10.9-1 RE-CERTIFYING A COMPONENT/ PART REMOVED FROM AIRCRAFT ...... 10.10-1 FABRICATION QUALITY CONTROL................................................................ 10.11-1 MOR/ MALFUNCTION AND DEFECT REPORTING ........................................ 10.12-1 SUSPECTED UNAPPROVED PARTS REPORTING ....................................... 10.13-1 MAINTENANCE EVENT/ OCCURRENCE INVESTIGATION ........................... 10.14-1 QUALITY NOTICE ............................................................................................. 10.15-1 QUALITY AUDIT ............................................................................................... 10.16-1 SUPPLIER CONTROL ...................................................................................... 10.17-1 CERTIFICATED AND NON-CERTIFICATED FACILITY CONTROL ................ 10.18-1 COMPANY CERTIFICATE APPROVAL HANDLING ........................................ 10.19-1 CONCESSION FOR DEVIATION FROM ORGANISATIONS PROCEDURES 10.20-1 QUALITY MONITORING ................................................................................... 10.21-1 MAINTENANCE ERROR/ VIOLATION DETECT AND RECTIFICATION ......... 10.22-1 ASSESSOR QUALIFYING ................................................................................ 10.23-1 QUALIFYING EXAMINATION ........................................................................... 10.24-1 TEMPORARY AUTHORIZATION (DISPENSATION) ....................................... 10.25-1 INSTRUCTOR QUALIFYING ............................................................................ 10.26-1
PART 11 HUMAN RESOURCE AND TRAINING PROCEDURES ........................... 11-1

11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5 11.6 11.7 11.8 11.9 11.10 11.11 POSITION NEED ASSESSMENT ....................................................................... 11.1-1 EMPLOYEE NEED ASSESSMENT AND TRAINING RECORD ......................... 11.2-1 TRAINING COURSE ARRANGEMENT .............................................................. 11.3-1 TRAINING COURSES PREPARATION .............................................................. 11.4-1 TRAINING COURSE IMPLEMENTATION .......................................................... 11.5-1 EXAM ARRANGEMENT ..................................................................................... 11.6-1 EXAM PREPARATION ........................................................................................ 11.7-1 EXAM IMPLEMENTATION.................................................................................. 11.8-1 TRAINING RECORDS COMPLETION AND STORAGE..................................... 11.9-1 ISSUANCE OF CERTIFICATE/ ATTESTATION ............................................... 11.10-1 TRAINING ACTIVITIES REVIEW ...................................................................... 11.11-1
PART 12 SPECIFIC PROCEDURES FOR VNA ...................................................... 12-1

12.1 12.2 12.3 12.4 12.5 12.6 12.7 12.8 12.9 12.10 12.11 12.12 AIRWORTHINESS DIRECTIVE EVALUATION AND IMPLEMENTATION ......... 12.1-1 SERVICE BULLETIN (SB) EVALUATION AND DEVELOPMENT ...................... 12.2-1 AD, SB, MOD AND EO COMPLIANCE CONTROL ............................................ 12.3-1 ENGINE CONDITION MONITORING ................................................................. 12.4-1 ESTABLISHMENT AND CONTROL OF AIRCRAFT CONFIGURATION ........... 12.5-1 SET UP TECHNICAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM FOR NEW AIRCRAFT ........... 12.6-1 CONDITION MONITORING OF AIRCRAFT SYSTEM ....................................... 12.7-1 CONTROL OF PRELOAD REQUIREMENTS ..................................................... 12.8-1 COMPLIANCE OF AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS ................... 12.9-1 CONTROL OF MAINTENANCE ACTIVITIES IN AMASIS ................................ 12.10-1 VNA VARIATION/ CONCESSION CONTROL .................................................. 12.11-1 CONTROL OF HOLD COMPONENT ................................................................ 12.12-1
Page 1.1-3

PART 1 GENERAL
12.13 12.14 12.15 12.16 12.17 12.18
CONTROL OF EMERGENCY EQUIPMENTS .................................................. 12.13-1 COMPONENT ROBBERY/SWAPPING ON VNA AIRCRAFT........................... 12.14-1 HANDLING OF VNA AIRCRAFT EVENTS ....................................................... 12.15-1 STRUCTURE DAMAGE REPAIR...................................................................... 12.16-1 CONTROL OF ACCEPTABLE DEFERED DEFECT ......................................... 12.17-1 AIRCRAFT SOFTWARE MANAGEMENT......................................................... 12.18-1
PART 13 FORMS ...................................................................................................... 13-1

13.1 13.2 VAECO FORM AND GUIDANCE FOR COMPLETION....................................... 13.1-1 AUTHORITY AND CUSTOMER FORM AND GUIDANCE FOR COMPLETION 13.2-1
Page 1.1-4

PART 1 GENERAL 1.2 RECORD OF REVISIONS
1.2
RECORD OF REVISIONS
Issue No. Revision No. 01 01 02 02 02 02 02 02 00 01 00 01 02 03 04 05
Revision Date 15 JUL 2010 19 MAY 2011 01 FEB 2012 18 APR 2012 08 MAY 2012 20 JUL 2012 28 NOV 2012 25 APR 2013
Revised by VAECO QAD VAECO QAD VAECO QAD VAECO QAD VAECO QAD VAECO QAD VAECO QAD
Page 1.2-1

PART 1 GENERAL 1.3 SUMMARY OF AMENDMENT
1.3
SUMMARY OF AMENDMENT The following table shows the summary of the latest amendment in the current issue of the VAECO SOP. Manual Name Manual Code Issue Number : Standard Operating Procedures : VAECO SOP : 02
Revision Number : 05 Part. Chapter - Page 1.1-1 to 1.1-4 1.2-1 1.3-1 to 1.3-3 1.4-1 to 1.4-6
1.7-1 to 1.7-2 5.1-2 5.3-1 to 5.3-3
Amendment Summary To update Table of content To update Record of revision To update Summary of amendment To update List of Effective Pages
+ To add definition of ADD Type B, ADD type C, Over and Above work + To specify that RMC may perform a work package IAW SOP 12.15 + To revise the work pack preparation review and acceptance + To add the BDD responsibilities to cooperate with customer for approving additional work performance as requested by customer during maintenance progress. + To request maintenance staff to follow towing instruction of respective maintenance center. + To remove VAECO requirement of placing safety cone when customer does not have that requirement. + To specify that Non-routine Work/ Workpack Change Request (VAECO Form 6006) is submitted to BDD and customer for approval if the non-routine work is belonged to Over and Above work. + To specify that the Delivery Note shall be issued and acknowledged whenever transferring of tool/ equipment. + To add the procedure to inspect and accept the part/ component returned to VAECO after loan. + To revise the part/ materials tagging
5.4-1 to 5.4-4
6.1-1 to 6.1-9 6.2-2
6.3-2 to 6.3-8
8.13-1 to 8.13-3
9.1-1 to 9.1-11 9.2-1
Page 1.3-1

PART 1 GENERAL 1.3 SUMMARY OF AMENDMENT
Part. Chapter - Page
Amendment Summary
+ To clarify the experience required for I&RTS staff + To group the common requirement of I&RTS staff + To add equivalent of task training for the requirement of Part and Material Incoming Inspection staff + To change the assessment process for NDT staff
10.1-1 to 10.1-14
+ To change the condition for maintaining the validity of authorization + To add paragraph Structure damage evaluation and deferment function is applicable for all aircraft structure + To clarify the privileges and limitation of borescope inspection staff and component I&RTS staff
10.2-2
+ To remove the requirement that QA manager shall review records of interview result. + To add base maintenance work to the duties of MCC controller
10.4-2 to 10.4-9
+ To add base maintenance experience to the requirement of MCC controller + To clarify the privileges of Qualified Mechanic
10.8-1 to 10.8-3
+ To specify the requirement for returning an A/C to service after line maintenance. + To revise the requirement when Re-certifying a component/ part removed (by VAECO staff) from an aircraft of an operator other than VNA. + To change multiple-choice questionnaire structure for category B1/B2 upgrade/ supplement + To delete the multiple-choice questionnaire for Engine run-up and Borescope inspection + To add new procedure Instructor Qualifying + To revise the procedure of preparation and update of preload requirements + To revise responsibility of preparing spares/ materials list required to perform OPM. + To revise the procedure of handling the A/C undergone an occurrences and other maintenance events.
10.10-2
10.24-1
10.26-1 to 10.26-2 12.8-1 to 12.8-3 12.9-2 to 12.9-4 12.15-1 to 12.15-4
Page 1.3-2

PART 1 GENERAL 1.4 LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
1.5
DOCUMENT DISTRIBUTION SOP manual will be published in PDF format. The users who are VAECO members will access the current document on VAECO website. The VAECO Technical Library will update the document on VAECO website whenever there is a new issue/ revision. The Quality Assurance Department will notify the changes on home page of VAECO website whenever there are significant changes.
Page 1.5-1

PART 1 GENERAL 1.6 ABBREVIATION
1.6
ABBREVIATION ABBREVIATION A/C AD BDD BMC BTPD CBT CEO CFR CHDO CMC CSI CSN CSO CTPD DAD DRO EASA EGD EO ER ETA FAA FAR FOD GSE HAN HCM HRD HT IAW IFO IT JC LGD LLP LEP MCC MTE NDT NRC MEANING Aircraft Airworthiness Directive Business Development Department Base Maintenance Center Base Technical Planning Division Computer Based Training Chief Executive Officer Code of Federal Regulations Certificate-Holding District Office Component Maintenance Center Cycles Since Inspection Cycles Since New Cycles Since Overhaul Component Technical Planning Division Da Nang Defect Rectification Order European Aviation Safety Agency Engineering and IT Department Engineering Order Engineering Request Estimated Time Arrival Federal Aviation Administration Federal Aviation Regulations Foreign Object Damage Ground Support Equipment Ha Noi Ho Chi Minh City Human Resource Department Hard Time In Accordance With International Field Office Informatics Technology Job Card Logistics Department Life Limit Part List of Effective Pages Maintenance Control Center Measuring and Test Equipment Non-Destructive Testing Non-Routine Card Page 1.6-1
Issue: 02, Revision: 04, Date: 28 NOV 2012

PART 1 GENERAL 1.6 ABBREVIATION
ABBREVIATION NRCC OOP OPM PLD QA QAD QCM QN RII RMC RSM RSTP RTS SB SGN SRO T&E TAR TC TCD TPD TI TL TOEFA TS TSI TSN TSO VAC VACBI VAECO VAR WO WR WP WS
MEANING Non-Routine Card Continuation Out Of Phase Out of Phase Maintenance Planning department Quality Assurance Quality Assurance Department Quality Control Manual Quality Notice Required Inspection Items Ramp Maintenance Center Repair Station Manual Repair Station Training Program Return To Service Service Bulletin Tansonnhat Airport Structure Repair Order Tools and Equipment Technical Assistance Request Training Center Training Director Technical Planning Division Technical Instruction Technical Library Test of English For Aviation - Docwise Technical Service Time Since Inspection Time Since New Time Since Overhaul Vietnam Airlines Corporation Video and Computer Based Instruction Vietnam Airlines Engineering Company Ltd. Vietnam Aviation Regulation Work Order Work Request Work Pack Worksheet
Page 1.6-2

PART 1 GENERAL 1.7 DEFINITION OF TERMS
1.7
DEFINITION OF TERMS TERM DEFINITION A MEL/ airworthiness related defect that is accepted to defer the rectification IAW maintenance data such as MEL, CDL, AMM, SRM, EM, TA A non-MEL/ non-airworthiness related defect that is accepted to defer the rectification (this defect is not specified in any maintenance data and does not concern to the airworthiness of the A/C).
ADD Type B
ADD type C
Airworthiness Approval CAAV Form 1, EASA Form ONE, FAA Form 8130-3 etc. Tag/ Authorized Release Certificate Arrival/ departure KIT Authorized inspection staff Authorized staff Include but not limited to necessary tool for A/C arrival and departure activities as: headset, safety pins Person authorized by VAECO to performing inspections under the Company certificate and operations specifications. Person authorized by VAECO to plan, supervise, perform inspection and approve for return to service the maintenance, preventive maintenance, or alterations performed under the VAECO certificate and operations specifications. Re-inspection of work performed as a result of previous required inspection findings. A maintenance task involving some element of removal/ disassembly and installation/ reassembly of several components of the same type fitted to more than one system on the same aircraft during a particular maintenance check. Area for controlling all maintenance document including processing, completing etc. during specific maintenance check. Person working in EGD and qualified IAW chapter 10.4. Nominated person by maintenance director, who manage all maintenance activities for specific work pack.
Buy-back Critical task
Dock Control Room
Engineering engineer Foreman
Maintenance document Documents that used to record and certify for the work to be done such as Job card, worksheet, NRC, NRCC, JCAS etc.
Page 1.7-1

PART 1 GENERAL 1.7 DEFINITION OF TERMS
TERM Maintenance planner MCC controller Mechanic Over and Above Work
DEFINITION Person working in EGD and qualified IAW chapter 10.4. Person working in a Maintenance Control Center and qualified IAW chapter 10.4. Person working in a Maintenance Centers who is qualified IAW chapter 10.4. Any additional work which is not originally part of the contracted work package or variations to existing documents in contracted work package requested by the customer. Person working in a Maintenance Center and qualified IAW chapter 10.4. Person who authorized to perform the incoming inspection on parts and/or materials to be used by the VAECO. Person who authorized to direct the work performed under the Company certificate and operations specifications. A statement by the competent person performing or supervising the work, that the task or group of tasks has been correctly completed. Person qualified IAW chapter 10.4. Person working in a Maintenance Center and qualified IAW chapter 10.4. Person working in Maintenance Center and qualified IAW chapter 10.4.
Production planner Store inspector Supervisor Sign-off
Technical librarian Technical service staff Tool controller
Page 1.7-2

PART 2 MANAGEMENT
PART 2
MANAGEMENT
Page 2-1

PART 2 MANAGEMENT 2.1 ORGANIZATION CHARTS
2.1 2.1.1
ORGANIZATION CHARTS HUMAN RESOURCE DEPARTMENT
HUMAN RESOURCE DEPARTMENT
PERSONNEL DIVISION
TRAINING & DEVELOPMENT DIVISION
COMPENSATION & BENEFITS DIVISION
Page 2.1-1

2.1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE DEPARTMENT
QUALITY ASSURANCE DEPARTMENT
SAFETY DIVISION
QUALITY AUDIT DIVISION
QUALITY CONTROL DIVISION (HAN)
QUALITY CONTROL DIVISION (HCM)
SAFETY STANDARD SECTION
QUALIFYING SECTION
AVIONIC SECTION
AVIONIC SECTION
SAFETY CONTROL SECTION
AUDIT SECTION
AIRFRAME SECTION
AIRFRAME SECTION
Page 2.1-2

2.1.3
ENGINEERING AND IT DEPARTMENT
ENGINEERING & IT DEPARTMENT
MAINTENANCE PLANNING DIVISION
TOOL AND EQUIPMENT CONTROL DIVISION
AIRCRAFT ENGINEERING DIVISION
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY DIVISION
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE SECTION
GROUND EQUIPMENT SECTION
AD/ SB CONTROL SECTION
IT SECTION (HAN)
MAINTENANCE REQUIRED PARTS AND EO SECTION
TOOL SECTION
STRUCTURE SECTION
TECHNICAL LIBRARY SECTION (HAN)
WORK ORDER SECTION
AIRCRAFT SYSTEM SECTION
IT SECTION (HCM)
PLANNING SECTION
ENGINE SECTION
TECHNICAL LIBRARY SECTION (HCM)
ELECTRIC/ AVIONIC SECTION
TECHNICAL RECORD SECTION (HAN)
HCM ENGINEERING SECTION
TECHNOLOGY DEVELOPING SECTION
Page 2.1-3

2.1.4
PLANNING DEPARTMENT
PLANNING DEPARTMENT
INVESTMENT PLANNING DIVISION
DEVELOPMENT PLANNING DIVISION
INVESTMENT PLANNING SECTION
GENERAL PLANNING SECTION
Page 2.1-4

2.1.5
LOGISTICS DEPARTMENT
LOGISTICS DEPARTMENT
STORE DIVISION
STOCK CONTROL DIVISION
SUPPLY DIVISION
REPAIR CONTROL DIVISION
HCM LOGISTICS DIVISION
INCOMING INSPECTION SECTION
PURCHASE SECTION
IMPORT/ EXPORT SECTION
GENERAL SECTION
STORE CONTROL SECTION
SUPPLIER CONTROL SECTION
DOMESTIC SECTION
INCOMING INSPECTION SECTION
STORE KEEPING SECTION
IMPORT/ EXPORT & DOMESTIC SECTION
REPAIR CONTROL SECTION
STORE KEEPING SECTION
Page 2.1-5

2.1.6
BUSINESS DEVELOPING DEPARTMENT
BUSINESS DEVELOPMENT DEPARTMENT
MARKETING & SALES DIVISION
CUSTOMER SUPPORT DIVISION
Page 2.1-6

2.1.7
MAINTENANCE CONTROL CENTER
MAINTENANCE CONTROL CENTER
MAINTENANCE CONTROL DIVISION
PRODUCTION PLANNING DIVISION
CONTROL SECTION (1, 2, 3, 4)
AIRBUS/ FOKKER MAINTENANCE PLANNING SECTION
GENERAL SECTION
BOEING/ ATR MAINTENANCE PLANNING SECTION
ADD CLEARANCE PLANNING SECTION
Page 2.1-7

2.1.8
HAN BASE MAINTENANCE CENTER
HAN BASE MAINTENANCE CENTER
TECHNICAL PLANNING DIVISION (TPD)
AIRFRAME & CABIN SQUAD
AVIONIC & IFE SQUAD
POWER PLANT SQUAD
STRUCTURE REPAIR SQUAD
MAINTENANCE SUPPORT SQUAD
TECHNICAL SERVICE SECTION
TEAM 1
TEAM 1
TEAM 1
STRUCTURE REPAIR SHOP
DOCK SECTION
PLANNING SECTION
TEAM 2
TEAM 2
TEAM 2
COMPOSITE SHOP
ELECTRICITY SECTION
GENERAL SECTION
TEAM 3
TEAM 3
TEAM 3
PAINTING SECTION
AIRCRAFT CLEANING SECTION
STORE SECTION
TEAM 4
TEAM 4
TEAM 4
HANGAR SECTION
CABIN SECTION
Page 2.1-8

2.1.9
HCM BASE MAINTENANCE CENTER
HCM BASE MAINTENANCE CENTER
TECHNICAL SERVICE DIVISION
AIRFRAME SQUAD
AVIONIC SQUAD
STRUCTURE REPAIR SQUAD
MAINTENANCE SUPPORT SQUAD
SECTION 1 (ZONE 100, 200 AND 800)
STURCTURE REPAIR SHOP
HANGAR SECTION
PLANNING SECTION
SECTION 2 (ZONE 300 AND 400)
COMPOSITE SHOP
CLEANING SECTION
GENERAL SECTION
SECTION 3 (ZONE 500, 600 AND 700)
PAINTING SECTION
Page 2.1-9

2.1.10
HAN RAMP MAINTENANCE CENTER
HAN RAMP MAINTENANCE CENTER
TECHNICAL PLANNING DIVISION
MAINTENANCE SQUAD (1, 2, 3, 4)
CABIN INTERIOR & IFE SQUAD
INTERNATIONAL MAINTENANCE SQUAD
TECHNICAL SERVICE SECTION (1, 2, 3, 4)
A320/ 321/ 330 AIRCRAFT SECTION
NUMBER 1 SECTION
NUMBER 1 SECTION
PLANNING SECTION
F70 & OTHER ICRAFT SECTION
NUMBER 2 SECTION
NUMBER 2 SECTION
CONTROL SECTION
NUMBER 3 SECTION
NUMBER 3 SECTION
GENERAL SECTION
NUMBER 4 SECTION
NUMBER 4 SECTION
INFORMATIC & DOCUMENT SECTION
VEHICLE SECTION
RAMP SECTIONS (OUT STATIONS)
Page 2.1-10

2.1.11
HCM RAMP MAINTENANCE CENTER
HCM RAMP MAINTENANCE CENTER
MAINTENANCE SQUAD (1, 2, 3, 4)
CABIN INTERIOR & IFE SQUAD
INTERNATIONAL MAINTENANCE SQUAD
TECHNICAL SERVICE SECTION (1, 2, 3, 4)
ATR72 AIRCRAFT SECTION
NUMBER 1 SECTION
NUMBER 1 SECTION
PLANNING SECTION
B777 AIRCRAFT SECTION
NUMBER 2 SECTION
NUMBER 2 SECTION
CONTROL SECTION
A320/ 321 AIRCRAFT SECTION
NUMBER 3 SECTION
NUMBER 3 SECTION
GENERAL SECTION
A330 AIRCRAFT SECTION
NUMBER 4 SECTION
NUMBER 4 SECTION
INFORMATIC & DOCUMENT SECTION
VEHICLE SECTION
Page 2.1-11

2.1.12
DAD RAMP MAINTENANCE CENTER
DAD RAMP MAINTENANCE CENTER
DAD RAMP STORE SECTION
PLANNING SECTION
Page 2.1-12

2.1.13
HAN COMPONENT MAINTENANCE CENTER
HAN COMPONENT MAINTENANCE CENTER
CALIBRATION WORKSHOP
AIRCRAFT COMPONENT WORKSHOP
CABIN & PRODUCTION WORKSHOP
MAINTENANCE SUPPORT WORKSHOP
GROUND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE WORKSHOP
CALIBRATION SHOP
BATTERY SHOP
CABIN SHOP
TOOL STORE SECTION
MECHANICAL SHOP
PLANNING SECTION
MEASUREMENT T&E CONTROL SECTION
ATEC SHOP
SOFT FURNISHING SHOP
EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE SHOP
MAINTENANCE RECORD SECTION
NDT AND BORESCOPE SHOP
IFE SHOP
02 N2 H2O SHOP
SAFETY EQUIPMENT SHOP
WHEEL SHOP
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT SHOP
Page 2.1-13

2.1.14
HCM COMPONENT MAINTENANCE CENTER
HCM COMPONENT MAINTENANCE CENTER
CALIBRATION & ELECTRONIC WORKSHOP
AIRCRAFT COMPONENT WORKSHOP
CABIN INTERIOR WORKSHOP
MAINTENANCE SUPPORT WORKSHOP
CALIBRATION SHOP
BATTERY & ELECTRICAL COMP. SHOP
MECHANICAL SHOP
TOOL STORE SECTION
PLANNING SECTION
T&E CONTROL SECTION
MECHANICAL COMPONENT SHOP
SOFT FURNISHING SHOP
MAINTENANCE RECORD SECTION
NDT AND BORESCOPE SHOP
WHEEL & BRAKE SHOP
OXYGEN, NITROGEN, H2O SHOP
EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE SHOP
Page 2.1-14

2.1.15
TRAINING CENTER
TRAINING CENTER
TRAINING DIVISION
ADMINISTRATIVE DIVISION
SOUTHERN TRAINING DIVISION
INSTRUCTOR SECTION
PLANNING AND CONTRACT SECTION
STANDARD SECTION
GENERAL SECTION
Page 2.1-15

PART 3 PROCESSES
PART 3
PROCESSES
Page 3-1

PART 3 PROCESSES 3.1 BASE MAINTENANCE PROCESS
3.1
BASE MAINTENANCE PROCESS

Maintenance cleanliness and FOD prevention (4.7) Handling, storage and disposal of wastes (4.9) Aircraft towing/ push back (6.1) Aircraft contract maintenance implementation (5.1) Aircraft work request issuance and monitoring (5.2) Work pack preparation and review (5.3) Management of tool and equipment (8.9) Maintenance data control (8.1) Hidden Damage Inspection (10.10) AIRCRAFT TO BE MAINTAINED
Control of work process and document in base maint. (5.4)
Dock control (5.5) Inspection of require inspection item (RII) (10.7) Suspected unapproved parts reporting (10.13) MOR/ Malfunction and defect reporting (10.12) Continuity of maintenance (Shift/ task handover) (6.4) Continuity of inspection (10.9) In-process inspection (10.5.7.2) Aircraft maintenance record (5.7) Aircraft document completion (5.6) Return of A/C parts/ materials to store (6.6) Final inspection (10.5.7.3)
Preliminary inspection (10.5.7.1)
Aircraft Maintenance
(6.3)
CRS/ maintenance release issuance (10.8)
AIRCRAFT RETURNED TO SERVICE
Page 3.1-1

PART 3 PROCESSES 3.2 RAMP MAINTENANCE PROCESS
3.2
RAMP MAINTENANCE PROCESS
Maintenance cleanliness and FOD prevention (4.7) Aircraft towing/ push back (6.1) Contract maintenance implementation (5.1) Aircraft work request issuance and monitoring (5.2) Management of tool and equipment (8.9) Maintenance data control (8.1) Preliminary inspection (10.5.7.1) AIRCRAFT TO BE MAINTAINED Handling, storage and disposal of wastes (4.9) Inspection of require inspection item (RII) (10.7) Suspected unapproved parts reporting (10.13) MOR/ Malfunction and defect reporting (10.12) Shift/ task handover (6.4) Aircraft maintenance record (5.7) Aircraft document completion (5.6) Return of A/C parts and materials to store (6.6) Final inspection (10.5.7.3)
In-process inspection (10.5.7.2)
Aircraft Arrival (6.2.4.2)
Aircraft Maintenance and Service (6.2.4.3)
Aircraft departure (6.2.4.4)
AIRCRAFT RETURNED TO SERVICE
Page 3.2-1

PART 3 PROCESSES 3.3 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE PROCESS
3.3
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE PROCESS
Workshop Work request Issuance and management (7.1) Worksheet preparation (7.2) Tools and equipments control (8.9) Workshop Spare parts & materials control (7.7) Maintenance data control (8.1) Hidden Damage Inspection (10.10)
AIRCRAFT COMPONENT TO BE MAINTAINED
Maintenance cleanliness and FOD prevention (4.7)
Suspected unapproved parts reporting (10.13) Handling, storage and disposal of wastes (4.9) MOR/ Malfunction and defect reporting (10.12) Shift/ task handover (6.4) Component document handling (7.6) Unserviceable parts return to store (6.6)
AIRCRAFT COMPONENT RETURNED TO SERVICE
Aircraft component receiving and preliminary inspection (7.3)
Component maintenance performance (7.4)
Component final inspection and return to service (7.5)
Page 3.3-1

PART 4 GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
PART 4
GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
Page 4-1

PART 4 GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 4.1 GENAERAL SAFETY
4.1 4.1.1
GENERAL SAFETY PURPOSE To ensure the basic safety requirements are followed by the VAECO maintenance staffs in order to achieve the best quality of maintenance work.
4.1.2 4.1.3
SCOPE This procedure is applied when performing maintenance activities. RESPONSIBILITY 1. 2. All VAECO personnel shall follow all the requirements set forth in this instruction. The staff on duty has responsibilities for: a. b. 3. Following the safety regulations of the jobs. Informing the manager immediately when the safety problems occurred or may occur. Ensuring all his staffs follow safety requirements. Providing the sufficient safe environment. Investigating the incident/ accident and issuing the safety report and sending to QAD.
The manager has responsibilities for: a. b. c.
4.1.4
GENERAL SAFETY OPERATION 1. Fire accident prevention a. b. c. d. Smoking is prohibited in the ramp, the hangar and the aircraft. The location symbol of the fire bottle must be clear, and the expiry must be remarkable on each one. It must be easy to go through/to the pavement, fire lane and fire hydrant. The fire extinguisher location shall be established by Administration department and accepted by QAD. List of all fire extinguishers shall specify the locations and expiry dates and be controlled by the Administration department. Fire extinguisher control list shall be printed out every three months. Fire control team shall perform the fire extinguishers routine checks and request to replace the expired or unserviceable one. The entire working zone must be kept neatly clean. The entire equipments using on the maintenance jobs must be fixed to prevent the personnel in or around the working area from being hurt. The maintenance staff must wear the uniform clothing and safe shoes in the working area. Page 4.1-1
2.
Common Safety operation a. b.
c.

d.
The maintenance staff is prohibited to wear the ring, the ear-ring, the necklace and so on when working in critical area or cramped area such as fuel tank etc. It is prohibited to wear the shoes showing toes in hangar or ramp. The manager must confirm that maintenance staff had the necessary safety accessories before doing the maintenance jobs. All the personnel must have the necessary protective accessories when go through the danger area. The personnel must wear the safe rope when doing the jobs on the high area like as the wing, the aerial ladder truck and the fuselage top point. It is prohibited to be used on the aircraft maintenance when tools/equipment are damaged or unserviceable. Electrical operated drills are not allowed for aircraft work due to possibility of sparking. Adjustable spanner are not allowed for aircraft work as the bolts or nuts are prone to be rounded. The tools/equipment as power tools, electric machinery, electronic tester, cybernetic equipment and self-propelled vehicles must be operated by the training-approved man. The crane and the forklift must be operated by the training-approved man. The operator must check the brake or other functions one time before operation and be sure awareness of the loading restriction. The mechanic must wear cotton-padded clothes and use the airdriven tools and flame-proof lamp/ lights/ torches when performing jobs in the fuel tank. The maintenance staff must use the oil-free tools when performing the oxygen system maintenance jobs. The maintenance staff cannot tear off/down the unserviceable tag, safety protection equipment and warning symbols. Maintenance staff must follow all airport authority requirements when working at ramp. The ramp area must be clean without anything (foreign objects). The aircraft must be grounded when performing heavy maintenance visit. Obey the aircraft maintenance manual notice like as Warning, Caution and Note for preventing the aircraft from damage and maintenance staff from being hurt.
e. f. g. h.
3.
Tools/ equipment safety operation a. b. c. d.
e.
f.
g. h. 4.
Hangar and ramp safety operation a. b. c. d.
Page 4.1-2

e. f. g. h. i. j. k. 5.
The vehicles must follow the lane on the apron IAW the regulation of airport authority. Be careful of striking the protruding flight control surface, antenna, static discharger and opened panel. Be careful of tripping up by the power cable, ground wire, air condition tube or fuel tube. The tear-off battery from the aircraft must cover the connector with the plastic cap from circuit shorting. The personnel must wear the earplug or the ear-flap around the engine-running aircraft. The maintenance staff must perform the Walk around inspection to clear all foreign objects before the aircraft arrival. It is prohibited to perform the de-fueling or refueling jobs in hangar except approved by QC manager. All the shops must have the sufficient ventilation and illumination. The shop working area must have enough distance for going through and keeping clean and preventing from slipping and falling. The shop must have a checklist to check and keep the machines and tools neat and clean. The power source and switch must have the clear symbol. The operating staff of power mechanism must take care of the environment around him/her and wear the protection accessories like as goggles and ear plug. The instrument/avionics shop (ATEC, NDT, Calibration shop...) must have the capability of dust disposal and controlling of the temperature and the humidity. The maintenance staff must wear the static-free clothes and wrist-strap when performing maintenance jobs. The battery shop must be isolated. The ground power unit location must be near by the power connector, and the exhaust is away from the aircraft. When the ground power unit is switched on, the operating staff must watch out the control panel, the ground power unit operation, output voltage and frequency to ensure they are under the normal condition. If not, remove the power cable and confirm the cause before restart. The maintenance staff must check the switch and the circuit breaker panel of the aircraft for confirming the electrical system function is normal before connecting to ground power unit. Page 4.1-3
Shop safety operation a. b. c. d. e.
f.
g. 6. a. b.
Starting the ground power unit and energizing aircraft electrical system
c.

7.
Radioactive ray illumination safety operation a. The radioactive objects like fuel-density meter, emergency selfillumination exit light and illuminated switch symbol removed from the aircraft must process IAW the aircraft maintenance manual. The fuel-density meter maintenance must be performed by the authorized staff or under the manufacturer supervision. The maintenance staff must be careful of the high energy radioactive rays in the X-ray illumination process. The X-ray equipment must be operated by the qualified man. The maintenance staff related radioactive rays operation must wear the Film Badge or any other measurement that can count the accumulative quantity contained of the radioactivity. The maintenance staff assists with replacing the film must do it under the qualified operation. X-ray operation area must be separated and marked for no-entry. It is possible to cause the fire accident when performing the weld or cutting operation, so the operator must prepare for the fire extinguisher on hand. As any possible to remove the movable combustibles from operation area, and cover the unmovable ones with the metal plates or the incombustibility materials. The gas bottles must be fixed carefully from toppling down. Be careful of the acetylene leaking in the closed environment and causing the flammable or explosive situation to explode. The maintenance staff cannot contact the oxygen bottle with the oily gloves, hands or rags, and not lubricate the valve or connector. The weld jobs on the aircraft must be pre-evaluated the feasibility by the Engineering & IT department, and be approved under the QAD before performing it.
b. c.
d.
e. 8. a.
The weld safety operation
b.
c. d.
e.
Page 4.1-4

PART 4 GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 4.2 A/C ELECTROSTATIC SAFETY
4.2 4.2.1
A/C ELECTROSTATIC SAFETY PURPOSE To ensure all the A/C will be grounded to release static electricity and keep A/C safe.
4.2.2
SCOPE These requirements are applied when performing maintenance activities on the apron and in the hangar.
4.2.3
RESPONSIBILITY The maintenance personnel are responsible to set up the ground wire and confirm the grounding is in good condition.
4.2.4
STATIC ELECTRICITY SAFETY GENERAL REQUIREMENT 1. This requirement is to prevent from igniting the spark caused by the electric potential difference between A/C & ground, which may damage of A/C or injury to personnel. Before setting the ground wire, the maintenance staff should check the condition of wire to ensure there is no broken or corrosion on the cable and the clip is properly connected with the cable. The ground wire should be properly connected with the identified static ground point on A/C. Connecting to any point other than identified static ground point may cause the damage to the connecting point and lower the efficiency of grounding. The A/C should be static electricity grounded whenever it parked in hangar. The jack should be static electricity grounded when A/C performing the maintenance job such as gear swing, landing gear change and etc. Before towing the A/C, the ground wire should be removed and stowed properly.
2.
3.
4. 5. 6.
Page 4.2-1

PART 4 GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 4.3 ELECTRICITY AND AIR POWER SAFETY
4.3 4.3.1
ELECTRICITY AND AIR POWER SAFETY PURPOSE To make sure the safety of the personnel and A/C when using power equipment or hangar ground power source.
4.3.2
SCOPE These requirements are applied when using or maintaining the power equipment and ground power source.
4.3.3
RESPONSIBILITY The operating staff is responsible for safe operating or maintaining of power equipment or hangar ground power source.
4.3.4
DEFINITION 1. 2. 3. Power equipment: Any petrol or diesel engine, electrical or pneumatic equipment. Ground power: The power source of GPU, hangar pit. Ground air source: Compressor or hangar pit supply shop air. Before starting power equipment, making sure all the aircraft, personnel and other facilities are clear. Use the suitable electrical power source (correct phase, frequency, voltage), pneumatic source (correct pressure value) according to the operation instruction. Also, check the oil quantity before using the petrol/diesel power compressor. If any fuel/oil or pneumatic leak found, the operating staff should inform the related department for repairing, and this equipment cannot be used until the problem is fixed. When using external electrical or pneumatic power equipment, turn off the power switch first before cut off the external power. Make sure the duct pressure is released before removing the connector between the pneumatic equipment and external source. After using the equipment, the operating staff should return it back to the certain place. Keep the ground power unit away from fueling ports, tank ventilation ports, drain ports and wing tip area. The GPU is forbidden to use within 7.6 meters (25 feet) away from fuel tank ventilation ports or poor ventilation area. Ground power equipment, any possible fire electrical equipment or connector, high temperature surface should be located at least 0.5 meter (18 inches) from ground level position when operating in hangar. It is forbidden to fill fuel into GPU cart in hangar. Page 4.3-1
4.3.5
POWER EQUIPMENT 1. 2.
3.
4. 5. 6. 4.3.6
GROUND POWER UNITS 1.
2.

PART 4 GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 4.3 ELECTRICITY AND AIR POWER SAFETY
3. 4. 5.
The ground power equipment should equip with surge protector to prevent from irregular voltage. The ground power equipment should be operated within the voltage limitation. When the working area is polluted by fuel or other dangerous material, the ground power equipment should be towed away or keep at its original condition until the problem clear. Before removing ground power unit from the dangerous area, cut off the power source first, and then disconnect the power connector. The electric power wire should be properly preserved to prevent from damage. Prevent the wire or terminal connector from deformation. After GPU connecting to the aircraft, turn on the ground power first and then check the voltage. If the voltage is correct, then the power can be supplied. Make sure the function of fire jumper is normal before power supply. Before disconnecting the power supply connector, cut off the power source first. Before using ground pneumatic power, turn off the upstream shut-off valve then connect the air tubes. Make sure the pneumatic connectors and tubes fit well before opening the valve. If any air leakage found during the operation process, stop the power unit, inform the manager to have it fixed. Continue the operation after the problem is cleared.
6. 7.
8.
4.3.7
GROUND PNEUMATIC SOURCE 1.
2.
Page 4.3-2

PART 4 GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 4.4 FUEL TANK SAFETY
4.4 4.4.1
FUEL TANK SAFETY PURPOSE To avoid the danger while working in fuel tanks and ensure the safety of maintenance staff as to reach the goals of personnel safety, ground safety and flight safety
4.4.2 4.4.3
SCOPE This instruction is applied when working in or near the fuel tanks. RESPONSIBILITY 1. The maintenance staff is responsible for his personal safety and the work safety in the fuel tanks. The maintenance staff shall follow the related requirements of the manufacture to do the jobs such as refueling, fuel draining and fuel tank maintenance jobs. The supervisor should monitor the safety of fuel tanks, maintenance staff, and area near the fuel tanks. RTPD/BTPD on duty personnel is responsible for assisting to call ambulance in an emergency and inform the management. The common regulation when implementing the jobs of fuel tanks a. b. c. d. e. Before fuel tank open, the maintenance staff should ground the aircraft and ensure ventilation facilities are good. The warning sign should be placed around A/C when fuel panels are opened. The fire prevention system and emergency safe equipment should be put at easy-to-access place. A/C should be stopped in the well-ventilated space, and the dangerous materials should be moved to safe area. A/C, working stand and ventilation equipment should be grounded. The maintenance staff should touch the stand with bare hand before start working to balance static electricity. A/C power must be off and the connectors of main and APU batteries should be disconnected from A/C. A/C aviation instrument and communication system must not be operated such as mobile phone, walkie-talkie The high-power communication system cannot be used around the area near A/C. The compressed air cannot be directly led into the fuel tanks. If possible, direct the tank exhaust air out of hangar. Be good physical condition. Page 4.4-1
2. 3. 4.4.4
THE SAFETY OF FUEL TANKS 1.
f. g. h. i. j. 2. a.
The maintenance staff working in the fuel tanks should:

b. c. d. e. f. 3. a. b. c.
Be well-experienced the operation procedure. Be familiar with the method handling the healthy problems and fire emergency. Wear the proper clothes, cotton caps and shoes while working in the fuel tanks. Not carry the lighter, oven, watch, pager, laptop, notebook, tablet and mobile phone into tanks. Have received the training about working in fuel tanks. The tank should be well-ventilated. The volatile liquid should be kept safely in the container, and the carrying amount should be strictly limited. The light used in fuel tanks should be fire-proof, and the action of turning on/off the light should be performed out of the fuel tanks (as well as any instruments powered by electricity). The pneumatic tools should be powered by compressed air. The components of A/C fuel tanks should be carefully protected. If the tools must be taken in, they should be kept in proper container. Ensure all the set-up work, cautions and warnings IAW AMM task have been completed/ followed before the maintenance staff entering fuel tank. Immediately inform the maintenance staff if any abnormality in the ventilation equipment is discovered. Pay attention to the physical conditions of maintenance staff working in fuel tanks. Pay attention to the area near fuel tanks. Pay attention to the circumstance when working area is near the purging tanks. Following requirements should be followed as detail: Prepare the fire extinguisher. If the panel of the fuel tank is removed, the tank should be covered with protector. Remind the personnel working in the same area to take care of their safety. With the wind behind working area, make sure no dangerous goods are downstream of the wind and be aware the position of blower. The maintenance actions that possibly fire the hazardous fumes cannot be done at the same time within 7.6 meters (25 feet) from the same aircraft, fuel tanks or fuel tankers.
The maintenance staff must ensure that:
d. 4.
Supervisor should a.
b. c. d. e.
Page 4.4-2

The radar or radio systems cannot be used or tested within the specific distance. 5. When working near the fuel tanks which were in purge or ventilation, the operator should: a. b. c. 4.4.5 Properly ground the pneumatic or electrical equipment before operation. Not expose the bare wire. Cut off the power of related electrical ventilation equipment before leaving. (The pneumatic equipment can be used continuously).
THE OPERATION IN CASE OF EMERGENCY OR ACCIDENT 1. In an emergency case: a. The maintenance staff escapes from the tank himself: Be aware of his physical and mental condition while in the tank, leave the tank right away if feel uncomfortable. The supervisor commands the maintenance staff to leave: If the circumstance is dangerous to the maintenance staff or his condition is unusual, the supervisor should command the maintenance staff to leave the fuel tanks. The supervisor should call for help to save the maintenance staff in the tank when his respond is slow. Once the accident happened, the supervisor should call the medical personnel to save the maintenance staff (call the ambulance when necessary) and inform Manager. Verify the cause of accident and check the circumstance and air quality before entering the tank for rescue. The rescuer should wear the protective equipment and prevent the accident happen again. The accident reason should be noted in the related instruction and on the checking list to prevent the accident happen again. The dangerous elements should be cleared before work re-starting.
b.
c. 2.
In an accident case: a.
b.
c. d. 4.4.6 1.
THE NOTES ABOUT FUEL TANK MAINTENANCE: The residual fuel that cannot be drained out should be cleared after panel open. Perform tank ventilation procedure first, choose the safest way to clear the residual fuel and prevent to stain the surface of A/C wing or ground. Draw out the residual fuel with hose, sponge and mop. The bleed orifice and fuel line between normal and under maintenance tanks should be sealed with the plug and adhesive tape. The maintenance staff performing the fuel tank operation should have received the related training such as work environment and the hazardous characters of materials.
2. 3.
Page 4.4-3

4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
The supervisor should possess of sufficient information about the fuel tanks maintenance. The equipment that may cause spark or fire cannot be used in the hazardous area of volatile vapor. The operating staff should wear static proof clothes. During the fuel tanks operation, the operating staff should prevent from using the electrical equipment. If the volatile vapor exists in the dangerous area, all the electric cable in the aircraft should be de-energized. Prepare at least one portable fire extinguisher (20-B fire extinction effectiveness, 15 LB (6.5kg) capacity) within 15,2m (50Ft) away from working area while performing A/C fuel tank repair work.
10. If the operating staff must bring combustible liquid into the fuel tanks for maintenance jobs, he should use the container to keep it and prevent from the liquid spilling out. 4.4.7 THE ADDITIONAL REGULATIONS OF MAINTENANCE OF INTEGRAL FUEL TANK 1. The scraper used to scrape the sealant in the tanks should be metallic or hard-wooden product. The plastic product that may cause static electricity is not allowed to use. Only pneumatic tool is acceptable to use in fuel tanks. When applying the sealant on the surface of fuel tanks, the maintenance staff should particularly pay attention on it to prevent from spark of fire.
2. 3.
Page 4.4-4

PART 4 GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 4.5 HIGH AREA WORKING SAFETY
4.5 4.5.1
HIGH AREA WORKING SAFETY PURPOSE To prevent from injury of the personnel and damage to the A/C when performing work in the high area over 2 meters above ground.
4.5.2
SCOPE This instruction is applied when using aerial platform, scissors lifter and highlift platform to perform the maintenance at the area that over 2 meters above ground.
4.5.3
RESPONSIBILITY The maintenance/ operating staff is responsible for performing all following requirements.
4.5.4
HIGH AREA WORKING SAFETY REQUIREMENT 1. 2. 3. Only person who has been trained and authorized can operate the lifter IAW operation instruction. If it is necessary to use the GSE (as aerial platform or scissors lifter), the operating staff should check to ensure that the equipment is serviceable. The operating staff should choose the proper GSE. For example, when using the platform, the operating staff cannot increase the length of safety belt. If the height of platform is not enough, the operating staff should use another proper GSE to perform the maintenance. Safety accessories (safety belt, barrier) should always be used when performing the work at high area. The maintenance staff should pay attention to the surrounding around the A/C, especially in a strong wind condition when performing the maintenance on the wings or platform. In case of strong wind condition, the maintenance staff can coordinate with BTPD to perform the maintenance inside the hangar. If not, the maintenance staff should determine if the maintenance can be continued or not. Before the maintenance, the maintenance staff should communicate with the supervisor of the A/C and attach DO NOT OPERATE Tag on C/B, control lever or control switch to prevent from the dangers caused by other personnels touching. If the vehicle should be parked near A/C for maintenance, the operating staff should ensure the parking brake, chocks and support are properly set to prevent injury of personnel and damage to A/C.
4. 5.
6.
7.
8.
Page 4.5-1

PART 4 GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 4.6 OXYGEN SYSTEM HANDLING SAFETY
4.6 4.6.1
OXYGEN SYSTEM HANDLING SAFETY PURPOSE To stipulate the routine or non-routine maintenance on oxygen system/ assembly to prevent property from damage or personnel from injury.
4.6.2
SCOPE These requirements are applied for maintaining oxygen system/ assemblies on the A/C and in the workshop.
4.6.3 4.6.4
RESPONSIBILITY Maintenance staff is responsible for follow all requirements specified below. OXYGEN SYSTEM HANDLING REQUIREMENT When perform maintenance task related to oxygen system, maintenance staff should follow instruction specified in maintenance data. However, the following requirement also be applied. 1. 2. The electrical equipment, high heat source, combustible materials, oil and metal scraps must not place near the oxygen system. Wearing the gloves, clothes and tools that are contaminated with oil is strictly prohibited. Clothes and tools shall be always kept clean and only pure cotton gloves shall be used. The technician is prohibited to use grease to lubricate the screw. To prevent from fire or explosion, the technician should slow down his/her action when open or close the valve of oxygen system. The valve of the oxygen system cannot be forcefully opened/closed by the spanner, hammer or other tools. If the valve cannot be operated by hand, it should be divided into unserviceable. Before removing or installing the oxygen bottle, the technician should close all the shut off valve of the oxygen system and protect the tube by the plug or cover. Follow the AMM of A/C to torque the shut off valve, and do not over torque. The distance between oxygen tube and electrical wire is 5 centimeters (2 inches) at least. Do not connect a low pressure hose to a high pressure oxygen system.
3. 4. 5.
6.
7. 8. 9.
10. Use the correct lubricant to lubricate the O-ring according to each A/C AMM. 11. Follow the A/C AMM to do leak check with correct parts or tool. Only the approved oxygen leak hunting liquor can be used for leaking test. 12. At least one 20-B/ 15 LB (6.8kg) portable fire extinguisher should be provided in 15.2m (50ft) working area.
Page 4.6-1

PART 4 GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 4.6 OXYGEN SYSTEM HANDLING SAFETY
13. Before replacing chemical oxygen generator on A/C, safety pin on the oxygen generator must be installed to prevent inadvertently fire that will cause 260C (500F) and raise up injury to personnel. 14. If the oxygen generator were inadvertently fired, the oxygen generator should be removed to a safe area that will not cause fire hazard. However, if generator was fired on aircraft it should be remained on the location and be replaced after temperature go down to operational range. 15. Oxygen must not be used to pressurize container or as blow off air or high-pressure air on painting process. 16. Different gas is prohibited to mix in one oxygen bottle. 17. Good ventilation should be kept in working area. It is restricted to work in the closed room during oxygen system operation. 18. The maintenance staff must avoid from touching the lubricant, flammable goods with the tools, hands, clothes, equipment or system. 19. The oxygen bottle storage and service area must be placed under the highest safety standard, clean and neat. 20. All the oxygen equipment must be extremely careful of processing, and be fixed to prevent from rolling or falling. It is absolutely prohibited of smoking and flame. 21. All the connectors surface must be absolutely clean and careful to handle it. 22. The maintenance staff must not remove the fixed-style oxygen bottles or perform any oxygen system related maintenance jobs unless the team leader agreed and the attendant had well prepared for the evacuation.
Page 4.6-2

PART 4 GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 4.7 MAINTENANCE CLEANLINESS AND FOD PREVENTION
4.7 4.7.1
MAINTENANCE CLEANLINESS AND FOD PREVENTION PURPOSE To provide procedures for the maintenance of cleanliness of aircraft under maintenance and FOD prevention.
4.7.2
SCOPE/ RESPONSIBILITY 1. Maintenance Directors and Department Managers shall be responsible for interpreting, disseminating and implementing FOD prevention program in their respective department. They shall ensure all production personnel are informed and strictly comply with FOD prevention practices. They shall also ensure sub-contractors who have to work on/in the vicinity of aircraft are briefed of the FOD procedures pertaining to such work. FOD procedures shall also be reviewed regularly to ensure compliance is possible and practical and for improvements All employees shall be responsible to comply with the company FOD prevention practices A Foreign Object is defined as a substance or article alien to the aircraft that has been allowed to invade it. Foreign Object in the immediate area of or in area from which migration is possible, e.g. through tooling holes, bend relief cut-outs, drain hole, etc., and which could cause a system or component malfunction or deterioration is classified critical. Foreign Object Damage (FOD) is any damage attributed to a foreign object which can be expressed in physical or economic (monetary) terms which may or may not degrade aircraft safety and or performance characteristics. Types of FOD broadly include but not limited to the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. Safety wire Nuts, bolts and washers Rivets and cotter pins Airframe fittings and fasteners Tools Rags, paper Hats, gloves and headsets Bags Rubber plugs Ground safety streamers Rocks/gravel Water
2. 4.7.3
DEFINITION 1.
2.
3.
m. Erosion and contamination products Issue: 02, Revision: 00, Date: 01 FEB 2012 Page 4.7-1

4.7.4
SCOPE OF FOD PREVENTION MEASURES The areas which are addressed in this SOP include: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Aircraft Operations Work Practices Housekeeping Inspection Surveillance Tools Control Investigation Training
4.7.5 4.7.5.1
AIRCRAFT OPERATIONS Flight line aircraft 1. All serviced aircraft shall have protective covers installed over pitot, static tubes/ ports, engine inlets/ intakes, exhausts, bleed valve ports after the overnight check as required by customer and applicable maintenance data. FOD prevention inspections shall be conducted before and after every flight and/ or engine run-up. These inspections shall include but are not limited to: a. b. Compressor inlet area Engine intake area for security of joints or inlet hardware to confirm that gaps or openings through which debris can enter the engine do not exist Tools and general hardware accountability check
2.
c. 3. 4.
Engine ground run personnel shall ensure engine thrust is not directed towards nearby aircraft or buildings during engine ground run. If engine run is to be conducted after a heavy downpour, engine ground run shall not be conducted in the vicinity of water puddles so as to avoid ingestion or large volumes of water. All staff involved in engine run shall not take articles/ personal objects near the intake ducts of operating engines. Anyone who must approach within a 10m (30 ft) radius of operating engines must first remove items such as insignia pins and security badges, and secure them in pockets that can be fastened with Velcro tape or in pouches/ zipper pockets. Ground maintenance personnel shall use only authorized headset cords for intercommunication with the cockpit in order to prevent slack being draw into the engine inlet/ intake when walking around the aircraft. Page 4.7-2
4.7.5.2
Personnel precautions near operating engines 1. 2.
3.

4.7.6
WORK PRACTICES 1. Maintenance/ manufacturing tasks shall be planned and sequenced in a manner that precludes foreign object entrapment and product contamination. Documents shall contain necessary processes and procedures for controlling contamination and debris during fabrication and assembly operations. Boxes or special trays shall be used for small items, such as hand drills, hardware, which are to be used in aircraft. This tray shall be used to transport tools to and from the tool crib/ shadow board and act as temporary storage container for removed hardware. The removed hardware shall be disposed of properly when the tray and tools are returned to the tool crib/ shadow board. Maintenance personnel shall be extra vigilant whenever work is performed in, around, or in front of intakes, integral fuel tanks and flight deck areas. Extreme caution shall be used to prevent the introduction of foreign objects. Whenever work is performed in the flight deck, all trades involved shall co-ordinate jobs to preclude the introduction of foreign objects during the performance of work and to effect thorough cleaning of the flight deck when work is completed. Inlet and exhaust covers and bleed valve port covers shall be installed during aircraft maintenance and servicing if required by manufacturer or customer. All engines shall be fitted with intake blanks or protective coverings when installed on engine stand. All open fuel, hydraulic and air pipelines and disconnected electrical terminals shall be blanked using appropriate caps and plugs. After fluid and pneumatic system lines and tubing are cut and deburred, the system fluid shall be purged and ends of lines capped. Whenever large modifications, skin repairs, spar changes, etc., involving the production of large quantities of swarf, redundant parts and sealant are performed, it shall be removed as much as possible as it is produced and a systematic cleaning procedure is implemented. All corrosion control measures shall be implemented as required.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6. 7. 8. 9.
10. After the completion of each task, the area in the work vicinity shall be cleaned of all swarf and debris. The work area shall be cleaned at the end of each work day. 4.7.7 FOD PREVENTIVE PROGRAM FOR HANGAR 1. During work process a. Fluid leaks: The maintenance staffs shall use the suitable container to collect the fluid. In case the fluid is spilled to floor, it should be absorbed by sand/sawdustand clean up immediately to avoid the fluid from causing any possible damage to the aircraft or the personnel in that area. Page 4.7-3

b.
Metal chip or debris: During the maintenance activities, metal chips or debris shall be collected using proper equipment. Suitable plate or cover shall be provided to prevent debris or tool from dropping. All maintenance staffs are requested, after the work is accomplished, to clean the ground, the racks, and work benches and the work area of the aircraft to remove any debris, scrapped hardware, rags, etc. Also the maintenance staffs shall check the tools and equipment with respect the task had been removed from the working area to ensure there is nothing left when all work are accomplished. Should there be any tool/equipment missing after check, the supervisor shall be informed to perform the searching of the nearby area thoroughly to prevent any consequential damage to the aircraft or aircraft system.
2.
After work cleaning a.
b.
3.
Contract Agency Cleaning: In order to remove the oil/grease resident and other objects that might cause the unnecessary contamination, the respective BMC shall assign the contract agency use cleaning machine to clean up the hangar floor when hangar area do not have aircraft maintenance activity. Other than the requirement to the maintenance staff to pick up any of the foreign object from ground, when weather condition is allowable, the RTPD/BTPD will inform Sanitation team to perform an FOD check to clear FOD in the apron areas of VAECO. During the FOD check, assigned personnel of relevant center shall walk around the apron and pick up any foreign object that might cause the damage to the aircraft that are parking, towing or performing maintenance in the apron area. The FOD checks at the ramp area are performed by the maintenance staff before the aircraft arrived. The maintenance staffs shall walk around the parking area prior to the aircraft taxiing/pushing in and pick up all foreign objects that might cause the damage to the aircraft/ engine. Special caution shall be taken for the path of the engines and the wheel where risk of damage is higher than other area. All extraneous material shall be inspected for and removed during assembly operations. Upon completion of each major assembly, conduct a foreign object inspection and remove debris. If any hardware is lost during the performance of maintenance, a systematic and thorough search shall be conducted for the lost.
4.7.8
FOD PREVENTIVE PROGRAM FOR VAECO APRON 1.
2.
4.7.9
FOD PREVENTIVE PROGRAM FOR RAMP MAINTENANCE 1.
2. 4.7.10
INSPECTION 1.
2.
Page 4.7-4

3.
Production tooling (fixtures, handling equipment, etc.) shall be inspected to ensure it is clean, undamaged and free of foreign material prior to installation and build-up of components and assemblies. The same shall apply to work stands, special test equipment, etc. which must be placed on and around production area to accomplish specific work tasks. Inspection of Intakes/ Engines a. The inlet area shall be inspected for security of joints of inlet hardware to determine that gaps or openings do not exist through which debris can enter the engine. The necessary repairs shall be initiated and adjacent areas where debris might congregate cleaned if any anomaly is detected. All aircraft shall be thoroughly inspected in the vicinity of the engine inlet and in locations in which loose objects could conceivably constitute an FOD hazard. Emphasis shall be placed on ensuring the security of latches, twist-lock fasteners, snap rings, cotter keys rivets, etc. The inspection shall include blow-in doors, ducting and seals for security and evidence of deterioration. When intake maintenance is completed, the intake shall be cleaned (vacuumed thoroughly if necessary). When physical entry is required to inspect the intake areas of engines, maintenance staff should remove all loose objects, badges, jewelry etc., from clothing. Wearing of pocket-less coverall (bunny suit) or equivalent by maintenance staff is recommended. Components such as flight control surfaces, wings tail units and boxed-in structures shall be inspected progressively for cleanness. A foreign object inspection of all closed areas as well as FOD entrapment compartments and migratory routes shall be conducted prior to final sealing.
4.
b.
c. d.
5.
Inspection of aircraft structures a. b.
4.7.11
SURVEILLANCE 1. Ramps and fuelling areas shall be monitored at all times for foreign objects. During towing or vehicle operations on these surfaces, personnel shall continuously be on the alert for foreign objects. All foreign objects shall be removed and placed in a receptacle. FOD hazards such as deteriorating or damaged paving in aircraft parking areas shall be reported to the building maintenance department for immediate repair. All FOD incidents shall be reported to QAD immediately for investigation. All activities being performed on the damaged part, equipment or aircraft shall cease pending the investigation, except activities necessary to ensure its safety, and/or safety of personnel. The investigation shall conduct to: Page 4.7-5
2.
4.7.12
INVESTIGATION 1.
2.

a. b. 3.
Determine cause(s), and Recommend disposition of damage(s) and measures to prevent occurrence.
Investigation findings and recommendations shall be written in Report of Maintenance Error Investigation (VAECO Form 2055) and submitted to QA Director. QAD shall maintain close monitoring of FOD incident and trends. Director of BMC, RMC shall be informed of the findings and recommendations for follow- up actions, if necessary. Case studies of FOD incidents shall be disseminated though Safety & Quality Notes. All new employees and trainees shall be briefed on the FOD prevention practices before they start work in department. This shall be done as part of their induction program. Subcontractors shall be briefed on FOD control and safety measures by the work requestor before they are allowed to work on or in the vicinity of aircraft. The contents of the briefing shall at least include the following: a. b. c. d. e. Definition and classes of FOD; Causes of FOD arising from contractual work; Hazards of FOD to people and aircraft; General FOD prevention and control concepts; Mandatory FOD prevention and control measures.
4. 5. 4.7.13
TRAINING 1.
2.
3.
Page 4.7-6

PART 4 GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 4.8 SAFETY FOR AIRCRAFT IN HANGAR
4.8 4.8.1 4.8.2 4.8.3
SAFETY FOR AIRCRAFT IN HANGAR PURPOSE To stipulate the safety requirements for aircraft in hangar SCOPE RESPONSIBILITY Hangaring of aircraft shall be supervised by an assigned supervisor and maintenance staff. The person in-charge shall be thoroughly familiar with the requirement below.
4.8.4
SAFETY REQUIREMENT FOR HANGARING THE A/C 1. All personnel concerned with fuelling to and refueling from aircraft shall clearly understand their responsibilities in preventing a fire risk and also to realize that only strict co-operation between various personnel servicing an aircraft will ensure safely from aviation fuel fires and explosions Aircraft may be taken into hangars for inspection, modification or other servicing operations if rectification does not affect the fuel drained from their tanks. In the case of aircraft fuelled with AVGAS, and if the work renders the aircraft immobile, the aircraft fuel system must first be drained. Aircraft rendered immobile and left in hangars, whether the fuel system is drained or not, are to be positioned as far away as practicable possible to enable adjacent aircraft to be moved out of the hangar during emergency. To minimize the risk of fuel vapor concentration, doors of storage hangars are to be opened for a ventilation period of at least 15 minutes during working days. Aircraft is to be inspected for fuel leaks before taken in to hangars. When leaks in the fuel system are found, the fuel tanks and pipes are to be drained before placing the aircraft in a hangar. The requirement for draining aircraft having integral fuel tanks before being placed in hangar is left to the discretion of the BMC Director, with risk assessment carried out. Aircraft is not to be refueled or defueled in hangars. Normally, fuelled aircraft will only be hangared for emergency maintenance, items which cannot be performed outside or a protective measure against severe weather. If possible, fuelled aircraft should be isolated in the hangar which contains no other aircraft. A risk assessment is to be carried out. Before moving aircraft into the hangar, the fuel tanks must be inert and rendered safe.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6. 4.8.5 1.
SAFETY FOR FUELLED AIRCRAFT IN HANGAR
2.
Page 4.8-1

PART 4 GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 4.8 SAFETY FOR AIRCRAFT IN HANGAR
3. 4. 5. 6. 4.8.6 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
The aircraft shall be positioned in the hangar to permit rapid evacuation, if required. Hangar doors shall be kept open. An tow-bar shall be attached to aircraft. Signs shall be posted to inform everyone that the aircraft is fuelled. Aircraft shall be earthed to an approved static ground point. Adequate fire extinguisher shall be positioned immediately next to the aircraft. Oily wastes or replenishment bowers are not to be kept in hangars containing aircraft. All aircraft fluids (engine oil, hydraulic oil, etc.) and commercial fluids must be clearly labeled, segregated and stored in flameproof cabinets. Only approved types of inspection lamps in good order and efficiently earthed are to be used in hangars containing aircraft. Smoking is not permitted in all hangars. The automatic spring loaded lighting device must not use within hangar.
FIRE PREVENTION
Page 4.8-2

PART 4 GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 4.9 HANDLING, STORAGE AND DISPOSAL OF WASTES
4.9 4.9.1 4.9.2
HANDLING, STORAGE AND DISPOSAL OF WASTES PURPOSE To define the requirements for waste handling, storage and disposal. SCOPE This procedure applies to handle all waste dumped from VAECO. Waste includes general waste, industrial waste and toxic industrial waste.
4.9.3
RESPONSIBILITY: 1. The Safety Division shall be responsible for monitoring the handling of waste and ensuring that the contracted waste disposer is approved by relevant authority. Safety Action Group (SAG) shall be responsible to ensure proper implementation of the waste handling system in accordance with this procedure. All waste generated in VAECO are classified as: a. b. c. d. 2. a. b. c. Toxic industrial Waste Industrial Waste General Waste Class 3 AGS spares All toxic industrial wastes generated shall be disposed in accordance with Toxic industrial Waste Regulations. Contractor to collect the toxic industrial waste must be verified to possess a valid toxic industrial waste collectors license. The common Toxic industrial wastes generated in VAECO include: Waste Paint Stripping sludge Waste Solvent Waste Oil and Lubricant from ground Support Equipment (GSE) maintenance Waste Sealant Empty Tins/ Carboys (solvent/paint/sealant/ resin containers) Empty Oil Drums (oil/lubricant containers) Rags containing oil, solvent, paint stripper: these materials will be collected in the designated frame-proof bins, which are placed in designated areas in the hangars. Removed sealant bits, paper containers, spent absorbent material: these materials may be put in the same container as the one containing soiled rags.
2.
4.9.4
PROCEDURE 1.
Toxic industrial Waste
Page 4.9-1

Waste fuel and oil from aircraft Exhausted X-ray processing chemicals Composite materials (cured and uncured) Filter elements exposed to toxic materials Used lead acid and nickel cadmium batteries Aircraft fuel tank foam d. Exhausted X-ray film processing chemicals; namely fixer and developer can be stored in NDT Shop. They are to be kept in labeled containers which must be capped and placed within containment. If the quantity of waste exceeds the prescribed quantities for transportation as specified in the third column of the schedule to the Toxic Industrial Waste Regulations, the licensed waste collector will generate a consignment form. Details in consignment form to include: Type of hazardous wastes Quantity in drums Date to be collected g. h. The respective department shall keep and maintain consignment forms and records. Waste/ used oil drained from aircraft and maintenance equipment will be collected in empty drums & stored in the hazardous waste storage facility (commonly known as waste POL Point). Temporary POL (Petrol, Oil, Lubricant) point is permitted for each hangar provide that: Max 1 drum (200 liters) for each type Fire extinguisher is available Spillage absorbent material is available Containers are to be labeled and closed Send to waste POL point when full. j. Each work area shall have 2 metal containers. One will be labeled as Used rags and the other as POL/ chemical cans. The Used rags can will be used for rags stained with toxic chemicals as well as sealant bits, seals coated with chemicals, paper cups used to contain paint, spent absorbent material and cardboard used to hold sealant. All toxic industrial waste must be labeled properly when they are stored. The respective departments person-in-charge shall ensure that there is no mixing spillage of toxic industrial waste during handling and transportation to the hazardous waste storage facility. Page 4.9-2
e.
f.
i.
k. l.

m. The respective departments person-in-charge shall ensure that all containers used (including temporary basis) to contain toxic industrial waste are properly closed and labeled before transportation and storage. n. o. The labeling must include the name (contents) of substance, department, person-in-charge and date of storage. The respective departments person-in-charge shall consistently update the waste register to indicate the quantity brought in and the balance which is the quantity in the store. The register is also be updated when the vendor takes away the waste. Type and quantity of toxic waste generated The manner of disposal The date and quantity supplied or sold to a toxic industrial waste collector The name and address of the toxic industrial waste collector The quantity of wastes held in stock p. POL & chemicals are segregated as follows Clean fuel: Clean fuel shall be stored in drums and sent to waste POL point for storage. If it is stored in bowser, the bowser shall be parked in the sheltered area next to the diesel tank at the plant maintenance area. Mixed oil: Mixed oil shall be stored in drums and kept at the waste POL point. Mixed oil will include waste hydraulic and engine oil, waste fuel and waste lubricating oil. Solvent, MIBK (Methyl, Isobutyl, Kentone) & other cleaning chemicals: Solvent, MIBK & other cleaning chemicals can be disposed in the same drum. They will be stored at the waste POL point. MIBK is used as a chemical intermediate, a solvent for manufacturing paints, rubbers, pharmaceuticals, other chemicals, and industrial cleaners) Composite waste: There are 2 types of composite waste: Cured and uncured. Both of them shall be stored in separate containers at the hazardous waste storage area outside the composite shop. They are to be collected by toxic waste vendor for disposal. Large empty POL/chemical containers: Large empty POL/ chemical containers like drums and carboys will be closed and stored at the waste POL shed. Small empty POL/chemical containers: Small empty POL/chemical containers shall be disposed in a 200-litre drum. The drum will be painted red and marked as POL/ chemical cans. The drum will be closed and stored at the waste POL shed
Page 4.9-3

Contaminated rags: Contaminated rags shall be disposed in a 200-litre drum. The drum will be painted red and labeled as used rags. The drum will be closed and stored at the waste POL shed Filter elements: Filter elements may be toxic of the particles they filter and collected is toxic. They shall be sealed in a plastic bag and stored in the waste POL shed Used lead acid and nickel cadmium batteries: The batteries shall be labeled and stored in a containment tray in the waste POL shed. Note: All containers (drums, carboy, plastic bags, and tray batteries) shall be properly labeled q. 3. a. Absorbent material shall be available at the waste POL points The common industrial waste are as follows: Sheet metal waste Waste timber and saw dust Aluminum, stainless steel tubes b. c. Aluminum/ stainless sheet metal & tubes will be collected by scrap metal dealers Waste timber & clean sawdust will be collected & disposed with general waste provided they have not been used as chemical absorbent. General waste includes: Office paper and shredded waste Packaging waste: cardboard, polystyrene, timber and plywood Domestic waste: food waste from canteen operations b. All general waste generated shall be collected into bulk bins & disposed by a general waste collector. Food waste will be disposed in separate bins. No waste shall be placed within the companys boundary in such a way that can affect the safety and health of the employees. Class 3 AGS Spares wastes include: Used nuts, bolts and washer Used screws, nuts and washer Used fasteners Used rivets and cotter pins Page 4.9-4 Industrial Waste
4.
General waste a.
c. 5.
Class 3 AGS Spares a.

Cut metal seal Worn bearing Safety wires, snap rings, etc. Airframe fittings and fasteners Worn out tools, drill bits, etc... Any class 3 aircraft general spares that were removed from aircraft undergoing servicing in hangar and are deemed not suitable for reused. 6. Each work area or bay shall have quantity one metal container (at least 100 dm3) with a receptacles cover and lock. It will be labeled as Class 3 AGS Spares- Non Reusable. The metal containers will be placed in strategic location in the aircraft bay for collection of used bolts, used screws, used rivets, used fasteners, other metallic debris, etc. removed from the aircraft in the process of carrying out maintenance. a. b. c. The key to the metal containers or receptacle cover shall be with the Engineer- in charge till the aircraft is ready for output. Containers shall not be overflowing. The metal container shall then be routed to scrap metal dealers for disposal.
Page 4.9-5

PART 5. A/C MAINT. CONTROL PROC.
PART 5
AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE CONTROL PROCEDURES
Page 5-1

PART 5. A/C MAINT. CONTROL PROC. 5.1 CONTRACT MAINTENANCE IMPLEMENTATION
5.1 5.1.1
CONTRACT MAINTENANCE IMPLEMENTATION PURPOSE To ensure the customer requirements as specified in the contract between VAECO and customer are followed.
5.1.2
SCOPE 1. This procedure is applied for deploying and implementing the customer order/ request, including: a. b. c. 2. A/C base maintenance and other work performed at BMC; A/C ramp maintenance and other work performed at RMC; A/C component maintenance and other work performed at CMC;
Applicable Department: QAD, RMC, BMC, LGD, EGD, CMC, MCC and BDD. Director of BDD is responsible to explain and develop the contract that had been signed with Customers to the appropriate Department/ Center. Director of QAD is responsible to summarize the procedures of customer and incorporate into the Quality Notice (QN) if necessary. Director of EGD, MCC, RMC, BMC. LGD and CMC are responsible to implement the customer requirements as specified in the contract and QN (if any).
5.1.3
RESPONSIBILITY 1. 2. 3.
5.1.4 5.1.4.1
PROCEDURE Receiving and developing the customers contract/ order 1. BDD receives all customers work request and related documents and send Service Order (VAECO Form 1007) to: a. EGD all A/C maintenance work from A check, Engine/ landing gear replacement, AD/ SB implementation and other complex work that require Engineering Order (EO). The EGD determines the requirement of T&E, part and materials (preload), prepare work packages (if required), issue Work Order and send to MCC. MCC all A/C maintenance work that normally be performed at line station such as simple tasks or routine tasks/ line checks LGD all component maintenance work. The LDG bases on the location of the component and capability of related CMC to issue Maintenance/ Repair Request and send to appropriate CMC.
b. c.
2.
MCC bases on the availability of T&E, Part and materials and manpower (for the work under its control) to assign the work to appropriate center for implementation. QAD may prepare a QN which contains operation procedures IAW the contract and customers procedures as specified in SOP 10.15.
3.
Page 5.1-1

PART 5. A/C MAINT. CONTROL PROC. 5.1 AIRCRAFT CONTRACT MAINTENANCE IMPLEMENTATION
5.1.4.2
Performing the A/C maintenance at BMC 1. 2. 3. Upon receiving the WO and WP from MCC, the BMC performs the maintenance IAW SOP 6.3. The progress status of WP performance is uploaded on Technical Reports menu of VAECO website. The BMC shall report to BDD any arising issue that is out of the contract or affects to the maintenance schedule. The RMC performs the maintenance IAW SOP 6.2 or SOP 12.15. The RMC shall report to MCC any arising issue that are out of the contract with the Customer. The MCC will report to BDD for contacting Customer and follow the Customer instruction/ direction. Upon receiving the Maintenance/ Repair Request from LGD, the CMC performs the requested order IAW SOP Part 7. The CMC reports to LGD and BDD any arising issue that are out of the contract with the Customer and follow the Customer instruction/ direction.
5.1.4.3
Performing the A/C maintenance at RMC 1. 2.
5.1.4.4
Performing the A/C component maintenance at CMC 1. 2.
Page 5.1-2

PART 5. A/C MAINT. CONTROL PROC. 5.2 AIRCRAFT WORK REQUEST ISSUANCE AND MANAGEMENT
5.2 5.2.1
AIRCRAFT WORK ORDER ISSUANCE AND CONTROL PURPOSE To ensure the Work Order (WO) is issued and managed in accordance with the customers maintenance requirements.
5.2.2
SCOPE 1. 2. Applicable Department/ Center: EGD, MCC, RMC, BMC. Applicable Object: The aircraft maintained IAW customers requirement. Director of EGD is responsible to issue the WO for the following work in compliance with customer maintenance requirements: a. b. c. d. 2. a. b. A/C maintenance work from A check; Engine/ landing gear replacement; AD/ SB implementation; Other complex work that requires an EO to implement; Deploying the WO issued by EGD to appropriate Maintenance centers; Issuing WO for line checks and OOP maintenance requirements with the interval less than A check; ADD rectification, defect troubleshooting and deploying to appropriate Maintenance centers.
5.2.3
RESPONSIBILITY 1.
Director of MCC is responsible for:
3. 5.2.4 5.2.4.1
Maintenance centers are responsible for issuing WO to perform Nonroutine work, defect rectification;
PROCEDURE WORK ORDER ISSUANCE 1. EGD receives the Service Order or contract implementation request from BDD for the work specified in item 5.2.3.1 and issues WO to MCC for deploying. The EGD shall confirm the availability of part/ materials and tools/ equipment and upload the WO together with WP/ EO/ SRO to Work Order Information menu on homepage of VAECO web. MCC receives the Service Order or contract implementation request from BDD for all A/C maintenance work that normally be performed at line station (such as simple tasks or routine tasks/ line checks) then issues WO to appropriate maintenance center for performance. MCC also receives defect information of VNA A/C from BTPD/ RTPD When required part/ materials and tools/ equipment are available MCC issues WO to appropriate center for ADD rectification, defect troubleshooting MCC should assign appropriate maintenance center for implementing the work. Normally, the appropriate maintenance center shall be decided by MCC based on the following principles: Page 5.2-1
2.
3.
4.

PART 5. A/C MAINT. CONTROL PROC. 5.2 AIRCRAFT WORK REQUEST ISSUANCE AND MANAGEMENT
a. b. c. 5.2.4.2 1.
Capability of maintenance center, The place where aircraft will be maintained, Type of maintenance work,.
WORK ORDER CONTROL WO is created and controlled by using AMASIS. After a WO is accomplished the respective BTPD/ RTPD shall enter the completion information in AMASIS to close that work. If there is any raising problem or the WO could not be performed the BTPD/ RTPD shall report to MCC. EGD shall control every WO that is issued by EGD and inopen status in AMASIS to ensure that all WOs are performed on schedule. If a WO is due but not closed on AMASIS the EGD staff shall inform to MCC for checking and solving. MCC shall control every WO that is issued by MCC and in open status in AMASIS to ensure that all WOs are performed on schedule.
2.
3. 5.2.5
ARCHIVES The completed WO and related maintenance record are kept at Tech record section of EGD for at least two years.
Page 5.2-2

PART 5. A/C MAINT. CONTROL PROC. 5.3 WORKPACK PREPARATION AND REVIEW
5.3 5.3.1
WORK PACK PREPARATION AND REVIEW PURPOSE To prepare required tool/ equipment, material and related maintenance data for the maintenance work as specified in the WP.
5.3.2
SCOPE This procedure is applied for preparation and review of the WP prior to conducting the maintenance.
5.3.3
RESPONSIBILITY 1. Director of EGD is responsible to establish the WP for VNA, receive WP from BDD for other customers and ensure that job cards, worksheets, preload requirement and related documents are adequate and satisfied. Director of LGD is responsible to prepare all required parts, material specified in the preload requirement. Director of CMC is responsible to prepare all required tools, equipment specified in the preload requirement. Director of MCC is responsible to adjust the schedule of WP performance within the deadline and assign appropriate maintenance center for implementation of the WP..
2. 3. 4.
5.3.4 5.3.4.1
PROCEDURE Work pack preparation 1. EGD shall establish the WP IAW current AMS and issue lists of required parts/materials, tools/ equipment for the whole WP for VNA. For customer other than VNA, the WP shall be provided by the customer. EGD shall check the WP right after receiving from customer to ensure that job cards, worksheets and related documents are adequate and satisfied. Any discrepancies in the Work Pack (including related documents) should be reported to BDD to clarify with Customer. EGD transfer WO and the WP to MCC and preload requirements to LGD and appropriate CMC in electronic or hard copy format at least 13 days before A check or equivalence and 30 days before C check or equivalence. MCC shall evaluate opening OPM, ADD and issue WO to put in the WP for performance. The WP for VNA should include but not limited to the following: a. b. WP content (VAECO Form 1004); Job cards/OOP job cards index (including all standard maintenance requirements of schedule maintenance and OOP requirements as defined in the AMS); List of additional work and List of engineering requests (if any, including all EOs, SROs and all other requirements need to be performed); Page 5.3-1
2.
3.
4. 5.
c.

d. e. f. 6. 7.
Job cards; Preloads requirements; Other related documents.
[Deleted]. MCC shall send WO and WP (in format of electronic or hard-copy) to appropriate BTPD/ RTPD and the supplemental list of required parts/materials to LGD and the supplemental list of required tools/ equipment to related CMC for preparation: a. b. 10 days before A check or equivalence, 21 days before C check or equivalence.
8.
If any maintenance work (job cards, worksheets/ EO) need add to or withdraw from the WP before the maintenance visit, the EGD should send to MCC to evaluate, link with the WP (AMASIS declaration for VNA A/C) and fill in Last minute items list (VAECO Form 1006) then transfer to the assigned maintenance center as part of the WP. Upon receiving WP from MCC the assigned MC shall review all tasks in the WP including added OOP tasks. If the work cannot be carried out due to an unforeseen problem, relevant maintenance center shall immediately inform MCC for adjusting the schedule or reporting to BDD for further action.. The BTPD/ RTPD shall assess all job cards/ worksheets to determine any special requirement tasks such as: critical tasks, duplicate inspection required tasks, required inspection items etc. and confirm that the job cards/ worksheets are marked with Critical, DII, RII accordingly. If the Customer does not mark for DII work the maintenance staff shall follow customer policy/ procedure. Additional requirement: a. b. c. If the WP comes in electronic format, the data is to be first saved into the computer for backup purpose; If the WP comes in paper format, it is scanned and save into the computer; The production planner shall coordinate with authorized staff and technical service staff to evaluate the job contents and work procedures, which are stated in customers job cards and prepare all drawings and/ or references called for the work. The technical service staff shall verify tool/equipment, material for special work. the required skill,
5.3.4.2
Work pack review 1.
2.
3.
d. e.
Production planner shall prepare the required tool/equipment, material, man power and confirm with related shop for proper capability if there is any job transfer required.
Page 5.3-2

4.
The assigned BTPD/RTPD shall summary the WP issues required to be discussed/ confirmed and send to related department/ center at least 2 working days before the pre-input meeting. LGD and CMC shall review the issues. One day before the pre-input meeting, LGD and CMC shall notify to respective maintenance center and MCC the status of the concerned issues. For A check, if all issues are solved the pre-input meeting need not be organized. The assigned maintenance center shall determine the attendance and time (conform to requirement of the customer) to perform the pre-input meeting. The assigned maintenance center will normally organize a pre-input Meeting for C check at least 5 days and for A check (if required) at least 3 days prior to estimated input date. The meeting attendance may include Customers representative, BDD staff, aircraft Manager (Foreman), Supervisors, MCC Planner, Supply staffs and Quality Control personnel. The availability/ satisfaction of the required part/ materials (that is not available in VAECO store at the confirmation time) are only accepted if the intended receiving date showing that there is enough time to complete the related work as schedule. The input meeting will review the work scope, the flowchart, the tooling and materials requirements, manpower assignment and other relevant issues a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Summary Tally Sheet against the Task Cards for discrepancies, Ensure the documents are of correct effectivity, Materials requirements called out in the task cards, Tool/Equipment called out in the task cards, Engineering support, Flowchart of the major activities, Determine the individual task that requires a formation of a nonrecurring task team for the review of new / critical task/RII task.
5.
5.3.4.3
Pre-input meeting 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
In the pre-input meeting, all maintenance works that could not be performed due to lack of parts/ materials and/or tools/ equipment shall be withdrawn from the WP. MCC shall update on AMASIS and control the maintenance works that are withdrawn from the WP with the due date less than next A check and deploy to implement at suitable time. Withdrawn maintenance work with due date more than or same as next A check shall be transferred back to EGD for control. The Production Planner shall prepare all maintenance data for the routine work (print-out and attach to the respective job cards, worksheet). Page 5.3-3
6.
7.

5.3.5
ARCHIVES 1. 2. The pre-input meeting minutes are kept at BDD at least 24 months since the WP completion. The copy of pre-input meeting minutes are kept at respective maintenance center at least 3 months since the WP completion.
Page 5.3-4

PART 5. A/C MAINT. CONTROL PROC. 5.4 CONTROL OF WORK PROCESS AND DOC. DURING MAINT. PROGRESS
5.4 5.4.1
CONTROL OF WORK PROCESS MAINTENANCE PROGRESS PURPOSE This procedure is promulgated to ensure: 1.
AND
DOCUMENT
DURING
All aircraft related work tasks shall be reviewed, approved and issued as appropriate so that all work carried out on the aircraft are valid and current, and Proper control of aircraft work and maintenance documents (Job cards, Worksheets, and Non Routine Cards) for accountability and traceability.
2. 5.4.2
SCOPE This procedure is applied for controlling of work processes and maintenance documents during base maintenance.
5.4.3
RESPONSIBILITY 1. 2. 3. BDD staff is responsible to cooperate with customer to handle additional task and non-routine work arisen during maintenance process. Maintenance staff is responsible for the completion of the work he performs. Production planner is responsible to maintain maintenance documents to be valid and current to the work carried out on the aircraft.
5.4.4 5.4.4.1
PROCEDURE Procedure for generation of work document 1. After reviewing the WP and all NRC raised after preliminary inspection, the Production Planner in charge shall establish NRC list (VAECO Form 6003). Any job card, worksheet withdrawn from WP shall be recorded in List of acceptable deferred tasks (VAECO Form 6013) with concurrence of the customer and in compliance with customer operation procedure before the aircraft is returned to service. Additional maintenance work required by customer during maintenance shall be listed in Customer Form or Additional Tasks List (VAECO Form 6020) Production Planner shall issue Non-routine Work/ Workpack Change Request (VAECO Form 6006) and send it together with additional task list to BDD. For the work that is not included in the contract, the BDD shall sign and submit to customer for approval. The BDD shall notify to the related maintenance center and MCC for performance.. If job cards/ worksheets are not provided for the additional maintenance work, such work shall be transferred to NRC by production planner. The Production Planner shall validate all maintenance documents (job cards, worksheets, NRC, NRCC, JCAS) by appending stamp on the upper right corner of the first page of those documents.
2.
3.
4.
Issue: 02, Revision: 05 Date: 25 APR 2013
Page 5.4-1

5.
If any maintenance document is declared lost, The Production planner must be informed for the issuing of a duplicate copy. Any duplicate copy issued to replace the original job card must be approved by the Production planner and stamped Duplicate copy. The mechanic and authorized staff who had worked and inspected the job shall sign and stamp on the duplicated job card or NRC after verifying that the job has been properly performed. All customer work instructions and documents released for compliance on aircraft/parts are checked by the production planner for completeness of the work scope and specification, and availability of referenced work documents. All released Job cards and worksheets must be properly indexed according to the customer furnished index sheets. When the customer furnished index sheets is not provided by customer, before the maintenance visit the production planner should prepare the Master Job cards/Worksheets index, NRC list, other related forms and attachment, and then send this package to the Dock control room one day before the work start. The Master Job cards/Worksheets Index must be available at the aircraft work document trolley/ rack and not to be removed from its designated location. Production planner shall gather completed maintenance documents (Job cards/worksheets and NRCs) that are duly signed and checked by authorized staff, from the designated rack together with Master Job card/ Worksheet Index or NRC list and transfer them to QC authorized staff for checking. QC authorized staff shall check all completed maintenance documents for completeness and accuracy of entries and indicate this by stamping and signing in each work documents. After certified by QC authorized staff, Production planner shall register in computer system (AMASIS) and indicate that the work has been done by stamping, signing and specified the performed date in column Performed of the Master Job card/ Worksheet Index (VAECO Form 6019) or NRC list (VAECO Form 6003) for the said job card/worksheet and NRC respectively. Maintenance staff is to process the entire maintenance document (Job cards/ worksheets /NRCs, etc.) flow as follows: a. Maintenance staff is to pick up maintenance document with attached related maintenance data from the Dock Control Room, Note: Production planer is responsible for prepare all maintenance data for the routine work (referred in the job cards, worksheet).
5.4.4.2
Customer Work instructions and Furnished Worksheets 1.
2. 5.4.4.3
Master Job card/ Worksheet index and NRC list 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
5.4.4.4
Maintenance document work flow 1.
Page 5.4-2

Maintenance data which are used for the non-routine work (Referred in NRC, NRCC, SRO) shall be prepared by authorized staff. b. For the work steps accomplished, maintenance document and related maintenance data shall be signed off progressively by each respective trade. This is to ensure that every phase of the work process is certified and also for work continuity purposes. When completed, maintenance document and related maintenance data shall be put in Sign off area. If a work process is stopped midway, maintenance documents and the related maintenance data are to be signed to the last process step carried out and to be put in Work in progress area. This will allow continuity and eliminate the duplication of work. If work cannot be accomplished due to unavailability of parts or awaiting Engineering instruction, the maintenance document and related maintenance data are to be put in Awaiting Parts / Instructions area.
c.
d.
2.
Authorized staff shall check completed maintenance documents especially the NRCs for completeness and appropriateness of entries. Authorized staff shall affix his/her stamp and signature upon vetting to indicate that the completed work document was satisfactory. For traceability and record keeping process, document vetting must consider the following: a. For work that involves replacement or installation of serialized aircraft parts/components, authorized staff and Technician must ensure that the Part Number (P/N), Serial Number (S/N) are clearly annotated on the appropriate portion of the maintenance document (NRC, worksheet...). Copy of Release/ Return to Service certificate such as FAA Form 8130-3, EASA Form 1, CAAV Form 1 or equivalent and Serviceable tag must be attached together with the completed work documents. For work that involves usage of consumable materials, whole or partial (e.g. paint, adhesive, sealant, etc.), and replacement or installation of Standard Parts (e.g. bolts, nuts, washers, rivets, etc.), authorized staff and Technician must ensure that the Part Number (P/N) and Batch Number (B/N) are clearly annotated on the appropriate portion of the document (NRC, worksheet...). Copy of Certificate of Conformance/ Compliance (C of C) and document to prove the equivalency need to be attached to the completed work documents in case using of substitute material. The completed maintenance documents then shall be check by QC inspector before transfer to production planner.
b.
c. 3.
Production planner shall monitor and track the checking of these completed work documents for completion before they are routed to Technical Record Section.
Page 5.4-3

PART 5. A/C MAINT. CONTROL PROC. 5.5 DOCK CONTROL
5.5 5.5.1
DOCK CONTROL PURPOSE To define normal work procedures pertaining to the Dock Control. These procedures may at times be modified to meet the special contractual requirements of specific customers.
5.5.2 5.5.3
SCOPE This procedure is applied for the dock control during base maintenance. RESPONSIBILITY 1. Manager of the related TPD is overall responsible for the proper control of the Dock Control Room and for ensuring that this procedure is enforced and maintained. Production planner is directly responsible for controlling of all activities in the Dock Control Room. All maintenance personnel under management of Foreman ensure that all requirements in respect of the Dock control room are properly maintained.
2. 3.
5.5.4 5.5.4.1
PROCEDURE General 1. 2. 3. 4. The Dock Control Room is the information center for the aircraft being worked on. All job cards/ worksheets shall be prominently displayed according to zones and trades inside the Dock Control Room. All requests from maintenance staff for drawings, manuals, technical assistance or purchases shall be processed through the Dock Controller. The maintenance documents that took out of the Dock control room for working purpose and must be returned back to the Dock Control Room when the work is completed or at the end of each working shift. Exceptions to this procedure may be necessary at times to meet the requirements of certain customers. The related TPD Manager or his delegate shall determine the exceptions in consultation with the customer. The Production Planner shall prominently display Aircraft General Information. The Aircraft General Information shall contain the pertinent information as follows: a. b. c. d. Customer; Aircraft Type & model number; Manufacture Serial number (MNS); Engine type; Page 5.5-1
5.
5.5.4.2
Production planner (Dock controller) 1.

e. 2. 3.
Check type.
Maintain good housekeeping in the Dock Control Room. After receiving an incoming work package from MCC the Production Planner in-charge shall: a. f. g. h. i. Check the work package against the Customer tally list for completeness. Assign job and control numbers to the individual work sheets. Ensure that all drawings or references called for in the work are available. Load maintenance documents on the work boards and issues for maintenance as per the established maintenance timetable. If using hardcopy pre-printed NRC, issue blank serialized NRC to Maintenance staff for defect write-up. Maintenance staff will book out the required number of serialized NRC and initial on the NRC list (VAECO Form 6003). Keep track of the removal of any task cards via Task card booking in & out records (VAECO Form 6021).
j. 5.5.4.3
As the project progresses, the Production Planner shall 1. Maintain all printed maintenance data up-to-date. In case the maintenance data is updated during work performance respective TPD staff shall evaluate the requirement of T&E and part/ materials and request for supply to continue the work. Check all maintenance documents for proper sign off in accordance with the progress and status of the work being completed. When work is completed, he/she is to ensure that all related worksheets are duly signoff with the relevant signatures and stamps, date of completion, employee number by mechanic(s), inspection personnel, and QC authorized staff responsible for the job . Sign and stamp on the Master job cards/worksheets index (VAECO Form 6019) and NRC list (VAECO Form 6003) to signify the completion of the worksheets and keep the completed sheets progressively, as all Routine and Non-Routine cards are completed. Receive maintenance documents and related maintenance data from maintenance staff and put in In-progress or Sign off area accordingly. Complete the required operation in computer system (AMASIS for VNA) and keep all completed Job cards/worksheets/NRCs that checked by QC authorized staff in COMPLETED WORKS area Note: For projects where the customer has specified a format of their requirement, the format desired by the customer will be used. Otherwise, the Master Job cards/Worksheets Index and NRC list shall be used.
2.
3.
4. 5.
Page 5.5-2

6.
Receive all TAR (VAECO Form 3015) and register in the TAR Index (VAECO Form 6022) before conveying to the Tech service section or EGD. Conduct a worksheet audit at the appropriate time to ensure all Routine task cards, NRC, Engineering Orders, Technical Assistance Request and related paperwork are accounted for accountability. Any discrepancies are to be immediately highlighted to the Aircraft Manager (Foreman). Gather and send all OPM Requirement Notices (VAECO form 5004) to MCC whenever there is a new/ revised/ terminated OPM requirements arisen during maintenance for updating to new OPM Requirement Control Sheets (VAECO Form 1003). Ensure that the Control Room is cleared of all documents belonging to the project just completed after the aircraft departure. The foreman and the trade engineers (Zone/Team leader) in charge shall determine the job priorities and assign work to the crews accordingly. All paperwork to be taken out shall be brought to the attention of the Production planner (dock controller). Any partially completed task card waiting for work continuation or other trades shall also be returned to the dock control room daily. Worksheets that are booked out to workshops can be returned upon completion of jobs if it is not practical to return them daily. As the mechanic work on job, he shall sign and write down his (her) companys ID number for the work accomplishment. When the work is completed or is stopped due to shift change or whatever reason, maintenance staff returns the maintenance document with related maintenance data attached to Production planer. Component removals from aircraft are tracked by the use of a List of Replaced Component (VAECO Form 6014) where part number & serial number of removed/installed items are recorded. All authorized staff working on each assigned aircraft are to provide sample signatures, and stamp approvals on the Maintenance staff register (VAECO Form 6015). This identifies the signature & approval stamp to the name of the engineer. QC authorized staff shall check all completed maintenance documents and related maintenance data for completeness and accuracy of entries and indicate this by stamping in each maintenance documents. The maintenance documents then are put in COMPLETED WORK area. Related maintenance data shall be collected and archived at QC department for 01 year. Page 5.5-3
7.
8.
9. 5.5.4.4
Maintenance staff 1. 2. 3.
4. 5.
6.
7.
5.5.4.5
QC authorized staff 1.
2. 3.

5.5.4.6
After completion of the check, the production planner shall: 1. 2. Contact with MCC to get the new OPM Requirement Control Sheet (VAECO form 1003) (for VNA A/C). Replace all Dent and Buckle chart pages and OPM Control Sheet with the new ones when all the maintenance work is completed. All opened items shall be transferred to the new pages/ sheets. The removed pages shall be placed in the WP. Scan and upload the following documents on Aircraft Event of Technical Information menu on VAECO website: a. b. 4. List of acceptable deferred defects (VAECO Form 6012) with all related document such as NRC, SRO, spare requisition etc.; List of acceptable deferred tasks (VAECO Form 6013);
3.
Notify date and time that the aircraft is serviceable to VAECO MCC, Customer and BDD. The completed Work pack is handled IAW "aircraft maintenance record" procedure 5.7. Ensure that the Dock Control Room is cleared of all documentation or parts belonging to the project just completed.
5.
Page 5.5-4

PART 5. A/C MAINT. CONTROL PROC. 5.6 MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION COMPLETION
5.6 5.6.1
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENT COMPLETION PURPOSE To ensure that all work completed on aircraft or components are recorded IAW applicable regulatory authority and the operator.
5.6.2
SCOPE This procedure is applied for completing the document for the aircraft/ aircraft component of VAECOs customer.
5.6.3
RESPONSIBILITY 1. 2. Maintenance staff is responsible for the completion of the work he performs and/or inspects. Production planner and Tech record staff is responsible to ensure the completeness of all aircraft/ aircraft component maintenance records.
5.6.4 5.6.4.1
PROCEDURE Maintenance document completion 1. 2. 3. The necessary information such as check/ test result shall be recorded in appropriate block of maintenance documentation as specified. When a work/ step of work completed the maintenance staff shall sign on appropriate block in the maintenance document. Completion of maintenance documents must meet the following requirements: a. Unless otherwise specified, left blank in a filling block of maintenance documents are not allowed. In case there is no information to filled in, the field (filling block) shall be annotated: N/A means Not Applicable with reason clearly stated; N/R means Not Required; PCW means Previously Complied With as appropriate; Clearly entry in English capital letter and without any unfamiliar abbreviation words; Any mistake in the maintenance document shall be corrected by person who had performed and inspected the work. To correct, he strikes out the wrong words or make a line from 7 oclock to 13 oclock (for a block of text) and certifies by his signature and authorized number then writes the correct words next to the incorrect ones. Erasing or overwriting of the incorrect words is not allowed.
b. c.
4.
The aircraft/ aircraft component maintenance documents shall be completed in a specified area/ room. The documentations of each WP shall be processed in separated area to prevent from mixing of the records. For A/C maintenance document, QC authorized staff shall check the documents to ensure: Page 5.6-1
5.6.4.2
Maintenance document completion review 1.

PART 5. A/C MAINT. CONTROL PROC. 5.6 MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION COMPLETION
a. b. c. d. e. f. 2. 5.6.4.3
Proper entries in required block; Proper signature, date and stamp; All concerned pages are sufficient; Proper cross-references for traceability; Good physical condition; Certificates/ Serviceable tags are attached where applicable.
Maintenance documents with discrepancies shall be returned to the production planner/ maintenance staff for corrective action. All additional maintenance work should be put into AMASIS. Work pack should be closed on AMASIS within 3 working days for A check and 7 working days for C check.
Aircraft maintenance record update in AMASIS for VNA 1. 2.
Page 5.6-2

PART 5. A/C MAINT. CONTROL PROC. 5.7 AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE RECORD
5.7 5.7.1
AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE RECORD PURPOSE To ensure aircraft maintenance records are properly transferred to the customer and achieved in VAECO after the completion of aircraft maintenance IAW applicable regulations.
5.7.2
SCOPE This procedure is applied for aircraft maintenance record processed in VAECO.
5.7.3
RESPONSIBILITY 1. 2. The BTPD/ RTPD shall ensure all aircraft maintenance records properly transferred to Tech record section. Tech record section is responsible for keeping the maintenance record for VNA IAW contract and copy of maintenance record for other customer. Director of BDD is responsible to transfer maintenance record to customer.
3. 5.7.4 5.7.4.1
PROCEDURE General requirements 1. For customer other than VNA, original maintenance records of aircraft shall be transferred to the customer just after the contract/ work request completion or a duration required by the Customer. For the VNA, the original A/C maintenance records are kept in tech record section IAW the contract with VNA. The maintenance records are scanned and achieved for two (02) years before transferring to Customers. After checking all aircraft maintenance records to ensure they are satisfactory, the related TPD prepares Work pack handover (VAECO Form 6016). The maintenance record should include but not limit to the followings: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. Purchase Order; Aircraft Maintenance Work Order; Master job card/ worksheet index (VAECO Form 6019); Last minute items list (VAECO Form 1006); Additional Tasks List (VAECO Form 6020); List of acceptable deferred defects (VAECO Form 6012); List of acceptable deferred tasks (VAECO Form 6013); List of replaced component (VAECO Form 6014); Page 5.7-1
2. 3. 5.7.4.2
A/C maintenance records after base maintenance 1.
2.

i. j. k. l.
Non-routine Card list (VAECO Form 6003); Routine and Non-Routine Job Cards; Maintenance Release (VAECO Form 2012 or Air carriers form); Record of accomplished Service Bulletin and/or Airworthiness Directive; FAA Form 337/ CAAV Form 523 (Major Alterations only), if applicable; FAA Form 8110-3, DER Approved Data, if applicable; Any other documentation that may be applicable.
m. Records of tests and/or calibration performed on article; n. o. p. 3.
All maintenance record pertaining to one aircraft are filed separately from another aircraft, indexed and filed with the following identifications: a. b. c. d. e. Control number; WP, WO number Aircraft Registrations Number; Worksheets category, e.g. Routine Card, NRCs, etc. Volume number, e.g. 01, 02, etc. Original or Backup copies.
4.
All maintenance records are transferred from the related TPD to Tech record section. The Tech record section checks the work documents received against the WP handover sheet provided by the related TPD. For VNA, The maintenance records then are archived in Tech record section. For other customer, the maintenance records are photocopied and scanned for archiving. Original of maintenance record shall be handed over to customer by BDD. The maintenance records are either transferred to the operator or to Tech record section by hand or shipping. The operator or Tech record section personnel accepts the maintenance records by signing on the acknowledgement column of Work pack handover (VAECO Form 6016) when the records are delivered by hand. For maintenance record is shipped, the Airway Bill (AWB) will serve as acknowledgement of receipt. Maintenance records of VNA A/C. a. Cabin defect log: The 2nd copy of cabin defect log page is gathered by maintenance staff and kept at HAN RTPD for Airbus and Fokker A/C or HCM RTPD for Boeing and ATR A/C at least 30 days since the entry date for normal flight otherwise it shall be kept until official acceptance to discard.
5. 6.
7. 8.
5.7.4.3
A/C maintenance records after ramp maintenance 1.
Page 5.7-2

The original of cabin defect log books are gathered by maintenance staff after completion of cabin defect log books and kept at least 12 months since the entry date at HAN RTPD for Airbus and Fokker A/C or HCM RTPD for Boeing and ATR A/C. b. Technical log: The 4th copy of technical log page (blue copy) are gathered by maintenance staff at line station other than HAN, SGN and retained at least 24 hours for normal flight otherwise it shall be retained until official acceptance to discard. The 3rd copy of technical log pages (pink copy) are gathered at HAN, DAD or SGN by authorized staff and sent to the respective RTPD to input all necessary information into AMASIS within 03 hours. These copies of technical log pages are then sent to related Quality Control division for checking (except DAD station). The 2nd copy of technical log pages (white copy) are gathered and achieved at least 24 months since the entry date at HAN (for Airbus and Fokker A/C) or at SGN (for Boeing and ATR A/C). The 1st copy of technical log pages (white original copy) are kept in the technical log book and will be gathered after technical log book completion and then sent to Technical Record Section of EGD to keep IAW the contract with VNA. When gathering the completed technical log book maintenance staff shall leave technical log pages (original copies) of last fifteen flights to attach on the new technical log book. c. Other ramp maintenance records: The other ramp maintenance records such as: OOP task card, EO are collected and distributed as follow: The maintenance records are sent to the RTPD by authorized staff to input all necessary information into AMASIS. Original of such maintenance record shall be sent to Technical Record section of EGD to keep IAW the contract with the VNA. 2. Maintenance records of the other Customer. a. The copies of technical log sheets are collected by authorized staff and sent to respective RTPD for handover to tech record section of EGD for keeping. Maintenance records other than technical log sheet are sent to Technical record section of EGD for scan into electronic file before transfer the original copy to customer.
b.
5.7.4.4
A/C maintenance records keeping 1. Technical Record section of EGD shall scan all maintenance records (except technical log pages) into electronic files within 5 days for a check lower than C check and 10 days for another check since WP completion. The electronic files of maintenance records are uploaded on VAECO Page 5.7-3

website. Maintenance records in papers and in electronic files are archived for at least 24 months or longer as required by customer. 2. 3. Electronic maintenance records are stored in server and backed up daily by the IT division of EGD. Head of Tech record section shall inform QA director, as required, when hardcopy record/ log books need to discard. The QA director shall inform the relevant airworthiness authority and obtain the necessary approval for destroying if required by the authority. General requirement a. The VAECO fulfills the forms IAW the customers procedure. In the case of re-creation, the procedure in the item 2 below is applied except otherwise specified by the Customer. The correction in maintenance record is allowed but all the mistakes are retained to recognize. The maintenance records are re-created in the following cases: The records are missing during transportation or storage. The maintenance records is voided due to illegibility; Missing of signature or mistake of personnel. Using incorrect words or grammar. Additional requirement from the Customer or the Authorities to add more information into maintenance records. 2. Maintenance record re-creation procedure a. Maintenance record missing When the aircraft maintenance records are missed, the Technical Record Section of EGD shall inform the relevant Maintenance Centre about this problem. The relevant Maintenance Center determines and contacts the performer, check to confirm that the relevant work have been completed. The maintenance records are re-created with the signature of the relevant personnel who had performed and inspected the work. The relevant QC Manager shall certify and signed in the first page of re-created maintenance records. The Customer shall be informed about the case that the information in missed maintenance records affects the airworthiness of the aircraft. b. Information lack or discrepancy in maintenance records
5.7.4.5
Maintenance record re-creation 1.
b. c.
Page 5.7-4

When the discrepancies or lack of information found in maintenance records, the person who certified the work is informed to correct/ complete the records. The person who corrects the records has to confirm that all related maintenance work had been correctly performed and follow 5.6.4.1 when correction. 5.7.5 ARCHIVES 1. 2. Acknowledgement receipts of Tech record section are maintained on file in the Tech record section for 02 years. Acknowledgement receipts of customer are maintained on file in the BDD for 02 years.
Page 5.7-5

PART 6 RAMP & BASE MAINT. PROC. 6.1 AIRCRAFT TOWING/ PUSHBACK
PART 6
RAMP AND BASE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
Page 6-1

6.1 6.1.1
AIRCRAFT TOWING/ PUSHBACK PURPOSE To outline the general requirements, safety precautions in towing/ pushback operations.
6.1.2
SCOPE This procedure is applied for towing/ pushback activities for all A/C type handled by VAECO.
6.1.3
RESPONSIBILITY 1. 2. 3. RMC/ BMC are responsible for A/C towing/ push back and assigning towing/ push back personnel. RTPD/BTPD is responsible for coordinating the operation of A/C towing/ push back and arranging airplane space within VAECO facility. Ground Support Manager of related CMC is responsible for providing towing equipment (tractor and tow bar) and assigning tractor driver. PUSHBACK: moving of A/C from parking position to taxi position by use of specialized ground support equipment. TOWING: moving of A/C other than pushback operations, with/ without load on board by use of specialized ground support equipment.
6.1.4
DEFINITIONS 1. 2.
6.1.5 6.1.5.1
PROCEDURE Informing 1. 2. 3. 4. The RTPD/ BTPD should be informed before A/C towing and after repositioning. If A/C is towing to VAECO hangar, the BTPD should arrange place to park and inform A/C towing personnel. If A/C is towing to/ from VAECO hangar dock, the BTPD should be informed first. If A/C is towing to airport ramp, the RTPD should inquire for parking place and schedule that is arranged by airport authority and inform staff before towing A/C to ramp. Staff responsibilities. Before starting of process, the towing/ pushback team should be established, may include: a. Headset man Headset man is responsible for controlling of whole towing/ pushback operation, coordinating of towing/pushback personnel. Headset man should be trained and qualified for towing/ pushback as specified in SOP 10.4.2.9.
6.1.5.2
Personnel assignment and necessary equipment 1.
Page 6.1-1

b.
Cockpit man (N/A for pushback) Cockpit man is responsible for operating of required A/C systems for towing. Cockpit man should be qualified A2 function as specified in SOP 10.1.4.4.
c.
Tractor driver Tractor driver is responsible for towing/ pushback routing, operating of tractor/ tow bar. Tractor driver should have the towing vehicle operating license granted by authority.
d.
Wing walker/ tail walker: Wing walker/ tail walker are responsible for monitoring the A/C clearance when towing/ pushback in a congested or restricted aircraft movement area.
e.
Towing supervisor: Towing supervisor is responsible for managing the towing operation when A/C is docking in/out,
f.
Clearance monitors: Clearance monitors are responsible for monitoring the clearance between A/C to ease-to-impact point of dock when A/C is docking in/out.
2.
Minimum equipment Towing/ push back staff should be equipped with necessary equipment for work and communication as below: a. b. Headset man: headset and steering by-pass pin for respected A/C type. Wing walker, tail walker, clearance monitors: air whistle/ horn; for night operation: flash light or lighting wand is additional required.
6.1.5.3
General requirements and safety precautions 1. Towing/ push back preparation, checks and operations should be performed IAW relevant AMM and customer procedures. However, the following requirements and safety precautions should be complied with if they are not against or stricter than the relevant AMM and customer procedures. The headset man is prohibited to seat behind/on tractor cabin / tow bar during towing within VAECO area. Unless otherwise specified by customer, Verbal conversation between ground and cockpit shall be used as specified in 6.2.4.6. Non-standard hand signal is prohibited. Unless otherwise specified by customer, Hand signal communication between ground and cockpit shall be used IAW CAAV AC-10- 003 (which uses signals published by ICAO annex 2, section 5- Rules of the air). These hand signals are listed in the Appendix 6.1.1 of this SOP. Page 6.1-2
2. 3.
4.

Caution: During thunder storm, use hand signal for communication between ground and cockpit. 5. Unless otherwise specified by individual contract/agreement, Hand signal communication between headset man and tractor driver shall be used IAW CAAV AC-10- 003 (which uses signals equivalent to ICAO annex 2, section 5- Rules of the air IATA and IATA AMH631). These hand signals are listed in the Appendix 6.1.1 of this SOP. Towing of A/C into/ out of VAECO hangar or nearby hangar area shall be performed by VAECO staffs. Before commencing of towing/ pushback process, Headset man should ensure that staffs required for towing operation are adequate. Headset man should brief the work and agree communication/ signal in normal and abnormal situation to all concerned staff such as tractor driver, cockpit man, wing walkers Aircraft wheel chocks shall not be removed until the aircraft parking brakes is applied with pressure available. Aircraft wheel chocks removal sequence should be complied with respective type of towing/push-back vehicle. Ground gear lock pins shall be installed at all times except during pushback. Communication shall be maintained between cockpit and ground at all times. Use of interphone or VHF set is first priority. A/C surround area and engine inlet/ gas exhaust area (if engine run) should be confirmed clean and clear of personnel/ GSE/ foreign object. If case of A/C abnormal configuration, the approved/ accepted alternate procedure should be applied to maintain the safety. During towing/pushback, the headset man should always keeps in contact with cockpit man and tractor driver, maintains the minimum distance 3 meters away from the nose gear, towing bar while A/C is moving. Never walk in or forward of the path of tractor or nose wheel. During towing/pushback, the headset man should always monitors towing speed, turning angle, tow-bar condition, ground clearance and informs driver the abnormal conditions immediately. During towing, A/C brake operation is prohibited except for emergency situation or requested by headset man. The cockpit man is prohibited from putting his feet on brake pedal during A/C towing. Incase of abnormal situations (such as tow-bar shear pin broken) towing staffs should have appropriate actions basing on each situation. After towing, The A/C should be set back to normal configuration and 360 check (walk around) should be performed to confirm there is no damage on the A/C.
6. 7.
8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.
15.
16. 17.
6.1.5.4
Towing instruction Please refer to Working instruction of each individual maintenance centers
Page 6.1-3

Appendix 6.1.1: Some of necessary signals for maintenance staff.
Set brakes Raise hand just above shoulder height with open palm. Ensuring eye contact with flight crew, close hand into a fist. Do not move until receipt of thumbs up acknowledgement from flight crew.
Release brakes Raise hand just above shoulder height with hand closed in a fist. Ensuring eye contact with flight crew, open palm. Do not move until receipt of thumbs up acknowledgement from flight crew.
Chocks inserted With arms and wands fully extended above head, move wands inward in a jabbing motion until wands touch. Ensure acknowledgement is received from flight crew.
Page 6.1-4

Chocks removed With arms and wands fully extended above head, move wands outward in a jabbing motion. Do not remove chocks until authorized by flight crew.
Start engine(s) Raise right arm to head level with wand pointing up and start a circular motion with hand; at the same time, with left arm raised above head level, point to engine to be started.
Cut engines Extend arm with wand forward of body at shoulder level; move hand and wand to top of left shoulder and draw wand to top of right shoulder in a slicing motion across throat.
Page 6.1-5

Affirmative/all clear Raise right arm to head level with wand pointing up or display hand with thumbs up; left arm remains at side by knee. Note This signal is also used as a technical/ servicing communication signal.
Fire Move right-hand wand in a fanning motion from shoulder to knee, while at the same time pointing with left-hand wand to area of fire.
Dispatch aircraft Perform a standard salute with right hand and/or wand to dispatch the aircraft. Maintain eye contact with flight crew until aircraft has begun to taxi.
Page 6.1-6

Connect ground power (technical/servicing communication signal) Hold arms fully extended above head; open left hand horizontally and move finger tips of right hand into and touch open palm of left hand (forming a T). At night, illuminated wands can also be used to form the T above head.
Disconnect power (technical/servicing communication signal) Hold arms fully extended above head with finger tips of right hand touching open horizontal palm of left hand (forming a T); then move right hand away from the left. Do not disconnect power until authorized by flight crew. At night, illuminated wands can also be used to form the T above head.
Negative (technical/servicing communication signal) Hold right arm straight out at 90 degrees from shoulder and point wand down to ground or display hand with thumbs down; left hand remains at side by knee.
Page 6.1-7

Establish communication via interphone (technical/servicing communication signal) Extend both arms at 90 degrees from body and move hands to cup both ears.
Page 6.1-8

PART 6 RAMP & BASE MAINT. PROC. 6.2 AIRCRAFT ARRIVAL AND DEPARTURE
6.2 6.2.1
A/C ARRIVAL AND DEPARTURE PURPOSE To stipulate the standard, requirements for A/C arrival and departure activities.
6.2.2
SCOPE This procedure is applied for arrival and departure activities within VAECO ramp operation.
6.2.3
RESPONSIBILITY 1. 2. The assigned staff of related RTPD is responsible for monitoring customer flight schedule and informing maintenance staffs. Maintenance staffs are responsible for implementing arrival and departure activities in compliance with this procedure.
6.2.4 6.2.4.1
PROCEDURE General 1. The arrival/ departure operation is performed IAW customer procedures. However, the following guidelines should be complied with if they are not against customer procedures. Unless otherwise specified by customer, Verbal conversation between maintenance staff and fight crew shall be used as specified in 6.2.4.6. Unless otherwise specified by customer, Hand signal communication between maintenance staff and fight crew shall be used IAW. CAAV AC10- 003 (which uses signals published by ICAO annex 2, section 5Rules of the air). These hand signals are listed in the Appendix 6.1.1 of the SOP 6.1. Warning: Use Hand signal for communication with Flight crew during thunderstorm.
2. 3.
6.2.4.2
Aircraft arrival 1. Before aircraft arrival, basing on information provided by RTPD/ customer, the Inspection & RTS staff should check A/C status to prepare for maintenance and servicing. The status checking include but not limited to defect occurred during flight (PFR or onboard maintenance message) and outstanding deferred defect item. Maintenance staff should ensure that all required equipment and arrival/ departure KIT are available at arrival gate/ parking place before A/C arrival. Maintenance staff should be available at arrival gate/ parking place 30 minutes and complete the check to prevent FOD at arrival gate/ parking place 10 minutes prior to ETA. Before A/C taxiing into the ramp, maintenance staffs should verify that no people or vehicle activity on the path of A/C to prevent from damaging aircraft or ground equipment. Page 6.2-1
2.
3.
4.

5.
When A/C completely stopped, maintenance staff should approach from front to nose wheel, confirm parking brake set and place chocks fore and aft of all nose wheels or IAW the appropriate customers procedure/ document (if any), connect headset and communicate to confirm if external power required. Maintenance staff should connect External power/ Ground air conditioner upon request. When engines are spooled down and beacon lights are turned off, maintenance staff places chocks at main wheel(s) IAW the appropriate customers procedure/ document. If the customer does not have specific instructions/ requirements, places chocks as following: a. b. In normal condition: Fore and aft of outboard LH main landing gear wheel set. In abnormal circumstances (sloping and slippery surface, wind or wind gust, etc are described in relevant AMM): Fore and aft of all LH & RH main landing gear wheel sets.
6. 7.
Warning: For ATR72, the staff is only allowed to set chocks to main landing wheel after propellers stopped. Moving propeller blade can cause dead or injury of person. 8. Maintenance staff connects the headset to inform flight crew CHOCKS IN PLACE, RELEASE PARKING BRAKE, Note: Use appropriate hand signals if interphone is not available/ unserviceable. 9. 6.2.4.3 Maintenance staff should place ground safety cones IAW the appropriate customers procedure/ document. Maintenance staff shall perform servicing & maintenance following the contract between customer and VAECO. The procedures for A/C maintenance are detailed in 6.3. In case customer request for non-routine work or loan of tools, equipment and component, maintenance staff should inform the RTPD to complete Work request/ confirmation sheet (VAECO Form 1016). Obtain customer representative signature on Work request/ confirmation sheet. Preparation a. Authorized staff shall check to ensure that: All doors and panels are closed and locked; All landing gear down lock pins are removed; Steering lever is in appropriate position.
Maintenance and servicing 1.
2.
3. 6.2.4.4
Aircraft departure 1.
Page 6.2-2

b.
15 minutes prior to the departure, headset man should take the headset to contact flight crew and remain contacted in entire operation. The headset man should inform cockpit if he has to leave and report to cockpit when he is back to position. Headset man confirms: The MLG wheel chocks are removed; Surrounding of A/C, engine inlet and gas exhaust areas are clean and clear of personnel/GSE/foreign object.
c. 2.
Departure a.
b.
Headset man informs flight crew to prepare for engine start. When realized that navigation and anti-collision light are on, Headset man shall inform flight crew that A/C ready for engine start. Headset man monitors the engine start process, and immediately warns the flight crew of abnormalities such as: oil/ fuel leak, smoke, fire After receiving order from flight crew, Headset man disconnects head set, closes and latches panel, removes NLG wheel chocks then standby near the A/C nose route as requested by flight crew. In case of the steering pin is used, the headset man raises and stretches the steering pin streamer to notify the flight crew (in case of insufficient illumination, it should be illuminated by the torchlight). After confirm all clear, the headset man gives Thumb up sign to the cockpit and wait for the flight crews direction. If the flight crew is ready to depart (flash/turn on the taxi-light), the headset man should salute to the captain (means hand over the duties of defending flight safety and servicing passengers to crews) and wave hand to the passengers (end of waving hand till vertical stabilizer pass for full passenger A/C). In case of emergency, call STOP! to order pilot to set brake using abruptly extend arms to top of head, crossing arms.
c.
d.
e.
f. g.
h. 3.
In case of departure without VAECO headset man, maintenance staff should a. b. Standby near the A/C route. Give the proper assistance, if required. Monitor A/C taxi to the end of runway and take off. Return equipment and arrival/ departure KIT, handle the departure documents and maintenance records to related RTPD.
4.
After A/C departure, maintenance staff should a. b.
Page 6.2-3

6.2.4.5
Operation in high wind conditions 1. The high wind warning a. b. The MCC shall receive for high winds warning from customer, air traffic tower control and other public media... After high wind warning confirmed, The MCC will inform to related RTPD for prepare the necessary work and assign maintenance team. Confirm working ladders, platform and ground service equipment is secured to prevent an unexpected movement. Confirm chocks are correctly installed at wheel(s) of all landing gears IAW AMM. Confirm aircraft PARKING BRAKE had been set except brake temperature shows an overheat condition. Remove the aircraft nose gear STEERING PIN. Pay attention if any abnormal condition may occur and report to respective TPD immediately. Confirm the STEERING PIN has proper installed back before the aircraft push back or after the high wind warning was relieved.
2.
To prevent accident, maintenance staff should: a. b. c. d. e. f.
6.2.4.6
Conversation between maintenance staff and fight crew 1. Before start and push back: In case of hydraulic pressurization, flight crew or maintenance staff shall make sure that the aircraft is clear of ground equipment Crew: Crew: 2. Cockpit to ground. Request to pressurize hydraulic. Main. staff: Ground to cockpit. Main. staff: Clear to pressurize hydraulic Non push back start: When the flight crew and maintenance staff are ready to start engines the flight crew will advise as follows Crew: Crew: Crew: Crew: Cockpit to ground. Are you ready to start engines Brakes set Starting engine # 1 (Left) or #2 (Right) Main. staff: Ground to cockpit. Main. staff: Confirm brakes are set Main. staff: Clear to start engines
Page 6.2-4

Main. staff: Clear to start # 1 (Left) or #2 (Right) The maintenance abnormalities. Crew: 3. Crew: staff will monitor engine rotation and any
Main. staff: N1 rotation Check. Start complete, disconnect headset, hand signals on the left/right side. Repeat above sequence for other engine
Push-back start: When the flight crew request pushback but ground personnel are not ready, then the maintenance staff will answer as follows Main. staff: Negative, standby for pushback. When the flight crew and maintenance staff are ready for push back the flight crew will advise as follows: Crew: Crew: Crew: Cockpit to ground. Clear for pushback facing ... (direction) Brakes released Main. staff: Ground to cockpit. Main. staff: Pushback facing ..., release brakes. Main. staff: Commencing pushback, clear to start engines. Upon completion of a normal pushback the tractor driver will apply the brakes. The maintenance staff will advise the flight crew as follows: Main. staff: Ground to cockpit, pushback complete, set brakes. Crew: Brakes set. Before, during or after pushback the maintenance staff will advise the flight crew of when and where they will start the engines. Main. staff: Clear to start engines Crew: The maintenance abnormalities. Crew: Crew: Starting engine # 1 (Left) or #2 (Right) staff will monitor engine rotation and any Main. staff: Clear to start # 1 (Left) or #2 (Right)
Main. staff: N1 rotation. Check. Start complete, clear to disconnect, hand signals on the Left/Right side. Repeat above sequence for other engine.
Main. staff: Disconnecting, hand signals on the left/right side. Issue: 02, Revision: 04, Date: 28 NOV 2012 Page 6.2-5

4.
Engine Start with External Pneumatic Power: The procedure should be carried out in accordance with the specific aircraft FCOM. The maintenance staff will advise the flight crew when the required services are available and co-ordinate connection and removal of equipment. Main. staff: Ground to cockpit. Crew: Cockpit to ground. Main. staff: The Air starter connected, standing by for engine start. Crew: Crew: The maintenance abnormalities. Crew: Crew: Ready to start engines. Supply pneumatic pressure. Starting engine # 1 (Left) or #2 (Right) staff will monitor engine rotation and any Main. staff: Pneumatic pressure is available. Main. staff: Clear to start # 1 (Left) or #2 (Right)
Main. staff: N1 rotation. Check. Engine #1 (Left) or #2 (Right) start complete, remove the Air starter, GPU
Main. staff: The Air starter, GPU is removing After the Air starter/ GPU removed, the maintenance staff will advise the flight crew that he is ready for start or push back and they will perform Non push back start or Push back start procedure as practicable. Then they will apply the Cross Bleed Start procedure for starting the other engine. 5. Arrival Procedures: Main. staff: Ground to cockpit. Crew: Crew: 6. For ATR72 aircraft When maintenance staff and flight crews are ready for start engines and push back: Crew: Request to start Hotel mode Main. staff: Clear to start Hotel mode Before or during pushing back: Main. staff: Clear to release prop brake Issue: 02, Revision: 04, Date: 28 NOV 2012 Page 6.2-6 Cockpit to ground. Brake released Main. staff: Chocks in place, release brakes

Crew:
Releasing number #2
Then start the other engine as mentioned above.
Page 6.2-7

PART 6 RAMP & BASE MAINT. PROC. 6.3 AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE
6.3 6.3.1
AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE PURPOSE To implement the aircraft maintenance IAW applicable regulations and customer requirements.
6.3.2
SCOPE This procedure is applied for conducting maintenance activities those are covered by VAECO approved certificate, on customers aircraft.
6.3.3
RESPONSIBILITY 1. Director of EGD is responsible for issuing WO, contacting with the BDD, for contract matters and providing engineering support as required by maintenance centers (as specified by contract). Director of MCC is responsible for assigning the relevant maintenance center to implement the maintenance work. Director of Maintenance centers are responsible for providing resources, planning and managing maintenance processes. Director of LGD is responsible for providing spare parts, materials as required by maintenance activities in timely, sufficiently manner. Director of CMC is responsible for providing tools, equipment as required by maintenance activities in timely, sufficiently manner. [Deleted].
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 6.3.4 6.3.4.1
PROCEDURE Work order and work pack 1. According to maintenance contract from customers or maintenance plan of VNA, EGD shall issue WO for aircraft maintenance. This WO shall specify the work to be accomplished basing upon the customer requirements. The WO issuance is detailed in procedure 5.2. The WP shall be provided by customer or generated by EGD for VNA aircraft. The WP issuance is detailed in procedure 5.3. Maintenance data related to aircraft maintenance such as AMM, IPC, TSM, WDM, MME, LMM shall be provided by the customer. If the maintenance data is continuously use (for VNA or Ramp maintenance of other customer...), those documents shall be controlled for updating status and distributed to needed department by Technical library of EGD. The maintenance data control is detailed in procedure 8.1. Aircraft Parts/ Materials are provided by customer or by Logistics Department under agreement with the customer.
2. 6.3.4.2
Maintenance data 1. 2.
6.3.4.3
Parts/ Materials 1.
Issue: 02, Revision: 03, Date: 20 JUL 2012
Page 6.3-1

2.
When spare parts/ materials are required, maintenance staff shall check the spares/ materials availability in the stores by using AMASIS: a. If the spares/ materials are available the requester fill all necessary information of spares/ materials required in Stock Requisition (VAECO Form 4024) and get them from store; If the spares/ materials are not available the requester shall input all necessary information of spares/ materials required in the AMASIS and create Request for Supply (VAECO Form 4023) to order for later usage.
b.
3.
Authorized staff must carry out part inspection before installing on aircraft (physical conditions, life limit, airworthiness data in accompanied documents). The cannibalization/swapping of components from the operating aircraft/ stock NHA may be performed in specific maintenance or operation condition: a. b. For the customers aircrafts, component swapping/ cannibalization is carried out in accordance with customers procedure. For the VAECOs components, the cannibalization of components is detailed in procedure 9.4.
4.
6.3.4.4
Production control 1. 2. For base maintenance, maintenance director shall assign a foreman to manage the maintenance activities. The related TPD shall establish a Maintenance Timetable for carrying out a task or group of task. For a maintenance check equivalent to C check and above, a work flow chart should be created to reflect Maintenance Timetable and may be adjusted according to any possible changes during the course of maintenance. Production planner shall hand out the job cards/ worksheets/ NRCs to authorized staff/ Supervisor according to the Maintenance Timetable for carrying out maintenance work. Refer to The procedure 5.4 for detailed. When the job cards/ worksheets/ NRCs cannot be carried out as scheduled, the related TPD should report to the director and coordinate with the foreman to readjust the maintenance plan so as the A/C ground time is minimized. Upon receiving the Aircraft from customer or RMC (for VNA aircraft) Aircraft handover sheet (VAECO Form 6011) or customer handover sheet (if any) shall be used to record overall status of the A/C. Before starting to work in base maintenance, the maintenance staff should register by writing name and signing in appropriate block in Maintenance staff register sheet (VAECO Form 6015).
3.
4.
6.3.4.5
Maintenance and inspection 1.
2.
Page 6.3-2

3.
The preliminary inspection shall be performed on an aircraft IAW procedure 10.5.7.1.
Page 6.3-3

4.
When the customers instruction reflects that the subject aircraft has been involved in an accident, a hidden damage inspection shall be performed IAW procedure 10.6. The supervisor shall plan and co-ordinate all work activities. He shall assign the work, brief and emphasis work requirement to his staff. Maintenance staffs follow the job card/ worksheet/ NRC to perform the work step by step in accordance with instruction in the appropriate manufacturers publications/ manuals or approved documented procedures. All necessary maintenance data must be available at working area for reference. If any technical difficulties found, the maintenance staff should fill out TAR (VAECO Form 3015) and send to RTPD/ BTPD for assistance. Refer to Technical support procedure 8.5 for detailed. All routine job cards in customer check package shall be performed in accordance with customers approved procedures. Any questionable job card shall be consulted to customer for providing instruction.
5. 6.
7.
8. 9.
10. Any discrepancies found during base maintenance shall be recorded in NRC and handled as specified in item 6.3.4.6 below. 11. Any discrepancies found during the working processing for ramp maintenance shall be handled following the customers procedures. Maintenance actions taken shall be specified in the maintenance log or other document specified by the customer and signed by the authorized staff. 12. Tasks are marked as critical will be performed as follows. a. b. c. Each critical task shall be performed by different authorized staff; Critical tasks are performed by one authorized staff and re-inspected by another authorized staff (duplicate inspection). Critical tasks performed by the same authorized staff, who then issue a NRC to re-inspect the work performed.
13. Tasks related to the aircraft critical systems such as flight control, engine, landing gear and pitot static systems are to be subjected to an independent or duplicate inspection as defined by the customer and carried out IAW customer procedures. 14. Upon completion of each task, the authorized staff shall check/ inspect the affected article to assure conformance to specification and established workmanship standards. He shall then certify the task with his signature, approval stamp and date. 6.3.4.6 Non Routine Card issuance 1. Before the maintenance visit, customer (other than VNA A/C) should issue maintenance work transfer summary to the maintenance center.
Page 6.3-4

2.
Technical service staff shall evaluate all items in maintenance work transfer summary and the Preliminary Inspection Finding List to determine required materials, tools and documents, and issue TAR if necessary. After understanding the contents of deferred defect corrective procedure, Production planner shall extract all outstanding work requirements from all relevant documents (including Tech Log) supplied by customer and arrange/ adjust the proper A/C ground time, location, facilities and manpower, then issue a NRC. For discrepancies found during base maintenance, authorized staff shall prepare the Non Routine Card (VAECO Form 6001) with detailed work request and forward to the Production planner for scheduling the rectification/repair. The respective TPD shall review estimated man-hours and other requirements specified in the NRC. If the man-hours to accomplish the work is belonged to Over and Above work (O&A work), TPD staff shall prepare Non-routine Work/ Workpack Change Request (VAECO Form 6006) and send it to BDD. The BDD staff shall sign and submit to customer for approval and then notify to the related maintenance center and MCC for performance. To prevent error entry on the customers Non Routine Card due to unfamiliar of the format. VAECO Non Routine Card (VAECO Form 6001) may be used by maintenance staff to hand script the finding before entry to the customers serialized Non Routine Card. All NRC must be property indexed and recorded in NRC list (VAECO Form 6003) before they are released to production for compliance. The Production planner is to make available blank NRCs and issue NRC list (VAECO Form 6003) at the designated location. The list must be filled for each NRC raised and not to be removed from the designated area. If a NRC is inadequate for documenting sub-task relating to the main task, (e.g. Removal for access, follow-on checks etc.), a supplementary log sheet termed Non Routine Card Continuation Form (VAECO Form 6017) shall be used instead of another NRC. This continuation form is to be attached to the related NRC. More than one NRC Continuation form may be used if necessary.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7. 8.
9.
10. The person raising the NRC Continuation form shall annotate in the main job NRC, the statement NRCC Form raised. 11. If any NRC is declared lost, production planner must be informed to release the original copy. The Production planner, based on information extracted from the original, is to issue a duplicate copy. This copy shall be stamped Duplicate copy by the Production planner as evidence of his/her concurrence.
Page 6.3-5

12. After all O&A work completion, the related TPD is responsible for consolidating all O&A work requirements, preparing Additional Man-hour of Non-standard Work (VAECO Form 1135) and submit to Customer for approval before sending to BDD. 13. Production planner shall place NRC (contractual and O&A) under NRC column of the Document rack according to trade. 6.3.4.7 Job Card/ Non Routine Card Continuation Form 1. The Job Card/ Non Routine Card Continuation Form (VAECO Form 6017) is used to record the detailed work or a series of work processes or sub-tasks that are required to be carried out to perform a complex task or rectify a defect raised in the NRC. The cross reference shall be specified between Job Card or NRC and related JC/ NRCC Form. Production planer uses JC/ NRCC List (VAECO Form 6023) to control the issuance of JC/ NRCC Form. A separate NRC shall be raised if another defect, which is not related to the original defect, is detected. Another JC/ NRCC form shall be raised accordingly to record the related work. When a defect is raised, it shall be handed over to the authorized staff for vetting and evaluating the defect to specify the basic work requirements or process in the JC/ NRCC form. The authorized staff shall also indicate on the NRC Block Action taken that JC/ NRCC form raised and staple the JC/ NRCC form to the JC/ NRC for the trade in charge to initiate work process. During the course of defect rectification, the maintenance staff shall record all additional work process related to the defect (if any) in the JC/ NRCC form. The JC/ NRCC form shall be handed over to authorized staff for vetting, the authorized staff shall indicate that he has vetted the entries made by stamping his stamp, including name and date. When more than one trade is involved in closing the entries of the JC/ NRCC form, the authorized staff of the trade closing the last entry shall ensure that all the work required are competed and certified by appropriate authorized staff. The Production planner closing the NRC list shall ensure that all JC/ NRCC forms are stapled to the related NRC or related JC and tally with the numbers of NRCC form raised for that particular JC/NRC. In order to provide the better access or working environment, parts may be temporarily removed from the aircraft and performed maintenance on such parts in other location provided the parts shall be reinstalled back to the original location. Additionally, such maintenance activities must be under the existing airframe maintenance capability of VAECO and all requirements of the special maintenance data, equipment, or facilities are fulfilled. Page 6.3-6
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
6.3.4.8
Perform maintenance at a location other than the aircraft 1.
2.

3.
The removal and installation of the parts and necessary test, examination called out in the relevant maintenance data must be performed prior to or during the removal/installation and must also be recorded. Also, the identification and the protection of the removed parts shall be IAW paragraph 6.3.4.10 below. The maintenance activities mentioned in this item does not include those parts that need specific test process or test equipment, personnel training or certificate, unique facility, and those parts deem impracticable to be performed outside the workshop. For the work requiring to use measuring and testing tool/ equipment, authorized staff must record into relevant maintenance document the following contents: a. b. c. Reference maintenance data. Measuring value. Tool/equipments P/N and S/N.
4.
6.3.4.9
Other maintenance requirements 1.
2.
Using Defect identification tag (VAECO Form 0013) for better identifying location of defects discovered during base maintenance work. The Yellow tag is for Mechanic and Pink tag is for Authorized inspection personnel. For the work required to carry out in several locations, the Supervisor who is responsible to that work must give sufficiently, clearly instructions to maintenance staff at each location. The Supervisor is responsible to sign in job card, and assure that each work at each location has been carried out as required. All the parts when removed from the aircraft must be attached with Identification Tag (VAECO Form 0003) to identify the customer and A/C registration number, location and removal reason, except when parts are short time removed for ramp maintenance and shall be reinstalled immediately. In all cases, the protective blanking plates, plug or covers shall be installed to preclude contamination and all parts shall be segregated to prevent damaged. The Panel Removed tag (VAECO Form 0010) is issued for identifying the removal location of the panel during base maintenance. Individual parts determined unserviceable after inspection and /or test should be tagged with the applicable completed unserviceable tag in accordance with customers manual or the Unserviceable Tag (VAECO Form 0005). All materials determined to be damaged and/or obviously beyond economical repair are defined as condemned. When concurred by the customer, the condemned procedure 9.8 shall be followed. Page 6.3-7
3.
6.3.4.10
Parts handling 1.
2.
3. 4.
5.

6.3.4.11
On-wing maintenance IAW CMM When the defect rectification/ repair is to be carried out IAW CMM, related maintenance center need to perform the self evaluation as described in MOE Part 2, Chapter 6, item 6.4 to ensure that all conditions are met and send to QA department for approval before performance.
6.3.4.12
Job transfer to workshop 1. 2. If some jobs need transfer, the authorized staff issues Job card attaching sheet (VAECO Form 6007), which states clearly the job requirement. Before transferring the job to a workshop, Production planner must check the capability of related shop for work performed. If there is any doubt, production planner must confirm with QAD using TAR (VAECO Form 3015). The components with Identification tag (VAECO Form 0003) and Job card attaching sheet shall be sent to related workshop. After the transferred job has been performed, component authorized staff must sign in Job card attaching sheet and send it with component back to requesting department. Difficulties that cannot be resolved, authorized staff may consult to Technical service section for assistance. For the defects that not covered in the approved maintenance data (SRM, AMM), TAR (VAECO Form 3015) shall be sent to EGD. Details of Technical support can be found in procedure 8.5 During the course of an inspection, discrepancies noted by the authorized staff shall require re-inspection of these items prior to final inspection acceptance of the completed task. When there is a disagreement concerning any inspection, the override policy in Item 10.5.6 shall be applied. Deferral of defects rectification shall follow customer procedures. For base maintenance, all deferral defects shall be listed on List of acceptable deferred defects (VAECO Form 6012) with concurrence of the customer before the aircraft is returned to service. For ramp operation, the deferred items shall be clearly deferred IAW maintenance deferral document said by the customer and customers maintenance data such as MEL, CDL, AMM prior to release the aircraft to service.
3. 4.
6.3.4.13
Technical support 1. 2. 3.
6.3.4.14
Buy back inspection procedure 1.
2. 6.3.4.15
Deferral of defect rectification 1. 2.
3.
Page 6.3-8

6.3.4.16
Final inspection and return to service 1. The inspection authorized staff shall perform aircraft final inspection. The final inspection shall be performed in accordance with customers procedure and the procedure as described in item 10.5.7.3 of this SOP. The return to service activities shall be performed in accordance with customers procedure and the procedure as described in SOP 10.8. Authorized staff returns the A/C to service under his/ her privilege granted by QAD. In case the A/C is performed by base maintenance center it is then handed over to representative of customer or RMC (for VNA aircraft) the Aircraft Handover Sheet (VAECO Form 6011) or customer handover sheet (if any) shall be used to record overall status of the A/C. Upon receiving the A/C,, RMC staff should check the practical status of the A/C and confirm the information written in the Handover Sheet are adequate and correct. The production planner shall send to MCC List of acceptable deferred defects, List of acceptable deferred tasks, OPM maintenance requirement notices, new/ revised SRO and related documents by uploading on Aircraft Event of Technical Information menu on VAECO website (for VNA A/C).
2.
6.3.4.17
Handover the A/C after work pack completion 1.
2.
3.
6.3.5
ARCHIVES The Aircraft Handover Sheet (VAECO Form 6011) or customer handover sheet (if any) shall be archived at the respective TPD at least 1 month since completion date.
Page 6.3-9

PART 6 RAMP & BASE MAINT. PROC. 6.4 CONTINUITY OF MAINTENANCE (SHIFT/ TASK HAND-OVER)
6.4 6.4.1
CONTINUITY OF MAINTENANCE (SHIFT/TASK HAND-OVER) PURPOSE To establish procedure for shift /task handover process to ensure the continuity in maintenance activities.
6.4.2
RESPONSIBILITY Director of Maintenance centers are responsible for ensuring that the shift/task handover within the maintenance center is complied with this procedure.
6.4.3 6.4.3.1
PROCEDURE Transfer of Work Policy 1. At shift change, or if maintenance staff must leave a partially completed job or inspection, the following steps shall be taken to provide the relief maintenance staff with information about the remaining work. This may be accomplished by signing off the items that had been accomplished or through the use of a Shift/ task handover sheet. It is forbidden for the maintenance staff to sign-off the task prior to its accomplishment to avoid possible lost or duplication of the task performed. The Shift handover report is used to ensure a continuity of information regarding the maintenance process of aircraft, aircraft component and planning activities. It is the responsibility of the shift leader to complete this report prior leaving a job. If any maintenance work cannot be completed during the shift, the maintenance staff shall fill out Shift/ task handover sheet (VAECO Form 6004 for base maintenance; VAECO Form 5002 for ramp maintenance; VAECO Form 7040 for component maintenance), denoting the relevant information that might have a bearing on aircraft airworthiness, schedule or personnel safety that need to notify the incoming staff. The supervisor who handovers or takeovers the task shall review the handover sheet and the applicable job cards/ worksheets/ NRCs to ensure that the remaining phases of the work are thoroughly understood. It is the responsibility of the supervisor to instruct the maintenance staff involved in the continuation of the job so they understand all pertinent details and problems. A maintenance task normally includes several work steps/subtasks of which an individual takes or group of maintenance staff may share the responsibility for accomplishment. Unless an individual staff take the whole responsibility to complete the entire task within one shift where he shall only issue one signature for this task, each step/subtask shall be signed off on the related working copy of maintenance data (AMM, Page 6.4-1
2. 3.
6.4.3.2
Shift handover procedures 1.
2.
3.
4.
6.4.3.3
Partially completed work handover procedure 1.

PART 6 RAMP & BASE MAINT. PROC. 6.4 CONTINUITY OF MAINTENANCE (SHIFT/ TASK HAND-OVER)
Worksheet etc.) by the authorized maintenance staff who get direct involved to the accomplishment of such step/subtask. 2. Sign off for each maintenance work step/ subtask as soon as it is completed is highly recommended. Sign off the entire task shall be done immediately after the accomplishment of this task. Note: It is not necessary to sign off on sub-tasks that call out from the main-task if such sub-tasks call for a routine and repetitive work during base maintenance, such as: Energize/ de-energize the aircraft, open the passenger doors, cargo doors, LDG doors. Open/ close access panel, engine cowling, Operate hydraulic power, Air conditioning system, Air bleed system, Fuel pump, Lighting Access CFDS, Simple BITE. 3. Any time, maintenance staff leaves while the work is only partially completed, he shall return the maintenance document and related maintenance data to the maintenance supervisor for reassignment. At shift change, the supervisor completes Shift handover procedures as contained above. The incoming maintenance staff shall review the work previously completed before starting the job. All required functional, operational or leak checks must be completed and noted as such. The Shift handover report and Shift/ task handover sheet should be kept in binder for traceability and to prevent from missing. The handover binder must be made readily available to both shift out-going and incoming maintenance staff and located as follows: a. b. c. 2. 3. Each dock control room for base maintenance. RTPD office for ramp maintenance. Shop office for component maintenance.
4. 5. 6. 6.4.3.4
Shift/ task handover sheet control 1.
Every Shift/ task handover sheet for particular zone/trade and also for a particular work should be separated from another. The Shift/ task handover sheet shall be archived for one year since the article returned to service.
Page 6.4-2

PART 6 RAMP & BASE MAINT. PROC. 6.5 LANDING GEAR, FLIGHT CONTROL FUNCTIONAL TEST
6.5 6.5.1
LANDING GEAR, FLIGHT CONTROL FUNCTIONAL TEST PURPOSE To provide procedures for conduct of functional tests of landing gear and flight controls. The information given here is general in nature. For a particular aircraft landing gear and flight control system, the appropriate aircraft Maintenance Manual is to be referred
6.5.2
SCOPE/RESPONSIBILITY 1. 2. The aircraft landing gear and flight control functional test shall be supervised by assigned supervisor. There shall be no concurrent operation of both landing gears and flight control operation check. Jack up the aircraft in accordance with procedures lay out in the respective aircraft maintenance manual/ Handbook. Check up the aircraft documents to ensure all unsatisfactory conditions related to landing gear system are corrected and it is safe to carry out landing gear functional check Service the aircraft hydraulic system Landing gear area should be roped off or guarded to ensure no one approaches the landing gear during functional check Position a qualified person in the cockpit to operate the control and another to operate the hydraulic mill All staff should be instructed to keep off the aircraft except those involved in the operations concerning the functional check Connect a manufacturers recommended or suitable hydraulic test rig to aircraft hydraulic system Restore electrical power necessary for the landing gear functional check Communicate between the man in the cockpit and the person giving instruction on the ground
6.5.3
LANDING GEAR FUNCTIONAL TEST ON GROUND 1. 2.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
10. For rigging, remove only one landing gear down lock pin or lock at a time, leaving the other two gears locked with their respective gear pins/locks 11. For full landing gear functional check, remove all landing gear down lock pins. 12. Carry out functional test on the selected landing gear(s) in accordance with respective aircraft maintenance manual. It is recommended to perform the initial swing at low pressure unless otherwise stated in the AMM 13. Repeat steps 11 and 12 for the individual landing gear functional test 14. Hydraulic pressure shall be off during leak check in the wheel well Issue: 02, Revision: 00, Date: 01 FEB 2012 Page 6.5-1

PART 6 RAMP & BASE MAINT. PROC. 6.5 LANDING GEAR, FLIGHT CONTROL FUNCTIONAL TEST
15. On completion of the functional test, ensure the down lock pins/locks are installed. 16. Lower the aircraft, with all the necessary precautions 6.5.4 FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL TEST 1. Check the aircraft documents to ensure all unsatisfactory conditions related to flight control system are corrected and they are safe to be operated Remove the flight control locks, if installed Service the hydraulic system and connects a suitable test rig if the systems are power operated Ensure all working stands are removed and if required, a suitable stand is placed cleared off the control surface range of movement to facilitate checking on the range of movement. Place a qualified maintenance staff in the cockpit to operate the controls. Restore the electrical power to the aircraft Communication between the maintenance staff in the cockpit and the maintenance staff on the ground giving instruction Carry out functional check in accordance with respective AMM Install control surface lock previously removed on completion of the functional check
2. 3. 4.
5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Page 6.5-2

PART 6 RAMP & BASE MAINT. PROC. 6.6 RETURN OF AIRCRAFT PART/ MATERIAL TO STORE
6.6 6.6.1
RETURN OF AIRCRAFT PART/ MATERIALS TO STORE PURPOSE To ensure the aircraft parts/ materials returned to VAECO store in compliance with applicable regulation.
6.6.2
SCOPE This procedure is applied for returning of aircraft part/ materials from maintenance centers to VAECO store.
6.6.3
RESPONSIBILITY Maintenance center is responsible for returning component with attached required documents to VAECO store.
6.6.4 6.6.4.1
PROCEDURE Return of expendable part and materials 1. Expendable part/ materials that has not been used should be returned if the packing/ container is not unwrapped/ opened, the status is good, expiry date is not due. The Stock Requisition of the returned part/ materials must be stated the reason for return such as Preload redundancy, incorrect P/N then signed and stamp by the RTS staff who performed the respective task. The returned parts/ materials should be attached with their Stock Requisitions and the Serviceable tags/ Consumable release tags and send to the VAECO store right after the task completion. Expendable part that cannot reused and expired materials must be discard. The maintenance center shall discard such part/ materials as specified in 4.9. Repairable parts that has not been used should be returned if the packing/ container is not unwrapped/ opened, the status is good. The Stock Requisition of the returned part/ materials must be stated the reason for return such as Preload redundancy, incorrect P/N then signed and stamp by the RTS staff who performed the respective task. The returned parts should be attached with their Stock Requisitions and the Serviceable tags and send to the VAECO store right after the task completion. Whenever a part has been used on an aircraft or next high assembly, such parts can only be returned to stores with a Re-certified certificate. Procedure for issue the Re-certified certificate can be found in 10.10. repairable part from ramp and base
2.
3.
6.6.4.2
Return of serviceable part 1.
2.
3.
6.6.4.3
Return of unserviceable maintenance centers 1.
All aircraft part removed from aircraft must be attached immediately with VAECO unserviceable tag that is filled appropriate information by authorized staff. If information such as: part number, serial number, etc. Page 6.6-1

on the removed component are not eligible, the authorized staff must contact RTPD/BTPD for getting correct information from AMASIS. 2. 3. Unserviceable part must be thoroughly cleaned. End of duct and connector must be caped hermetically. Depending on aircraft type, aircraft information reporting system, part type, troubleshooting procedure for the part, authorized staff enters the detailed information on the defect as much as possible in the Unserviceable tag. The technical documents shall be attached with the part for a purpose of providing as sufficient as possible information for repair. The unserviceable part then is returned either directly or via RTPD to VAECO store with following documents: a. b. c. d. e. f. Unserviceable Tag; Copy of Tech. log pages for ramp maintenance; Copy of NRC for Base maintenance; Troubleshooting data, if any; Post flight reports or onboard maintenance messages, if available on aircraft; Bite test report, if available on aircraft. If any document mentioned in item c, d, or e above is not attached to unserviceable part, that should be explained clearly reason in block Reason For Removal in Unserviceable tag.
4.
6.6.4.4
Returning defective component from Component maintenance center 1. During performing component maintenance in workshop, if failure of a component is out of workshop capability the shop staff must re-assemble the component, bring it to storage condition and return the component to VAECO store with Unserviceable Tag (VAECO Form 0005/ right hand side), Finding/ Repair Report and test result (if any). For the defected part/ sub-assembly removed from a component, if it is in repairable type with P/N and S/N, the shop staff shall return it to VAECO store with Serviceable tag (VAECO Form 0005), Finding/ Repair Report and test result (if any). Serviceable part/ materials must be returned to VAECO store right after maintenance centers determine that no need for such part/ materials. During base maintenance, unserviceable part removed from aircraft must be returned to VAECO store during the day of removal. For ramp maintenance in HAN, DAD and HCM, unserviceable component must be returned to VAECO store as soon as possible, but not later than 03 hours.
2.
6.6.4.5
Other requirements 1. 2. 3.
Page 6.6-2

4.
For outstation, maintenance staff sends unserviceable component to RTPD (HAN or HCM) in the earliest applicable flight. RTPD shall return to VAECO store as soon as possible, but not later than 03 hours. Part sent to ATEC shop for maintenance should be return to VAECO store within 24 hours from received time; Part sent to other shops but not repairable due to out of shops capability should be returned to VAECO store within 02 hours. If unserviceable part is not returned to store within specific time base on principle of delivery, Logistics Department should make part list to send to maintenance center for return. Status of the unserviceable part in the AMASIS should be updated by RTPD staff of respective maintenance center to reflect the practical status (removed from A/C and unserviceable) immediately and within 24 hours since the component is returned to store.
5. 6. 7.
8.
Page 6.6-3

PART 7 COMPONENT MAINT. PROC.
PART 7
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
Page 7-1

PART 7 COMPONENT MAINT. PROC. 7.1 WORKSHOP WORK REQUEST ISSUANCE AND MANAGEMENT
7.1 7.1.1 7.1.2
WORKSHOP WORK REQUEST ISSUANCE AND MANAGEMENT PURPOSE To give instruction to issue work requests IAW applicable requirements. SCOPE This procedure is applied to issue and manage work request performed in the workshops.
7.1.3
RESPONSIBILITY 1. Logistics Director has responsibility for dealing with VAECO component maintenance need, the customers request, repair invoice, maintenance/ modification contract; The manager of related RTPD/ BTPD has responsibility for receiving the acceptance from the customer before sending request to the pertinent shop to perform. The manager of CTPD has responsibility for issuing work request to perform component maintenance as requested by LGD, BMC and RMC for work performed in the CMC workshops. The manager of BTPD has responsibility for issuing work request to perform component maintenance as requested by LGD, other BMC and RMC for work performed in the BMC workshops.
2.
3.
4.
7.1.4 7.1.4.1
PROCEDURE RECEIVING THE MAINTENANCE REQUEST 1. Logistic Department receives unserviceable repairable components from the customer, bases on the customers request/ contract and the VAECO approved maintenance capability specified in capability list manuals to issue the Maintenance/ Repair Request (VAECO Form 4002) to pertinent CMC/ BMC for performance. The maintenance request may be transferred to the CTPD from BTPD or RTPD in the JCAS (VAECO Form 6007) if the work arises during base maintenance or ramp maintenance. The maintenance request may be transferred to the Base TPD from other BTPD or RTPD in the JCAS (VAECO Form 6007) if the work arises during base maintenance or ramp maintenance. Upon receiving the maintenance request, the respective TPD shall confirm that the work is within his approved work scope otherwise the request shall be returned. The qualified planner of the respective TPD shall issue work request (VAECO Form 7014). Work request is based on requirements of Maintenance/ Repair Request, JCAS. If one workshop WR applied to more than one component, a Serial Number List (VAECO Form 7050) will be raised if necessary. Page 7.1-1
2.
3.
4.
7.1.4.2
WORK REQUEST ISSUANCE 1.

PART 7 COMPONENT MAINT. PROC. 7.1 WORKSHOP WORK REQUEST ISSUANCE AND MANAGEMENT
2.
The shop work request is created in VAECO Form 7014 including, but not limited to, the following information: a. b. c. d. e. The unique number of the WR specified and controlled by relevant maintenance center; Work request reference number; The Follow-up sheet number should be specified if the part is monitored in the AMASIS; Worksheet reference number; The regulation should be followed and form used to release the component to service (CAAV Form 1, FAA Form 8130-3, CAAV Form 523); The work details and the dead line.
f. 3. 7.1.4.3
The WR should be approved by the manager or delegated person before sending to the workshop for performance. When the WR is completed and returned, the staff of respective TPD shall review the completion of the related documentation to ensure the WR is completed as required. The staff of TPD should monitor the issued WR. If the WR is not performed in time due to any reason, it should be reported to the TPD Manager for further action.
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE WORK REQUEST CONTROL 1.
2.
7.1.5
ARCHIVES The WR shall be archived at the respective TPD at least 2 years since completion date.
Page 7.1-2

PART 7 COMPONENT MAINT. PROC. 7.2 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE WORKSHEET ISSUANCE
7.2 7.2.1 7.2.2
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE WORKSHEET ISSUANCE PURPOSE To ensure worksheets are issued IAW applicable requirements. SCOPE This procedure is applied to issue and manage worksheet performed in the workshops.
7.2.3
RESPONSIBILITY The Technical-Planning Division (TPD) of respective maintenance center (BMC, CMC) has responsibility for issuing worksheet IAW manufacturer component maintenance manual and applicable maintenance data.
7.2.4 7.2.4.1
PROCEDURE Worksheet creation 1. 2. Workshop engineering staff of respective TPD uses VAECO Form 7032 to compose a new component maintenance worksheet. The major work shall be defined in order to satisfy the requirements of repair request or production request. The work is defined basing on work requirement, maintenance history of component (if any), in-process inspection requirement, CMM, SB, AD, and other approved document such as manufacturer instruction. The component maintenance Worksheet (VAECO Form 7032) should be prepared IAW requirements specified in para. 8.2.4(2). The following information, but not limited to those, should be specified in the worksheet: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. 4. Work request reference number; Worksheet control number; Worksheet number; Component information (Nomenclature, P/N and S/N); CMMs reference (Number, Revision No/ Date); Tool/ equipment and materials/ spare needed to perform the work. Work step.
3.
For the repetitive jobs the pertinent worksheet could be reused. These worksheets are controlled by worksheet control number and called standard worksheets. TPD shall create a list of all standard worksheets (VAECO Form 7053) specifying, but not limited to, name of shop, worksheet control number, worksheet revision number and date, applied Part Number.
7.2.4.2
Worksheet approval and issuance 1.
Page 7.2-1

PART 7 COMPONENT MAINT. PROC. 7.2 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE WORKSHEET ISSUANCE
2.
Standard worksheets and list of worksheet shall be reviewed and approved by TPD Manager before sending to the pertinent workshops/ uploading on VAECO website for use by the maintenance staff. TPD Manager approves the standard worksheet by his signature on concerned Approved Worksheet List (VAECO Form 7053). The maintenance staff shall be only used the current and approved worksheets (hardcopy or electronic file). All standard worksheets and Approved Worksheet List are controlled by TPD. Upon receiving the updated maintenance data, workshop engineering staff shall review the concerned worksheet. If there is a change in the derived maintenance data (CMM, AMM, AD, SB...) the standard worksheet should be updated and specified by new revision number and date. All out-of-date worksheets shall be removed from the VAECO website and the Approved Worksheet List shall be revised. The standard worksheet shall be also revised for more convenience or correcting the ambiguity information. Any discrepancies in the worksheets (such as out-of-date status) found by maintenance staff or any person shall be reported to the TPD for correction. The newly modified worksheets shall be approved and updated to concerned workshop and on VAECO website IAW 7.2.4.2.
3. 4. 7.2.4.3
Worksheet control 1. 2.
3.
4.
5. 7.2.5
ARCHIVES Worksheets and Approved Worksheet List are retained at the respective TPD for at least 2 years since the approval date.
Page 7.2-2

PART 7 COMPONENT MAINT. PROC. 7.3 COMPONENT RECEIVING AND PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
7.3 7.3.1
COMPONENT RECEIVING AND PRELIMINARY INSPECTION PURPOSE To ensure the preliminary inspection is pertinently performed IAW applicable requirements.
7.3.2
SCOPE This procedure is applied for receiving and preliminary inspection of all articles taking a shop visit.
7.3.3
RESPONSIBILITIES The Workshop manager is responsible for ensuring preliminary inspection has been conducted by component return-to-service staff (RTS staff) prior to beginning any maintenance task.
7.3.4 7.3.4.1
PROCEDURES Component receiving 1. 2. The maintenance staff receives the component at the receiving area of the shop. The component RTS staff shall ensure P/N, S/N and the visual status of the component are in conformity with the information in the Unserviceable tag/ Identification tag and accompanied documents. If Work Request (WR) is not available or the preliminary inspection is not immediately performed the component shall be placed at Waiting for WR/ preliminary inspection area. The shops supervisor or RTS staff shall inform the respective Technical-Planning Division (TPD) to issue WR if it has not been issued. Preliminary inspection is performed by component RTS staff prior to beginning the maintenance task at the shop dedicated area. Preliminary inspection is conducted to assess the current status and condition of the component which are undergoing maintenance, preventive maintenance, or alteration by the workshop, and also to determine the requested work within the workshops approved work scope. Any suspected unapproved parts found during preliminary inspection shall be reported to the Quality Assurance Department in accordance with the procedure 10.13. Preliminary inspection of aircraft component may include but is not limited to the followings: a. Review of all accompanying documentation and Unserviceable Tag (VAECO Form 0005) or Identification Tag (VAECO Form 0003) to verify the part number, serial number, reason for removal, date of removal, time in service and any other pertinent information of the article. Page 7.3-1
3.
7.3.4.2
Preliminary inspection 1. 2.
3.
4.

PART 7 COMPONENT MAINT. PROC. 7.3 COMPONENT RECEIVING AND PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
b.
External visual inspection for physical condition to determine any damage which may have been caused by transportation, packaging or improper storage condition. Partial or complete disassembly of the component may be required to accomplish this inspection. Perform any inspection specified in the component maintenance manual (CMM).
c. d. 5. 6.
The Hidden damage inspection is performed IAW procedure 10.6 of this SOP if the component has been involved an incident/ accident. Discrepancies found during preliminary inspections shall be recorded in Component maintenance worksheet (VAECO Form 7032). Any discrepancies shall be also recorded in Finding/ Repair Report (VAECO Form 7033). If the required corrective actions are out of the work specified on the given Work request, The component RTS staff shall send the Finding/ Repair Report to the respective TPD and follow the TPD's direction. The Workshop manager will be also informed. Respective TPD shall evaluate the findings and inform to the repair requester. When the requested work changing is accepted by repair requester, the TPD shall update the current WR or issue new WR and WS and send to the workshop to perform. If the requested work changing is not accepted the WR shall be recalled and the component attached with Unserviceable Tag (VAECO Form 0005) and Finding/ Repair Report will be returned to repair requester. All additional work shall be recorded on the Aircraft Component Maintenance Worksheet (VAECO Form 7032). If the defect of the component is out of workshops approved work scope but may be repairable, the article is returned to the repair requester with Unserviceable Tag (VAECO Form 0005/ right hand side) and Finding/ Repair Report.
7.
8. 9.
10. If the defect of the component is un-repairable or beyond of economic repair, the article is returned to the repair requester with Unserviceable Tag (VAECO Form 0005) and Finding/ Repair Report. 11. The information of a component visiting the workshop such as P/N, S/N, received date are recorded in Shop component receive/ release record (VAECO Form 7054). 12. The Shop Identification Tag (VAECO Form 0020) should be raised and attached with the component. If the component is waited to perform the next step it should be placed on racks labeled Waiting for maintenance. 13. Before maintaining the component, the Unserviceable Tag (VAECO Form 0005) or Identification Tag (VAECO Form 0003) and/ or other documentations are removed and kept in area/ cabinet specified by the shop.
Page 7.3-2

PART 7 COMPONENT MAINT. PROC. 7.4 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE
7.4 7.4.1
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE PURPOSE To ensure the maintenance is pertinently performed IAW applicable requirements.
7.4.2 7.4.3
SCOPE This procedure is applied for maintaining a component in a work shop. RESPONSIBILITIES The Workshop manager are responsible for ensuring the maintenance has been conducted IAW approved maintenance data and in-process inspection is conducted by component RTS staff.
7.4.4
PROCEDURES 1. 2. 3. The maintenance staff must follow main steps in the worksheet and details in applicable CMM and other applicable maintenance data. The maintenance staff must follow the tool/ equipment instruction manual when using tool and equipment to maintain the component. All parts removed from the component/ NHA must be tagged with an Identification Tag. For the small details such as nuts, bolts It is allowed to group several items and put them into a nylon bag or put on a tray/ basket and using one Identification Tag for those belonging one component/ NHA. All necessary information must be fulfilled in Identification tag (VAECO Form 0020) including following information ("N/A" entry if not applied): a. b. c. d. Shop-in date, Customer name; Description, part number, serial number of the Next Higher Assembly (ASSY); Description, part number, serial number, position of the component/ parts; Remark must be given for any delay reasons or caution. Status of concerned work such as cleaned/ inspected or repaired should be specified by mark on appropriate box. Other necessary information of the work status or warnings may be written in the backside of the Tag.
4.
5.
All the parts removed from the component should be protected from dust and/or damage and placed in area or on racks labeled Processing when they are not maintained immediately. The cleaning work must be performed in accordance with the CMM. Wet cleaning must be performed in defined area. The Identification Tag could be removed for soaked cleaning as long as it can be identified after cleaning and the Tag must be attached again just after cleaning work completed.
6.
Page 7.4-1

7.
The maintenance staff must confirm that the specification/ type of chemical for cleaning/ lubricating meet the requirements of those specified in the maintenance data or accepted by the component manufacturer. The check, test, repair must be performed in accordance with the CMM and/or other document accepted by the manufacturer. The test result must be recorded in the worksheet or print out/ written in a separated form and attached to the worksheet with mutual crossreferences. a. All defects shall be recorded in Finding/ Repair Report (VAECO Form 7033) and the Worksheet (VAECO Form 7032). All the defected parts must be repaired or replaced by serviceable parts IAW the CMM or other document accepted by the manufacturer. If the required corrective actions are out of the work specified on the given WR, the component RTS staff shall send the Finding/ Repair Report to the TPD and follow the TPD's direction. The Workshop manager will be also informed. The TPD staff shall contact the repair requester for acceptance or giving instruction. If the defect of the component is un-repairable or considered as beyond of economic repair or out of workshops approved work scope but may be repairable, the article is returned to the repair requester with Unserviceable Tag (VAECO Form 0005/ right hand side), Finding/ Repair Report and concerned documentation (JCAS, Work Transit sheet, WR, test result (if any)).
8. 9.
10. During maintenance, if a defect found, it is handled as follows:
b.
c.
11. If the need of the technical support raised the shop supervisor/ RTS staff records the problem in Technical Assistance Request (VAECO Form 3015) and send to respective TPD for technical support. 12. All the additional work must be recorded in the Worksheet (VAECO Form 7032). 13. If spare part is required but it is not available in the main store, component maintenance staff may rob parts from spare NHA and related information must be recorded to component maintenance worksheet for reference IAW SOP 9.4. 14. If the work is stopped/ delayed due to any reason the date, time and situation should be specified in the Identification tag. 15. Job transfer a. When the work needed to perform at other shop (of its maintenance center or other maintenance center), the RTS staff shall issue a Work transit sheet (VAECO Form 7031). The Work transit sheet shall clearly specify: P/N, S/N of the transferring component and NHA The work to be accomplished Issue: 02, Revision: 00, Date: 01 FEB 2012 Page 7.4-2

The supporting shop to perform the work The number of original request (WR) Date of issuance The issuer name and signature, stamp b. Before job transfer, the component RTS staff shall confirm the capability of related shop to perform the work. If there is any problem in determining the capability, the component RTS staff shall fill in VAECO Form 3015 and send to QAD for clarification. VAECO Form 0020 is used to record the first step of transfer work. After transit task accomplished, the reference number of transit form shall also be recorded on the work sheet for traceability. If the transfer job is NDT requirement, the NDT shop may use the NDT report (VAECO Form 7042) to record the NDT result. The NDT report shall be attached with and referred from the Work Transit Sheet/ JCAS. If the transfer job is borescope inspection requirement, the Engine/APU borescope report (VAECO Form 7043) shall be used to record the borescope result. This report shall be attached with and referred from the Work Transit Sheet/ JCAS.
c.
d.
e.
16. For the hardware/ materials/ defected details removed from a component, if they are not in repairable type or they are consumable materials, the shop staff shall handle as waste IAW SOP 4.9. Other waste arises during maintenance must be handled IAW SOP 4.9. 17. Before reassembly of the component, the in-process inspection shall be performed if specified in the worksheet. The reassembly of the component is performed IAW the CMM. 18. The Inspection Tag (VAECO Form 0014) shall be raised and tagged on the safety equipment for the performed work that affect the maintenance limitation of the equipment (E.g.: Restoration of the life vest, weighing of the fire extinguisher). The expiry date is determined IAW CMM. If the component is property of VNA, the component RTS staff must refer to List of Aircraft Component Required Maintenance (VAECO Form 1001) for the required maintenance intervals IAW AMS and chose the stricter limitations to specify in the Inspection Tags. 19. Each performed task/ step must be signed just after completion by the performer and component RTS staff. 20. If a MTE is used, its P/N and S/N should be recorded in the work sheet. 21. Before leaving the shift, the leader of the shift should enter all necessary information in handover sheet IAW procedure 6.4. 22. All repair or replacement to rectify all defects must be recorded in Finding/ Repair Report.
Page 7.4-3

23. The completion of the component requirements specified in 5.6.4.1.
documentation
shall
meet
24. The final inspection and return the component to service is performed IAW procedure 7.5.
Page 7.4-4

PART 7 COMPONENT MAINT. PROC. 7.5 COMPONENT FINAL INSPECTION AND RETURN TO SERVICE
7.5 7.5.1
COMPONENT FINAL INSPECTION AND RETURN TO SERVICE PURPOSE To ensure the component are inspected and returned to service IAW applicable requirements.
7.5.2
SCOPE This procedure is applied for final inspecting a component after shop visit and returning it to service.
7.5.3
RESPONSIBILITIES 1. 2. The Workshop manager are responsible for ensuring the final inspection and return to service are conducted by RTS staff. The component RTS staff is responsible to inspect and approve the component return to service IAW approved maintenance data.
7.5.4 7.5.4.1
PROCEDURES Final inspection 1. The component RTS staff shall do final inspection of the entire component for airworthiness with respect to the maintenance, preventive maintenance, or alterations performed. Final inspection will include the review of the WR, Worksheet, Finding/ Repair Report, all other related documentation and ensure that: a. b. The CMM and other applicable maintenance data approved by authorities are used for maintenance. All required maintenance and inspections, including Required Inspection Items (RII) if required by the Customer have been performed completely and comply with the CMM and other applicable maintenance data. The standards, techniques, methods, tools and equipment used for performing the maintenance and the inspections are in compliance with the CMM and other applicable maintenance data. The results of inspections meet the requirements specified in the CMM and other applicable maintenance data. Parts and materials used for maintenance are eligible for used on the component and in compliance with the CMM and other applicable maintenance data. All maintenance records are properly completed: All test result are recorded or printed, all repair work/ replacement and other additional work are recorded in pertinent forms, all required signature blocks are signed. Corrective actions required for the discrepancies found in preliminary inspection and during maintenance are properly taken. The hard time and life limit of replacing components must be in allowable limits (if applicable). Page 7.5-1
2.
c.
d. e.
f.
g. h.

3.
If the part is monitored in the AMASIS, the RTS staff shall close the Follow-up sheet and update the necessary information such as the completion date, Man-hours, spare parts/ materials used in AMASIS.
7.5.4.2
Issuing certificate for returning to service after maintenance and major repairs 1. For the component sent to the shop from RMC, BMC the RTS staff will signed, stamped on JCAS (VAECO Form 6007) to certify that the work are completed as required. For the component sent to the shop from other shop the RTS/ inspection/ sign-off staff will signed, stamped on Work transit sheet (VAECO Form 7031) to certify that the work are completed as required. For the component sent to the shop from LGD the RTS staff will use the form specified in the Work request to certify components for return to service after maintenance and major repairs. FAA Form 337/ CAAV Form 523 may be used to record major repairs if requested by customer. The issuing certificate for returning to service after major repairs using FAA Form 337/ CAAV Form 523 the same as the case of major alteration as specified in 7.5.4.3. The information in the Airworthiness Approval Tag (FAA Form 8130-3 or CAAV Form 1) must be specified, including: a. b. c. d. e. f. 6. Approving National Aviation Authority/Country; Organization Name and Address; Form Tracking Number; Customer WO or WO number; Description, P/N, Eligibility, Quantity, Serial/ Batch Number, Status/ Work; A brief description of the work performed with reference to FAA approved data, shelf life/ inspection/ overhaul/ life limit information; The compliance with Airworthiness Directives and/or Service Bulletins, if required.
2.
3.
4.
5.
For a batch with more than two components, the Serial Number List (VAECO Form 7050) may be used to record all serial numbers in the batch with mutual reference to the Airworthiness Approval Tag. The RTS staff shall determine the statement, write his name, stamp/ write his authorized number and sign on the appropriate blocks of the FAA Form 8130-3 or CAAV Form 1. For returning a component to service after major alterations will require the use of FAA Form 337 or CAAV Form 523 Major Repair and Alteration in duplicate. The information in the Major Repair and Alteration must be specified, including:
7.
7.5.4.3
Issuing certificate for returning to service after major alterations 1.
2.
Page 7.5-2

a. b. c. d. e. f. 3. 4.
Type of work; Unit identification; Conformity Statement; Approval for Return to Service; Description of work accomplished. Aircraft Nationality and Registration Mark/ Make; A/C Serial No., Model/ Series; Owner Name and Address will be left blank.
The original and duplicate copy of the form will accompany with the component and return to the repair requester. The RTS staff shall determine the statement, write his name, stamp/ write his authorized number and sign on the appropriate blocks of the FAA Form 337 or CAAV Form 523.
Note: The person who installs the part on aircraft will enter Aircraft Nationality and Registration Mark/ Make; A/C Serial No., Model/ Series; Owner Name and Address information in blocks 1 and 2, give the original of the form to the aircraft owner/ operator, and forward the duplicate copy to the local FAA district office (FAA Form 337) or CAAV (CAAV Form 523) within 48 hours after the work is inspected; 7.5.4.4 Transfer the component to the repair requester 1. Before transferring the component to the repair requester, it may be placed at "Waiting for delivery" area/ rack with suitable tags and documentations. For the component sent to the shop from LGD, the serviceable component is packed using the cover/ box coming with the component and sent to the main store with the Airworthiness Approval Tag and accompanied documentation. For the component sent to the shop from BMC or RMC, it is packed as receiving status, the component is sent to the repair requester with the JCAS and FAA Form 337 or CAAV Form 523 (if any) and other related documentation (such as test result report, repair report). For the component sent to the shop from other shop, it is packed as receiving status, the component is sent to the requester with the Work transit sheet and other related documentation (such as test result report, repair report).
2.
3.
4.
7.5.5
ARCHIVES The documentation of component maintenance, major repairs or alterations will be handled and archived as procedure 7.6.
Page 7.5-3

PART 7 COMPONENT MAINT. PROC. 7.6 COMPONENT DOCUMENTATION HANDLING
7.6 7.6.1
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE RECORD HANDLING PURPOSE To ensure the component maintenance records are handled and archived IAW applicable requirements.
7.6.2
SCOPE This procedure is applied for handling maintenance records of component undergone shop visit.
7.6.3
RESPONSIBILITIES 1. The shop supervisor/ RTS staff are responsible for gathering and transferring all component maintenance record to Technical - Planning division (TPD). TPD staff is responsible for reviewing, arranging and archiving all component maintenance record.
2. 7.6.4 7.6.4.1
PROCEDURE Component maintenance record sending 1. The component transferred to the shop from another shop with Work Transit sheet will be returned with: a. b. c. 2. Original Work Transit sheet (VAECO Form 7031); Original Finding/ Repair Report (VAECO Form 7033) (if any); Test result sheets (if any);
The component transferred to the shop from BMC or RMC with VAECO Form 6007 will be returned with: a. b. c. Original Job card Attaching Sheet (VAECO Form 6007); Original Finding/ Repair Report (VAECO Form 7033) with referred test result sheets (if any); Original FAA Form 337/ CAAV Form 523 (if any);
3.
The component transferred to the shop from main store will be returned with: a. b. c. Original applicable Airworthiness Approval Tag (CAAV Form 1, FAA Form 8130-3) Original Finding/ Repair Report (VAECO Form 7033) with referred test result sheets (if any); Original FAA Form 337/ CAAV Form 523 (if any).
7.6.4.2
Maintenance record review and acceptance at respective TPD 1. The following component maintenance record shall be sent to the respective TPD just after job completion and within one (1) working day since the date of job completion: a. Maintenance/ Repair Request (VAECO Form 4002); Page 7.6-1

b. c. d. e. f. g.
Original Work request; Original Maintenance Worksheet; Original Work Transit sheet (if any); Copy of Job card Attaching Sheet (if any); Copy of Finding/ Repair Report (if any); Original Serviceable Tag of part installed or materials used in maintenance, repair (if any); The copy of Serviceable Tag is accepted in case the original Serviceable Tag keeping in the shop for remaining items. Copy of applicable Airworthiness Approval Tag of the maintained component; Test result sheets or related maintenance record (if any);
h. i. 2.
Respective TPD staff shall check the maintenance record IAW WR and to ensure that all necessary information of performed work is entered in AMASIS. For the H/T or LLP the TPD staff shall adjust the respective performing date to be entered AMASIS in order to ensure that the next due date is the same as actual due date specified in the Airworthiness Certificate or due date based on AMS/ CMS whichever is sooner. Respective TPD staff shall scan all component maintenance records within 5 working days since receiving date of maintenance record. All maintenance records relating to one work request are stored as an electronic file (completed work pack) at least 2 years since the completion date or until next equivalent work performed whichever is longer.. The hard copies of the component maintenance records are also arranged and archived in folders for at least 2 years from the completion date or until next equivalent work performed whichever is longer. The access to archived component maintenance records is only permitted to authorized personnel. The archiving room shall be protected from weather element and insect.
7.6.4.3
Scanning and archiving at respective TPD 1.
2.
3. 4. 7.6.4.4
Component maintenance record re-creation The re-creation of component maintenance record is performed IAW para. 5.7.4.5.
7.6.4.5
Component logbook update and archiving 1. Log books of VNA battery installed in Airbus and Fokker A/C are kept at HAN Battery shop. Log books of battery installed in Boeing and ATR A/C are kept at HCM Battery shop. Respective RTS staff shall update maintenance/ repair information into battery log book. In the case of missing battery log book, the RTS staff reports to TPD manager to buy or create a new one. Page 7.6-2
2.

3.
For the battery of Airbus and Fokker A/C that is maintained at HCM CMC, the RTS staff of the HCM Battery shop shall send the Battery log sheet (in hard copy or electronic file) to HAN CMC within five (5) working days to update the log book. For the battery of Boeing and ATR A/C that is maintained at HAN CMC, the staff of the HCM Battery shop shall send the necessary Battery log sheet (in hard copy or electronic file) to HCM Battery shop within five (5) working days to update the log book.
4.
Page 7.6-3

PART 7 COMPONENT MAINT. PROC. 7.7 WORKSHOP SPARE PART AND MATERIAL CONTROL
7.7 7.7.1
WORKSHOP SPARE PART & MATERIALS CONTROL PURPOSE To ensure all workshop spare parts/ materials is preserved IAW the manufacturer requirement.
7.7.2
SCOPE This procedure is applied for controlling all spare parts/ materials stored at the workshops.
7.7.3
RESPONSIBILITIES Workshop manager are responsible for ensuring that spare parts/ materials is preserved IAW the manufacturer requirement.
7.7.4
PROCEDURE 1. The workshop spare parts and materials shall be stored in a specified area. The shop supervisor shall regularly check the condition of the store area to ensure the storage condition is IAW the manufacturer's requirement. During maintaining, all spares/ materials needed, the RTS staff of concerned workshop will create a Requisition Form (RF) on AMASIS and print out as Stock Requisition (VAECO Form 4024). The Stock Requisition should be signed by the Director or delegated person and send to the LGD: a. b. Based on the availability of spares/ materials in stock, staff of LGD will only issue the Purchase Order (PO) for the not/ nil stock items. When all spares/ materials (suitable types and quantities) are available as required, the LGD staff make an Issue Slip (IS) to perform the respective WO. The RTS staff monitor the RF. If the IS is available for the RF the maintenance staff will get spares/ materials from the store to perform related WO.
2.
c.
3.
Spare parts and materials in the workshop shall be always accompanied with Serviceable tag (VAECO Form 0005) or Consumable release tag (VAECO Form 0008) and placed on suitable racks/ cabinet with appropriate label. Chemical materials shall be separated from other parts/ materials. The shop manager or assigned person must monitor the storage condition and shelf life of the spares/ materials remained in the shop such as adhesive, sealant or other chemical materials. The spares/ materials with expired shelf life shall be discarded as specified in 4.9 or returned to LGD as requested by LGD. The shop manager or assigned staff must update List of spares/ materials being stored at the shop (VAECO Form 7018) whenever the information is changed and re-issue the list every quarter (at least).
4.
5.
Page 7.7-1

PART 8 MAINT. SUPPORT PROC.
PART 8
MAINTENANCE SUPPORT PROCEDURES
Page 8-1

PART 8 MAINT. SUPPORT PROC. 8.1 MAINTENANCE DATA CONTROL
8.1 8.1.1
MAINTENANCE DATA CONTROL PURPOSE To ensure all maintenance data are currently and sufficiently controlled to perform maintenance, including modifications and repairs.
8.1.2 8.1.3
SCOPE This procedure is applied for controlling the maintenance data. RESPONSIBILITIES 1. The manager of Technical Library (TL) is responsible for ensuring all document and maintenance data are current and available and distributing to maintenance centers/ departments and uploading on the VAECO network. The Manager of TPD of maintenance centers are responsible for keeping and updating all maintenance data sent from the TL and making this data available to the maintenance staff. The Information Technology (IT) Team Leader is responsible for ensuring all electronics maintenance data controlled on the Local Area Network (LAN)/ VAECO Website are secured.
2.
3.
8.1.4 8.1.4.1
PROCEDURES Document control in the VAECO Technical Library 1. Maintenance data are documents which contain instructions for performing maintenance for aircraft, engine and component. Maintenance data shall be any of the following: a. Any applicable requirement, procedure, operational directive or information issued by the authority responsible for the oversight of the aircraft or component; Any applicable airworthiness directive issued by the authority responsible for the oversight of the aircraft or component. Instructions for continuing airworthiness, issued by type certificate holders, supplementary type certificate holders, any other organization required to publish such data by Part-21 and in the case of aircraft or components from third countries the airworthiness data mandated by the authority responsible for the oversight of the aircraft or component. Any applicable standard, such as but not limited to, maintenance standard practices recognized by the applicable as a good standard for maintenance. Maintenance data that is modified IAW procedure 8.3.
b. c.
d.
e. 2.
The library staff shall enter the following information in Document Management Software within 02 working days from the receiving date: a. b. Name of document; Effectivity, Issuer, Format, ATA; Issue/ revision number, revision date; Page 8.1-1

c. d. e. 3.
P/N of the equipment (if any); Location of document in library; Customer name (if any).
Documents shall be arranged and placed on identified and easy-toaccess cabinets basing on: a. b. c. Form of document (Paper, CD/ DVD, Microfilm); Issuer (Manufacturer, Operator, Authority, etc...); Type of aircraft, equipment;
4. 8.1.4.2
Library rooms should be designed to prevent from insect, fire and weather effect such as humidity, rain... Department/ Center Directors base on necessity of work send a request to Engineering Director for supplying document. It is necessary to specify the name, quantity, supplier or issuer and the reason in the request. When the document request is approved by the Engineering Director, Technical Library shall look for required document in the document management software. If the required document is not available at the library, the library staff shall contact the issuer to make order. Technical Librarian shall make the copies of the document based on the request and stamp CONTROLLED on the cover page before delivering. The required documents are distributed to users as follows: a. For users within Hanoi and Hochiminh city facilities, documents are distributed to users directly from Hanoi library and Hochiminh city branch library respectively. DAD Ramp maintenance center receive documents from Hanoi library then distribute to users. The RTPD of the maintenance center that manages the outstation shall distribute all necessary documents to the outstations. Documents distributed to Hochiminh city branch library and DAD Ramp maintenance center shall be sent through post office. Library staff is responsible to contact users for acknowledge of receipt/ update.
Document request, distribution and update 1.
2.
3. 4.
b. c. d.
5.
For the technical data keeping onboard the VNA A/C, RTPD receives the documents from Technical Library and updates them to the A/C. The Onboard Technical Data List (VAECO Form 3026) should be kept in the A/C Technical Log Book to reflect the current status of the documents. Updating newly revised document a. b. Updating new revision shall be carried out within 07 days from receiving date. Document may be updated by mean of: Page 8.1-2
6.

Replacing old pages by new revision pages upon the list of effective pages or equivalent instruction pages; Replacing CD/ DVD by new revision; Installing new revision of the document in LAN/ website server. 7. Updating temporary revisions (TR) a. b. c. Upon receiving TRs, Library staff uses Document Control Software to find out the quantity of TR copies to be prepared. All TRs must be updated no later than 07 days from the receiving date. Updating TR Electronic TR is printed on yellow paper. Paper TRs is copied on yellow paper or scanned to file. For paper document, updating is performed by inserting TR to the document as instructed by the TR itself. For document installed on LAN/ website server, updating is performed by copying TR file to document folder. For documents on CD/ DVD, a TR CD is sent to user to place together with the related documents. d. 8. After updating, all out-of-date TR files are removed from its folder on the servers.
Out-of-date CDs and document pages removed after updating must be stamped OBSOLETE and stored at isolating location in the library for at least two (2) years. Library staff shall establish/ update the Document Master List (VAECO Form 3014) for each Department/ Maintenance Center. Maintenance data in the electronics format are stored on the Web Server of VAECO which is located in the head office at Noi Bai (Electronics Library). Only authorized users who have accounts issued and controlled by IT Team can be able to access the Electronics Library stored on the Web Server. All Website accounts are secured by passwords. Passwords can be changed by users themselves with at least 6 digits or characters. Only authorized users who are technical library staff can be able to upload update electronics maintenance data to the server. Authorized user list must be controlled by IT Team. The library staff updates and controls the document on the server by the same rules as 8.1.4.2. The old versions of documents installed on LAN/ website server must be removed completely before updating. All Website accounts are secured by passwords. Passwords can be changed by users themselves with at least 6 digits or characters. Page 8.1-3
9. 8.1.4.3
Electronics Library 1.
2.
3. 4. 5.
6.

PART 8 MAINT. SUPPORT PROC. 8.2 TRANSCRIPTION OF MAINTENANCE DATA
7. 8. 9.
Authorized user list must be controlled by IT Team. IT Team must have Server Log Book to follow up all maintenance performances of Server. Department/Center Directors on necessity of work send a request to Engineering Director for issuing user account. It is necessary to specify the full name, division, and working group in the request.
10. When the request is approved by the Engineering Director, IT Team shall create user account within 24 hours since the time of receipt. 11. The Electronics Library on Web Server is automatically backed up daily from VAECO Main Server at Noi Bai to backup Server at Hochiminh city. 8.1.4.4 Controlling the document validity 1. User must verify amendment status of documents before using it by checking the updated status in accordance with the Document Master List. If a discrepancy found the user must report to the Library. The librarian must co-ordinate with user to fix the problem as soon as possible. Quarterly, Technical Library shall check the current status of all documents using in VAECO. The Maintenance Centers may issue/ print-out documents to use in its divisions/ workshops such as AMM tasks, modified maintenance data, instruction to use/ operate and maintain tools/ equipment... The printed maintenance data shall be controlled by the TPD of respective Maintenance Centers and they shall be stamped on the cover page to identify as control copy for repetitive usage. The TPD of Maintenance Centers shall create a Current Document and Technical Data List (VAECO Form 7055) to record current status of all documents issued by the TPD. The document and Current Document and Technical Data List shall be updated whenever any document in the list is revised. The user shall inform to the related TPD when the documents are missed, damaged or not corrected as information in the Current Document and Technical Data List. The maintenance data and other controlled documents shall be kept in identified racks/ cabinets. For the document issued by the TPD, the out-of-date pages/ documents are kept at the TPD of respective Maintenance Centers at least 02 years since the removed date. Hand over minutes, Document Master Lists must be stored at the Technical Library for at least 02 years.
2. 8.1.4.5
Controlling documents at the divisions/ workshops 1.
2.
3.
4.
5. 8.1.5
ARCHIVES 1.
2.
Page 8.1-4

8.2 8.2.1
TRANSCRIPTION OF MAINTENANCE DATA PURPOSE To ensure establish procedure for transcribe approved/ accepted maintenance data into VAECO maintenance documents to make guidance on performing, recording and certifying the completion of maintenance tasks.
8.2.2 8.2.3
SCOPE This procedure is applied for issuance of VAECO maintenance documents. RESPONSIBILITIES 1. 2. 3. The Director of EGD is responsible for issuing EO, TI IAW this procedure. Director of BMC is responsible for issuing SRO IAW this procedure. TPD of maintenance centers are responsible for issuing Worksheet IAW this procedure. VAECO may transcribe approved maintenance data into maintenance documents to make guidance on performing, recording and certifying the completion of maintenance tasks. While copying/ transcribing maintenance data, composer must ensure the following: a. b. c. Maintenance document is written in English. Name, revision of maintenance data is recorded in the maintenance document. Maintenance document has precise reference to particular maintenance task or is transcribed accurately from approved maintenance data. It is recommended to break down complicated procedures into small stages in order to ensure that the completion of maintenance task will be clearly recorded. Maintenance document has enough space for recording measurement results, inspection finding and P/N and S/N of tools or equipment used for implementing maintenance/ inspection work. Maintenance document has enough space for signature and stamps certifying for task completion. Maintenance document is controlled by reference number and revision.
8.2.4
PROCEDURES 1.
2.
d.
e.
f. g. 3.
Before issuing, the following maintenance documents must be approved by an authorized person: a. b. EO (VAECO Form 3003); TI (VAECO Form 3017); Page 8.2-1

c. d. 4.
SRO (VAECO Form 6009); Component maintenance worksheet (VAECO Form 7032).
During effective period of maintenance documents (From issuance date to completion of maintenance task), the maintenance documents should be updated when original data has been changed or revised. Procedure for EO issuance can be found in Item 8.6. Procedure for TI issuance can be found in Item 8.7. Procedure for SRO issuance can be found in Item 12.16. Procedure for Component worksheet issuance can be found in Item 7.2.
5. 6. 7. 8.
Page 8.2-2

PART 8 MAINT. SUPPORT PROC. 8.3 MAINTENANCE DATA MODIFYING
8.3 8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3
MAINTENANCE DATA MODIFYING PURPOSE To ensure all maintenance data are modified IAW applicable requirements. SCOPE This procedure is applied for modifying maintenance data when necessary. RESPONSIBILITIES The Director of EGD is responsible for ensuring all modified maintenance data are pertinent to use.
8.3.4 8.3.4.1
PROCEDURES General 1. Maintenance data is only modified by VAECO when maintenance quality, results from such modification, will be equal or higher than the origin, and ensuring its basic content is unchanged. The maintenance data mentioned in this paragraph are the instructions for specific maintenance task. It does not include repair designs, modifications and ADs. Maintenance data may be modified: a. b. For easier and more effective in maintenance; When the original intent of maintenance data is hard for worker to follow.
2.
8.3.4.2
Prepare of modified maintenance data 1. After receiving Request to modify maintenance data (VAECO Form 3005) from maintenance centers, EGD assigns an appropriate qualified engineer to compile Modified maintenance data. Assigned engineer shall: a. Compile Modified Maintenance Data (VAECO Form 3006). Reference number of modified maintenance data will be numbered as follows: Original maintenance data reference number/ VAECO, Example: Reference number of maintenance data needed to be modified for Task 72-00-00-200-001 will be: 72-00-00-200001/VAECO b. c. d. Inform manufacturers or TC or STC holder; Adjust the modification in accordance with feed-back from manufacturer if necessary; Based on manufacturers recommendations, revise the Modified maintenance data and launch a demonstration test (if necessary). Members for evaluating this test are: EGD, QAD and Requested Maintenance center.
2.
Page 8.3-1

PART 8 MAINT. SUPPORT PROC. 8.3 MAINTENANCE DATA MODIFYING
e. 8.3.4.3
Test results are recorded in the Sample modification record (VAECO Form 3022) with signatures from the above members.
Approval for modified maintenance data 1. 2. The Modified maintenance data with attached of related documents shall be submitted to QAD for approval. The attached document includes but not limited to: a. b. c. Maintenance data needed to be modified; Recommendations of manufacturer. Sample modification record (if available).
8.3.4.4
Application and control of modified maintenance data: 1. 2. After being approved, modified maintenance data will be controlled by VAECO Library in according with procedure 8.1; EGD shall monitor the Modified Maintenance Data to: a. b. Update Modified maintenance data when the original data has been changed; Cancel Modified maintenance data if it is no longer valid.
8.3.5
ARCHIVES 1. The original documents of Modified maintenance data storage at EGD include: a. b. c. d. 2. Request of Modifying Maintenance Data form; Modified Maintenance Data form; Sample Modification Record; Recommendations of the manufacturer or STC holder.
These documents are archived in EGD for a minimum of 01 year since the Modified maintenance data is cancelled.
Page 8.3-2

PART 8 MAINT. SUPPORT PROC. 8.4 NOTIFICATION OF MAINTENANCE DATA INACCURACIES AND AMBIGUITIES TO THE AUTHOR
8.4 8.4.1
NOTIFICATION OF MAINTENANCE AMBIGUITIES TO THE AUTHOR PURPOSE
DATA
INACCURACIES
AND
To ensure the maintenance data inaccuracies and ambiguities are reported to the author of the maintenance data. 8.4.2 SCOPE This procedure is applied for reporting the maintenance data inaccuracies and ambiguities to the author of the maintenance data. 8.4.3 RESPONSIBILITIES EGD is responsible for ensuring all inaccuracies and ambiguities found in maintenance data are reported to the relevant author. 8.4.4 PROCEDURES 1. When receipt of Maintenance data ambiguities and inaccuracies report (VAECO Form 3007) from VAECO staffs, EGD shall assign a qualified engineer to assess the reported content; In case the reported content can be comprehend has been found no ambiguities and inaccuracies, assigned engineer shall provide explanations and suitable instructions to the report maker. When ensuring that the content of document is ambiguous and/or inaccurate, assigned engineer shall: a. b. 4. Immediately notify TC/STC holder to request the correction/ clarification; Notify the departments using maintenance data about ambiguities and inaccuracies confirmed in maintenance data. the
2.
3.
As soon as receiving feedback from TC/STC holder, corrective action is performed as follows: a. Issue MAINTENANCE DATA TEMPORARY REVISION NOTICE (VAECO Form 3008) to all departments which use the related maintenance data to support accuracy information before receiving official update from the TC/STC holder. The corrections in Maintenance Data Temporary Revision Notice should refer accurately to the instruction documents from TC/STC holder; Inform AD/SB Control Team to follow the maintenance data correction.
b. 5.
AD/SB Control Team is responsible to monitor the correction until it is revised in related maintenance data. If the correction is not incorporated on time, AD/SB Control Team will give notice to ST holder to request accomplishment.
Page 8.4-1

PART 8 MAINT. SUPPORT PROC. 8.4 NOTIFICATION OF MAINTENANCE DATA INACCURACIES AND AMBIGUITIES TO THE AUTHOR
8.4.5
ARCHIVES Maintenance data ambiguities and inaccuracies report, Maintenance Data temporary revision notice and the related documents are archived in EGD for at least 2 years since the maintenance data is revised.
Page 8.4-2

PART 8 MAINT. SUPPORT PROC. 8.5 TECHNICAL SUPPORT
8.5 8.5.1 8.5.2
TECHNICAL SUPPORT PURPOSE To give technical support to maintenance staff in maintenance activities. SCOPE This procedure is applied for supporting the maintenance staff in maintenance activities when requested.
8.5.3
RESPONSIBILITY 1. The Technical service section of maintenance centers are responsible for the following main functions: a. Assist the maintenance staff in clarifying and interpretation of the technical issues such as specifications, standards, work process and other maintenance data. Review and prepare the job card and the router from the current maintenance manual. Contact EGD for assistance on complicated technical matter. Assist the maintenance staff in trouble shooting and fault isolation. Evaluating and developing the shop capability. Assist other departments on engineering issues that out of capability of such departments. Contact manufacturer and the customer for the applicable working standards, general practices and maintenance process and obtain necessary approval thereof. Gathering and analysis relevant data for the customer as required. Obtain necessary technical information and issue the technical instruction for maintenance upon request from maintenance center. Evaluate and coordinate customers requirement for airframe, power plant and component maintenance.
b. c. d. e. 2. a. b.
Director of EGD is responsible for:
c. d. e. 8.5.4 8.5.4.1
PROCEDURE Engineering Order, Technical Instruction and Engineering request Engineering Order (EO), Technical Instruction (TI) and Engineering Request (ER) are documents issued by EGD to assist other departments on technical issues. Those documents are used on a case by case basic as follows: 1. Engineering Order Engineering Order (VAECO Form 3003) is a maintenance document, transcribed from approved/ accepted maintenance data IAW Item 8.2, and issued to give instructions on performing, recording and certifying the completion of maintenance tasks. 2. Technical Instruction Page 8.5-1

a.
Technical Instruction (VAECO Form 3017) is a maintenance document compiled based on maintenance data, Manufacturer recommendations and issued as a work instruction. Technical Instruction is issued in the following cases: To carry out a local modification; To rectify a defect which is not specifically mentioned in AMM; To carry out inspection/ test of parts/ systems as necessary.
b.
c. d. 3.
Technical Instruction should be prepared based on approved/ accepted data and approved by EGD. Technical Instruction, after approved, should be controlled by Technical Library IAW procedure 8.1. Engineering request is issued to order other department conducting necessary work in order to improve maintenance quality of VAECO based on requirements of maintenance data, Manufacturer recommendations and/ or EGDs investigation/research results. Engineering request is also issued to request for supporting from related department on occurrence investigation or defect rectification
Engineering request a.
b.
8.5.4.2
Technical Assistance Request 1. Technical Assistance Request (TAR - VAECO Form 3015) is raised by maintenance staff to request the support when a difficulty occurs during maintenance. TAR may be issued in the following cases: a. b. c. Request for maintenance data or maintenance instruction; Clarify the interchangeability and mixability of components, materials and expendables; Provide the configuration of A/Cs, engines, components;
2.
8.5.4.3
Technical support 1. If a defect or technical problem cannot be resolved by the maintenance squad, the supervisor creates a TAR (VAECO Form 3015) and sends to the Technical service section for assistance. The engineer of Technical service section should evaluate and base on approved/ accepted data to provide assistance by filling on the TAR. If the issue is out of maintenance center capability, Technical service staff sends the TAR with related document to EGD for assistance. For tracking purpose, the TAR should be numbered IAW the following rules: xxx/yy/zzz. Where: + xxx is the code of maintenance center as follows:
2. 3.
Page 8.5-2

Maintenance center HAN Base Maintenance Center HAN Ramp Maintenance Center HAN Component Maintenance Center HCM Base Maintenance Center HCM Ramp Maintenance Center HCM Component Maintenance Center DAN Ramp Maintenance Center + yy is the last two digits of the year + zzz is the ordinal number of the TAR 4. 5. 6.
Code HBM HLM HCM SBM SLM SCM DLM
Upon received the TAR, engineering staff of EGD is assigned to evaluate and provide the assistance information. If the issue is out of EGD capability, assigned engineering staff may contact manufacturer, customer for support. When the requested information is available, assigned engineering staff completes the TAR with the feedback information and returns to maintenance center for action. If necessary, assigned engineering staff of EGD can issue EO, ER or TI for instruction. In this case, the reference of EO, ER or TI should be mentioned in the TAR.
Page 8.5-3

PART 8 MAINT. SUPPORT PROC. 8.6 ENGINEERING ORDER ISSUANCE
8.6 8.6.1 8.6.2
ENGINEERING ORDER ISSUANCE PURPOSE To ensure the EO are issued IAW applicable requirements. SCOPE This procedure is applied for EO issuance for performing the maintenance, repair of aircraft as required by the Authorities and/or Customers.
8.6.3
RESPONSIBILITIES The Director of EGD is responsible for ensuring that the EO is issued IAW approved maintenance data and by qualified staff.
8.6.4 8.6.4.1
PROCEDURES General 1. ENGINEERING ORDER (EO) is the maintenance document issued to instruct performing the following work: a. b. c. d. e. f. 2. Technical requirements of the Operator; Airworthiness Directives for aircraft, aircraft components; Service Bulletins, Vendor Service Bulletins approved by the Operator to perform on aircraft, aircraft components; Structure damage repairs which are out of SRM limits; Airworthiness Requests from Authorities; Requests to inspect and repair damage in order to maintain safety aircraft operation, defined by EGD.
ONLY qualified engineers can prepare EO. Other staffs who have not been qualified can prepare EO under supervision of the qualified engineers. When issuing EO, engineers must strictly comply with requirements in procedure 8.2. The required spares/ materials and tools to perform each EO should be input in the AMASIS after approval. EO (VAECO Form 3003) includes two main parts: a. b. PROCESS Approval; Worksheet.
3. 4. 5.
8.6.4.2
Process approval 1. PROCESS APPROVAL is used to describe general information of EO and is used for approval/ issuance purposes. The information in PROCESS APPROVAL is: EO number, Issue date, Title. Title must clearly define: a. General content of EO;
2.
Page 8.6-1

b. 3. 4.
AD, SB or VSB number that is being controlled through AMASIS;
OTHER REF: other documents which EO refers to. EFFECTIVITY: aircraft(s), aircraft equipment(s) on which maintenance actions in EO will be performed. This section must clearly state that: a. b. For aircraft: MSN or A/C registration; For A/C equipment: Serial number.
5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Characteristics of EO: TASK TYPE, CATEGORY; Deadline and Intervals of EO: SCHEDULING PRIORITY; Changes in Center of Gravity and Weight of aircraft after carrying out EO: WEIGHT AND BALANCE; Related information and purposes of EO: COMMENTS; After preparing EO, qualified engineer sign in section: PERFORMED BY; personnel signs in section
10. Engineering Director or delegated ACCEPTED BY to issue the EO;
11. Time and necessary investments (spares, tools, equipment, materials) for performing tasks: COST/ INVESTMENT 12. MANAGEMENT APPROVAL: this section is used in case the EO is required to approve by Director of QAD. 8.6.4.3 Worksheet 1. WORKSHEET can be used for different aircrafts, aircraft component. WORKSHEET includes the following sections: a. PLANNING: To write WO/ WP number each time the EO is performed for one specific aircraft (MSN)/ aircraft equipment (S/N). The WO/ WP is numbered by AMASIS. TOOLING AND MATERIALS: List of materials, equipment and tools needed to perform the EO. All spares/ materials required to perform the EO shall be input in AMASIS. WORK REQUIREMENT: List the procedure of the maintenance tasks
b.
c. 2.
WORKSHEET is also used for recording the accomplishment of maintenance work. As a result, engineers should maintain: a. b. Clear and easy to understand arrangement and separation of the tasks Enough space for recording the inspection results.
3.
TECHNICAL RECORD REQUIREMENT: Instruction for the Tech Record Team to record the accomplishment of specific tasks into aircraft, aircraft component log books and update the maintenance information into AMASIS. a. Maintenance tasks required to record into aircraft, engine logbook are: Page 8.6-2

Record the accomplishment of the AOT/ AD/ SB No It R ... into AIRCRAFT LOG BOOK if the EO is issued to perform aircrafts AOT/ AD/ Mandatory SB, or Record the embodiment of MOD Mandatory No into MANDATORY MODIFICATION RECORD OF MODIFICATION RECORD BOOK if the EO is issued to perform SB with MOD number or work related to major structure repair, or Record the embodiment of MOD/REPAIR REF No. into MODIFICATION AND REPAIR RECORD OF MODIFICATION RECORD BOOK, or Record the accomplishment of the AOT/ AD/ SB No It R ... into ENGINE LOG BOOK/ APU LOG BOOK if the EO is issued to perform engine/ APUs AOT/ AD/ Mandatory SB. b. Information required to update in AMASIS are: Removal/ Installation of aircrafts components/ assembly; Changes in Part numbers of components. 4. REMARK/ FINDING: REMARK/ FINDING accomplishment. 8.6.5 ARCHIVES All EOs are archived in EGD for minimum 3 years since the date of EO closed. records additional information during EO
Page 8.6-3

PART 8 MAINT. SUPPORT PROC. 8.7 TECHNICAL INSTRUCTION FOR PART FABRICATION
8.7 8.7.1
TECHNICAL INSTRUCTION FOR PART FABRICATION PURPOSE To establish procedure for Self-Development of design data and issue of work instruction for CAT 3 part fabrication.
8.7.2
SCOPE This procedure is applied for fabrication of repair part when design data and/ or work instruction cannot obtain from OEM of customer.
8.7.3
RESPONSIBILITY 1. 2. Director of EGD is responsible for self-development of design data and issuance of the Technical Instruction for part fabrication. Customer is responsible for acceptance and getting approval from competence authority (if applicable) for the design data.
8.7.4 8.7.4.1
PROCEDURE Self-Development of design data 1. When acceptable design data or drawing is not available and upon request of customer, EGD shall develop the design data for a new part fabrication as follows: a. Define necessary specifications for the part based on acceptable data such as FAA part 25, Service Bulletins, AC 43.13-2A, AMM, CMM, etc. Establish drawing that contains necessary information such as: dimensions, tolerance, materials Implement the stress report and/ or dynamic test to prove that the design is comfort to the defined specifications, if applicable.
b. c. 2.
The design data contain all information above and reference document shall be sent to customer for acceptance, and getting approval from competence authority if applicable. When the part fabrication arises, the Aircraft Engineering Division - EGD shall thoroughly review the design data or specification provided by the customer, and determines if part fabrication is feasible. The following conditions will be basis for evaluation: a. b. c. Special tooling requirements Special manufacturing processes Complexity of the part
8.7.4.2
Technical Instruction Issuance 1.
2.
If VAECO has capability to produce the part, Aircraft Engineering Division of EGD shall prepare the Technical Instruction for part fabrication (VAECO Form 3020). The following information shall be contained when preparing the form:
Page 8.7-1

a.
The original manufacturers Part number/Name List the part(s) to be fabricated with the VAECO part number and nomenclature, and also specify the quantity required for the part(s). Acceptable design drawings with reference to the approved data used to show the configuration of the fabricated part(s), including all required dimensions. Material specification that specifies the material type(s) and specifications to define the physical and chemical properties of the fabricated part(s) (if necessary). Special manufacturing processes that shall be followed during part fabrication to show the conformity to the acceptable data and part quality. The in-process and final inspections required during part fabrication operation mainly to ensure that materials and fabricated parts conform to the applicable design data without any deviations. Testing specified in the acceptable design data, state the test procedures in accordance with the methods given in the acceptable data to verify the fabricated parts be conforming to the acceptable design data. Substantiating data including test reports, analysis, computations, etc. are required to show the fabricated parts for repair and/or alteration meet the applicable airworthiness standards. Attach these data to the TI where applicable. Part number of the fabricated part shall be identified when the fabricated part is accepted by conformity inspection. For distinguishing the VAECO fabricated part from the originally manufactured part and for traceability, the part number is defined as follows: Originally manufactured P/N: AAA VAECO fabricated P/N: AAA-VAE Note: If the size of the part makes it impractical to mark, the marking information will be included in the part records or by the used of an affixed tag.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
8.7.4.3
Approval of Technical Instruction for part fabrication: 1. 2. After completion, the Technical Instruction for part fabrication is submitted to EG director for review. The TI then is sent to QAD. If all requirements are fulfilled QAD shall approve the TI and send to customer for concurrence. Customer may need to get approval from competence authority for the TI for part fabrication. For soft furnishing parts installed in the VNA A/C, QAD shall accept the part fabrication by signature in the List of fabricated soft furnishings (VAECO Form 7023). Page 8.7-2
3.

8.7.4.4
Technical Instruction control 1. 2. The current TI shall be sent to Technical Library for control IAW procedure 8.1. The current TI shall be sent to related maintenance center and updated by EGD and for future fabrication of the part.
8.7.5
ARCHIVES The TI and design data is archived in Technical Library.
Page 8.7-3

PART 8 MAINT. SUPPORT PROC. 8.8 ACCEPTANCE OF TOOL AND EQUIPMENT
8.8 8.8.1
ACCEPTANCE OF TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT PURPOSE To ensure tools and equipment (T&E) are checked/ inspected and accepted before releasing to use in maintenance activities IAW appropriate regulatory requirements.
8.8.2
SCOPE This procedure is applied to the inspection and receiving process of all T&E that will be utilized by VAECO staff for aircraft maintenance from approved suppliers or calibration agency.
8.8.3
RESPONSIBILITY 1. Director of LGD is responsible for: a. Primary inspection and acceptance of T&E. b. Purchasing, leasing, borrowing, exchanging T&E. 2. Director of respective CMC/ DAD RMC is responsible for final inspection and acceptance, keeping and storing of the T&E that delivered from LGD. All T&E, before using at VAECO, must go through an inspection/ acceptance process. The T&E purchased, borrowed or returned after calibration/ maintenance shall have the sufficiency technical document (operation/ maintenance/ user manual), certificate and/or report as following: a. For the purchased T&E: The certificate of compliance/ conformance or other equivalent documents (for specific T&E); Technical document; Calibration certificate (if any); Other related document. b. c. d. For the T&E returned after maintenance: Maintenance/ repair report/ certificate. For the T&E returned after calibration: Calibration certificate and/or calibration report. For the T&E borrowed/ leased/ exchanged from supplier: The certificate of compliance/ conformance or other equivalent documents (for specific T&E); Technical document; The serviceable tag/ label issued by the supplier with the calibration information or calibration certificate/ record (for calibration required T&E).
8.8.4
GENERAL 1. 2.
Page 8.8-1

Note: The certificate/ technical document could be in copy as long as the serviceable tag/ label issued by the supplier is original. 3. The T&E calibration certificate/ report shall be issued by a calibration agency accepted by the VAECO QAD (listed in the VAECO Form 2062 Recognized Calibration Service Supplier List).
8.8.5 8.8.5.1
ACCEPTANCE PROCEDURE OF VAECO TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Receiving of T&E at LGD 1. Tool/ equipment is newly purchased or borrowed or returned after repair/ calibration from extrinsic agencies will be segregated at receiving area to perform incoming inspection. In the incoming inspection, the Store Inspector shall: a. Check information in T&E accompanied certificate/ document and the order to ensure it is appropriate. b. Check for physical condition, ensuring that the T&E is free from visual defects and damage; c. Check the accompanied certificates and technical document mentioned in item 2 of 8.8.4 to ensure they are sufficiency and validity; d. Fill information in the Receiving/ Delivering minute of Tool/ Equipment (VAECO Form 7011). 3. The Store Inspector shall issue Discrepancy Report (VAECO Form 4004) to report any discrepancies to LGD Director. Tool/ equipment with any discrepancy shall be held in quarantine area. The LGD staff contacts the supplier for instruction/ solution. All T&E and accompanied original certificates, technical document shall be handed over to respective CMC. For outside purchased tool/ equipment that do not have P/N and S/N, the LGD staff contacts related CMC to determine P/N and S/N for that tool/ equipment before declaring it in AMASIS (except personal tools that are controlled IAW 8.9.5.5 of this manual) as follows: a. P/N: OPIxxxx, in which, xxxx is sequent number = 0001, 0002; (OPI means Outside Purchased Item). Use the next available number. S/N: xxx, in which, xxx is sequent number = 001, 002 Use the next available number.
2.
4. 5.
b. 6.
All the necessary information of the delivered tool/ equipment will be recorded into a Receiving/ Delivering minute of Tool/ Equipment (VAECO Form 7011) with the signatures of both deliverer and receiver. The Tool controller shall carry out the followings:
8.8.5.2
Acceptance of tools and equipment at respective CMC/ DAD RMC 1.
Page 8.8-2

a. Check the information in calibration/ maintenance certificates/ records and technical document to ensure they are acceptable; b. Perform detail inspection of physical condition, specification and technical status, included specific manufacturer's requirements such as storage condition, maintenance requirement ; c. Carry out operation test of tool/ equipment if necessary. 2. Tool controller shall refuse to accept the T&E if there is any discrepancy and issue T&E Refusal Report (VAECO Form 7013) to report to LGD Director and respective CMC Director/ DAD RMC Director. The unaccepted T&E shall be placed in quarantine area for further action. For the measuring and test tool/ equipment: a. Tool controller will classify and determine the calibration requirements (interval and parameters) based on: Manufacturers certificates and/ or technical document for the new tool/ equipment; Calibration certificate/ report and/ or repair report for the tool/ equipment after calibration/ maintenance. b. Tool controller will determine the calibration interval/ due date. If there is no information of calibration due date or interval in the certificate, maximum interval shall not be more than 1 year. The calibration interval is determined based on: Manufacturer's recommendation/ requirement; Other referenced National regulation and standards; The level of accuracy and the technical requirements; The using and keeping condition. c. Tool controller shall evaluate, analyze the calibration result and record into Calibration result evaluation report (VAECO Form 7022). d. The Calibration Control Label (VAECO Form 0004) shall be issued and affixed to each tool/ equipment that has not been calibrated at VAECOs calibration laboratories. This label must include the Serial number of the tool/ equipment and the calibration due date. e. For the measuring and test tool/ equipment, if its calibration is not required (by the manufacturer) the Calibration Not Required label (VAECO Form 0018) shall be affixed on that tool/ equipment. f. If the calibration required tool/ equipment is determined to be out-oftolerance it shall be attached with the Tool/ Equipment Unserviceable tag (VAECO Form 0002) and kept in separate area. Tool controller shall report to Manager of Calibration workshop. In this case, Manager of Calibration workshop shall implement one of the following solutions: Send it to manufacturers service center for repair/ calibration.
3.
Page 8.8-3

Re-define usable range of the measuring and test tool/ equipment IAW Para. 9 of 8.10.5.1. Report to respective CMC Director for tool/ equipment disposition if it is un-repairable or beyond economical repair. 8.8.5.3 Outstation inspection/ acceptance of T&E In case of performing unscheduled maintenance at outstation, some of T&E could be purchased (or borrowed, shared...) directly from suppliers/ other sources (Airlines, AMOs). The receiving and acceptance process of T&E could be done with the instruction from store inspector and tool controller (if necessary). In this case, all the key requirements must be maintained. The information of Tool/ equipment (Description, P/N, S/N, calibration and expiry date (if applicable)) should be sent to LGD for entering in the AMASIS. 8.8.6 ACCEPTANCE PROCEDURE OF CUSTOMER PROVIDED TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT 1. Incoming inspection personnel of LGD or tool controller of DAD RMC will perform the incoming inspection of the T&E to ensure: a. b. T&E has no visual defects and/or damages. Calibration required T&E has a tag/ label/ certificate showing the valid calibration. The calibration agency shall be listed in the VAECO Form 2062 - Recognized Calibration Service Supplier List or accepted by the relevant Authority.
2.
If a discrepancy is found the incoming inspection personnel/ tool controller shall place the T&E in quarantine area, make Discrepancy Report (VAECO Form 4004) and send to Customer for further action. In the case, the Customer (Operator/ Air Carrier) has no contract with VAECO to control/ perform calibration and/or maintenance, The Customer has responsibility to control the calibration and/or maintenance schedule and perform calibration/ maintenance accordingly. In the case, the Customer has a contract with VAECO to control/ perform calibration and/or maintenance, the copy of related certificate and technical document should be provided to VAECO: a. The LGD shall send the related certificate and technical document of T&E to related CMC and EGD to create the calibration and maintenance program. The regional CMC creates the calibration/ maintenance schedule and specifies all maintenance/ calibration that could be performed itself and send to LGD for monitoring. For the maintenance required T&E used at DAD RMC, the technical document of the T&E shall be sent to EGD for updating maintenance program. The DAD RMC shall establish the maintenance and/or calibration schedule and monitor/ perform the schedule.
3.
4.
b.
c.
Page 8.8-4

5.
The LGD/ DAD RMC will keep the T&E at the storage area that meet the preservation condition required by the customer. All Customers T&E will be listed and managed by the LGD/ DAD RMC. LGD/ DAD RMC staff shall create an Usage Notice (VAECO Form 0016) to attach to the T&E to show that it is only used for the respective customer.
6.
8.8.7
Register Tool/ Equipment in the management software and handling of related documents. 1. For a new tool/ equipment which has a serial number, Tool controller will classify it in suitable material class (e.g. TOS for specific tool/ equipment) and enter any necessary information into AMASIS system; Copies/ Scans of Calibration Certificates and/ or Certificate of Conformity will be kept at respective Tool store or unit who manages the tool/ equipment. The original technical document will be sent to Tool and equipment control section of EGD for creation of maintenance program (if required). The original technical document is then transferred to Technical Library. The respective CMC/ DAD RMC will make a copy of technical document to attach with T&E for use (if necessary). For a used tool/ equipment that have been received after calibration, Tool controller will enter calibration date, calibration agency and other necessary information into AMASIS system. For a used tool/ equipment that have been maintained, Tool controller will also enter maintenance date, maintenance agency and other necessary information into management software developed by EGD. Basing on technical document of new tool/ equipment, The Tool & Equipment control division of EGD shall update Maintenance Program. After acceptance by Tool controller, T&E shall be transferred to Tool store of respective CMC with appropriate tag/ label and documents for keeping and using. In case T&E is transferred to other tool store/ department then the attached tags/ technical documents (copy) shall be accompanied with tool/ equipment. If the tool/ equipment is transferred in unserviceable/ overdue calibration status or the calibration is due within one month the receiver and calibration workshop manager of the receiver shall be informed. In case of T&E with complicated operation procedure, the EGD makes proposal of a training course to the users/ maintenance personnel. For the T&E training course organized by Manufacturer/ Supplier, the EGD shall preside at the course and make a list of trained staffs (together with certificates or pass list, if any) and send to HRD. Page 8.8-5
2.
3.
4.
5.
6. 8.8.8
Transferring tool/ equipment 1.
2.
3.
8.8.9
Training of personnel in the use of T&E: 1. 2.

3. 4. 8.8.10
For the T&E training course that could be organized by Training Center, the training process shall perform as specified in Part 11 of this SOP. Only the person who is passed the training course (if any) is allowed to operate/ maintain the respective T&E. All the original certificates will be kept at respective CMC/ DAD RMC. All the original technical documents of tool/ equipment are kept at the Technical Library. All the purchase/ repair orders and copy of certificates are kept in LGD. All the certificates and related documents must be kept at least 02 years since the tool/ equipment is removed from service.
ARCHIVES 1. 2. 3. 4.
Page 8.8-6

PART 8 MAINT. SUPPORT PROC. 8.9 MANAGEMENT OF TOOL AND EQUIPMENT
8.9 8.9.1
MANAGEMENT OF TOOL AND EQUIPMENT PURPOSE To ensure all tools and equipment used to maintain aircraft/ aircraft component are managed in accordance with applicable requirements.
8.9.2
SCOPE This procedure is applied to all tools and equipment (T&E) used by VAECO staff for performing aircraft, aircraft engine and component maintenance.
8.9.3
RESPONSIBILITY 1. Engineering Director is responsible for: a. b. c. d. e. Defining the need of T&E for aircraft and aircraft component maintenance in VAECO; Establishing stock level of T&E in VAECO; Establishing the Maintenance Program for all T&E that required maintenance; Initiating the training of T&E if necessary; Designing complicated/ specific T&E required from Technical Data. For the complicated and valuable T&E, the EGD submits the project to CEO for approval then deploys the project; Cooperating with CMC and QAD in evaluation of equivalent T&E. Checking and accepting the T&E handed over from LGD; Keeping T&E and ensuring the availability and serviceability of all T&E necessary for maintenance activities; Annually, basing on approved Maintenance Programs, creating the Maintenance Schedule for all T&E used in the assigned region. Controlling the Maintenance Schedule. Maintaining the assigned T&E and T&E of other centers if the work is within its capability; Updating the operation and maintenance information of the assigned T&E on VAECO website. Establishing the Calibration Program for all T&E that required calibration in the assigned areas; Initiating the usage of equivalent T&E; Designing simple and non-specific T&E; Initiating manufacturing process of T&E and fabricating T&E according to approved design; Making request for supplement of T&E for common usage; Confirming the capability to maintain/ repair the T&E as request from users.
f. 2. a. b. c. d.
The respective CMC Directors are responsible for:
e. f. g. h. i. j.
Page 8.9-1

3.
DAD Ramp Maintenance Director is responsible for: a. b. c. d. e. Checking and accepting the T&E handed over from LGD; Keeping T&E and ensuring the availability and serviceability of all T&E necessary for maintenance activities; Annually, basing on approved Maintenance Programs, creating the Maintenance Schedule for all assigned T&E. Establishing the Calibration Program for all assigned T&E that required calibration; Controlling the Maintenance and Calibration Schedule. Maintaining the assigned T&E; Updating the operation and maintenance information of the assigned T&E on VAECO website; Making request for supplement of T&E.
f. 4.
HAN and HCM Ramp and Base Maintenance Directors are responsible for: a. b. c. Controlling, properly using and keeping all the assigned T&E; Making request for supplement of T&E; Controlling and maintaining the Maintenance Schedule. Coordinating with the CMC to determine the capability to perform scheduled maintenance work (for assigned T&E); Sending T&E maintenance request to respective CMC as the schedule; Giving the solution/ work scope to sending T&E to manufacturer or other approved maintenance agency for the work out of respective CMCs capability; Updating the operation and maintenance information of the assigned T&E on VAECO website; Assuring that the maintenance personnel use the appropriate T&E. Properly using the T&E IAW manufacturer instructions; Keeping and performing minor maintenance IAW manufacturer requirements; Reporting to his manager and respective CMC (for the T&E borrowed from the tool store) when finding a tool/ equipment is lost or damaged or Calibration Stamp/ Calibration Control label is damaged/ peeled off.
d.
e. f. 5. a. b. c.
Technical staff who use the T&E is responsible for:
8.9.4
GENERAL 1. 2. Only T&E that specified in Technical Data or equivalent one can be used for maintenance. VAECO maintenance staff can only use provided or borrowed T&E from Tool store. Usage of self-equipped T&E or T&E from unapproved sources is strictly forbidden. Page 8.9-2

3. 4.
VAECO maintenance staff can only use the test and measuring tool/ equipment that is controlled IAW procedure 8.10. The Usage Notice (VAECO Form 0016) shall be raised by the person who manages the tool/ equipment to specify all liquid used/ contained in that tool/ equipment. The maintenance staff can only use the liquid specified in the Usage Notice to refill/ maintain that tool/ equipment.
8.9.5 8.9.5.1
MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE OF VAECO T&E Storage and keeping of tool/ equipment in Tool stores 1. Specific and non-specific T&E to be shared are kept in the Tool store of respective CMC. T&E shall be preserved IAW manufacturers requirements/ recommendation. T&E that have serial number will be entered in AMASIS and placed properly on the racks/ location as specified in the AMASIS. All un-serviceable specific T&E shall be tagged with a Tool/ Equipment Un-serviceable tag (VAECO Form 0002) and be segregated at the separated area. According to maintenance requirements, some T&E are permanently handed over to maintenance center or workshop. In that case, that maintenance center or workshop have responsibility to preserve T&E IAW manufacturers requirements. Maintenance Center/ Workshop shall establish and maintain master list of all assigned T&E. All maintenance required T&E shall be registered on VAECO website by the assigned unit. For equipment which have accessories but come in kit, they shall be identified with the main item. The accessories shall be controlled by a contents list to be kept in the kit. The format of the contents list shall include Part No. (if applicable), description of tool and quantity. All tools handed over to maintenance staff must be maintained and controlled IAW 8.9.5.5. Tool and Equipment control Division of EGD shall established maintenance program (VAECO form 3027) for the maintenance required T&E basing on the tooling instruction manual or VAECO experiences. After approval by the EGD the master maintenance program shall be entered in the management software. Maintenance Required T&E handed over to maintenance centers are controlled and maintained as follows: a. The respective TPD of maintenance center shall prepare worksheet (VAECO form 7051) for T&E maintenance basing on Maintenance Program of each tool/ equipment.
2. 3.
8.9.5.2
T&E handed over to Ramp, Base maintenance Center/ Workshop. 1.
2.
3.
4. 8.9.5.3
Establish and control the T&E Maintenance Program 1.
2.
Page 8.9-3

b.
Maintenance center who manages the T&E will perform all maintenance work within its capability. For the work out of the Maintenance centers capability but within the capability of the CMC, it will be cleaned, packed and sent to applicable CMC for maintenance. The Maintenance of T&E shall be implemented IAW manufactures document. The information of work performed shall be recorded in book sheet (minor maintenance/ servicing) or worksheet (VAECO form 7051). The T&E operation (weekly) and maintenance information shall be updated (just after completion of maintenance work) on VAECO website by the Maintenance center who manages the T&E.
c.
3.
In case the maintenance/ repair of T&E are beyond VAECO capability, Department/ Center who manage the T&E shall work out the solution/ work scope for sending that T&E to manufacturer or other maintenance agency for maintenance/ repairing. Borrowed T&E from Tool store must be returned to Tool store before completion of each working shift. T&E borrowed from Tool store for long time usage (more than one working shift) must be registered with Tool store keeper. While providing/ receiving of T&E, Tool store keeper shall check status and accompanied document of tool/ equipment then record all necessary information in the Tool Inventory and Control (VAECO Form 7046) for the tool without serial number or hand tool, or Tool/ Equipment Monitoring Record (VAECO Form 7045) for the serialized tool/ equipment. The information of borrowing/ returning of serialized tool/ equipment shall be updated in AMASIS whenever the tool/ equipment is borrowed/ returned. While borrowing of T&E, borrower is responsible for checking of physical condition, calibration/ maintenance due date and accompanied technical document before signing into the Tool/ Equipment Monitoring Record or the Tool Inventory and Control Record. Users will ensure status and available of accompanied document of T&E before returning to the Tool store. While receiving returned T&E, Tool store keeper shall check physical condition and related document. T&E shall be accepted if the T&E is in good condition. If returned T&E has discrepancies Tool store keeper shall: a. b. c. Request the borrower to complete Lost/ Damaged Tool/ Equipment Report (VAECO Form 7010) with the signature of manager. Raise the Tool/ Equipment Un-serviceable Tag (VAECO Form 0002) and tag on the damaged tool. Keep Un-serviceable T&E in separate area in Tool store. Page 8.9-4
8.9.5.4
Control of borrowed/ returned T&E 1.
2.
3.
4. 5.

6. 8.9.5.5
In case T&E have not returned on time, Tool store keeper will report to the Maintenance Support Workshop Manager of respective CMC. User/ person-in-charge shall establish a list of all personal tools in his tool box (VAECO form 2063). This list shall be checked and confirmed by his manager and director and kept at the office of the center/ department for at least one year. One copy of the list is placed in the box. This list will be rechecked and confirmed by the manager and director every year. All tools housed within the tool box/ tool crib must have the relevant approved marking engraved (etched) on the tool and a corresponding shadow on the board. The marking on each tool (identification code) in a tool box is same as the tool box code. The tool box code is identified as follows: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. The HAN Ramp maintenance center is RHxxxxx; The HAN Base maintenance center is BHxxxxx; The HAN Component maintenance center is CHxxxxx; The HCM Ramp maintenance center is RSxxxxx; The HCM Base maintenance center is BSxxxxx; The HCM Component maintenance center is CSxxxxx; The DAD Ramp maintenance center is RDxxxxx; The HAN QC division of QAD is QHxxxxx; The HCM QC division of QAD is QSxxxxx. In which xxxxx is number defined by respective center/ department.
Control of personal tools 1.
2.
3.
4.
Tools which are non-etchable may be color coded by the respective center/ department and a listing of the used colors is registered with QAD. This applies to tools which are non-etchable but feasible to be color coded. The respective center/ department may choose a second color band to identify the various sections within the department. Under such situation, he has to reconfigure the secondary color scheme. A list of the color scheme chosen for each section shall be registered with the QAD. To allow flexible use of the primary colors as secondary colors, the primary color band width shall be double that of the secondary color band. Alternatively, tools that cannot be etched and not feasible to be color coded such as alien keys and drill bits may be kept in a separate box with identification number on the box. Vernier caliper or micrometer and feeler gauge can be kitted as a set. The tool list is to reflect these tools as a set. Only the main item/ assembly of the tool shall be etched; this applies to tools where accessories are attached together like the soldering iron complete with electrical plug.
5.
6.
7.
Page 8.9-5

8.
In the event of a tool being transferred to another tool box/ crib, the old identification number shall be engraved with a line across. All transferred tools must have new tool box/ crib number engraved and the respective inventory lists updated to include these transferred tools. Uncontrolled tools are not to be used for work on aircraft, systems or components. The manager shall randomly conduct spot checks to purge uncontrolled tools.
9.
10. The Manager shall ensure a copy of the Personal Tool List is kept in each tool box/ tool crib. The tool inventory checklist should include tool description, part number/ type and quantity. Interim hand-written amendments of the Personal Tool List are allowed providing that a Lost/ damage tool/ equipment report (VAECO Form 7010) is raised and endorsed by the related manager. Copy of the Lost/ damage tool/ equipment report should be attached with the Tool List. 11. User or person-in-charge must check the quantity and status of all tools at the beginning of the working shift (before using) and at the end of the working shift (after using). The performance of each check must be recorded in Personal tool inventory log (VAECO form 2064) by date and signature. The log sheets of last sixty (60) days must be kept in the tool box after that it is sent to the office of the center/ department to keep together with respective Personal tool list. 12. A tool shall be considered lost if it cant be located after one hour from time of discovery of its loss. A tool shall also be considered lost if it is discovered lost at end-of-day tool inventory check. Lost/ Damaged Tool/ Equipment Report (VAECO form 7010) shall be immediately raised by the person responsible for/ discovering the loss. The report must be submitted to the respective manager/ foreman, director and copied to QC manager (except the DAD RMC and all out stations) no longer than 24hrs from discovery. Such report must also be raised even if the tool is recovered later within the day. 13. In the case of damaged or unserviceable tools, Lost/ Damaged Tool/ Equipment Report (VAECO form 7010) shall be raised within 2 days of discovery. The report must be submitted to the respective manager/ foreman (sending to QC division is not required). The respective manager shall be responsible for closure of the report and confirmed by statement and signature in the Personal tool list also. 14. Random surveillance will be conducted by QA personnel to check for compliance of this procedure. After the surveillance check he shall annotate in the Personal tool inventory log sheet (VAECO form 2064) accordingly with state Checked by (name) in the remark column. 15. User/ Person-in-charge of tool box who fail to report missing or obviously damaged tools during his daily inventory check shall be disciplined. 16. Users who promptly report any missing or damaged tool in accordance with this SOP shall not be penalized. However, this may not apply to recurring offenders or incidents of gross negligence. Issue: 02, Revision: 01, Date: 18 APR 2012 Page 8.9-6

17. Modification to any tools is only allowed with prior approval from the respective director. The tool will then be de-registered and re-registered under a different name. 18. Lost tool is searched and solved as follows: a. When an item (tool/ hardware) is lost during performance of maintenance, the technician responsible for the loss shall inform his team leader and manager/ foreman immediately. All activities in the affected area of the aircraft will be stopped and a search party assembled. The manager will enlist the assistance of at least three technicians depending on the size of the affected area. This search will continue until the item is found or adequate assurances are made that the item is not contained in the structure. The search action shall only be called off by the respective director. Searching for such items (tool/ hardware) must be undertaken in a systematic and thorough manner. The employment of detailed nondestructive inspection techniques including borescope and x-ray shall be implemented as required. The respective manager and QC personnel (if necessary) shall be responsible for investigation and closure of the report. The respective manager shall inform his director of such a loss. If aircraft is affected by a lost item, the Return-to-service staff in charge shall decide to clear the aircraft for flight.
b.
c.
d.
19. Unless otherwise decided by the respective director, a lost tool shall only be replaced at least two weeks after loss discovery and search. All outstanding damaged/ lost tools shall be reviewed/ evaluated on an annual basis and the report shall be closed accordingly. 8.9.5.6 Control of commonly - used tool/ equipment 1. The commonly - used tool/ equipment are tool/ equipment kept in the tool store that can be loaned/ borrowed by user or tool/ equipment handed over to a squad/ workshop that can be commonly used by any technical staff. Control of hand tool/ equipment is performed as para. 8.9.5.5 above. If the lost or damaged tool is borrowed from tool store the initial report and closure report of Lost/ damaged tool/ equipment shall be send to respective CMC. In addition to para. 8.9.5.5 when a damage found on tool/ equipment borrowed from the store the user must inform to tool store keeper. The damaged tool/ equipment must be tagged with Tools/ equipment unserviceable tag (VAECO Form 0002). The respective manager must check and sign in the Lost/ damaged tool/ equipment report before sending it to respective CMC. The damaged T&E shall be sent to respective CMC or keep in department/ center if the T&E is impossible to be moved. The Tool
2.
3.
4.
Page 8.9-7

controller shall examine, evaluate and report to the Workshop Manager to implement one of solutions below: a. b. 5. Sending un-serviceable T&E for maintenance/ repair. Keep unserviceable tool/equipment and report to his director for destroying if repair is uneconomical.
All permanently lost and unrecovered damage tool/ equipment shall be enumerated by tool controller and reported to respective CMC director for substitution. VAECO may fabricate T&E for use as need during maintenance activities. The request to fabricate T&E may initiate by maintenance centers/ departments and send to Engineering & IT department and related component maintenance center. For complicated and/or specific T&E, The Engineering & IT department will design and give fabrication instruction. For simple and non-specific T&E, The respective CMC will design and give fabrication instruction. Except the personal tools that are controlled IAW 8.9.5.5 of this manual, the P/N and S/N of VAECO fabricated tool/ equipment are defined as follows: a. For tool/ equipment to be fabricated that does not have P/N referred from OEM: P/N: VMIxxxx, in which, xxxx is sequent number = 0001, 0002; (VMI means VAECO Manufactured Item). Use the next available number in AMASIS. S/N: xxx, in which, xxx is sequent number = 001, 002 Use the next available number in AMASIS. b. For tool/ equipment to be fabricated that has P/N referred from OEM: P/N: OEM P/N-VAE. For example: The P/N of OEM tool/ equipment is 12345 then the P/N of VAECO fabricated tool/ equipment is 12345-VAE. S/N: xxx, in which, xxx is sequent number = 001, 002 Use the next available number in AMASIS.
8.9.5.7
Fabrication of T&E 1.
2.
3.
4.
The document to fabricate includes: a. b. c. Technical drawings and manufacturers data or those developed by VAECO; Methods and technical parameters to be tested. Materials and instruction for fabrication.
5. 6.
The fabrication document will be submitted to EGD for approval (if necessary) before sending to applicable workshop for fabrication. The CMC staff (together with staff from EGD and QCD if necessary) will test all technical parameters as required in order to verify all Page 8.9-8

requirements are satisfied. A minutes shall be created and signed for completion of the test. 7. The CMC must issue the tool/ equipment operation and maintenance document including, but not limited to, the following information: a. b. c. 8. Name, part number, serial number (if applicable); Description of functions and technical specifications (such as operating and limitation parameters, accuracy) Operation and maintenance instruction.
For the fabricated equipment to be operated/ used at the apron, the required document and fabrication records must be sent to QAD for submitting to CAAV for approval. VAECO will purchase and use T&E recommend by manufacturer as specified in Technical Data. However, equivalent T&E will be accepted. Reason for review, evaluation and use equivalent T&E could be as follows: a. b. c. d. e. Recommended T&E maker out of business, or Recommended T&E model being replaced or substituted by its maker, or Manufacturer newly recommended T&E maker and/or model, or Commercial T&E with same function, or Self-fabricated T&E with same function etc.
8.9.5.8
Equivalency evaluation of T&E 1.
2. 3.
For the NDT related tool/ equipment the evaluation of equivalency will be performed IAW NDT manual. For the non-specific tool/ equipment the user will check the specification/ functions of the tool/ equipment and confirm that all requirements specified in Technical Data are satisfied before usage. The Evaluation of equivalent T&E (VAECO Form 3001) is not required. For specific tool/ equipment that is accepted by manufacturer of the aircraft/ aircraft component then it can be used. The Evaluation of equivalent T&E (VAECO Form 3001) is not required. The acceptance letter/ document from the manufacturer shall be put in the tool/ equipment records and sent a copy to EGD for updating the master list of equivalent tool/ equipment. For specific tool/ equipment that is not confirmed by the aircraft/ aircraft component manufacturer for equivalency then the equivalent evaluation is performed as follows: a. The affected Maintenance Center will submit a request to use equivalent T&E to the respective CMC (HAN or HCM).
4.
5.
Page 8.9-9

The respective CMC will review the request and prepare technical documents which may include data, drawings, or other related information. The respective CMC will then submit the request and documents to the EGD for evaluation. b. c. d. EGD in cooperated with QAD and respective CMC conduct evaluation to confirm the equivalent of T&E. The evaluation information of equivalent T&E are recorded in Evaluation of equivalent T&E (VAECO Form 3001). The EGD will verify the equivalency by requesting the CMC to perform a test to assure that the T&E meet the manufacturers standards and specifications in all respects regarding tolerances, repeatability and accuracy. When the equivalency must be confirmed by the OEM the EGD will contact the T&E OEM. If the equivalency is verified by the OEM, the T&E may be used. The EGD will notify the Quality Assurance Department with their results. Experiments, testing methods and the results shall be recorded and kept for equivalency evidence. Degree of accuracy of equivalent T&E is not less than degree of accuracy recommended by manufacturer. After evaluation for equivalency, the results will be submitted to the Quality Assurance Department for approval. General hand tool may be used but not necessary considered as alternate tools/ equipment.
e.
f.
g. h. 8.9.6
MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE OF CUSTOMER PROVIDED T&E 1. In the case, the Customer (Operator/ Air Carrier) has no contract with VAECO to perform calibration and/or maintenance of the T&E, The LGD/ DAD RMC will inform to the customer the maintenance/ calibration expiry status and place the T&E in quarantine area waiting for customers instruction/ decision. In the case, the Customer has a contract with VAECO to perform calibration and/or maintenance of the T&E: a. b. c. In case the work could be performed by VAECO the LGD shall send T&E to the suitable CMC for the maintenance/ calibration; In case the T&E managed by DAD RMC and the work is within its capability the DAD RMC will perform the maintenance. For the maintenance/ calibration that could not be performed by VAECO, the LGD/ DAD RMC will send T&E to the extrinsic agency for calibration/ maintenance with consultancy of the customer. The LGD/ DAD RMC shall summarize the expenditure (materials/ man-hours) and report to BDD to claim for payment. Page 8.9-10
2.
d.

3. 4. 8.9.7
The LGD/ DAD RMC manages the T&E store, issues T&E for use and receive T&E after use as requested from maintenance staff. Maintenance staff are allowed to use the customer provided T&E for that customer only. Certificates and calibration history of tool and/or equipment will be archived at the appropriate Component Maintenance Center for at least 2 years after removing the item from service. The technical documents of Tools and Equipment such as operation/ maintenance manuals will be kept at the Technical Library. Equivalent assessment records and test data are retained in the EGD for at least 2 years after removing the item from service. Maintenance/repair records will be archived at the Maintenance Center who manages the T&E for at least 2 years since maintenance date.
ARCHIVES 1.
2. 3. 4.
Page 8.9-11

PART 8 MAINT. SUPPORT PROC. 8.10 CALIBRATION REQUIRED TOOL AND EQUIPMENT MANAGEMENT
8.10 8.10.1
CALIBRATION REQUIRED TOOL AND EQUIPMENT MANAGEMENT PURPOSE To establish policy and procedure for controlling tools and equipment that requires calibration (CRTE) IAW applicable requirements.
8.10.2
SCOPE This procedure is applied for management, control and calibration of VAECOs CRTE.
8.10.3
RESPONSIBILITY 1. HAN Calibration Workshop is responsible for controlling CRTE that is owned by HAN Component Maintenance Center; HAN Base Maintenance Center; HAN Ramp Maintenance Center and Outstations under HAN Ramp Maintenance Center. HCM Calibration Workshop is responsible for controlling CRTE that is owned by HCM Component Maintenance Center; HCM Base Maintenance Center; HCM Ramp Maintenance Center and Outstations under HCM Ramp Maintenance Center. Technical and Planning Division of DAD Ramp Maintenance Center is responsible for controlling of CRTE that is owned by DAD Ramp Maintenance Center and Outstations under DAD Ramp Maintenance Center. Director of LGD is responsible for sending the CRTE to outside approved calibration agencies and receiving tools/ equipment after calibration. Maintenance Centers are responsible for managing the usage and status of CRTE under their management to ensure that only CRTE with valid calibration can be used. Technician or authorized staff who use CRTE are responsible for: a. b. Verifying the status and calibration due date of CRTE prior to use; Reporting to respective Calibration workshop and his/ her manager in case of failure, calibration overdue, missing/ damage of Calibration Stamp (VAECO Form 0021) or Calibration Control label (VAECO Form 0004) of CRTE.
2.
3.
4. 5.
6.
8.10.4
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1. Measuring and test tool/ equipment that are required calibration by manufacturer are herein referred to as Calibration Required Tool and Equipment (CRTE). The CRTE used to make airworthiness determinations (the accuracy of the value measured by them shall effect on the decision of return to service of the aircraft, aircraft engine or aircraft component) shall be calibrated and traceable to a standard that is derived from NIST or ILAC members or provided by the equipment manufacturer.
2.
Page 8.10-1

3.
For the CRTE other than CRTE mentioned in para. 2. above, industrial standard, standard of the country of manufacturer or national standard of Vietnam may be used. All of the VAECO CRTE can only be calibrated at the calibration agencies listed on Recognized Calibration Services Supplier List (VAECO Form 2062) A serviceable CRTE shall be attached with Calibration Control label (VAECO Form 0004) or Calibration Stamp (VAECO Form 0021). The Measuring and test tool/ equipment that are not required calibration by manufacturer shall be attached with Calibration Not Required label (VAECO Form 0018). The CRTE has a function limited and/ or accuracy downgraded shall be attached with a Caution label (VAECO Form 0019) and Usage Notice (VAECO Form 0016). Each unserviceable item of CRTE will be attached with Tools/ Equipment Unserviceable Tag (VAECO Form 0002). All CRTE at Tool store or at tool keeping area of related workshop/ centers shall be kept in storage conditions IAW the manufacturers requirements.
4.
5. 6.
7.
8. 9.
8.10.5 8.10.5.1
PROCEDURE CRTE Control system 1. The calibration information of all CRTE including nomenclature, P/N, S/N, calibration date, calibration due date, interval, status, user, manufacturers, calibration agencies should be recorded in AMASIS and other computerized program (if necessary). A list of all CRTE (VAECO Form 7016) using in VAECO maintenance activities with all information mentioned above may be exported from AMASIS at all time. After the CRTE has been calibrated and is within the tolerance required by the manufacturer, the Calibration Workshop shall update the calibration date of such equipment on the CRTE Management System. Non Schedule Calibration a. Any CRTE which is found defective, out of calibration, inoperative, label missed/ damaged, due date unclear or unable to meet specification of the manufacturer must be considered as unserviceable. A Tool/ Equipment Unserviceable Tag (VAECO Form 0002) must be raised by the user and attached on unserviceable CRTE. No one is allowed to use this equipment/ tool to perform maintenance. The unserviceable CRTE shall then be routed to the Calibration Workshop for repair, re-calibrate. For CRTE that the label is dim/ missed and no damage is found and calibration record is available the Tool Controller may issue a new Calibration Control Label Page 8.10-2
2.
3.
4.
b.
c.

(VAECO Form 0004). In other case that T/ E shall be sent to calibration agency for calibration. 5. Control of calibration due date: a. b. Respective calibration workshop shall control calibration due dates of all VAECOs CRTE; Every month, on the 20th day (or the next working day if that day is holiday), Calibration workshop shall issue List of tool and equipment to be calibrated (VAECO Form 7003) to list all T&E that will be expired up to the end of the next month and upload on Calibration Required T&E menu of the VAECO website. The assigned staffs of related department/ center shall: Monthly access the appropriate folder on VAECO website to check the List of tool and equipment to be calibrated; Clean, pack and send the CRTE that mentioned in the list to respective calibration workshop. Provide information related to CRTE such as measuring range, next usage date to tool controller. Tool controller shall check and define the calibration requirements for each CRTE and send to: Respective VAECO Calibration Workshop if calibration requirement is within its approved calibration scope. Outside approved calibration agencies if calibration requirement is out of respective VAECO Calibration Workshop via LGD.
c.
d.
6.
Define the calibration requirements: Tool controller shall check and define the calibration requirements for each CRTE as below: a. b. Complete a Calibration/ repair/ maintenance request for T&E (VAECO Form 7001). Request of calibration is defined base on: Manufacturers document; Usage condition, frequency of use; The technical status of the CRTE; Result of previous calibration (if any). Receiving inspection and acceptance of CRTE after being calibrated at outside calibration agencies shall be carry out IAW 8.8.5.2. Tool controller shall evaluate, analyze the calibration result specified in calibration certificate and/or finding report of CRTE. All necessary information shall be record into Calibration Result Evaluation Report (VAECO Form 7022). Tool controller shall attach Calibration Control Label (VAECO Form 0004) to the CRTE that calibrated from calibration agency other than VAECO if the CRTE meets the manufacturer requirements. Page 8.10-3
7.
Inspect and evaluate the calibration result a. b.
c.

d.
If the CRTE is determined to be out of tolerance, Tool controller shall attach Tool/ Equipment Unserviceable Tag (VAECO Form 0002) and report to respective Calibration workshop manager. The unserviceable CRTE shall be kept in separated area and to be handled as one of the following solutions: Send it to manufacturer for repair/ calibration. Redefine the CR Tool/ Equipment's range/ functions. Condemning the item if not economically repairable. If the CRTE was determined to have been out of allowable tolerance by more than twice the value, the tools and equipment control personnel of respective Calibration Workshop will initiate the Significant Out of Tolerance Report (VAECO Form 7009) and send to the EGD and QAD to determine if there could be any adverse effect on any maintenance tasks that used this CRTE. If any adverse condition could exist, the EGD will issue an Engineering Order to: reexamine or to re-perform the maintenance tasks. If the article has already left the VAECO, the customer shall be notified of any potential problems. For a multi-functioned measure/ test equipment, when one or more independence functions do not meet the manufacturer's specification then remain functions of the measure/ test equipment may be accepted to be used. When measuring and test equipment is out of manufacturer's tolerance, it can be used for other purpose. The procedure of defining the limited functions or changing the usage purpose of measuring and test equipment as follows: The Tool controller records all information related to limited functions or the change of usage purpose of the measuring and test equipment in a Function/ Usage Purpose Change Request (VAECO Form 7008) and submits it to Calibration Workshop manager. Calibration Workshop manager sends the Function / usage purpose change request with all related documents to EG Director. EG Director shall examine, evaluate and approve to use the measuring and test equipment with limited functions or the change of usage purpose. Based on the approval of EGD, the Tool controller shall clearly specify the limited functions or the change of usage purpose of this measure/ test equipment into a Usage Notice (VAECO Form 0016) attached to the tool/ equipment. A Caution Label (VAECO Form 0019) is also affixed to the tool/ equipment for attention.
e.
8.
Define the limited functions of CRTE or change their purpose of use a.
b. c.
9.
Expiry and Lost Page 8.10-4

a.
Respective Calibration Workshop will send Overdue Calibration Notice (VAECO Form 7005) to the related department/ center to announce of any CRTE that overdue calibration date but have not been sent for calibration and request to be received as soon as possible such CRTE. The overdue calibration date CRTE shall be attached with Tool/ Equipment Un-serviceable Tag (VAECO Form 0002) and kept in separated area. If the CRTE has been reported lost, the CRTE shall be removed from the CRTE list (by update the status of that tool in AMASIS) within 15 days. The file of that CRTE shall be kept 2 years since the lost date. If it is later found, the tool controller shall check the CRTE documents and status to confirm the serviceability and traceability before acceptance. All the leased/borrowed CRTE shall be inspected and accepted in accordance with 8.8.5. Tool controller will check the date of the last calibration and the date of the next calibration to ensure that calibration interval does not exceed the applicable manufacturer's and/or VAECO's requirements. The leased/ borrowed CRTE will be labeled, tagged and controlled in the same manner as those items VAECO owns.
b.
10. Control of Leased/ Borrowed CRTE a. b.
c.
11. Calibration of CRTE in VAECO Calibration Laboratory: Calibration of CRTE in VAECO shall be carried out IAW procedure 8.11. 12. Calibration in the site other than VAECO Calibration Laboratory a. For the CRTE that is not able to move to the Calibration Laboratory due to the size or the characteristic of the CRTE, the calibration staff may perform the calibration at the equipment location. Such calibration shall be done only when there is no influence of the environment to CRTE.
b. 8.10.5.2
Calibration interval verification of CRTE provided by customer. 1. When receiving customers provided CRTE, Tool controller shall accept the CRTE in according with procedure 8.8. Tool controller shall also ensure that CRTE has valid customers certified stamp/ label and calibration is traceable to NIST/ ILAC. The customer provided CRTE can only be utilized on the maintenance activities of their own aircraft provided it has been verified according to the above procedure and has affixed on the CRTE both customers certification label/ stamp and VAECO Calibration Control label (VAECO Form 0004). CRTE are handled, packed, preserved and stored in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. The following precautions are to be Page 8.10-5
2.
8.10.5.3
Handling, packing, preservation and storage of CRTE 1.

observed by all personnel concerned with the handling, movement, preservation and storage of CRTE. a. b. c. 2. 3. To ensure that appropriate containers are to be used during movement of equipment. Anti-vibration mountings are to be clamped, or sufficiently "damped" to eliminate excessive movement within the transit case. The transit case is to be secured during transportation and is to be hand held if it is small in size.
Protection against deterioration or damage to CRTE in transit or storage is to be provided.. The following factors are to be considered when deciding on the method of packaging: a. b. c. Physical Properties - Size, shapes, weight, etc. Hazard - Impact during handling, chemical properties, radiation properties, etc. Climatic protection-Rain, heat, etc.
4.
Packaged CRTE is to be provided with identification and detailed nomenclature in the form of labels and stickers. Precautionary labels such as "Fragile" and "Keep Upright" are to be used when required. For packaging of fragile and delicate equipment, the minimum requirement is to have 4" protecting space filled with sponge all round. Storage of electronic CRTE is followed the recommendation specified in the manufacturer manuals. However, where there is no specific storage requirements mentioned, a basic air-conditioned room would suffice.
5.
8.10.6
ARCHIVES The Calibration workshop shall maintain records of calibrated equipment for a period of two (2) years from date of last calibration.
Page 8.10-6

PART 8 MAINT. SUPPORT PROC. 8.11 CALIBRATION AT VAECO CALIBRATION LABORATORY
8.11 8.11.1
CALIBRATION AT VAECO CALIBRATION LABORATORY PURPOSE To establish procedure for calibrating tools and equipment that required calibration (CRTE) IAW applicable regulations.
8.11.2
SCOPE This procedure applied for calibration activities in VAECO approved calibration laboratory.
8.11.3
DEFINITION 1. 2. Measuring Standard Device: The device used to calibrate CRTE or other lower measurement standard and provide traceability. Reference Standard: This is the highest metrological standard available from which all applicable calibrations are conducted. These standards shall be traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) of U.S.A. or national standards acceptable to the FAA. Working Standards: Those standards are usually calibrated against a Reference Standard and routinely utilized to calibrate CRTE. Traceability: The traceability of the CRTE means the property of a result of a measurement whereby it can be traceable to, generally national or international standards, through an unbroken chain of comparisons. All VAECO CRTE must maintain traceability to National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) of U.S.A. or national standards acceptable to the FAA. Respective Manager of calibration workshop is responsible to: a. b. c. Determine the periodicity for calibration. It shall be in accordance with manufacturers recommendation. Determine the due date for calibration. Determine the calibration standard and tolerance, where applicable. It shall be in accordance with OEMs specification/ manual or specifications/ standard such as ISO 6789-2003, Fed Spec GGG-W686C, MIL-STD-45662A, BS959-1950 or national standards. Any exceptions shall be indicated accordingly. Performing calibration for the CRTE at VAECOs calibration laboratory within the approved scope of work.
3. 4.
8.11.4
RESPONSIBILITY 1.
d. 2.
Quality audit manager is responsible for verifying that calibration agency is authorized by Airworthiness Authorities. Calibration agencies approved by ILAC members or NIST according to ISO 17025 or OEM authorized source are accepted. The calibration personnel shall ensure that environmental condition for the intended calibration meets all applicable regulations. The Page 8.11-1
8.11.5
PROCEDURE 1.

environmental control follows the procedure specified in Calibration Laboratory operation manual. 2. 3. The accuracy of CRTE shall be in accordance with the manufacturer or industrial standard. If there is no manufacturer calibration procedure available, the respective Calibration Laboratory shall use the following methods: a. b. c. d. American national industrial standard specifications. The industrial standards based on manufacturers specifications and approved by the Authority. The standards developed by VAECO based on manufacturers specifications and approved by the Authority. Coordinate with the manufacturer to develop the necessary procedure and receive a written acceptance from the manufacturer regarding the test and/or calibration procedure specification.
4.
The calibration shall be performed by the calibration staff according to the procedures in Calibration Laboratory Operation Manual. The calibration procedures include the following: a. b. c. d. Specific item or group of CRTE to which the procedure is applicable. Identification of calibration points and environmental requirements. Description of the scope, principle, and theory of the calibration method. A list of standards and other Correlation Test Equipment (CTE) required to perform the calibration, nomenclature, manufacturer, model number, serial number, and accuracy of such CTE must be recorded for future references. Detailed step-by-step instructions for performing the calibration. Specific instructions and data sheet for obtaining and recording the test data.
e. f. 5.
After calibration, the CRTE meets the defined calibration requirement the calibration staff shall issue Calibration Certificate and Calibration Stamp (VAECO Form 0021). a. b. VAECO Calibration Stamp shall indicate the serial number and calibration expiry date. The Calibration Certificate shall include following information: Name, Model, P/N, S/N v.v.; Certificate Number; Calibration Date; Calibration Environmental Conditions; Calibration Standards and procedure; Calibration due date (for the VAECO CRTE);
Page 8.11-2

Name and signature of the authorized person. 6. The Calibration Stamp shall be affixed on the obviously visual place of the equipment. When affixing the Calibration Stamp is impractical due to the size, shape, or other characteristics of the CRTE the Calibration Stamp may be affixed on the container or the box of the CRTE for recognition. If the CRTE does not meet the defined calibration requirements the calibration staff shall issue Tool/ Equipment Unserviceable Tag (VAECO Form 0002), Calibration Report and return this CRTE to the user. All the discrepancies, modification and calibration result shall be recorded in Calibration Report. The T&E control staff shall check the CRTE status and all concerned document before sending to the user with the original Calibration Certificate.
7.
8. 9.
8.11.6
ARCHIVES Copy of Calibration Certificate; Calibration Report and concerned data are archived at least 2 years since the calibration date.
Page 8.11-3

PART 8 MAINT. SUPPORT PROC. 8.12 MATERIAL PRODUCTION
8.12 8.12.1
MATERIALS PRODUCTION PURPOSE To establish procedure to produce materials used for aircraft/ aircraft component maintenance.
8.12.2
SCOPE This procedure is applied for producing of nitrogen and distilled water with standard/ specification specified in maintenance data.
8.12.3
RESPONSIBILITY 1. 2. Director of LGD is responsible for requesting CMC for production. Director of CMC is responsible for producing and controlling the conformity of the product to standard/ specification requesting by LGD.
8.12.4 8.12.4.1
PROCEDURE Production request Upon receiving request for materials form maintenance centers, LGD shall issue request and send to CMC for production.
8.12.4.2 8.12.4.3
Work request and Working instruction The WR (VAECO Form 7014) is issued by CTPD and send to related shop. Production 1. 2. 3. CTPD shall issue Working instruction base on instruction manual of equipment used for production in order to clearly specify work step. The shop staff shall follow Working instruction to produce the requested materials. The shop staff shall monitor the producing process to verify a proper quality of the materials. Samples of consumable materials are taken every six months and sent to Accredited Testing Laboratory for analyzing. The result is reviewed and evaluated by CM Department in order to ensure products technical requirements are satisfied. If the analyzing result is shown unsatisfied, the production of related materials is stopped for corrective action. The production equipment is checked and repaired as required. Sample of consumable materials are taken after corrective action and sent to an approved organization for analyzing. The result is reviewed and evaluated again by CM Department prior to issue the Certificate of Conformity.
8.12.4.4
Quality management and COC issuance 1.
2.
3.
Page 8.12-1

PART 8 MAINT. SUPPORT PROC. 8.12 MATERIAL PRODUCTION
8.12.4.5
Products handover The products are put in delivering area of the shops and attached with Certificate of Conformity.
8.12.5
ARCHIVES 1. 2. The result of sample analyzing is archived for five years. The original WR and the Certificate of Conformity are kept at least five years in the CMC.
Page 8.12-2

PART 8 MAINT. SUPPORT PROC. 8.13 TRANSFER OF TOOL AND EQUIPMENT FOR MAINTENANCE
8.13 8.13.1
TRANSFER OF TOOL AND EQUIPMENT FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSE To ensure the necessary tools and equipments are available for maintenance activities.
8.13.2
SCOPE This procedure is applied to transfer tools and equipments for aircraft/ aircraft component maintenance.
8.13.3
RESPONSIBILITY 1. 2. 3. 4. Directors of Maintenance Centers are responsible for request the T&E transfer to carry out the work arising during maintenance. Directors of MCC is responsible for requesting T&E transfer to carry out WO issued by MCC. Directors of CMCs are responsible for transferring the T&E to support the maintenance activities. Directors of LGD is responsible for transport the T&E as requested by CMCs. Whenever scheduling the WO, MCC planner should check for requirements of tool and equipment. To rectify the defect, RTS staff should define the necessary tool and equipment. When a required tool/ equipment is available in store but not in the same station where the maintenance activity is to be carried out. MCC/ Maintenance centers shall create a Requisition Form on AMASIS and notify to local CMC and MCC. The receipt of the tool/ equipment transfer request shall be immediately confirmed in the urgent cases (by telephone, for example). The T&E transfer request should include the following information: a. b. c. 5. P/N, description, quantity of the tool / equipment to be transferred. Original place and the destination of the tool. Time, date when the maintenance activity take place.
8.13.4
PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3.
4.
The local CMC will issue a Delivery Note (DN) and inform to the CMC who keeping the tool/ equipment for preparation and to LGD for cooperation. The CMC staff shall base on Requisition Form issue a DN of T&E transfer in AMASIS. The DN shall be printed, signed by CMC staff and LGD staff, a copy of signed DN shall be attached with the tool/ equipment. The LGD staff shall update the information of transportation means (Flight No., date, time) in the AMASIS. Upon receiving the tool/ Page 8.13-1
6.
7.

PART 8 MAINT. SUPPORT PROC. 8.13 TRANSFER OF TOOL AND EQUIPMENT FOR MAINTENANCE
equipment at destination, LGD shall inform to local CMC for receiving it. The hand-over of tool/ equipment shall be acknowledged by signatures of LGD staff and CMC staff on DN. 8. Tool controller of the respective CMC shall make a receive acceptance on AMASIS and inform to maintenance center for borrowing.
9. The local CMC has responsibility of controlling the lend tool/ equipment as registration in borrowing record sheet (VAECO Form 7045/ 7046). After the maintenance task accomplishment, the maintenance center who use the tool/ equipment shall return it to the local CMCs tool store. 10. The local CMC shall return the tool/ equipment to the original place (the returning procedure including hand-over, transportation, receiving, acceptance of the tool/ equipment shall be performed the same as the sending procedure). 11. If the maintenance activity is carried out at outstation, the responsible maintenance center should assign a staff to receipt, control the tool and return the tool to the original place. 8.13.5 ACHIVES The DN of tool/ equipment transfer shall be kept at the delivers office for at least 6 months since delivery date.
Page 8.13-2

PART 9 LOGISTICS PROCEDURES
PART 9
LOGISTICS PROCEDURES
Page 9-1

PART 9 LOGISTICS PROCEDURES 9.1 PART/ MATERIALS INCOMING INSPECTION & RECEIVING
9.1 9.1.1
PART/ MATERIALS INCOMING INSPECTION & RECEIVING PURPOSE To ensure aircraft part/ materials are inspected and accepted IAW applicable requirements.
9.1.2
SCOPE This procedure is applied for incoming inspection of aircraft part/ materials used for maintenance performed by the VAECO.
9.1.3
RESPONSIBILITIES 1. The Logistics Directors is responsible for ensuring the incoming inspection process carried out properly by Store Inspector or authorized personnel. Any discrepancy found during incoming inspection of part/ materials shall be directly reported to the Logistics Director and the Quality Assurance Director by the person performing the incoming inspection. Ramp Maintenance Centers is responsible for receiving part/ materials for VNA at outstation upon request with the support of LGD.
2.
3. 9.1.4 9.1.4.1
GENERAL DOCUMENT REQUIREMENT Certificate(s) and document accepted by VAECO for aircraft part/ materials which used in maintenance for VNA aircrafts. 1. 2. Certificate and document specified in VNA MME para. 2.5.3. Re-certified Certificate (VAECO Form 5001).
9.1.4.2
Certificate/s and document accepted by VAECO for aircraft part/ materials which used in maintenance for aircraft under approval of CAAV (other than VNA aircrafts). 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. CAAV Form 1 EASA Form 1 FAA Form 8130-3. Re-certified Certificate (VAECO Form 5001). Approval Certificates: a. b. 2. 3. Compliance Certificate (C of C) or Equivalent Certificates issued by Manufacturers which approved by CAAV.
9.1.4.2.1 All new and used aircraft parts shall require one of document as follows:
9.1.4.2.2 New aircraft materials, standard parts shall require:
Copies of Certificates of Compliance if approved by the Head of QA of Supplier or a Suppliers authorized person. All the requirements of materials, standard parts, include storage conditions, self-life, fire proof, stated in: Page 9.1-1

a. b. c. 4.
Certificate of Compliance, or Related documents (Laboratory Test Report, Analyst Certificate etc.); or Printed in the cover of the materials
Specific requirements of materials, standard parts must be stated in Certificates/ Documents in following cases: a. b. The fire-proof ability of materials used in cabin such as: sewing threads, cloths to cover seats, curtains, carpet. etc. Storage condition, shelf life of chemical substances, rubber rings, etc.
Note 1. Other form of an serviceable document, such as a Serviceable Tag issued by a CAAV Operator will be accepted by VAECO for aircraft part/ materials which used in maintenance for aircraft under approval of CAAV. Note 2. All certificates are original or certified as true copy. In a number of cases, certificates issued with an electronic signature or printed without a signature will be accepted upon getting an approval of QAD. 9.1.4.3 Certificates and document accepted by VAECO (for aircraft part/ materials which used in maintenance for aircraft under approval of FAA). 1. 2. 3. A completed FAA Form 8130-3, FAA Form 8130-4 (For Engines) Airworthiness Approval Tag; or A completed EASA Form 1, Authorized Release Certificate; or Certificate of Conformity (for expendable/ consumable parts or materials).
9.1.4.3.1 All new parts or materials received shall require one of document as follows:
9.1.4.3.2 All repaired/ overhauled parts received may have documents that includes but is not limited to one of the followings: 1. 2. 3. 4. A properly executed FAA Form 337, Major Repair or Alteration Form; or A completed FAA Form 8130-3, Airworthiness Approval Tag; or FAA Certificated Repair Stations Approval for Return to Service Tag. If the parts have been maintained by a nonFAA certificated facility, the WP must include the record of in-process inspection as required by the procedure found in Part 3, Chapter 5 of RSM/QCM.
Note 1. Other form of an serviceable document, such as a serviceable tag issued by a U.S. Air Carrier in accordance with their Continuous Airworthiness Maintenance Program will be accepted by VAECO for aircraft part/ materials which used in maintenance for aircraft under approval of FAA. Note 2. All certificates are original or certified as true copy. In a number of cases, certificates issued with an electronic signature or printed without a signature will be accepted upon getting an approval of QAD. Issue: 02, Revision: 04, Date: 28 NOV 2012 Page 9.1-2

9.1.4.4
Certificates and document for aircraft part/ materials which used in maintenance for aircraft under approval of authority other than CAAV and FAA shall be accepted by VAECO IAW approval/ acceptance of the authority. PROCEDURES Initial classification and assigning receiving area 1. 2. All incoming part/ materials shall be received at Incoming inspection area. For parts of large size, such as engine, engine modules, APU, cowling of all kinds, shall be directly delivered to related shop or storage area where the Store Inspector shall perform the inspection onsite. In addition, for large size package part/ materials or large quantity materials such as metal sheets, turbine oil can be inspected and/or unpacked outside of Incoming inspection area. The Store inspector shall be notified and receiving inspection shall be carried out immediately at the assigned location. Part/ materials shall be checked against the Delivery Order/ Note or Packing List. The Delivery Order/ Note shall quote the Purchase Order or Subcontract Order number against which the supplier is making a delivery. In the event of part/ materials being delivered without a reference to a Purchase/Subcontract Order and is not a customer furnished item the Supply Division Manager is to be consulted for disposition. All part/ materials shall be unpacked and checked that the Part Numbers, Description and Specification on the Delivery Order/ Note or Packing List and the physical items agree with that shown on the Purchase/ Subcontract Order hard copy. Except for description, all other details shall be the same. Store Inspector will verify that the quantities shown in the Delivery Order/ Packing List agree with that stated in the Purchase / Subcontract Order and with part/ materials which has been delivered. For shelf-life items, the date of manufacture must be clearly printed. Shelf-life expired item shall be rejected. Items with less than 2/3 remaining shelf-life shall be reported to Logistics Director for acceptance.
9.1.5 9.1.5.1
3.
4. 9.1.5.2
Initial receiving check 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
9.1.5.3
Receiving Inspection Receiving inspection of part and materials will be performed as follows except the cases specified in SOP 9.1.5.5; 9.1.5.6; 9.1.5.8 and 9.1.5.9. 1. 2. Only authorized Store Inspectors shall perform incoming inspections. Incoming material inspections shall include, but not limit to, the followings:
Page 9.1-3

a. b. c. d.
Verify part/ materials are supplied from approved sources. Check physical condition of part/ materials to ensure that there is no visual damages or distortions. Check packaging and containers meet ATA-300 standards or equivalence. Check information of part/ materials such as: model, part number, serial numbers and quantity conform to the shipping documents, orders. Verify accompanying documentation and certificates are valid and conform to the requirements of customers and Authorities as specified in 9.1.4. Part number and serial number of the aircraft part against a List of AD potentially applicable to engine, component (VAECO Form 3012) to determine the AD compliance status of checking part.
e.
f.
3.
Incoming part/ materials must be accompanied by certificates and documents. These documents shall be utilized for determining the materials is airworthy and originates from approved sources. If this is missing, the part/ materials is to be held in Quarantine area until the approved certificate/ release documents have been received. Incoming part/ materials that need to be shipped in low temperature such as pre-preg materials shall be checked as follows. If the incoming part/ materials fails to meet the following standards they will be rejected. a. b. c. d. Check the label for specification, data and time. Parts package shall be sealed in a clean and defect free bag to prevent contamination by foreign substance. Refrigeration condition (temperature limitation during shipping and storage) when refrigeration is required. Sign of any residual cooling materials (e.g. dry ice). NOTE: If there is any sign of over temperature condition after transportation, the inspection procedures must be followed strictly. If the transport storage condition is not following manufacturer standard, the transported time must be subtracted from the allowable time storage.
4.
5. 6.
Life limited or used aircraft part/ components must be accompanied by historical documents that show the components serviceability limits. Assemblies such as landing gear, engines and APUs, etc. must be accompanied by: a. b. c. A list of LRUs that include: part numbers, serial numbers, life limits and release certificates if receiving the new articles. Other document required by customers if receiving used articles. List of missing parts upon shop visit. For VNA engine, landing gear and APUs, if the list of missing parts (reported by the repair/ Page 9.1-4

overhaul organization upon receiving) is differed from that created by VAECO when sending, the EGD shall inform LGD the discrepancies. 7. 8. For parts have been maintained by a noncertificated facility, Store Inspector shall inform QC Division for inspection and acceptance. Part/ materials control a. Receiving control numbers (GRN) will be automatically generated by AMASIS at the time of computer input of components and materials information. Original certificates, documents of part/ materials are stored and controlled by receiving control number (GRN). The number is also put on the Serviceable Tag of the part/ materials in order to identify its receiving folder as required. After accepted by the Store Inspector a Serviceable/Un-Serviceable Tag (VAECO Form 0005) or Serviceable Tag (VAECO Form 0007) shall be used corresponding to rotable part or consumable part/ materials. All associated information including of GRN, part number, quantity, information of storage limit/ life limit, etc. must be entered into AMASIS. For the HT/ LLP, the store inspector shall calculate and adjust the manufacture/ maintenance date to be entered in AMASIS in order to ensure that the next due date is the same as actual due date specified in the Airworthiness Certificate or due date based on AMS/ CMS whichever is sooner. For emergency equipment to be installed on VNA aircrafts, Store Inspector shall refer to procedure 12.13 for more requirements. After inspection, part/ materials shall be appropriately tagged.
b.
c.
d.
e. f. 9.
If a discrepancy found during part/ materials incoming inspection, a Discrepancy Report (VAECO Form 4004) will be raised to notify the appropriate party for corrective actions. All items with any discrepancy shall be held in Quarantine area waiting for further action IAW para 9.1.5.10. Any suspected part/ materials shall be quarantined in separated area for investigation. The Store Inspector shall describe the noncompliance using SUP Report (VAECO Form 4007). A detailed procedure for handling Suspect Unapproved Parts is contained in procedure 10.13. Customer supplied part/ materials shall be received and inspected in accordance with the procedures similar to incoming inspection procedure for VAECO part/ materials.
9.1.5.4
Suspected Unapproved Parts 1.
2. 9.1.5.5
Receiving customers part/ materials other than VNA 1.
Page 9.1-5

2.
Aircraft part/ materials not meeting the requirements of Section 9.1.5.3 shall be quarantined. Nonconformities shall be recorded in Discrepancy Report (VAECO Form 4004) and notified to customer. Customer part/ materials control a. After receiving customer part/ materials, Store Inspector shall input the data into specific control software and print out a record of the data. The Store Inspector accepts part/ materials by signing and stamping on Aircraft parts acceptance sheet (VAECO Form 4006). A copy shall be made and attached to the part/ materials to show its completion of receiving inspection.
3.
b.
9.1.5.6
Receiving of VAECO and VNAs part/ materials at Outstation. 1. In case of part/ materials replacement at Outstations, part/ materials receiving procedure from partners/ supplier shall be complied. Authorized staff of RMC carries out the following steps: a. b. Verifies the correction of provided part/ materials in comparison with the part/ materials requisition; In case of discrepancy in P/N and/or specification of part/ materials with the part/ materials requisition, the authorized staff reviews the related A/C manufacturers documents to confirm the interchangeability; Checks Physical condition of part/ materials; Collects and sends all the related documents/ certificates of part/ materials to LGD. via FAX and annotation information attached (original or the copy of release documents/ certificates); If part/ materials is accepted by LGD, performing the part/ materials installation in accordance with regulation and recording into Technical log for performed work, co-operating with the related RTPD, sending a PHOTOCOPY of Technical log, attached the original copy (or true copy) of certificates and documents related to part/ materials to LGD promptly.
c. d.
e.
2.
After receiving of part/ materials certificates/ documents with annotation information from authorized staff, LGD carries out: a. b. c. Evaluating of part/ materials certificates/ documents adequacy and validation in comparison with requirements; In case the part/ materials meets requirements, LGD sends temporary GRN of part/ materials to authorized staff by FAX; In case the related part/ materials certificates/ documents is insufficient for acceptance, to avoid AOG situation of aircraft, LGD may temporarily accept the part/ materials then provide temporary GRN to the authorized staff, if following conditions are satisfied: part/ materials accompanied with serviceable documents, which declare the part/ materials is serviceable;
Page 9.1-6

Organization, which issues the serviceable document for part/ materials, is not included in the List of Banned or Restricted Air Carrier/ Airlines announced by FAA and/or EASA; Part/ materials serviceable label (or documents) quotes reference number of original release certificate, and sufficient information to confirm Shelf life/ Life limit etc. (if any). d. The Store inspector carries out the following: Re-inspect to confirm the validation of the original release certificate and other related documents of part/ materials. Complete part/ materials acceptance procedure and entry information into AMASIS; Keep original release certificate and relevant documents in file with GRN generated by AMASIS; Keep FAXED release certificate and relevant documents in file with temporary GRN which have been issued; Record temporary and official GRN into both original and FAX release certificate; 3. In case part/ materials was accepted based on the serviceable label (or documents): a. b. Authorized staff clearly records into Technical Log that part/ materials are temporary used. LGD contacts contractor/ supplier to collect relevant certificates/ documents within 30 flight hours or right after aircraft come back to main base. If those certificates/ documents are insufficiently provided or unsatisfied, LGD informs MCC to request the related RMC to remove part/ materials from the aircraft. In case, certificates/ documents are sufficiently provided and satisfied, LGD updates information into AMASIS and keeps records. LGD also informs MCC to request related RMC for confirming in Technical Log the official usage of part/ materials before the deadline of the temporary usage.
c.
9.1.5.7
Incoming inspection for returned serviceable part/ materials. 1. The RTS staff should confirm the their serviceable status by signed and stamped on Stock Requisition (VAECO Form 4024) before returning unused expendable part and materials to store. The incoming inspection shall be carried out by Store Inspector as follows: a. b. Make sure that the returned consumable materials must be in good, clean status and still in original package. Base on attached documents such as Serviceable Tag/ Issued Slips, inspect the returned part/ materials. If expendable part/ materials status cannot be verified the part/ materials must be isolated as Unserviceable. Page 9.1-7

c. 2.
In case missing Serviceable Tag, Store Inspector shall issue a new one based on GRN and original certificates. If part is still in storage and good condition then the part shall be accepted with Serviceable Tag. if part has been used on an aircraft or next high assembly then the part shall be accepted with a Recertified Certificate (VAECO Form 5001).
For rotable part: a. b.
9.1.5.8
Incoming inspection of Pool or Loan aircraft part. The incoming inspection shall be carried out following the process as specified in para. 9.1.5.3 and Store Inspector shall issue a Loan Part Tag (VAECO Form 0015) or VNA POOL TAG and attach to the part.
9.1.5.9
Incoming inspection of lease/ loan component/ part removed from an aircraft of an operator other than VNA aircraft part. 1. Applying only for the component/ part removed from customers aircraft after lease/ loan if VAECO retains control of the airworthiness status of the components and the airworthy condition can be controlled. Incoming inspector should confirm the requirement specified in SOP 9.1.5.3(2.b, 2.c & 2.d) and 9.1.5.9(3) are met. The following information must be documented by the customer: a. b. c. 4. Information of required maintenance and defects arisen during operating is performed IAW approved maintenance data, and Information of service time accumulation (FH, FC, calendar day) and/ or preservation time (applied for shelf-life, HT and/or LLP), and Information of applicable AD/ SB performance during lease/ loan time.
2. 3.
The component/ part shall accompany with the Serviceable tag or equivalent document of customer. Note: The component/ part returned to VAECO after loan will not accepted for installation on US registered A/C.
9.1.5.10
Discrepancy Reporting and Part/ materials rejecting 1. Discrepancies found during incoming inspection include, but not limited to: a. b. c. d. e. No technical certificate, No purchase orders; Incorrect quantity, Incorrect description, Incorrect part number; Incorrect serial number; Fails, broken, distorted; Incorrect packing IAW ATA-300. Differences in the list of missing parts reported by repair/ overhaul agency with the list reported by VAECO. Page 9.1-8

2.
In the incoming inspection process, if an discrepancy is found, Store Inspector makes Discrepancy Report (VAECO Form 4004) and send to Supply Division Manager/ HCM Logistics Division Manager/ Logistics Director for handling. The Supply Division/ HCM Logistics Division checks the information in the Discrepancy report against the original orders and contact the supplier to resolve. Based on receiving information from supplier, Supply Division / HCM Logistics Division are going to fill entry in Directed by the Logistics Director in Discrepancy Report and sent to Logistics Director for approval. In the case damage found on container/ packing, Store Inspector need to follow these steps: a. b. c. All container/ packing must be checked carefully before opening for any damage dispostion. If there is any damage Store Inspector must take at least two sets of photos. If the part/ materials is not affected then the process continues to work normally and 02 sets of photos can be destroyed or kept as evidence of bad transportation services. If the part/ materials is damaged, Store Inspector must take photos. Then add photos to outside of damaged part/ materials and another photos to discrepancy report. Those documents are sent to Supply Division/ HCM Logistics Division Manager after registering to document tracking discrepancy and take a control number. The second photos are attached with a copy of discrepancy report with controlled number and kept in Store Control Section. Part/ materials with copy discrepancy report will kept in separate area for handling.
3.
4.
d.
e. f. 5.
The open Discrepancy Reports must be checked by Store Inspector everyday. If after 04 weeks has not received instructions, Store Inspector contacts Supply Division/ HCM Logistics Division to remind them. After 08 weeks, Store Inspector must report directly to Logistics Director for the guidance. Supply Division/HCM Logistics Division will return to Store Inspectors discrepancy report after completing the Instruction of Director of Logistics Department and approval necessary. Instructions will permit Store Inspector accept part/ materials or reject by returning to Supplier with writing approval for implementation. Monthly, Supply Division/ HCM Logistics Division makes synthesis report of discrepancy of incoming inspection and send to Logistics Director and Quality Assurance Director. Discrepancy reports and synthesis discrepancy report are kept in Supply Division/ HCM Logistics Division for at least 1 years from the closed date of discrepancy . Page 9.1-9
6.
7.
8.

9.1.6
ARICHIVES The original certificates and documents shall be stored separately. Original certificates and documents shall be stored in receiving files in sequence of GRN and retained by the Logistics Department for at least 2 years after the aircraft/ component is removed from operation.
Page 9.1-10

PART 9 LOGISTICS PROCEDURES 9.2 PART/ MATERIALS TAGGING, ARRANGEMENT, PRESERVING
9.2 9.2.1
PART/ MATERIALS TAGGING, ARRANGEMENT, PRESERVING PURPOSE To establish a procedure to tag, arrange and preserve part/ materials IAW applicable requirement from manufacturers.
9.2.2
SCOPE This procedure is applied for all aircraft parts and materials used for maintenance activities.
9.2.3
RESPONSIBILITIES Director of LGD is responsible for ensuring that the tagging, arrangement and preservation of spare parts/ materials is performed IAW this procedure.
9.2.4 9.2.4.1
PROCEDURE Tagging 1. All part/ materials have passed the incoming inspection must be properly identified by tagging. Identification may include: a. Serviceable Tag for Rotable Parts (VAECO Form 0005/Left hand section): used to identify the serviceable status of rotable parts and serialized/ repaired expendable parts. Serviceable Tag for Expendable/Consumable Item (VAECO Form 0007): used to identify the serviceable status of consumable or expendable parts/ materials. Consumable Release Tag (VAECO Form 0008): used for individual items from a batch. The information from the larger batch will be transcribed from the batch Serviceable Tag.
b.
c.
2.
The Serviceable tag is attached to part/ materials. Copy of accompanied certificate is also tagged to rotable parts, serialized/ repaired expendable parts. Consumable Parts shall have GRN on each cover bag/ can/ box to prevent improper preservation and distribution. [deleted]. For Electro Static Discharge Sensitive (ESDS) component, ESDS stickers are attached on the outside of container where it is easy to see for awareness. After inspection and acceptance, part/ materials are directly transferred to the suitable store or put on the rack marked Awaiting location. Part/ materials of customers other than VNA, after being inspected, will be kept with their original tags in dedicated location. Position of aircraft part/ materials are arranged depending to type, owner IAW manufacturers instruction and store facilities.
3. 4. 5.
6. 7. 9.2.4.2
Locating 1.
Page 9.2-1

2.
Aircraft part/ materials store of maintenance center located at suitably position and are monitored by LGD to avoid affecting of environment factor. Storage position of aircraft part/ materials must be assured for keeping in good condition to avoid physical damage Part/ materials arrangement is according to location specified in control system of Logistics Department. Location is showed on computer and written on Serviceable tags (VAECO Form 0005 or VAECO Form 0007) and on the outside of the containers if possible. When putting either barrel or box or baggage into certain place, it has to make sure that all tags are easy to be found, each container will be placed in order, from the bottom to the top. Only a light part/ materials can be put on top of other boxes, containers, carton boxes. If there is a space, it is not recommended to do so. If there is a symbol such as an arrow or umbrella on the outside of a box or a bag, it is restricting to follow the instruction. Part/ materials of the customers shall be stored in specific area. Part/ materials were preserved in box/ container IAW ATA-300 standard. Identification tag attached to each box/ container on rack must be identified from corridor/ path. Box/ container of part/ materials must be arranged IAW manufacturers requirements. Aircraft part/ materials in box/ container at working area must be attached related control document. Controller at working area need regularly check to assure that aircraft part/ materials were preserved IAW manufacturers requirements. Bonded store was segregated completely from working area and keep preservation environment IAW manufacturers requirements. Temperature and humidity in preservation area maintain strictly IAW manufacturers requirements and temperature and humidity must be recorded daily. In case not require perseveration temperature below environment temperature, temperature and humidity must be maintain reasonably. Part/ materials which have numerous or big size are arranged on suitable rack to avoid damage or distortion. Control sheet metal, composite after cutting to use a part a. If rest part is considered continuing use, store inspector will issue new VAECO Form 0007 base on last VAECO Form 0007 attached to rest part. If the rest part is considered not continuing use, store inspector will issue new VAECO Form 0009 attached to rest part
3. 4.
5.
6. 7. 8. 9.2.4.3 1.
Preservation (Storage)
2.
3.
4. 5.
b.
Page 9.2-2

6.
Part/ materials store of maintenance center located at suitably position and are monitored by LGD to avoid affecting of environment factor. Storage position of part/ materials must be assured for keeping in good condition to avoid physical damage It is recommended by using access ladder for reaching the high rack for safety, not climbing on it and probably dropping parts and materials Moreover, for some special part/ materials, the preservation procedure has to follow as below: a. Carpets preservation: Carpets and rolls of fabric are not kept straight up. If possible, they should be kept separately and rotated 90 every 06 months to prevent being crushed and wrinkle. Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive (ESDS) parts preservation: All ESDS parts have to be stored in containers completely insulated from metal objects. They should be preserved in containers ATA300, and All parts marked ESDS are handled with care during load/unload, transport, inspection Wrist bracelet connected to the ESDS test bench is always worn. The condition of bracelet has to be inspected and recorded as instruction on the ESDS test bench. c. Air cylinder preservation: Make sure that all indicators and valves of passengers/crews oxygen cylinders are protected with the cover/ cap, grease free as well All air cylinders are stored inside dark rooms to avoid fire and explosion. Those rooms have to be equipped air-conditioners and humidifiers. d. Wheels and tires preservation Tires are kept away from the direct sunshine. Wheels are preserved on the racks. The pressure of wheel during preservation is not excess of 20% operational pressure. e. Tubes, mattress, and other materials preservation. All tubes are attached on flat wood pad for keeping their original shape. Similarly, all big mattresses are either appended on flat plywood pads, or carton pads, or hung on with their racks, like tires, they have to be rotated to prevent crush. All the naked ends of electric cables have to be waxed or taped to avoid oxidizing.
7. 8.
b.
Page 9.2-3

It should have hooks for hanging different hoses and long particular items, and rubbery items which have to be kept away from direct sunshine because of being damaged or reducing quality of parts and materials. For any parts and materials which contain liquid inside have to be spin and turned over frequently in order to make liquid running everywhere inside. It is not allowed using mercurial temperature indicators in stores. All excessive long, big cables, rubber hoses, and wires are not allowed rolling tighten to avoid twisting, and folding. It should have specific racks for storing metal plates. They have to be arranged separately along the longest edge to avoid scratch and damage. It has to be written down Goods Receipt Number on the surface so that the number wont be disappeared when the metal plate is cut as distributing. f. Battery preservation Battery has to be preserved in store that is vented and kept away from aircraft parts/ materials. Moreover, battery store shall be equipped with safety devices in case of overflowing of battery liquid accidentally. Full charged batteries are kept in separated area in the store. g. h. Engines preservation Engines shall be preserved IAW manufacturers requirements. Flammable materials store Paint, oil, chemicals, grease are preserved in bricked stores away from the main and have weakened roofs in case of explosion, the air and smoke will run through the weakened point on the roofs, it causes less dangerous for people and equipment if the smoke and air break the roofs and escape. The flammable materials stores are equipped with air conditioner to control temperature. The store are clean and dirt free. All metal boxes, vases, bottles are clean before preserving. All paint boxes have to be turned over every month showed in a diagram located all boxes position such as upside down. It avoids forming films impact on paint, and cause residue on the bottom. Preservation procedure has to be followed the manufactures and suppliers requirements. Refrigerator and air conditioner are used for preserving materials required down to minus 20 Celsius. All information related to other part/ materials preservation maybe referenced to Commercial Materials Listing-CML.
Page 9.2-4

PART 9 LOGISTICS PROCEDURES 9.3 SHELF LIFE PART/ MATERIAL CONTROL
9.3 9.3.1
SHELF LIFE PART/ MATERIALS CONTROL IN STORE PURPOSE To establish a procedure to control shelf life of aircraft part/ materials IAW applicable requirement from manufacturers.
9.3.2
SCOPE This procedures is applied for all aircraft parts/ materials used for maintenance activities.
9.3.3 9.3.4 9.3.4.1
RESPONSIBILITIES Logistics Director is responsible to carry out this procedure. PROCEDURE Control of shelf life aircraft parts/ materials 1. 2. 3. 4. Storage time for Shelf life aircraft parts/ materials is specified in its certificate/ label of manufacturer. Due date of shelf life aircraft parts/ materials are monitored through AMASIS. Monthly, Store Control section make a List of aircraft part/ materials to be expired (VAECO Form 4014) for controlling and processing. At the expired date, Store Control section does the necessary changing on the system and move the expired aircraft part/ materials to an isolated store waiting for disposition. When doing incoming inspection of aircraft parts, Store inspector must refer to List of aircraft component require maintenance (VAECO Form 1001) issued by EGD and enter the related information such as manufacture date, overhaul/ inspection date, TSN, CSN, TSO, CSO, TSI, CSI (as required) in AMASIS in order to ensure that the next due date is the same as actual due date specified in the Airworthiness Certificate or due date based on AMS/ CMS whichever is sooner. Store Control section shall monitor all the maintenance required aircraft parts/ materials, pay attention to the aircraft parts/ materials that will be expired on next month to take appropriate actions. At the expired date, Store Control section does the necessary changing on the system and move the expired aircraft part to store of unserviceable part waiting for sending to be maintained as required.
9.3.4.2
Control aircraft parts that are required maintenance during storage 1.
2.
3.
Page 9.3-1

PART 9 LOGISTICS PROCEDURES 9.4 ROBBERY (CANIBALIZATION) FROM STOCKED ASSEMBLY
9.4 9.4.1
ROBBERY (CANNIBALIZATION) FROM STOCKED ASSEMBLY PURPOSE To establish a procedure to control robbery of aircraft component/ part from stocked assembly IAW applicable requirements.
9.4.2
SCOPE This procedure is applied for assembly stocked in VAECO store which meet requirement to be robbed.
9.4.3
RESPONSIBILITIES 1. 2. Logistics Department is responsible to control robbery process of stocked assembly. Line and Base Maintenance Center is responsible to carry out robbery of aircraft component/ part.
9.4.4 9.4.4.1
PROCEDURE General 1. When aircraft has a defect, which cannot be rectified due to no replacement part available, a serviceable part can be robbed from other stocked Next Higher Assembly or APU or engine (here after called ASSEMBLY). This assembly can be either serviceable or unserviceable. A single aircraft component/ part (here after called ITEM) which can be robbed from stocked assembly may be rotable LRU with following characteristics. a. b. 3. Disassembly/re-assembly of the item is simple work and having no impact on storage condition of the robbed assembly. No requirement to test the assembly in maintenance shop to be carried out after the item is re-installed.
2.
Robbery can be carried out upon customer request. In another case, A robbery of an item from ENGINE should be permitted from the Customer (Technical Department and Supply Department for VNA ). When robbing an item from serviceable assembly, staff with appropriate authorization of the RMC or BMC must carry out following actions: a. b. c. d. e. Remove requested item from the assembly. Inspect the robbing item and then issue Re-certified Certificate (VAECO Form 5001) for the robbing item. Make/ update Missing Part List (VAECO Form 4008) and attach with Serviceable tag of robbed assembly; Raise an Non-Routine Card (VAECO Form 6001) giving details of the actions taken and attach with assembly. Raise a Request for Supply to LGD for a replacement of robbing item. Page 9.4-1
9.4.4.2
Robbery of an item from serviceable assembly 1.

PART 9 LOGISTICS PROCEDURES 9.4 ROBBERY (CANIBALIZATION) FROM STOCKED ASSEMBLY
f. 2.
Copy the NRC and Missing Part List and send to Dock Control/ Technical Record team of related TPD.
The staff of related TPD shall remove the robbing item from NHA (disassembly) or make a TAR and send to EGD for support to disassembly on AMASIS. Logistics Department carries out following actions: a. b. c. d. Issue a Serviceable Tag for robbing item with the GRN on the tag. Enter all details of the item into ROBBERY REGISTER. Make an order for the item as specified in Request for Supply. Keep the robbed manufacturer. assembly in condition as requested by
3.
4. 9.4.4.3
The installation of the item on the A/C shall be updated in AMASIS within 24 hours since actual action performance. To certify an item robbed from stored unserviceable assembly as serviceable, staff with appropriate authorization of the Maintenance Centers (RMC or BMC) must carry out following actions: a. Checking all information in related documents of unserviceable assembly to ensure that the failure of the assembly has no impact on the component; Inspect the robbing item to ensure that it is serviceable.
Robbery of an item from unserviceable assembly 1.
b. 2.
All actions such as: remove, inspect, issue Re-certified certificate and Missing Part List are the same as above. However, the status of robbing item should be changed to serviceable basing on Re-certified certificate. All information concerning with Robbery must be entered into ROBBERY REGISTER. Logistics Department will decide either to re-install the robbing item before sending the assembly to maintain/ repair or to install the robbing item during maintenance/repair process of the assembly. On receipt request form Logistic Department for re-certifying assembly as serviceable after a robbery, authorized staff of the RMC or BMC must carry out following actions: a. b. c. d. Re-installing component on robbed assembly as soon as possible. Checking assembly, issuing Re-certified certificate for the assembly. Clearly note: To carry out related inspections when install the assembly on aircraft in block 9 of the Re-certified certificate. Entering information of the re-installation into Non-Routine Card.
3.
9.4.4.4
Recertify serviceable assembly after robbery 1.
2.
Store Inspector performs acceptance inspection for assembly in accordance with Incoming Inspection procedure. Page 9.4-2

PART 9 LOGISTICS PROCEDURES 9.5 PART/ MATERIALS ISSUANCE
9.5 9.5.1
PART/ MATERIALS ISSUANCE PURPOSE To establish a procedure to deliver part/ materials for maintenance IAW applicable requirements.
9.5.2
SCOPE This procedure is applied for part/ materials delivery to maintenance centers or department within VAECO.
9.5.3
RESPONSIBILITIES 1. 2. Logistics Department is responsible to deliver right part/ materials upon request from VAECO maintenance centers or department. Maintenance Centers are responsible to receive part/ materials and transportation from store to maintenance workplace.
9.5.4 9.5.4.1
PROCEDURE Receiving A/C parts/ materials request. 1. In general, A/C parts/ materials request originate from a. b. c. d. BMC and RMC for aircraft maintenance and rectification of defects. EGD to implement AMS/ CMS task, AD, SB, MOD, other technical work and service orders from BDD. MCC to implement service orders from BDD. CMC to implement aircraft component maintenance/ repair/ overhaul; aviation product fabrication; or tool and equipment calibration/ maintenance/ repair.
2.
All information of required spares/ materials shall be input in AMASIS by the requester and request Logistics Department by using Request for Supply (VAECO Form 4023) or Stock Requisition (VAECO Form 4024). In emergency case, the requester can fill all required information of the spares/ materials in the Stock Requisition (VAECO Form 4024) and submit to the Logistics Department to get the spares/ materials. In this case the staff of Logistics Department shall input the information of requested spares/ materials in the AMASIS. Location and actual stock of spares/ materials in store will be check on AMASIS to ensure they are available. The spares/ materials shall be issued following FIFO (First In First Out) policy. FIFO policy must strictly obey, except: a. Delivering A/C part/ materials to outstations far away from main base. In this case, A/C part/ materials which have the longest expired date shall be delivered.
3.
9.5.4.2
Issue of part/ materials 1.
2.
Page 9.5-1

b.
In HAN and HCM, when delivering A/C part/ materials with an expired date, ensuring that the A/C part/ materials which has the shortest time to the expired date shall be delivered.
3.
The delivering of A/C part/ materials shall be performed by using Stock Requisition (VAECO Form 4024). 01 copy of requisition is sent to Store Control section, 01 copy is kept in the Store and 01 copy is attached with the delivered spares/ materials. Upon part/ materials issuing, all the responsibility of part/ materials status, transportation and handling belongs to the Receiver. The delivered consumable part/ materials shall be attached with a Consumable Release Tag (VAECO Form 0008). All information of consumable parts/ materials are transferred from a batch of part/ materials. The Serviceable Tag for Expendable/Consumable Item (VAECO Form 0007) shall be kept with the batch of part/ materials until they are completely run out. For MOD kit: Cannot deliver MOD kit components separately. To avoid AOG situation, delivering a part of MOD kit shall be approved by Manager of Stock Control Division or HCM General Materials Division. To take a part/ component out of a MOD Kit, the Robbery procedure shall be followed as specified in 9.4. For a WP such as Base Checks, Engine Replacement, LDG Replacement, based on spare parts/ materials requested from EGD: a. Stock Control Division must prepare the preload and send to HAN Store/HMC Logistics Division in 07 days before the WP started. Each task card, EO, SRO, WO should have a separate Stock Requisition. Store Division must issue spares/ materials with EP and CO type 03 days before the work is started. All these spares/ materials are preserved at a separate area and shall be delivered when there is a request from Maintenance Centers. The spares/ materials type AR are prepared but not issued. Whenever an AR spare/ material is required, the maintenance staff goes to the store to get it. Note: CO type is material (including Oil, Fuel, Hydraulic fluid, lock wire, cloth); EP type is non-chemical material/ spare (including seal/ filters...). The CO and EP materials/ spares must be used to carry out the task. AR type is spare that need if a defect is found when performing related tasks/ EO).
4. 5.
6.
7.
b.
8.
For a WO to perform an OOP task, EO, SRO at ramp maintenance, the respective RTPD creates a separate Stock Requisition (VAECO form 4024) for each WO. Based on spare parts/ materials requested from RMC, the Store Division issue all spares/ materials required to perform the WO. In case of part/ materials are insufficient Nil Stock or Not Stocked, Stock Control Division has to:
9.
Page 9.5-2

a. b.
Check the actual store status, adjust the supply capability and interchange between stores. Determine if there are options for parts interchange by sending Part Technical Relation Confirmation (VAECO Form 4011) to EGD and assess the reply information. If there is option for parts interchange then update the store data base in AMASIS and send the request to Store keeper for delivering. If there are not interchange parts, Stock Control Division shall make a supply request base on AMASIS Requisition form, the Request for Supply (VAECO Form 4023) and priority order of the part (ROUTINE, CRITICAL, AOG). For rotable parts which are repairable (type 4, 5 on AMASIS): Make a supply request to VNA Supply Department. For consumable part/ materials (Type 1,2,3,6 on AMASIS) make a supply request to Supply Division and update on AMASIS related information. For parts can be fabricated by VAECO, Stock Control Division/HMC Supply Division make an fabrication order with a request by customer and send to the appropriate maintenance center.
c. d.
9.5.4.3
Update information and follow up Upon the supply request is sent, Stock Control Division must do the following: 1. 2. 3. Check and update information for requested parts such as: ordering number, order date. on the control software system. On a weekly basis, make a list of requested parts which has not information feedback and sent to Supply Division. On a weekly basis, make a list of ordered parts which must supply on time for rectification of B, C defects to related Divisions for supervising and speeding up the receiving process of ordered parts. If the parts cannot received on time, providing necessary document to requesting Department and upgrade the priority of part/ materials order if necessary. Sending parts/ materials to the third party/ contractor based on request from the customer or authorized person. When there is an approved request of sending parts/ materials to the third party/contractor, Repair control division/HCM Logistics Division carry out sending procedure. Shipping procedure: After finishing parts/ materials shipping procedure, Repair control division/HCM Logistics Division has to inform shipping details such as: AWB, quantity of sending, flight number and ETD... to Page 9.5-3
4.
9.5.4.4
Sending part/ materials to the third party/ contractor 1. 2.
3.

the third party/ contractor. Update information of parts/ materials on AMASIS and management software. Shipment will be monitored until the the third party/ contractor has received parts/ materials. 9.5.4.5 Sending part/ materials within VAECO stores 1. Sending parts/ materials between stores in VAECO based on request of Stock Control division or maintenance centers via requisition form on AMASIS When there is a request of sending parts/ materials, Repair control division or HCM Logistics Division will receive parts/materials from store, pack items IAW ATA300, accomplish documents for shipping. Updating issue note information in AMASIS and link to related requisition form; Notifying to the store who will receive parts/ materials; Monitoring until parts/ materials are received.
2.
3. 4. 9.5.5
ARCHIVES All the A/C part/ materials request and related documents must be archived in Logistics Department for 1 year.
Page 9.5-4

PART 9 LOGISTICS PROCEDURES 9.6 RECEIVING AND SENDING UNSERVICEABLE PARTS
9.6 9.6.1
RECEIVING AND SENDING UNSERVICEABLE PARTS PURPOSE To establish a procedure to receive and send unserviceable parts to approved maintenance organizations for maintenance.
9.6.2 9.6.3 9.6.4 9.6.4.1
SCOPE This procedure is applied for all unserviceable repairable aircraft parts. RESPONSIBILITIES Logistics Director is responsible to carry out this procedure. PROCEDURE Classification of receiving unserviceable part The unserviceable parts are received from the following sources: 1. 2. 3. 4. Unserviceable part is removed from aircraft in Ramp or Base maintenance. Unserviceable part is returned from Component maintenance center. Unserviceable part is received from customer who have maintenance contract with VAECO. Unserviceable part is considered as Un-repairable Part or Beyond Economical Repair Part which is returned by a maintenance organization or manufacturer. Personnel in duty of LGD (Store keeper or Store Inspector) shall carry out receiving of unserviceable part in specific area. The unserviceable part removed from aircraft shall be accepted if the part is preserved in ATA-300 container and accompanied with the document stated in 6.6. The unserviceable part returned from CMC shall be accepted if is preserved in ATA-300 container and accompanied with related documentation specified in 6.6.4.4. The unserviceable part will be handled as follows: a. if the unserviceable part can be repaired at other maintenance organization It will be moved to Unserviceable store. The unserviceable part will be sent to approve maintenance organization for maintenance. if the unserviceable part cannot be repaired or is beyond economical repair It shall be moved to Condemn store and handle IAW procedure 9.8 Disposition of condemn parts.
9.6.4.2
Receiving and handling Unserviceable Part. 1. 2.
3.
b.
4.
The unserviceable part received from customer who have contract with VAECO shall be accepted if it is preserved in ATA-300 container and accompanied with the following document Repair request or Repair order and other related document supporting the maintenance. The Page 9.6-1

unserviceable part will be sent to appropriate component maintenance center for maintenance. 5. The unserviceable part returned from outside maintenance organization or manufacturer as Un-repairable Part or Beyond Economical Repair Part shall be accepted if it is preserved in ATA-300 container and accompanied with the shop findings/ defect report and other related document. This unserviceable part shall be moved to Condemn store and handle IAW procedure 9.8 Disposition of condemn parts. For unserviceable part owned by VAECO or VNA, Repair control division will issue Repair order based on the followings: a. b. c. d. e. 2. 3. Unserviceable Tags (VAECO Form 0005); Repair Requirements from RTPD or BTPD; Scheduled maintenance requirement; Part maintenance history from monitoring system; Applicable AD, SB, VSB sent from EGD or CMC.
9.6.4.3
Determine the content of Repair Order for Unserviceable Part. 1.
For other customers U/S part, Repair control division will issue repair order based on customer requirements. Detailed repair order will be issued, controlled, updated in AMASIS. Information of order includes: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Name and address of approved Maintenance organization/ Repair station Number of repair order. P/N and S/N Defect description The additional work has to be done. All requested documents and certificate. Terms of Delivery and Redelivery.
9.6.4.4
Sending unserviceable parts inside VAECO 1. Repair control division issues Maintenance/ repair Request (In House Repair) (VAECO Form 4002) for all work such as repair, inspection, modification, guarantee if this work is within the capability of VAECO. Unserviceable part shall be packed in container meet requirement of ATA-300 and sent to relevant Component maintenance center of VAECO. This unserviceable part is accompanied with Maintenance/ repair Request and applicable document. Repair control division contacts, cooperates with Component Maintenance Centers for monitoring the processing and repaired condition of parts.
2.
3.
Page 9.6-2

9.6.4.5
Sending unserviceable parts outside VAECO 1. For VAECO unserviceable part, Repair control division issues Maintenance/ repair Request (Outside Repair) (VAECO Form 4003) for all the work is not within the capability of VAECO and sends directly to maintenance organization in the VAECO List of approved maintenance contractor. For VNA unserviceable part that the maintenance is out of the capability of VAECO, Repair control division issues Maintenance/ repair Request (Outside Repair) (VAECO Form 4003) and sends to VNA Supply Department. Based on detailed repair request, Repair control division will ship unserviceable parts for repairing. The following work shall be carried out: a. b. c. Select transportation method and transportation agency. Prepare document for outside repair including customs paper, trading invoice, repair order, repair contract, etc. Transfer unserviceable part from Unserviceable Store to shipping area. Unserviceable parts are prepared and packed following ATA300 requirements. Necessary information shall be written on accompanied documents and on the container. Co-operate and monitor condition, tracking of shipment by information of destination, time of arrival... to complete the procedures of sending, receiving outside repaired parts.
2.
3.
d.
9.6.5
ARCHIVES All repair request and related document are kept in Repair Control Division at least 1 year since the requested date.
Page 9.6-3

PART 9 LOGISTICS PROCEDURES 9.7 STOCK LEVEL AND STORE INVENTORY CONTROL
9.7 9.7.1
STOCK LEVEL AND STORE INVENTORY CONTROL PURPOSE To establish procedure to control the stock levels and inventory of the part/ materials IAW applicable requirement.
9.7.2
SCOPE This procedure is applied for controlling the stock levels of part/ materials owned by VAECO or customer who have contract with VAECO.
9.7.3
RESPONSIBILITIES Stock Control Division and HCM Logistics Division have responsibility to carry out this procedure.
9.7.4 9.7.4.1
PROCEDURE: Control of Stock level filling up 1. In the time of operating, the amount of aircraft part/ materials preserved in store gradually decrease. Therefore Stock Control Division/ HCM Logistics Division must continuously check the stock level to have the appropriate action. The Stock Control Division/ HCM Logistics Division make a list of aircraft part/ materials preserved in store which has the stock level less than the approved ordering point. The Stock Control Division analyzes and processes the list of aircraft part/ materials need to be filled up in the store as follows: a. Consider the interchangeable of aircraft part/ materials need to fill up the store to the aircraft part/ materials available in the store. Clear from the list all part/ materials which are interchangeable and part/ materials have the stock level higher than the ordering point. Check the order status of the rest in the list. Clear from the list all part/ materials which had the supply request and all part/ materials had the order to purchase. Make a supply request for the remaining in the list.
2.
3.
b.
c. 4.
Base on the analysis of real consumption of aircraft part/ materials, if the current stock level is not enough to meet the requirement of maintenance or the lead time needed to supply is too long, Stock Control Division makes a Request to change the approved stock level and sends to Logistics Director. After getting the approval of new stock level, Stock Control Division shall updates on the management software and makes a request to fill up the stock level compliance with the new stock level. The request shall be sent to Supply Division. To closely supervise the stock level as well as the changing of aircraft part/ materials must continuously conduct the store inventory. There are
9.7.4.2
Store Inventory Control 1.
Page 9.7-1

PART 9 LOGISTICS PROCEDURES 9.7 STOCK LEVEL AND STORE INVENTORY CONTROL
some methods to make an inventory: Continuously inventory, suddenly inventory and Period inventory. a. Continuously inventory is the method of inventory after the positions of part/ materials in the store, from the very first shelf to the last shelf. The Stock Control Division conduct continuously inventory everyday by management software. If an error is detected, conduct an on-site check and correct the data after there is an approval from the Logistics Director. Suddenly Inventory is an inventory at a random position in the store or a random aircraft part/ materials. Regularly Inventory is a total inventory as requirement. The Stock Control Division makes a List of A/C part/ materials needed to be inventoried (VAECO Form 4015). The Stock Control Division checks the real amount, status and position of aircraft part/ materials. Report the result to the Logistics Director. Whenever an error is detected must conduct an investigation and submit a solution. The changing of the store can only conduct when getting a decision from Logistics Director.
b. c. 2. a. b. c. d. e. 9.7.5
Steps to conduct an inventory:
ARCHIVES All the lists of aircraft part/ materials need to be filled up; inventory reports must be kept at the Stock Control Division in the duration of 5 years.
Page 9.7-2

PART 9 LOGISTICS PROCEDURES 9.8 DISPOSITION OF CONDEMNED PARTS
9.8 9.8.1
DISPOSITION OF CONDEMNED PARTS PURPOSE To ensure condemned aircraft parts/ materials are controlled and destroyed or mutilated in order to prevent these from being distributed and used as serviceable products.
9.8.2
SCOPE This procedure is applied for condemned aircraft part/ materials owned by VAECO or by Customer who have contract with VAECO regarding subject of disposition of condemned parts/ materials.
9.8.3
RESPONSIBILITIES 1. The Logistics Directors is responsible for ensuring disposition process of condemned parts/ materials carried out properly by authorization personnel. The Quality Assurance Director is responsible for controlling disposition process of condemned parts/ materials. Condemned parts/ materials in this procedure are the followings but not limited to: a. b. c. d. Certified life-limited parts that have reached or exceeded their certified life limits; Scrap part; Parts with known non-repairable defects, whether visible or not to naked eye; Parts that are not within the specifications set forth by the approved design, and that cannot be brought into conformance with applicable specifications; Part for which further processing or rework cannot make them eligible for certification under a recognized certificate holders system; Part subjected to unacceptable modification or rework that is irreversible; Life-limited part that have reached or exceeded their life limits, or have missing or incomplete records; Part that cannot be returned to an airworthy condition due to exposure to extreme forces or heat or adverse environment; Principal structural elements removed from a high-cycle aircraft for which conformity cannot be accomplished by complying with the applicable aging aircraft airworthiness directives; Components with no traceability to the Production Approval Holder (PAH); Page 9.8-1
2. 9.8.4
DEFINITION 1.
e.
f. g. h. i.
j.

k. l.
Parts imported without proper approval documentation; and Used parts with no maintenance history.
m. Certified shelf-life material that have reached or exceeded their certified shelf-life limits; 2. Life-limited part means any part for which a mandatory replacement limit is specified in the type design, the Instructions for Continued Airworthiness, or the maintenance manual. Scrap part is the part that VAECO or the owner has decided to dispose of because he/she considers them to be of relatively little value and unusable for any other reason. Shelf-life (Life-limited) material means any material for which a mandatory storage limit is specified in manufacturer manual. Receiving and verifying status of condemned parts. a. b. Repair Control Division of LGD checks all received un-serviceable aircraft parts and verify the status of those un-serviceable parts. If un-serviceable aircraft part is fall into any category specified in 9.8.4.1 above then the part is tagged with Condemned Part Tag (VAECO Form 0009) by Stored Inspector and transferred to Condemn Store. All condemned parts/ materials are quarantined in Condemn Store to prevent of misuse and waiting for disposition/ mutilation process. Condemn Store are locked, secured and separated from area or stores keeping serviceable part/ materials. Only authorized personnel of LGD and QAD can access to Condemn Store. Every 6 months, Logistics Department shall make a List of condemned parts/ materials that were property of VAECO and submitted to VAECO CEO for approval. For the condemned parts belonged to VNA, Logistics Department shall make a List of condemned parts and submitted to VNA as required for further action. A Disposition/ mutilation Team shall be set up for doing disposition/ mutilation condemned part with member of Logistics department, QAD and other related department. Mutilation should be accomplished in such a manner that the part becomes unusable for their original intended use. Mutilated parts should not be able to be reworked or camouflaged to provide the appearance of being serviceable such as, re-plating, shortening and re-threading long bolts, welding, straightening, machining, cleaning, polishing, or repainting.
3.
4. 9.8.5
PROCEDURES 1.
c. d.
2.
Process of disposition/ mutilation condemned parts/ materials a.
b.
c.
d.
Page 9.8-2

e.
Mutilation may be accomplished by one or a combination of the following procedures, but is not limited to: Grinding. Burning. Removal of a major integral feature. Permanent distortion of Components. Cutting a significant size hole with a cutting torch or saw. Melting. Sawing into many small pieces. Removing manufacturers identification, part, lot, batch, and serial numbers.
f.
Manufacturers Data plates of mutilated part shall be returned to Manufacture upon requested. Otherwise the Data plate shall be destroyed by VAECO. All information of condemned part being mutilated shall be recorded in the Condemned Part Log (VAECO Form 4021) for tracking purpose. Almost condemned part after being mutilated shall be handled as industrial wastes. Some mutilated part shall be kept in Condemn store for audit purposes. At the end of each month, Store division of Logistics Department shall make a list of Shelf-life material with the expiry date on next month. All the shelf-life material in the list shall be moved from store to separated area. Those materials shall be disposed as industrial wastes. In some case, VAECO may choose to release those condemned parts for legitimate non-flight uses, such as for training and education, research and development, or for non-aviation applications. In such instances, mutilation may not be appropriate. The following methods should be used to prevent misrepresentation: PERMANENTLY and CLEARLY by carving, sculpturing or chiseling the part, subparts as NOT FOR AVIATION USE and NOT SERVICEABLE. (Ink stamping is not an acceptable method). Removing part number identification. Removing identification plate and marking.
g.
h.
3.
Process of disposition of shelf-life material a.
b.
4.
Using condemned part for legitimate non-flight uses. a.
b.
Page 9.8-3

Maintaining a tracking of condemned part for legitimate non-flight uses by recording information in the List of condemned part for legitimate non-flight uses. This list will be sent to QAD for monitoring. Securing a signed certification statement from the purchaser indicating that the purchaser will not use or convey this part for use in aviation products. 9.8.6 ARCHIVES 1. 2. Condemned Part Log (VAECO Form 4021) shall be kept in Repair Control Division 1 year after the condemned part being destroyed. List of condemned part for legitimate non-flight uses shall be kept in QAD for 1 year after the condemned part not being used for other purpose.
Page 9.8-4

PART 10 QUALITY SYSTEM PROC.
PART 10
QUALITY SYSTEM PROCEDURES
Page 10-1

PART 10 QUALITY SYSTEM PROC. 10.1 INSPECTION AND RETURN TO SERVICE PERSONNEL
10.1 10.1.1
INSPECTION AND RETURN TO SERVICE PERSONNEL CATEGORIES PERSONNEL 1. a. b. c. d. 2. a. b. c. d. e. 3. 4. OF INSPECTION AND RETURN TO SERVICE
Aircraft inspection and return to service staff Category A staff. Category B1 staff. Category B2 staff. Category C staff. Component inspection and return to service staff. Borescope inspection staff. Structure repair staff. Cabin repair staff. In Flight Entertainment (IFE) repair staff.
Aviation Repair Specialist (ARS)
Non Destructive Test (NDT) staff. Part and Material Incoming Inspection staff (Store Inspector)
10.1.2 10.1.2.1
PREREQUISITE REQUIREMENTS FOR INSPECTION AND RETURN TO SERVICE PERSONNEL General requirements All inspection and return to service personnel shall meet the below requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Being thoroughly familiar with the applicable regulations of competent authorities. Being trained in the current applicable VAECO procedures accepted/ approved by competent authorities and customer procedures. Being able to read, write, and understand the English language. Being trained in human factors. Being trained in Safety Management System. Having successfully completed the approved type training at level II ATA 104 for all systems. Holding a valid Maintenance license category A with type rating, or equivalent, issued or recognized by the customer or the appropriate authority. Inspection and RTS persons need not hold any license (air authority certification) if accepted or authorized by the operator/air carrier in accordance with that operator/air carriers Continuous Airworthiness Maintenance Program or equivalent.
10.1.2.2
Category A staff 1. 2.
Page 10.1-1

3. 4. 5. 10.1.2.3 1.
Having minimum of 12 months practical maintenance experience with at least 04 months recent experience on relevant aircraft. Completed the task training for category A or equivalent. Being trained, examined and authorized by customer, if required. Having successfully completed the approved type training: a. For Category B1 staff: The type training course should cover airframe system, power plant, electrical systems at level III and avionics systems at level II ATA104. For Category B2 staff: The type training course should cover ATA25, ATA26, ATA35, ATA38, electrical systems and avionics systems at level III; other remaining systems at level II ATA 104.
Category B1/B2 staff
b.
2.
Holding a valid Maintenance license category B1/B2 with type rating, or equivalent, issued or recognized by appropriate authority. Inspection and RTS persons need not hold any license (air authority certification) if accepted or authorized by the operator/air carrier in accordance with that operator/air carriers Continuous Airworthiness Maintenance Program or equivalent. Having minimum of 24 months practical maintenance experience with at least 04 months recent experience on relevant aircraft. Completed the task training for category B1/B2 or equivalent. Being trained, examined and authorized by customer, if required.
3. 4. 5. 10.1.2.4
Additional prerequisite requirements for Engine run-up low/ high power function authorization: 1. 2. 3. 4. Having completed an engine run-up training course on aircraft make/model. Holding B1/B2 authorization in minimum of 03 months. Holding B1 authorization on Power plant systems, applicable for Engine run-up at high power. Completed the task training for Engine run-up (low/ high power). For applicant holding category B1 or B2 authorization, He/ She must have minimum of 36 months experience of exercising category B1 or B2 privileges including 12 months supporting category C authorized staff in base maintenance, or For applicant holding an academic degree in a technical discipline, from a university or other higher educational institution, He/ She must a. Successfully complete the approved type training: At the category B1 or B2 level on A/C type seeking for authorization, or
10.1.2.5
Category C staff 1.
2.
Page 10.1-2

At level I ATA 104 on A/C type seeking for authorization, and at B1 or B2 level of first relevant A/C type. b. Have 36 months of experience working in a civil aircraft maintenance environment on a representative selection of tasks directly associated with aircraft maintenance including 06 months of observation of base maintenance task.
3.
Holding a valid Maintenance license category C with type rating, or equivalent, issued or recognized by the appropriate authority. Inspection and RTS persons need not hold any license (air authority certification) if accepted or authorized by the operator/air carrier in accordance with that operator/air carriers Continuous Airworthiness Maintenance Program or equivalent. Completed the task training for category C or equivalent. Being trained, examined and authorized by customer, if required. Being trained in methods, techniques, practices for the incoming inspection for parts and material. Being trained in AMASIS, in related module(s). Being trained in ATA 300. Having 36 months experience working in the area of aviation parts and materials and at least 12 months assisting in parts and materials incoming inspections. Completed the task training for Part and Material Incoming Inspection or equivalent. Being trained in relative component maintenance and having minimum of 04 months experience in respective or equivalent component maintenance, or Having minimum 18 months experience in respective or equivalent component maintenance. Holding a valid ARS license or equivalent issued or recognized by the appropriate authority. Inspection and RTS persons need not hold any license (air authority certification) if accepted or authorized by the customer. Completed the task training for respective component maintenance or equivalent. The appropriate NDT method training and Practical experience requirement is as specified in VAECO NDT manual paragraph 3.6. Holding valid examination certificate for respective NDT method. Holding a valid Eye test certificate for near vision and color perception. Page 10.1-3
4. 5. 10.1.2.6 1. 2. 3. 4.
Part and Material Incoming Inspection staff
5. 10.1.2.7
Component inspection and return to service staff 1.
2. 3.
4. 10.1.2.8
NDT staff 1. 2. 3.

4. 10.1.2.9
Holding a valid approval from responsible level 3 for respective NDT method. For applicant holding category B1 AMT license with type rating of respective A/C type, or equivalent, issued or recognized by the the appropriate authority: a. b. Being trained in borescope inspection. Completed the task training for respective Engine borescope inspection.
Borescope inspection staff 1.
2.
For applicant holding ARS license or equivalent with Borescope Inspection function, issued or recognized by the appropriate authority: a. b. c. Being trained in borescope inspection and construction at level 3 ATA 104 of respective engine/APU. Having 12 months practical experience of engine/ APU borescope inspection under supervision of instructor/authorized staff. Completed the task training for respective aircraft part/component borescope inspection.
3.
Borescope inspection staff need not hold any license (air authority certification) if accepted or authorized by the operator/air carrier in accordance with that operator/air carriers Continuous Airworthiness Maintenance Program or equivalent. Being trained in structure repair and having minimum of 04 months experience on structure repair of respective aircraft, or Having minimum 18 months experience on structure repair of respective aircraft. Holding a valid ARS license, or equivalent, issued or recognized by the appropriate authority. Structure repair staff need not hold any license (air authority certification) if accepted or authorized by the operator/air carrier in accordance with that operator/air carriers Continuous Airworthiness Maintenance Program or equivalent. Completed the task training for respective A/C structure repair or equivalent. Being trained, examined and authorized by customer, if required. Being successfully trained in cabin maintenance. Holding a valid ARS license, or equivalent, issued or recognized by the appropriate authority. Cabin repair staff need not hold any license (air authority certification) if accepted or authorized by the operator/air carrier in accordance with that operator/air carriers Continuous Airworthiness Maintenance Program or equivalent. Page 10.1-4
10.1.2.10 Structure repair staff 1. 2. 3.
4. 5. 1. 2.
10.1.2.11 Cabin repair staff

3. 4. 5. 1. 2.
Having minimum 12 months experience in cabin maintenance. Completed the task training for cabin repair or equivalent. Being trained, examined and authorized by customer, if required. Being trained on IFE system make and model. Holding a valid ARS license, or equivalent, issued or recognized by the appropriate authority. IFE repair staff need not hold any license (air authority certification) if accepted or authorized by the operator/air carrier in accordance with that operator/air carriers Continuous Airworthiness Maintenance Program or equivalent. Having minimum 12 months experience in IFE maintenance. Completed the task training for respective IFE system repair or equivalent. Being trained, examined and authorized by customer, if required.
10.1.2.12 IFE repair staff
3. 4. 5. 10.1.3 10.1.3.1
QUALIFYING PROCESS Responsibilities 1. The relevant department/ center director are responsible for initially evaluating ability of potential candidate, proposing candidate list and application documents of each individual to Human Resource Department (HRD). HRD is responsible for initially evaluating application documents and sending to QAD. The Quality Assurance Director is responsible for establishing competence assessment board, evaluating candidate ability and granting authorization. HRD shall collect and initially evaluate application documents and forward to Quality audit division 10 days before scheduled competence assessment date. Application documents: a. b. c. Application form (VAECO Form 2045) with Director validation. Copy of basic training certificate/ diploma if initial authorization is sought. Copy of valid maintenance license, ARS license, or equivalent, issued or recognized by the CAAV, applied to candidate seeking for initial/ upgrade authorization. Copy of type/ specialty training certificate, applied to candidate seeking for initial/ upgrade authorization, or there is related change in the training records.
2. 3.
10.1.3.2
Application process 1.
2.
d.
Page 10.1-5

e.
Original Tasks Training Syllabus which shall be performed within last 12 months, applied to candidate seeking for initial/ upgrade/ supplement authorization. For renewal of authorization, the candidate who has not been working in maintenance centers shall submit Practical experience logbook (VAECO Form 2031) to QAD. QAD may request to provide copies of Technical log pages, NRC or Routine Job Card (if necessary). Training evidence on subjects: the current applicable VAECO procedures accepted/ approved by competent authorities, human factors, SMS, customer procedures (if required). Application form (VAECO form 2045) with Director validation. Copy of diploma, if any, applied to candidate seeking for initial authorization. Valid NDT method training certificate. Practical experience records (VAECO form 2053 or equivalent). Vision examination result (VAECO form 2043). The near vision test in vision examination will be valid for maximum of 01 year. The color perception test in vision examination will be valid for maximum of 05 years. Training evidence on subjects: the current applicable VAECO procedures accepted/ approved by competent authorities, human factors, SMS.
f.
g.
3.
Applicable to NDT staff, the following records should be submitted: a. b. c. d. e.
f.
10.1.3.3
Assessment process for Inspection and Return to service personnel 1. The Quality Audit division shall evaluate received application documents to verify correction and provision of relevant data. If accepted, the multiple choices test and/ or interview shall be arranged to assure the candidates competency. The Authorization assessment schedule (VAECO Form 2039) shall be informed to candidates and relevant departments via VAECO website. Multiple choices test and/ or interview shall include relevant technical knowledge, inspection skill, applicable regulations of the competent authorities and the current VAECO procedures accepted/ approved by competent authorities. Multiple choices test questionnaires (VAECO Form 2040) shall be selected from, but not limited to, VAECO questionnaire bank by Quality Audit division. Candidates shall use Multiple choices answer sheet (VAECO Form 2041) to record the answer. The interview shall be conducted by the competence assessment board nominated by QAD Director. The result shall be recorded to Authorized Staff Interview report (VAECO Form 2046). Page 10.1-6
2.
3.
4. 5.

6.
For NDT staff: a. Quality Audit division shall submit the necessary documents (including NDT training certificates, Practical experience records, Vision examination result) to responsible NDT level 3 of cognizant NDT organization to assess and issue Qualification letter or equivalent. After getting the Qualification letter of responsible NDT level 3, QAD shall arrange a multiple choices test and interview on subject of the current VAECO procedures accepted/ approved by competent authorities and/or customer procedures.
b.
10.1.3.4
Granting and validity of the authorization 1. Basing on evaluation of competence assessment board member, Quality Assurance Director shall grant Authorization Certificate (VAECO Form 2051) to successful candidate. Authorization details shall be registered in the Personnel Authorization & Licensing Management System. The roster of the inspection and return to service personnel shall be available for inspection by authority at any time, and be updated within 05 days when there is any change. Validity of the authorization is decided by Quality Assurance Director and does not exceed 60 months. To maintain the validity of authorization, following conditions shall be satisfied: a. b. c. d. Note: 1. Functions required for Category A: A.1 thru A.10 or A.1 thru A.18. 2. Minimum functions required for each Category B1/B2 system group: 1 thru 5. VAECOs approval is valid, and Staff remain employed by VAECO, and All required certificate/license/qualification are still valid, and The holder shall exercise his authorization privilege in at least 06 months in any consecutive 24 months period.
2. 3.
4. 5.
10.1.4 10.1.4.1
PRIVILEGES AND LIMITATIONS OF INSPECTION AND RETURN TO SERVICE PERSONNEL Borescope inspection staff 1. For Borescope inspection staff holding category B1 authorization: The authorized borescope inspection staff may perform and sign-off for borescope inspection tasks on respective A/C IAW applicable maintenance data. 2. For Borescope inspection staff holding ARS license: Page 10.1-7

Within the endorsed scope of authorization, the authorized borescope inspection staff may perform and sign-off for borescope inspection tasks IAW applicable maintenance data (except removal/ installation of panel/ access ports; performance of safety precautions; deactivation/ activation of Thrust Reverser).. 10.1.4.2 NDT staff The NDT staff is permitted to perform, sign-off for Non-destruction Tests according to the procedures and the requirements specified in VAECO NDT procedures manual. 10.1.4.3 Part and Material Incoming Inspection staff Part and Material Incoming Inspection staff is permitted to perform incoming inspection on parts and/or materials to be used by the VAECO, including: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 10.1.4.4 Performing the incoming inspection, acceptance and tagging of aircraft components and material. Performing the incoming inspection and tagging for aircraft components removed from A/C or from their NHA. Registering components and material data into AMASIS or other management software provided by the customer. Controlling the storage and release of aircraft components and material to aircraft maintenance. Performing the preliminary inspection of tools and equipment.
Category A staff Category A staff is permitted to inspect, personally performed, and return aircraft to service after scheduled ramp maintenance check (pre-flight, transit, daily/ terminal, up to weekly/line checks) and simple defects rectification within the limits of tasks specifically endorsed on the authorization (including ADD type B clearance). The detail privileges are as follows: A.1 A.2 A.3 A.4 APU start and shutdown. Towing & parking. Fuelling operation: Refuel; defuel; transfer; MMI/ measuring stick/ magnetic fuel level indicator readout. Routine lubrication; LDG/door lubrication; fluids and gases replenishment of: Engine & APU oil, starter oil, IDG/BUG oil, Hydraulic system fluid, Tire & accumulators; water & waste servicing/ drain. Pre-flight/Transit check. Replacement of internal & external lights, filaments and flash tubes. Limited Passenger cabin maintenance including replacement and cosmetic repair of: sun-visor, carpets, curtains, seat covers, seat belts & harnesses, ovens, boilers, beverage makers, internal compartment doors excluding door forming part of pressure structure, parts fitted on passenger seats and galleys, cabin normal lighting system including Page 10.1-8
A.5 A.6 A.7

ballast, toilet components excluding gate valves, passenger seat recline mechanism adjustment. A.8 A.9 Replacement of: loose cabin emergency equipment, passenger seats, and stretcher. Raising and clearing type C ADD of ATA 11& 25.
A.10 Replacement of wheel assemblies. A.11 Replacement of brake units. A.12 Terminal check/ daily check. A.13 Weekly/ line check. A.14 Replacement of main, APU and emergency batteries. A.15 Replacement of static wicks. A.16 Replacement of windscreen wiper blades. A.17 Repetitive pre-flight visual inspections and tests required by MEL items as listed in Appendix 1 of Authorization Certificate (Form VAECO 2051). If customers do not agree with this appendix, they may provide their appendix otherwise this function shall be performed by Category B1/B2 staff. A.18 Applying MEL items as listed in Appendix 1 of Authorization Certificate (Form VAECO 2051). If customers do not agree with this appendix they may provide their appendix, otherwise this function shall be performed by Category B1/B2 staff. 10.1.4.5 Category B1/ B2 staff 1. 2. Category B1 staff is permitted to issue certificates of return to service following maintenance, including airframe and power plant system. Category B2 staff is permitted to issue certificates of return to service following maintenance, including avionic and electrical systems, replacement of electrical and avionic LRUs and/ or applying Electrical Standard Practices on airframe and power plant systems (except that subsequently required functional or specific tests). Maintenance functions limitation (B1/B2 function index) (1) Maintenance check and inspection. (2) Component replacement. (3) Fault confirmation and defect deferment (structure damage evaluation and deferment are applied for all aircraft structures and applicable for Category B1 only). (4) Fault isolation and defect rectification; Re-certification for serviceable components removed from aircraft or the NHA. (5) Extension: (a) Category B1 and Category B2 staffs are permitted to defer defects and perform related maintenance procedures of MEL Issue: 02, Revision: 05, Date: 25 APR 2013 Page 10.1-9
3.

items listed in the Appendix 2 of Authorization Certificate. (b) Category B1 and Category B2 staffs are permitted to perform maintenance work on Ground handling (ATA09, 10), Placards & Markings (ATA11), Servicing (ATA12), Equipment & Furnishing (ATA25), Fire protection (ATA26), Oxygen (ATA35), and Water & Waste (ATA38). (c) Category B1 staff is permitted to perform maintenance work on Electrical and Avionic systems provided the complexity of such work does not exceed the following: General visual inspection of systems and subsequent simple correction/ restoration. System reset, on board self-test of systems, system BITE and simple operational tests. Replacement of line replaceable computers, card files that do not required test other than those mentioned above; (d) Category B2 staff is permitted to perform maintenance work on Airframe and Power plant systems provided the complexity of such work does not exceed the following: General visual inspection of systems and subsequent simple correction/ restoration. System reset, on board self-test of systems, system BITE and simple operational tests; (6) Engine run-up at low power. (7) Engine run-up at high power. 10.1.4.6 Category C staff Category C staff is permitted to issue certificate of maintenance release/ return to service for aircraft after base maintenance. 10.1.4.7 Component inspection and return to service staff Component inspection and return to service staff, within the endorsed Scope of authorization, is permitted to perform, inspect and return to service for component maintenances IAW applicable maintenance data... 10.1.4.8 Structure repair staff Structure repair staff, within the endorsed Scope of authorization on aircraft make and model, is permitted to perform, inspect and return to service for structural repairs after maintained IAW applicable maintenance data. 10.1.4.9 Cabin repair staff Cabin repair staff, within the endorsed Scope of authorization, is permitted to perform, inspect and return to service for cabin repair IAW applicable maintenance data. 10.1.4.10 IFE repair staff
Page 10.1-10

IFE repair staff, within the endorsed Scope of authorization on IFE system is permitted to perform, inspect and return to service for IFE repair IAW applicable maintenance data. 10.1.5 AUTHORIZATION REDUCTION 1. SUSPENSION/ REVOCATION/ DURATION
Authorization shall be temporarily suspended or revoked due to the seriousness of maintenance error/ violation that the authorized staff committed during exercising his/ her authorization. The followings are examples of maintenance error/ violation: Not comply with safety warning/ precautions; Not comply with maintenance instruction; Improperly apply maintenance procedure; Issue CRS or sign-off without verifying the performed work; Not perform authorized staff responsibilities; Performing maintenance work beyond the authorization; Not complete maintenance record; Not complete the READ AND SIGN for Quality Notice on time; Intentionally falsify documents, or maintenance records or application
2.
Intentionally omit maintenance task, or Being adversely effected by alcohol or drug during work, or 3. The maintenance error/ violation will be divided in to different levels. The applied level of penalty is determined after assessment/ investigation IAW SOP 10.22 and classified in Investigation Report (VAECO Form 2055). The applied level of penalty will be specified in Letter of authorization suspension/ revocation: a. b. c. d. 4. Level 1: The authorization certificate shall be suspended for 1 week. Level 2: The authorization certificate shall be suspended for 2 weeks. Level 3: The authorization certificate shall be suspended for 3 weeks. Level 4: The authorization certificate shall be suspended for at least 4 weeks or revoked.
In the case of maintenance error/ violation causing serious consequence or safety affected, QC manager may give a decision to suspend the authorization right after the maintenance error/ violation committed. The authorization suspension duration will be counted since the time suspended by QC manager.
Page 10.1-11

5.
The duration of suspension/ revocation and restoration condition are specified in Letter of authorization suspension/ revocation. The restoration condition may includes, but not limited to the following: a. b. Completing a remedial training on subjects related to committed error/ violation. Taking re-assessment/ re-examination.
6.
Letter of authorization suspension/ revocation shall clarify any change of the authorization validity and associated required recovering conditions and send to involved staff, related Department Directors and, if necessary, to the Training Director to request for remedial training course.
10.1.6
AUTHORIZATION FOR CONTRACTED STAFF FROM OTHER REPAIR STATION/ MAINTENANCE ORGANIZATION Contracted staff requirements and qualification shall be the same as VAECO staff. However, the technical assessment may be waived if there is an evidence of his qualification and experience working for other FAA approved Repair station or VAR part 5 approved maintenance organization, or other equivalent approved organization. Competence assessment may be required if theres a doubt about competence of the applicant.
10.1.7
MAINTAINING PROFICIENCY/ CONTINUATION TRAINING 1. In the period of 24 months, Inspection and return to service personnel shall be required to complete recurrent training on areas as follows: a. b. c. d. 2. Technical knowledge authorization. and skills appropriate to individual
Any change in VAECO procedures accepted/ approved by competent authorities and/or customer procedures. Human factors. Safety Management Systems.
Prior granting of authorization renewal, QAD shall arrange the multiple choices test and/ or interview to assure the candidates proficiency.
10.1.8
CONTROL OF AUTHORIZATION STAFF SIGNATURE, CERTIFICATE, STAMP AND LICENSE 1. 2. 3. Authorized staff shall be issued stamps with his/ her unique authorization number. Signature and stamp are used to confirm the completion of tasks or inspections I.A.W their authorizations. Upon receiving authorization, authorized staff shall enter his/ her signature and stamp into Authorized Staff Stamp and Signature registration sheet to register signature and stamp.
Page 10.1-12

4.
The staff shall return the stamp to Quality Assurance department when he/she is no longer authorized, such as: retirement, authorization revoked. The authorization and stamp number must be unique for each individual authorized staff. Once the authorization for staff is terminated, the number will not be re-issued to other staff. In case of authorization certificate, stamp or license is lost, the staff shall report immediately to QAD. The staff record shall be checked before reissue authorization certificate, stamp, or request the competent authority for the license re-issuance. Stamp of authorization is in format VAECO XXXX YYY, with details as follows: + + XXXX: sequent number = 001 to 9999; YYY: authorized staff code, defined as follow: AC : A/C inspection and return to service staff WS : Component inspection and return to service staff CAB : Cabin repair staff IFE SR : IFE repair staff : Structure repair staff
5.
6.
7.
BSI : Borescope inspection staff NDT : Non Destructive Test (NDT) staff AUD : Quality auditor SI : Part and Material Incoming Inspection staff
Page 10.1-13

PART 10 QUALITY SYSTEM PROC. 10.2 SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL QUALIFYING
10.2 10.2.1
SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL QUALIFYING SUPERVISORY DUTIES Within the endorsed scope of authorization, supervisory personnel shall direct and oversee the work performed by any individuals who are unfamiliar with the methods, techniques, practices, aids, equipment, and tools used to perform the maintenance, preventive maintenance, or alterations, including sign-off for routine tasks after completion of work performed in aircraft maintenance.
10.2.2
PREREQUISITE REQUIREMENTS 1. For supervisory personnel for aircraft maintenance: a. Holding category A authorization for respective aircraft. b. Being trained in aircraft type training at level B1/B2 for respective aircraft. c. Holding Maintenance License category B1/B2 with type rating, or equivalent, issued or recognized by customer or appropriate authority. d. Being practically trained in related work or having a minimum of 24 months maintenance experience, including 18 months practical experience in the work being performed. 2. For others supervisory personnel (including structure repair supervisor) a. Having a minimum 18 months practical experience in the work being performed. b. Holding Maintenance with type rating or ARS license, or equivalent, issued or recognized by the customer or the appropriate authority. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Being thoroughly familiar with the applicable regulations of competent authorities. Being trained on the current applicable VAECO procedures accepted/ approved by competent authorities and customer procedures. Being able to read, write, and understand the English language. Being trained in human factors. Being trained on Safety Management Systems. The supervisors are qualified by their own maintenance center/ departments. Director of corresponding maintenance center/ department shall ensure supervisor candidate fulfilled above mentioned requirements by recommended steps, but not limited to, as follows: a. b. Review candidate records. Perform the multiple choices test and/ or interview.
10.2.3
QUALIFYING PROCESS 1. 2.
Page 10.2-1

PART 10 QUALITY SYSTEM PROC. 10.2 SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL QUALIFYING
3.
The List of Qualified Personnel (VAECO Form 2065) shall be forwarded to the QAD for acceptance, monitoring and registering in the Personnel roster. Validity of the authorization is decided by the Director of respective maintenance center/ department and does not exceed 60 months. In the period of 2 years, supervisor shall be required to complete continuation training on subjects as follows: a. b. c. d. Technical knowledge authorization; and skills appropriate to individual
10.2.4
MAINTAINING VALIDITY OF THE AUTHORIZATION 1. 2.
Any change in VAECO procedures accepted/ approved by competent authorities and/or customer procedures; Human factors. Safety Management Systems.
3. 4.
Prior granting of authorization renewal, re-assessments shall be required. The List of Qualified Personnel (VAECO Form 2065) shall be updated whenever there is a change within 5 working days and forwarded to QAD for acceptance and monitoring.
10.2.5
ARCHIVES Supervisor qualification records shall be kept at their own maintenance center/ department.
Page 10.2-2

PART 10 QUALITY SYSTEM PROC. 10.3 QUALITY AUDITOR QUALIFYING
10.3 10.3.1
QUALITY AUDITOR QUALIFYING GENERAL 1. Quality Auditors perform independent audits of the management, control and performance of maintenance activates to ensure compliance with approved standards and procedures. In order to maintain independence, Auditors shall have no relations to subjects being audited and shall report directly to Quality Assurance Director. Scheduling and implementing quality audits on maintenance activities and products of VAECO in order to detect non-conformities and request remedial actions Monitoring and control remedial actions against non-conformities found in internal audits and external audits carried out by Authorities and Customers Performing investigations or surveys as required by VAECOs CEO or Quality Assurance Director. To accompany Authorities and Customers while auditing VAECO. Implementing assigned audits. Reporting non-conformities and irregularities in objective, impartial and accurate reports in a timely manner. Ensuring proprietary information of audited organizations is not disclosed to unauthorized persons. Auditors shall have access to all activities, products, records and persons related to an audited process. Auditors shall not be hindered from presenting audit results to the VAECO CEO, Quality Assurance Director and/or the auditee managers when appropriate. Auditors shall issue Corrective Action Requests for non-conformities. Being graduated from aeronautical technical college/university, or being graduated from technical college/university and basic aeronautical technical course. Being trained in aircraft type rating. Being thoroughly familiar with the applicable regulations of competent authorities. Being trained in VAECO procedures accepted/ approved by competent authorities. Page 10.3-1
2.
10.3.2
AUDITOR DUTIES 1.
2.
3. 4. 10.3.3 1. 2. 3. 10.3.4
AUDITOR RESPONSIBILITIES
AUDITOR AUTHORITIES 1. 2.
3. 10.3.5 1.
PREREQUISITE REQUIREMENTS FOR AUDITOR
2. 3. 4.

5. 6. 7.
Being thoroughly familiar with customer procedures. Being able to read, write, and understand the English language. Being trained on the following subjects: a. b. c. Quality management system. Audit training. Safety Management Systems.
8. 9.
Being trained in Human Factors. Having at least 36 months of experience in aircraft/ aircraft component maintenance environment including at least 24 months of experience in Quality assurance.
10. Completed an audit practical training. 10.3.6 QUALIFYING PROCESS 1. Auditor assessment and approval process a. Auditor candidates are selected by the Quality Assurance Director who sets up and executes a training program in both theoretical and practical in order to ensure compliance with standards. The Quality Audit Division Manager shall collect records from the candidate and schedule an interview. The Quality Assurance Director or delegate shall interview the candidate to evaluate his or her knowledge and ability. The Quality Assurance Director shall grant VAECO Auditor approval to candidates who meet the standards and successfully pass the interview. An Auditor authorization shall be valid for a maximum of 05 years. In period of 02 years, the Auditor shall complete recurrent training on the following subjects: VAECO procedures authorities. Human Factors. Safety Management Systems. c. An Auditor Certificate shall be revoked if the holder is involved in any of the following circumstances Violating seriously the audit procedure. Failing to accomplish the functions, duties and responsibilities of an auditor. Having failed to perform authorized auditor activities for more than 24 consecutive months. Issue: 02, Revision: 05, Date: 25 APR 2013 Page 10.3-2 accepted/ approved by competent
b. c. d.
2.
Auditor approval validity a. b.

10.3.7
ARCHIVES 1. 2. The List of authorized auditors and auditor records shall be maintained by the QAD. Auditor qualification records shall be kept on file for two years after termination of an Auditor Authorization.
Page 10.3-3

PART 10 QUALITY SYSTEM PROC. 10.4 JOB QUALIFICATION OF THE OTHER QUALIFIED EMPLOYEES
10.4 10.4.1
JOB QUALIFICATION OF THE OTHER QUALIFIED EMPLOYEES GENERAL Competence of the following personnel shall be assessed by on the job evaluations and/or by competence assessment relevant to their particular job role before unsupervised work is permitted, including: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Maintenance planner. Production planner. MCC controller. Technical service staff. Engineering engineer. Technical librarian. Technical record staff. Tool controller. Qualified Mechanic.
10. Workshop planner. 11. Workshop engineering staff 12. Part fabricating staff. 13. HAZMAT staff. 14. Foreman. 10.4.2 10.4.2.1 DUTIES AND REQUIREMENTS Maintenance planner 1. Essential tasks/ duties a. b. 2. a. Issuing a Work order for aircraft maintenance based upon the purchase order or other contractual document. Scheduling for aircraft maintenance. Being graduated from aeronautical technical university/ college, or being graduated from technical university/ college and being trained in basic aeronautical technical course. Being successfully trained in aircraft type training. Being thoroughly familiar with in-used maintenance management software(s), such as AMASIS, in related module(s). Being trained or thoroughly familiar with the VAECO procedures accepted/ approved by competent authorities. Being able to read, write, and understand the English language. Being trained in human factors. Page 10.4-1
Prerequisite requirements
b. c. d. e. f.

g. h. i. 10.4.2.2 1.
Being trained on Safety Management Systems. Having 24 months experience on maintenance planning. Being thoroughly familiar with maintenance planning work.
Production planner Essential tasks/ duties a. b. c. 2. a. Scheduling for work in each individual base maintenance check. Controlling base maintenance check progress. Controlling of maintenance documents and records. Being graduated from aeronautical technical university/ college, or being graduated from technical university/ college and being trained in basic aeronautical technical course. Being successfully trained in aircraft type training. Being trained or thoroughly familiar with applicable VAECO procedures accepted/ approved by competent authorities. Being thoroughly familiar with in-used maintenance management software(s), such as AMASIS, in related module(s). Being able to read, write, and understand the English language. Being trained in human factors. Being trained on Safety Management Systems. Having 12 months experience on base maintenance. Being thoroughly familiar with base maintenance control work.
b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. 10.4.2.3 1.
MCC controller Essential tasks/ duties a. b. 2. a. Controlling of ramp & base maintenance activities. Controlling of ramp & base maintenance documents and records. Being graduated from aeronautical technical university/ college, or being graduated from technical university/ college and being trained in basic aeronautical technical course or holding Cat A Inspection & RTS staff. Being successfully trained in aircraft type training. Being trained or thoroughly familiar with applicable VAECO procedures accepted/ approved by competent authorities. Being able to read, write, and understand the English language. Being trained in human factors. Being trained on Safety Management Systems. Page 10.4-2
b. c. d. e. f.

g. h. 10.4.2.4
Being thoroughly familiar with ramp & base maintenance control work Having 24 months working in aircraft maintenance environment with at least 3 months working experience in ramp maintenance control.
Technical service staff 1. Essential tasks/ duties a. b. c. 2. Supporting inspection and return to service staff in maintenance and defect trouble shooting/ deferment/ rectification. Controlling and performing defect trouble shooting/ deferment/ rectification. Monitoring contracted customers aircraft status and proposing preventive actions, if required by contract. Holding Cat B Inspection & RTS authorization in minimum of 12 months with at least 3 months working experience in technical supporting, or Being graduated from aeronautical technical university/ college or technical university/ college and being trained in basic aeronautical technical course, and Holding Cat A Inspection & RTS authorization, and Having 24 months working in aircraft maintenance environment with at least on 3 months working experience in technical supporting.
Prerequisite requirements a.
b.
10.4.2.5
Engineering engineer 1. Essential tasks/ duties a. b. c. d. e. 2. Evaluating AD, SB for contracted customer. Implementing Aircraft, Engine health monitoring program for contracted customer. Issuing EO, ER, EI... Supporting maintenance activities when requested. Taking part in investigation of failure, malfunction or defect of an article. Being graduated from aeronautical technical university/ college, or being graduated from technical university/ college and being trained in basic aeronautical technical course. Being successfully trained in aircraft type training. Being trained or thoroughly familiar with applicable VAECO procedures accepted/ approved by competent authorities. Page 10.4-3
b. c.

d. e. f. g. h. 10.4.2.6
Being able to read, write, and understand the English language. Being trained in human factors. Being trained on Safety Management Systems. Being thoroughly familiar with the work being performed. Having 36 months working in aircraft maintenance environment with at least 12 months in EGD.
Technical librarian 1. Essential tasks/ duties a. b. c. 2. a. b. c. d. e. f. Ordering and receiving of maintenance data, Managing of maintenance data Distributing and updating maintenance data to users. Being successfully trained in aircraft general familiarization. Being trained or thoroughly familiar with the applicable VAECO procedures accepted/ approved by competent authorities. Being able to read, write, and understand the English language. Being trained in human factors. Being trained on Safety Management Systems. Being thoroughly familiar with the work being performed.
10.4.2.7
Technical record staff 1. Essential tasks/ duties a. b. 2. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. Updating maintenance data to maintenance management system, such as: AMASIS Keeping of maintenance records. Being successfully trained in aircraft general familiarization. Being thoroughly familiar with in-used maintenance management software(s), such as AMASIS, in related module(s). Being trained or thoroughly familiar with the applicable VAECO procedures accepted/ approved by competent authorities. Being able to read, write, and understand the English language. Being trained in human factors. Being trained on Safety Management Systems. Being thoroughly familiar with the work being performed. Having 12 months working in aircraft maintenance environment with at least 03 months in Technical record field. Page 10.4-4

10.4.2.8
Tool controller 1. Essential tasks/ duties a. b. Performing the receiving inspection, acceptance and tagging of tools and equipment, Inspecting and evaluating tools and equipment prior to being sent out for calibration and when returned, review calibration results for acceptance. Inspecting and evaluating tools prior and equipment to being sent out for repair and when returned, review repair documents for acceptance. Performing investigations into the loss or damage of tools/ equipment. Assisting in the evaluations of the use of alternative tools and equipment. Being thoroughly familiar with in-used maintenance management software(s), such as AMASIS, in related module(s). Being trained or thoroughly familiar with the applicable VAECO procedures accepted/ approved by competent authorities. Being able to read, write, and understand the English language. Being trained in human factors. Being trained on Safety Management Systems. Being thoroughly familiar with the work being performed. Having 36 months working in aircraft maintenance environment with at least 24 months working in tool and equipment control field.
c.
d. e. 2.
Prerequisite requirements a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
10.4.2.9
Qualified Mechanic 1. Essential tasks/ duties a. b. Performing maintenance under supervision and signing as mechanic staff in maintenance records after completion of work. Personally perform the maintenance works that are not required to be released under AMO approval, such as: Position and/or remove wheel chocks, Ramp to Flight Deck Communication, Replenishing of oils and fluids, Perform the function of headset man during towing/ pushback operation. 2. Prerequisite requirements
Page 10.4-5

a.
Being graduated from aeronautical technical school/ university/ college, or graduated from technical school/ university/ college and being trained in basic aeronautical technical course, and having 03 months of maintenance experience on the respective aircraft or component, or Having 12 months of maintenance experience on the respective aircraft or component. Being trained or thoroughly familiar with the applicable working procedures. Being able to read, write, and understand the English language. Being trained in human factors. Being trained on Safety Management Systems. Being thoroughly familiar with the work being performed.
b. c. d. e. f. g. 1.
10.4.2.10 Workshop planner Essential tasks/ duties a. b. 2. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Issuing work request for component maintenance. Making plan for component maintenance. Being thoroughly familiar with in-used maintenance management software(s), such as AMASIS, in related module(s). Being trained or thoroughly familiar with the applicable VAECO procedures accepted/ approved by competent authorities. Being able to read, write, and understand the English language. Being trained in Human factors. Being trained on Safety Management Systems. Being thoroughly familiar with the work being performed. Having minimum of 12 months experience in workshop maintenance environment and 06 months working in Component Technical Planning Division.
10.4.2.11 Workshop engineering staff 1. Essential tasks/ duties a. b. c. d. 2. Issuing component maintenance worksheet. Supporting maintenance staff in workshop maintenance. Composing technical instruction and equipment operating instruction basing on manufacturer technical data. Evaluating defect and defect rectification arising in workshop maintenance.
Prerequisite requirements Page 10.4-6

a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.
Being graduated from technical university/ college. Being thoroughly familiar with in-used maintenance management software(s), such as AMASIS, in related module(s). Being trained or thoroughly familiar with the applicable VAECO procedures accepted/ approved by competent authorities. Being able to read, write, and understand the English language. Being trained in Human factors. Being trained on Safety Management Systems. Being thoroughly familiar with the work being performed. Having minimum of 12 months experience in workshop maintenance environment and 06 months working in Component Technical Planning Division.
10.4.2.12 Part fabricating staff 1. Essential tasks/ duties a. b. 2. Performing inspections required by part fabricating process. Issuing Certificate of Conformity (C of C) for respective part fabricated by VAECO. Having minimum of 18 months experience in related workshop maintenance, or having basic training in specialty related to parts to be fabricated. Being trained or thoroughly familiar with the applicable VAECO procedures accepted/ approved by competent authorities. Being able to read, write, and understand the English language. Being trained in Human factors. Being trained on Safety Management Systems.
b. c. d. e. 1.
10.4.2.13 HAZMAT staff Essential tasks/ duties a. 2. Performing packaging and shipping Hazardous Materials (dangerous goods) by air. Being trained in IATA Dangerous goods Regulations (which equivalent to Hazardous Materials requirements to meet the standards of 49 CFR Part 172 Subpart H). Being trained or thoroughly familiar with the applicable VAECO procedures accepted/ approved by competent authorities. Being able to read, write, and understand the English language. Being trained in Human factors. Page 10.4-7
b. c. d.

e. f.
Being trained on Safety Management Systems. Having minimum of 03 months experience working on Hazardous Materials packing and/or shipping.
10.4.2.14 Foreman 1. Essential tasks/ duties a. Managing all maintenance activities for work pack or maintenance performed in base environment such as engine change, LDG change etc. Coordinating related sections in base maintenance. Being of CAT B authorized staff with 03 months managing of work pack, or Being trained in A/C type training at level B1/B2, and Being trained or thoroughly familiar with the applicable VAECO procedures accepted/ approved by competent authorities. Being able to understand, read and write English. Being trained in human factors. Being trained on Safety Management Systems. Being thoroughly familiar with the work being performed. Having minimum of 24 months maintenance experience with at least 03 months managing of specific work pack. 10.4.3 QUALIFYING PROCESS 1. 2. The above mentioned staffs department/maintenance center. are qualified by their own
b. 2. a. b.
Corresponding maintenance centers/departments director shall ensure candidate fulfilled above mentioned requirements by recommended steps, but not limited to, as follow: a. b. Review records and evaluate the ability of candidate. Perform the multiple choices test and/ or interview.
3. 10.4.4
The List of qualified personnel (VAECO Form 2065) shall be forwarded to QAD for acceptance and monitoring. Validity of the authorization is decided by the Director of respective maintenance center/ department and does not exceed 60 months. In the period of 2 years, qualified personnel shall complete the recurrent training for Human factor. Prior granting of authorization renewal, re-assessment shall be required. The re-assessment shall include the knowledge of the following:
PERIODIC COMPETENCE ASSESSMENT 1. 2. 3.
Page 10.4-8

a. b.
Technical knowledge and skills appropriate authorization (not applicable to qualified mechanic);
to
individual
Any change in VAECO procedures accepted/ approved by competent authorities and/or customer procedures (not applicable to qualified mechanic);
4.
The List of Qualified Personnel (VAECO Form 2065) shall be updated whenever there is a change within 5 working days and forwarded to QAD for acceptance and monitoring.
10.4.5
ARCHIVES Records of staffs shall be kept at their own department/maintenance center in at least 2 years after ceasing of their authorization.
Page 10.4-9

PART 10 QUALITY SYSTEM PROC. 10.5 A/C MAINTENANCE INSPECTION
10.5 10.5.1
AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE INSPECTION PURPOSE The purpose of this instruction is to specify the inspection standard and operation for performing the efficiency and guaranteeing the airworthy safety by complying with the related maintenance data and applicable regulations.
10.5.2
SCOPE 1. 2. This procedure is applied to authorized inspection staff. Applicable Object: The maintenance and inspection according to approved airframe rating. Authorized inspection staff responsible to perform the inspection on aircraft maintained in VAECO IAW this procedure. The applicable Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the inspection personnel under supervision are properly qualified and authorized to conduct the assigned inspections. The authorized inspection staff should contact the production planner to realize about the RII and operation steps for guaranteeing the quality during inspection. The authorized inspection staff should inspect to ensure the safety prior to perform maintenance, such as the safe lock of the landing gear is set well, the ground cable is set well and the stand is fixed, etc. The authorized inspection staff should heed if the operation tools are proper and eligible to perform maintenance and the measurement and test equipment are maintained and calibrated as required. The authorized inspection staff should verify if the production planner prepares the router and the discrepancies recorded in maintenance record of aircraft prior to entering hangar, and check if the router is created based upon updated maintenance manual. The Maintenance staff cannot be the inspection staff at the same router. Aircraft maintenance inspection is a continuous work. The Inspection staff in charge should use Inspector handover sheet (VAECO Form 2015) when the job is not finished and/or need to transfer to another staff IAW continuity of inspection procedure 10.9. Any serious faults found during performing Preliminary inspection which may affect the airworthiness, Inspection staff should report to the QAD by the use of FAA Form 8010-4 for Malfunction and Defect and FAA Form 8120-11 for Unapproved parts reporting. Any maintenance action deferral must be directed by applicable maintenance data and must have customer concurrence prior to returning the aircraft to service. Page 10.5-1
10.5.3
RESPONSIBILITY 1. 2.
10.5.4
GENERAL EVENTS 1.
2.
3.
4.
5. 6.
7.
8.

10.5.5
TYPES OF AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE INSPECTION 1. Aircraft maintenance inspection is classified according to type of the maintenance, such as: a. b. c. Major repair and Major alteration. Required inspection items (RII) is provided by customer. The inspection of Hidden damage after accident should be complied with Hidden damage inspection instruction in Item 10.6 to perform Hidden damage inspection. If the stipulation of inspection items should be assisted by other departments, the related departments should support the required assistance and inspection.
2.
Aircraft maintenance inspection is also classified according to phases of inspections: a. Preliminary inspection is carrying out prior to performing maintenance to determine the status and condition of aircrafts, aircraft components. In-progress inspection is those which must be performed during the whole maintenance process to determine whether the maintenance was performed satisfactorily. In-progress inspection may be described in the maintenance manuals or other inspection for continuous airworthiness. Final inspection is carried out to ensure all required maintenance on an article have been accomplished or deferred in compliance with applicable regulations before release the article to service.
b.
c.
10.5.6
OVERRIDE POLICY When a conflict occurs during course of inspection, the following principle shall be applied: 1. 2. Under no circumstances shall maintenance staff override decision of an authorized inspection staff. QC manager can override decision of an authorized inspection staff in case of: a. b. c. 3. Specification Misinterpretation, Specification Unavailability, or Specification Deficiency or Inadequacy
For any conflict that cannot be solved, QA director will give final decision.
10.5.7 10.5.7.1
PROCEDURE Preliminary inspection 1. Preliminary Inspection shall be performed on the aircraft prior to performing maintenance and may include General visual inspection, Operational inspection, Functional inspections as well as Non Destructive Test. Preliminary Inspection shall also include aircraft input documents review. Page 10.5-2
2.

3.
For Ramp maintenance activities such as Transit, Preflight, Daily/Terminal and Weekly check, the inspection will be performed by appropriate Inspection personnel according to customers procedures. QC authorized staff should irregularly inspect it. Preliminary inspection in ramp maintenance should include but are not limited to the followings: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Inspections using customer CHECKLIST; General visual inspections of the aircraft exterior and interior; Review of Technical and Cabin Defect Logs to determine nonroutine tasks; Review of Notices of Flight Crews; Review of Post Flight reports; Check of the Status of ADDs and associated requirements; Review of the Out Of Phase List;
4. 5.
Findings during ramp maintenance inspection shall be documented according to customer procedure for corrective actions. For base maintenance the preliminary inspection shall include (a check sheet or other related documents may provide by the customer): a. Aircraft documents review: Upon input of aircraft, the production planner shall review the followings: Aircraft technical log/ records for input flight defects, deferred defects and calendar inspection items that do not have WO to perform but they are due or will become due while the aircraft is in the custody of the company. HT/LLP components status (if provided by customer) to find out whether any of such components on the aircraft will become due during the maintenance. AD Validation/ Verification of AD and SB shall be carried out. b. Inspection on the aircraft: Inspection on the aircraft shall be performed by QC authorized inspection staff with support from maintenance staff: Including 360 check of A/C appearance and internal loose equipment check. After A/C is in Hangar, Mechanic should open the cover indicated in router. The authorized inspection staff should complete the inspection in detailed when inspecting. If the inspection needs to dismantle the parts, the authorized inspection staff should cooperate with production planner for necessary actions. c. All finding found shall be documented on Preliminary Inspection Finding List (VAECO Form 6002).
Page 10.5-3

d.
After review the Preliminary Inspection Finding List, QC authorized inspection staff will forward to production planner for raising NRC according to customer acceptance by contract or by the customer representative.
10.5.7.2
In-process Inspection 1. The mechanic should notify the authorized inspection staff to perform the inspection before installation and maintenance. If finding some discrepancies during the inspection, the authorized inspection staff should issue NRC or entry in Flight/Maintenance Log. When realize that maintenance personnel didnt perform the operation according to standard procedures, the authorized inspection staff should reject it during the operation inspection. If finding discrepancy belongs to RII, the authorized inspection staff should identify in Flight/Maintenance Log or Maintenance action of NRC. Then, the inspection staff authorized by the customer should perform the inspection. Authorized inspection staff should check and stamp to certify for a step of work to be done after the maintenance staff fill the detailed descriptions in block of action taken and sign for the step performed. After completing the router, the authorized inspection staff in charge of that zone shall perform this inspection. If the work specified in the router required operation or function test, then the results should be recorded and attached to maintenance document. The final inspection of the aircraft maintenance shall be conducted throughout the efforts of the authorized inspection staff that involving in the maintenance tasks to be returned to service. Authorized inspection staff shall ensure: a. b. c. d. e. f. All requirements of Require Inspection Item (RII) are properly conducted. All work has been inspected as required and record the result accordingly to show compliance to specific standards. Proper inspection method/techniques and standards have been utilized when conducted the aforementioned inspections. Necessary inspection buy-back has been made. The issuance of FAA Form 337 when Major alteration has been conducted. Proper installation of appliances, accessories and individual parts or components on the aircraft during aircraft maintenance or alteration, and maintenance records are completed accordingly. All process documentation has been properly completed and generated discrepancies recorded and corrected or deferred. Page 10.5-4
2.
3.
4.
10.5.7.3
Final inspection 1.
2.
g.

PART 10 QUALITY SYSTEM PROC. 10.6 HIDDEN DAMAGE INSPECTION
10.6 10.6.1 10.6.2
HIDDEN DAMAGE INSPECTION PURPOSE To establish procedure for performing the hidden damage inspection. SCOPE This procedure is applied for the aircraft, engine or component is instructed by customer have been involved an accident, prior to commencement of any work.
10.6.3
RESPONSIBILITY 1. The Manager of Quality Control of the QAD is responsible for the performance of a hidden damage inspection to determine there is any possible defect on the items involved The Inspection personnel are responsible for performing appropriate inspections to the article reported involving accident to assure all defects, despite obviously or obscure, are properly identified and corrected. The customer is responsible to provide detail, documented accident information of which the repair article had involved to VAECO on the visit of subject article.
2.
3.
10.6.4
GENERAL When the aircraft, engine or component is instructed by customer have been involved an incident/ accident, prior to commencement of any work, shall be given a thorough inspection for hidden damage, including the areas adjacent to obviously damaged area and/or be disassembled as necessary.
10.6.5
PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. Whenever a report is received from the customer stating that the article to be maintained by the Company, the QC manager shall be informed. Inspection personnel shall be assigned by the QC manager for conducting detail inspection prior to the maintenance actions start. The authorized inspection personnel shall request EGD for support as he needs inspection standard references which are necessary for the inspection. Do research on associated documents, records for occurrence, accident to determine the methods, inspection standards would be followed and scope of work for inspection The Hidden Damage Inspection Procedure shall encompass the following: a. Authorized inspection personnel shall perform a thorough and comprehensive inspection and responsible for listing all discrepancies. The inspection shall include the area where the accident is occurred, adjacent area and the related system that directly or indirectly link to the area that might be consequentially damaged.
4.
Page 10.6-1

PART 10 QUALITY SYSTEM PROC. 10.6 HIDDEN DAMAGE INSPECTION
b.
If such inspection cannot be completed due to lack of suitable criteria notwithstanding standard or prior acceptance criteria, engineer of maintenance center or the EGD shall be requested to assist in the evaluation to assess damages and establish additional inspection requirements. Any defect which cannot be cleared within the limits of manufacturer's and/or approved maintenance data shall be coordinated with the manufacturer through engineer of EGD. The resultant manufacturer's recommendations and FAA approved evidence shall be made a part of the Maintenance Record.
c.
5.
All findings shall be recorded on the customer's flight/maintenance log or Non Routine Card (VAECO Form 6001) for aircraft, The A/C component maintenance worksheet (VAECO Form 7032) for component. The information shall be used for monitor and corrective actions If an authorized inspection personnel suspects an article may have been involved in an occurrence or accident, he shall report to the Manager of Quality Control who shall request any pertinent information from the customer. After receipt of customer information, the authorized inspection personnel may, if warranted, follow the procedure in this Section for further investigation.
6.
Page 10.6-2

PART 10 QUALITY SYSTEM PROC. 10.7 INSPECTION OF REQUIRE INSPECTION ITEM
10.7 10.7.1
INSPECTION OF REQUIRED INSPECTION ITEM (RII) PURPOSE This section provides guidance and describes procedures for conducting RII inspections in accordance with customer procedures.
10.7.2 10.7.3
SCOPE Applicable to whom it prescribes the responsibilities. RESPONSIBILITIES 1. 2. BDD is responsible to receive a RII list from customer and send to applicable maintenance centers. The RII inspection personnel are responsible for conducting RII inspections under their RII responsibilities, authorities, and limitations and in accordance with customers/air carrier procedures. The Director of QAD is responsible for ensuring that all RII inspection personnel are appropriately certificated, properly trained, qualified and authorized to perform RII inspection by customer/air carrier, and the work of inspection being performed does not exceed the authorization. The Maintenance Centers is responsible for ensuring that the RII is performed by proper authorized inspection staff. The air carrier will designate certain tasks as required inspection items (RII). These required inspections cover maintenance tasks which, if not properly performed or if done with improper parts or materials, could result in a failure, malfunction, or defect which would endanger the continued safe flight and landing of the aircraft. A primary concept of the RII function is that the person performing the item of work must not perform the required inspection on that item of work. [deleted] The accomplishment of RII functions must be separated from other maintenance (inspection, overhaul, repair, preservation, and other replacement of parts), preventive maintenance, and alteration functions. a. The QAD will develop a list of persons, identified by name, occupational title, and the inspections that they are authorized by customer to perform the RII by the use of RII authorized inspection staff list. The RII authorized inspection staff list will be sent to maintenance centers. Based on the RII authorized inspection staff list, the foreman will assign RII inspection personnel for a specific item(s). Those RII inspection personnel must not accomplish any maintenance
3.
4. 10.7.4
REQUIRED INSPECTION ITEMS (RII) DEFINITIONS 1.
2.
3. 10.7.5 1.
PROCEDURE
b.
Page 10.7-1

PART 10 QUALITY SYSTEM PROC. 10.7 INSPECTION OF REQUIRE INSPECTION ITEM
functions (including general inspection functions) of that (those) item(s). 2. Identify required inspection items a. The responsibility for developing and controlling of RII list belong to customer. When receiving RII list from BDD, MCC send the RII list to applicable maintenance centers. Based upon the RII list of customer, the respective TPD will review and identify on each job cards/worksheets the items of maintenance and alterations that must be inspected (required inspection) in the provided work/WP. The identification of RII will be a stamp with RII at the right upper corner of the respective job card.
b.
c. 3.
The RII inspection staff will review to make sure that required inspections are under their authorizations. If satisfied, the RII inspection staff will conduct the required inspection in accordance with the respective job cards and/or maintenance data. When the required inspection is completed and no finding is found, the RII inspection staff will signify on the job card by stamp and signature. The details of Maintenance Record Completion will be found in procedure 5.6. Buy-back: If there is any finding, the RII inspection staff will require the person who accomplished the item(s) to rework by the use of NRC, on which the discrepancies are recorded and stamp with RII, then the required inspection for that item of work will be conducted until satisfied. The NRC must be attached to the RII job card/worksheet/NRC after completion. Any conflict resolution of inspection findings will be implemented IAW Override policy in 10.5.6
4.
5.
6.
Page 10.7-2

PART 10 QUALITY SYSTEM PROC. 10.8 CRS/ MAINTENANCE RELEASE ISSUANCE (FOR AIRCRAFT)
10.8 10.8.1
CERTIFICATE OF RETURN TO SERVICE/ MAINTENANCE RELEASE ISSUANCE (FOR AIRCRAFT) PURPOSE To ensure the issuance of Maintenance release or Return to service certificate IAW applicable regulations.
10.8.2
SCOPE This procedure is applied to issue certificate for return aircraft to service by VAECO staff after maintenance and major repair/ modification (alteration).
10.8.3
RESPONSIBILITY 1. The Director of Quality Assurance Department is responsible to assign appropriate authorized staff for returning the aircraft to service after base maintenance and major modification (alteration). The Director of respective maintenance center is responsible to assign appropriate authorized staff for returning the aircraft to service in the cases other than base maintenance.
2.
10.8.4 10.8.4.1
PROCEDURE General 1. When all the maintenance actions for the A/C are completed, authorized staff shall perform the final inspection as specified in Item 10.5.7.3 to ensure the maintenance tasks comply with the required standard. The return to service activities are classified into 4 cases: a. b. c. d. Return to service after line maintenance. Return to service after maintenance event. Return to service after base maintenance (letter check). Return to service after major repair or modification (alteration).
2.
10.8.4.2
Return to service after line maintenance 1. 2. The return to service after line maintenance is performed by appropriate RTS staff IAW customers procedure. The RTS staff shall enter name, signature, stamp and date performance in relevant block of the technical log/ flight log to certify for returning the A/C to service. The return to service after maintenance event is performed by appropriate RTS staff of assigned maintenance center. The RTS staff shall enter the performance of WP of maintenance event in the technical log and certify by name, signature, stamp and date performance in relevant block of the technical log/ flight log for returning the A/C to service.
10.8.4.3
Return to service after maintenance event 1. 2.
Page 10.8-1

10.8.4.4
Return to service after base maintenance 1. The Production planner shall prepare the Maintenance Release Certificate by using Customer form or VAECO Form 2012 (if Customer form is not available) in duplicate. QC authorized staff who has appropriate CAT C authorized certificate shall enter name, signature, stamp and date performance in relevant block of the Maintenance Release Certificates to certify that the WP is successfully completed and basing on that work the A/C is returned to service.
2.
10.8.4.5
Return to service after major repair or modification (alteration) 1. After major modification completion, Major Repair or Modification Reporting Form (CAAV Form 523) is used to certify the aircraft returned to service. For the major repair, the use of Major Repair or Modification Reporting is according to Customer request. QC authorized staff with appropriate level B shall issue Major Repair or Modification Reporting Form (CAAV Form 523) in duplicate. The QC authorized staff shall enter name, signature, stamp and date performance in relevant block of the Major Repair or Modification Reporting Forms to certify that the repair/ modification is completed and the aircraft is approved for return to service. QC staff shall send one completed Report to CAAV. The other signed copy is attached with the related repair/ modification records and sent to Technical Record Section for scanning then keeping at Technical Record Section of EGD (VNA) or sending to Operator (other than VNA) Major Repairs/Alterations will only be performed in accordance with FAA approved maintenance data. Customer will be responsible for determination of Major Repairs/Alterations and providing appropriate FAA approved maintenance data. When finished the work, the RTS staff will collect all the maintenance document and data; check for the proper completeness of those as required and submit to QC manager for issuance of FAA Form 337. For Major Repairs, FAA Form 337 will not be used to record the work unless requested by customer. Use the customer's WO upon which the repair is recorded. For Major Alterations, FAA Form 337 will be used to record the work. This form may be provided in duplicate by customer if it includes FAA approval of related maintenance data. Then it will be executed in duplicate by the authorized inspection personnel in appropriate blocks. A signed copy will be attached to WP and sent to customer. QC will forward the second copy to the FAA within 48 hours after the aircraft is approved for return to service.
10.8.4.5.1 For VN registered A/C
2.
3.
10.8.4.5.2 For US registered A/C 1.
2.
3.
4.
Page 10.8-2

5.
Technical Flight will be proposed according to customer request and procedures which based on the regulatory requirements of the FAA. The responsibility of determining if a technical flight is necessary belongs to customer.
10.8.4.5.3 For Aircraft registered in other country Return to service procedure for A/C registered in the country other than USA or Vietnam is performed IAW the requirement as set in the contract with the customer.
Page 10.8-3

PART 10 QUALITY SYSTEM PROC. 10.9 CONTINUITY OF INSPECTION
10.9 10.9.1
CONTINUITY OF INSPECTION PURPOSE To maintain the continuity of inspections and ensure that interruptions of inspections caused by shift/task handover does not adversely affect any inspection responsibility.
10.9.2
RESPONSIBILITY 1. The Inspection personnel are responsible for full compliance with all procedures outlined in this manual and as appropriate to any item being inspected, repaired, overhauled or altered by the company. The airworthiness of those items, a compliance with record requirements of the operator of those items and of the Company, depends on conformity to the procedures of this system. Continuity of inspection of all items or components as they progress through the various stages of work in VAECO shall include Incoming Materials, Preliminary and Hidden Damage Inspection where applicable. In addition, as work progresses on a specific item, inspections shall be made as necessary so that final inspection to determine airworthiness shall not necessitate disassembly. Inspections, tests, and calibrations shall be accomplished in accordance with the applicable manufacturer's recommendations and accepted/approved methods and procedures. Each inspection shall be recorded by the individual accomplished the inspection. Inspector handover sheet (VAECO Form 2015) shall be left by each of the inspectors leaving the job before completion of a project for information to the succeeding inspector. Its purpose is to assure a continuing inspection responsibility for in-progress work inspections The Inspector handover sheet binders are located throughout VAECO and made readily available to both shift out-going and incoming inspectors to ensure the continuity for inspection completion. The Inspector handover sheet binders shall be located as follows: a. b. Dock Control Room for base maintenance; RTPD for ramp maintenance. Shop office for component maintenance.
2.
10.9.3
CONTINUITY OF INSPECTION 1.
2.
3.
10.9.4
HANDOVER SHEET 1.
2.
10.9.5
PARTIAL INSPECTION 1. 2. A partial inspection may consist of, but not be limited to, an inspection and verification of partial work completed. In the event that it becomes necessary to discontinue work on a certain task or process due to the shifting, availability of material, etc., the inspector shall perform the inspection to its latest situation. Page 10.9-1

PART 10 QUALITY SYSTEM PROC. 10.9 CONTINUITY OF INSPECTION
3.
Once the inspection is acceptable by the inspection personnel, he/she shall make a remark on the blank area of the document stating the tasks that have been performed and inspected. He/she shall sign and stamp his/her authorization adjacent to the remark to be the evidence of the acceptance.
Page 10.9-2

PART 10 QUALITY SYSTEM PROC. 10.10 RE-CERTIFYING A COMPONENT/PART REMOVED FROM A/C
10.10 10.10.1
RE-CERTIFYING A COMPONENT/ PART REMOVED FROM AIRCRAFT PURPOSE To ensure the used component/ part removed from aircraft is re-certified as serviceable IAW applicable requirements.
10.10.2
SCOPE This procedure is applied to the components removed from aircraft including, but not limited to, the following circumstances: 1. For trouble-shooting or cannibalization (robbery). 2. Required by Engineering Order (EO), Engineering Request (ER) or Work Order. 3. After on-wing repair.
10.10.3
RESPONSIBILITY The authorized staff has responsibility for confirming that the component/ part meet all applicable requirements before being re-certified.
10.10.4
PROCEDURE 1. The RTS staff must confirm the following requirements are met before the component/ part is considered as serviceable: a. During the last flight, the components and related systems operated normally and there is no evidence of defect; or b. If any defect occurred in the related system during the last flight but trouble shooting confirms that component is not the cause of the defect; or c. If the component has defect it has been repaired IAW approved/ accepted data. d. The removal was performed in accordance the AMM by a qualified person; e. A physical condition is good (no damage, corrosion, leak etc.); f. Other inspections/tests required by the relevant manufacturer maintenance instructions have been carried out; g. The removed component has been preserved in compliance with Manufacturer requirements. To issue Re-certified Certificate, authorized staff shall fill all necessary information in the appropriate blocks of VAECO Form 5001 including: a. Certificate reference number; b. Description, Part number, Serial Number; c. Work performed to confirm component as serviceable; d. Other necessary information (if applicable), for example: Flight hours; Technical log, PFR, Maintenance Message; e. Stamp or signature and authorization number of the authorized staff who issues the certificate. Page 10.10-1
10.10.4.1 Re-certifying a component/ part removed from VNA aircraft
2.

PART 10 QUALITY SYSTEM PROC. 10.10 RE-CERTIFYING A COMPONENT/PART REMOVED FROM A/C
10.10.4.2 Re-certifying a component/ part removed (by VAECO staff) from an aircraft of an operator other than VNA. 1. Authorized person (CRS holder) who is assigned to check the component/ part removed from customers aircraft after lease or loan may only re-certify a component/ part if VAECO retains control of the airworthiness status of the components and the airworthy condition can be controlled. The assigned RTS staff must confirm all the requirements specified in the item 10.10.4.1(1) and 9.1.5.9(3) are satisfied. The assigned RTS staff shall issue Re-certified Certificate by filling all necessary information in the appropriate blocks of VAECO Form 5001 IAW the item 10.10.4.1(2).
2. 3.
Page 10.10-2

PART 10 QUALITY SYSTEM PROC. 10.11 FABRICATION QUALITY CONTROL
10.11 10.11.1
FABRICATION QUALITY CONTROL PURPOSE To establish procedure for fabricating the aircraft parts during the period of performing maintenance or alteration in compliance with applicable regulations and customer requirements.
10.11.2
SCOPE 1. The fabrication of CAT 3 Parts for maintenance or alterations will be limited to parts, the failure of which would have no effect on the continued safe flight and landing of the aircraft, such as: bushings, shims, hard tubes, flexible tubes, secondary panels and structures, fairing panels and unaffected airworthiness parts in CABIN etc. Fabrication of CAT 3 parts requires the use of data accepted by competent Authority. The fabrication of a part that follows procedure specified in SRM is belonged to Airframe rating so that work is not applied by this procedure. Customer is responsible to provide requisition for fabrication replacement parts on paper format and contain or refer data accepted by competent Authority. Director of BDD is responsible for receiving customer requisition of fabricating parts and order related department for the fabrication. Director of LGD is responsible to provide necessary material for the fabrication. Director of EGD is responsible for preparing acceptable design data about new parts fabrication and transfer of technical/ specification requirements to executable fabrication procedures for workshop staff. Director of QAD is responsible for establishing Fabrication Quality Control System (FSQS) to ensure all parts are fabricated conforms to its design data and is in a safe condition for operation.
2. 10.11.3
RESPONSIBILITY 1.
2. 3. 4.
5.
10.11.4
PROCEDURE 1. When a replacement part cannot be provided by the customer or VAECO and cannot be purchased from OEM or other operators within the certain period of maintenance activity, the customer shall be informed for part provision. The customer may request VAECO via BDD for the part fabrication. The customer requisition must be in paper format, contain or refer to data accepted by competent Authority.. In case the part is listed in VAECO Fabrication part list (VAECO Form 2061), BDD shall issue Service Order to related Maintenance center for fabrication.
10.11.4.1 Customer requisition
2.
Page 10.11-1

3.
When the part is not listed in VAECO Fabrication part list, BDD shall send Technical Assistance Request - TAR (VAECO Form 3015) to EGD for evaluation of fabrication capability and Technical Instruction. Upon receipt of a TAR from BDD, EGD shall review the requirements and contact to customer or manufacturer for getting necessary acceptable design data or drawing for the fabrication. The followings data are considered acceptable: a. b. c. Design data or drawing from OEM. Design data or drawing is self-developed by the customer IAW FAA approved/ accepted procedures. Design data or drawing is self-developed by VAECO IAW procedure in 8.7.4.1.
10.11.4.2 Fabrication capability evaluation and Technical Instruction issuance. 1.
2. 3.
EGD also does the evaluation of VAECO fabrication capability. When realized that acceptable design data or drawing cannot be achieved and/or VAECO is incapability for fabrication, EGD shall denote on the TAR and sent back to the BDD. The customer shall then be informed for other provisions of the part. When realized that requirements specified in Item 1 & 2 above are fulfilled, EGD shall a. Check if customer is able to provide the detail work instruction and procedure for the fabrication. Otherwise, EGD shall prepare a Technical Instruction (TI) for fabrication of the part. Procedure for prepare the TI is found in procedure 8.7 Technical instruction for part fabrication. Reply BDD of fabrication capability and reference to the TI or customers work instruction and procedure on the TAR for the issuance of the Service Order.
4.
b.
10.11.4.3 Fabrication Worksheet issuance 1. When received the Service Order, TPD of responsible maintenance center shall review to ensure that the TI and all necessary documents for the fabrication are available and current. If work instruction and procedure for the fabrication provided by customer, then customers work instruction and procedure will be followed. In case customers work instruction and procedure is not available, TPD of responsible maintenance center shall issue the Fabrication Worksheet (VAECO Form 7035) base on Technical Instruction (TI). The Fabrication Worksheet and Service order then are sent to related shop to perform.
2.
3.
4.
Page 10.11-2

10.11.4.4 Materials 1. 2. The materials including the raw materials used to fabricate the parts are received from the stores. The shop staff shall check the spares/ materials availability in the stores by using AMASIS: a. If the spares/ materials are available the requester fill all necessary information of spares/ materials required in Stock Requisition (VAECO Form 4024) and go to the store and get them; If the spares/ materials are not available the requester shall input all necessary information of spares/ materials required in the AMASIS and create Request for Supply (VAECO Form 4023) to order for fabricating later.
b.
10.11.4.5 Fabrication and inspection 1. The fabricating inspection staff shall ensure that suitable, calibrated equipment required as per the TI shall be utilized for the performance of the task. The shop staff may perform the task he/she had been qualified according to the direction in the Fabrication Worksheet. He/she shall make proper record of the work in progress in the Fabrication Worksheet including the data related to the process that change the physical or mechanical characteristics of the materials such as treatment time, temperature, and dimensions, etc. If any of the fabrication process or test cannot be done by VAECO, the process may be contracted to the approved contractor of VAECO. The shop staff shall check the material prior usage. If any damage and deterioration is found, the material must be discarded in the place separated from the serviceable materials. The Fabricating inspection staff shall perform inspection using suitable methods or techniques as specified in the TI to verify the proper fabrication process is followed and the dimension, test result of the part are conformity to the specification specified in design data and ensure the quality of the parts fit to the requirements of subject parts. If the task is acceptable to the specification, the Fabricating inspection staff shall stamp properly on the Fabrication Worksheet as evidence of acceptance and issue Certificate of Conformity (VAECO Form 7036). Rejection Parts: The fabricated parts that are rejected during the inspection because of fail to compliance to the required specifications shall be attached with Condemned Part Tag (VAECO Form 0009), and destroyed or discard into the locked cabinet to prevent from misusage.
2.
3. 4.
5.
6.
7.
10.11.4.6 Parts Delivery Fabricated parts shall be delivered to a Maintenance center or LGD as assigned by customer, and accompany with: Issue: 02, Revision: 00, Date: 01 FEB 2012 Page 10.11-3

1. 2. 3. 1.
Original Fabrication Worksheet, Original Certificate of Conformity, The requisition document from the customer. Copy of Fabrication Worksheet, Certificate of Conformity, Service order and requisition document shall be archived in the respective CMC for two years. The Fabrication Worksheet, Certificate of Conformity, and requisition document for the fabricated parts, if directly installed back to the aircraft, shall be attached with the task card that call out the needs of subject part and shall be kept together with maintenance record in Technical record section.
10.11.4.7 Record Keeping
2.
Page 10.11-4

PART 10 QUALITY SYSTEM PROC. 10.12 MOR/ MALFUNCTION AND DEFECT REPORTING
10.12 10.12.1
MOR/ MALFUNCTION AND DEFECT REPORTING PURPOSE To ensure all mandatory occurrence; malfunction and defect found during maintenance activities are investigated and timely reported to competent authority, manufacturer and customer IAW applicable requirements.
10.12.2
SCOPE This procedure is applied to report all mandatory occurrence; malfunction and defect of articles/ aircraft/ aircraft component that are maintained by VAECO.
10.12.3
RESPONSIBILITY 1. 2. 3. Maintenance staff is responsible to report incidents/ accidents, malfunctions and serious defects. The related TPD Manager is responsible to initially report all mandatory occurrence, malfunction and defect to the regional QCD and MCC. The MCC Director is responsible to report mandatory occurrence, malfunction and defect to Air Carrier/ Operator (as required by the contract), EGD and Safety Division of QAD. Safety division manager is responsible for investigating to find out the root cause of all mandatory occurrence, malfunction and defect; summarizing and reporting to Authorities, the Manufacturer and the Air carrier/ Operator as applicable.
4.
10.12.4
OCCURRENCES, DEFECTS OR MALFUNCTIONS TO BE REPORTED
10.12.4.1 List of occurrence to be reported applicable to any aircraft maintained by VAECO The following are examples of reportable occurrences and are given for guidance of Authorized Staff. The list does not include all possible examples and Authorized Staff should use their judgment whenever they discover a defect, as to whether it comes within the scope of reportable occurrences. 10.12.4.1.1 Aircraft maintenance and repair 1. Incorrect installation of parts or components on aircraft that is detected during an inspection or test procedure not intended for that specific purpose; Leakage of hot air which resulted in aircraft structure damage; Any defect in a life controlled part causing retirement before completion of its full life Any damage or deterioration (i.e. fractures, cracks, corrosion, delaminating, deformation, de-bonding etc.) due to any reason (i.e. vibration, loss of material hardness) of: a. Primary structure or a principal structural element (as defined in the manufacturers Repair Manual) where such damage or deterioration
2. 3. 4.
Page 10.12-1

exceeds allowable limits specified in the Repair Manual and requires a repair or complete or partial replacement of the element; b. Secondary structure which consequently has or may have endangered the aircraft; c. Engine, propeller structure. 5. Any failure, malfunction or defect of any system or equipment, or damage or deterioration found as a result of compliance with an Airworthiness Directive or other mandatory instruction issued by a Regulatory Authority, when: a. It is detected for the first time by the reporting organization implementing compliance; b. On any subsequent compliance where it exceeds the permissible limits quoted in the instruction and/ or published repair/ rectification procedures are not available. 6. Failure of any emergency system or equipment, including all exit doors and lighting, to perform satisfactorily, including when being used for maintenance or test purposes. Noncompliance or significant errors in compliance with required maintenance procedures; Products, parts, appliances and materials of unknown or suspect origin; Misleading, incorrect or insufficient maintenance data or procedures that could lead to maintenance errors;
7. 8. 9.
10. Failure, malfunction or defect of ground equipment used for test or checking of aircraft systems and equipment when the required routine inspection and test procedures did not clearly identify the problem when this results in a hazardous situation. 10.12.4.1.2 Aircraft technical 1. Aircraft Structure a. Damage to a Principal Structural Element that has not been qualified as damage tolerant (life limited element). Principal Structural Elements are those which contribute significantly to carrying flight, ground, and pressurization loads, and whose failure could result in a catastrophic failure of the aircraft; . b. Defect or damage exceeding admissible damages to a Principal Structural Element that has been qualified as damage tolerant; c. Damage to or defect exceeding allowed tolerances of a structural element which failure could reduce the structural stiffness to such an extent that the required flutter, divergence or control reversal margins are no longer achieved; d. Damage to or defect of a structural element, which could result in the liberation of items of mass that may injure occupants of the aircraft.
Page 10.12-2

e. Damage to or defect of a structural element, which could jeopardize proper operation of systems. f. Loss of any part of the aircraft structure in flight. 2. Aircraft Systems The following generic criteria applicable to all systems are proposed a. Loss, significant malfunction or defect of any system, subsystem or set of equipment when Standard Operating Procedures (SOP), drills etc. could not be satisfactorily accomplished. (Report to VNA only) b. Inability of the crew to control the system, e.g. (Report to VNA only) Uncommanded actions; incorrect and or incomplete response, including limitation of movement or stiffness; runaway; mechanical disconnection or failure . c. Failure or malfunction of the exclusive function(s) of the system (one system could integrate several functions. (Report to VNA only) d. Interference within or between systems. (Report to VNA only) e. Failure or malfunction of the protection device or emergency system associated with the system. (Report to VNA only) f. Loss of redundancy of the system. (Report to VNA only) g. Any occurrence resulting from unforeseen behavior of a system. (Report to VNA only) h. For aircraft types with single main systems, subsystems or sets of equipment: Loss, significant malfunction or defect in any main system, subsystem or set of equipment. (Report to VNA only) i. For aircraft types with multiple independent main systems, subsystems or sets of equipment: The loss, significant malfunction or defect of more than one main system, subsystem or set of equipment. (Report to VNA only) Operation of any primary warning system associated with aircraft systems or equipment unless the crew conclusively established that the indication was false provided that the false warning did not result in difficulty or hazard arising from the crew response to the warning. (Report to VNA only)
j.
k. Leakage of hydraulic fluids, fuel, oil or other fluids which resulted in a fire hazard or possible hazardous contamination of aircraft structure, systems or equipment, or risk to occupants l. Malfunction or defect of any indication system when this results in the possibility of misleading indications to the crew. (Report to VNA only)
Page 10.12-3

m. Any failure, malfunction or defect if it occurs at a critical phase of flight and relevant to the operation of that system. (Report to VNA only) n. Occurrences of significant shortfall of the actual performances compared to the approved performance which resulted in a hazardous situation (taking into account the accuracy of the performance calculation method) including braking action, fuel consumption etc. (Report to VNA only) o. Asymmetry of flight controls; e.g. flaps, slats, spoilers etc. (Report to VNA only) Examples of reportable occurrences resulting from the application of these generic criteria to specific systems: b. Air conditioning/ ventilation: Complete loss of avionics cooling; Depressurization. (Report to VNA only) p. Auto flight system: Failure of the auto flight system to achieve the intended operation while engaged; Significant reported crew difficulty to control the aircraft linked to auto flight system functioning; Failure of any auto flight system disconnect device; Uncommanded auto flight mode change. (Report to VNA only) q. Communications: Failure or defect of passenger address system resulting in loss or inaudible passenger address; Total loss of communication in flight. (Report to VNA only) r. Electrical system: Loss of one electrical system distribution system (AC or DC); Total loss or loss or more than one electrical generation system; Failure of the backup (emergency) electrical generating system. (Report to VNA only) s. Cockpit/ Cabin/ Cargo: Pilot seat control loss during flight; Failure of any emergency system or equipment, including emergency evacuation signaling system, all exit doors , emergency lighting, etc. Loss of retention capability of the cargo loading system. (Report to VNA only) t. Fire protection system: Issue: 02, Revision: 04, Date: 28 NOV 2012 Page 10.12-4

Fire warnings, except those immediately confirmed as false; Undetected failure or defect of fire/smoke detection/protection system, which could lead to loss or reduced fire detection/protection; Absence of warning in case of actual fire or smoke; (Report to VNA only) u. Flight controls system: Asymmetry of flaps, slats, spoilers etc.; Limitation of movement, stiffness or poor or delayed response in the operation of primary flight control systems or their associated tab and lock systems; Flight control surface run away; Flight control surface vibration felt by the crew; Mechanical flight control disconnection or failure. Significant interference with normal control of the aircraft or degradation of flying qualities. (Report to VNA only) v. Fuel system: Fuel quantity indicating system malfunction resulting in total loss or erroneous indicated fuel quantity on board; Leakage of fuel which resulted in major loss, fire hazard , significant contamination. Malfunction or defects of the fuel jettisoning system which resulted in inadvertent loss of significant quantity, fire hazard, hazardous contamination of aircraft equipment or inability to jettison fuel. Fuel system malfunctions or defects which had a significant effect on fuel supply and/ or distribution; Inability to transfer or use total quantity of usable fuel. (Report to VNA only) w. Hydraulics system: Failure of the isolation system to operate; Loss of more than one hydraulic circuits; Failure of the backup hydraulic system; Inadvertent Ram Air Turbine extension. (Report to VNA only) x. Ice detection/ protection system: Undetected loss or reduced performance of the anti-ice/de-ice system; Loss of more than one of the probe heating systems. Inability to obtain symmetrical wing deicing; Issue: 02, Revision: 04, Date: 28 NOV 2012 Page 10.12-5

Abnormal ice accumulation leading to significant effects on performance or handling qualities (Report to VNA only) y. Indicating/ warning/ recording systems: Malfunction or defect of any indicating system when the possibility of significant misleading indications to the crew could result in an inappropriate crew action on an essential system; Loss of a red warning function on a system; For glass cockpits: loss or malfunction of more than one display unit or computer involved in the display/ warning function. (Report to VNA only) z. Landing gear system/ brakes/ tires: Brake fire; Significant loss of braking action; Unsymmetrical braking leading to significant path deviation; Failure of the L/G free fall extension system (including during scheduled tests); Unwanted gear or gear doors extension/ retraction. Multiple tire burst. (Report to VNA only) aa. Navigation systems (including precision approaches system) and air data systems: Total loss or multiple navigation equipment failures; Total failure or multiple air data system equipment failures; Significant misleading indication; Significant navigation errors attributed to incorrect data or a database coding error. Problems with ground navigational facilities leading to significant navigation errors not associated with transitions from inertial navigation mode to radio navigation mode. (Report to VNA only) bb. Oxygen system: Loss of oxygen supply in the cockpit; Loss of oxygen supply to more than 10% of passengers. (Report to VNA only) cc. Bleed air system: Hot bleed air leak resulting in fire warning or structural damage; Loss of all bleed air systems; Failure of bleed air leak detection system. (Report to VNA only) 3. Propulsion (including Engines, Propellers) and APUs
Page 10.12-6

a. Flameout, shutdown or malfunction of any engine; (Report to VNA only) b. Over-speed or inability to control the speed of any high speed rotating component (For example: Auxiliary power unit, air starter, air cycle machine, air turbine motor); (Report to VNA only) c. Failure or malfunction of any part of an engine or Power plant resulting in any one or more of the following: Non containment of components/ debris; Uncontrolled internal or external fire, or hot gas breakout; Thrust reversing inadvertently; system failing to operate or operating
Inability to control power, thrust or rpm; Partial or complete loss of a major part of the power plant; Inability, by use of normal procedures, to shut down an engine; inability to restart a serviceable engine (Report to VNA only). d. An un-commanded thrust/power loss, change or oscillation which is classified as a loss of thrust or power control (LOTC): for a single engine aircraft; or where it is considered excessive for the application, or where this could affect more than one engine in a multi-engine aircraft, particularly in the case of a twin engine aircraft; or for a multi-engine aircraft where the same, or similar, engine type is used in an application where the event would be considered hazardous or critical. (Report to VNA only) e. Any defect in a life controlled part causing retirement before completion of its full life f. Defects which could cause an inflight shut down rate high; (Report to VNA only) g. An engine limiter or control device failing to operate when required or operating inadvertently; h. Exceedance of engine parameters; i. 4. FOD resulting in damage. Propellers and transmission a. Failure or malfunction of any part of a propeller or power plant resulting in any one or more of the following: an over-speed of the propeller; the development of excessive drag; a thrust in the opposite direction to that commanded by the pilot;
Page 10.12-7

a release of the propeller or any major portion of the propeller; a failure that results in excessive unbalance; the unintended movement of the propeller blades below the established minimum in-flight low-pitch position; an inability to feather the propeller; an inability to command a change in propeller pitch; an un-commanded change in pitch; an uncontrollable torque or speed fluctuation; The release of low energy parts. (CAAV, VNA) b. Damage or defect of main rotor gearbox / attachment which could lead to in flight separation of the rotor assembly, and /or malfunctions of the rotor control. (CAAV, VNA) c. Damage to tail rotor, transmission and equivalent systems. (CAAV, VNA) 5. APUs a. Shut down or failure when the APU is required to be available by operational requirements, e.g. ETOPS, MEL. (Report to VNA only) b. Inability to shut down the APU. c. Over-speed. (CAAV, VNA) d. Inability to start the APU when needed for operational reasons. (Report to VNA only) 6. Human Factors a. Any incident where any feature or inadequacy of the aircraft design could have led to an error of use that could contribute to a hazardous or catastrophic effect. (Report to VNA only) 7. Other Occurrences a. Any incident where any feature or inadequacy of the aircraft design could have led to an error of use that could contribute to a hazardous or catastrophic effect. (Report to VNA only) b. An occurrence not normally considered as reportable (for example, furnishing and cabin equipment, water systems), where the circumstances resulted in endangering of the aircraft or its occupants. (Report to VNA only) c. A fire, explosion, smoke or toxic or noxious fumes. (Report to VNA only) d. Any other event which could hazard the aircraft, or affect the safety of the occupants of the aircraft, or people or property in the vicinity of the aircraft or on the ground. (Report to VNA only) e. Failure or defect of passenger address system resulting in loss or inaudible passenger address system( Report to VNA only) Issue: 02, Revision: 04, Date: 28 NOV 2012 Page 10.12-8

f. Loss of pilots seat control during flight. (Report to VNA only) 10.12.4.1.3 Operation of the Aircraft 1. 2. Heavy landing - a landing deemed to require a 'heavy landing check. A lightning strike which resulted in damage to the aircraft or loss or malfunction of any essential service.
10.12.4.2 List of occurrence to be reported applicable for US registered aircraft 10.12.4.2.1 The following Authorised Staff shall report the occurrence or detection of each failure, malfunction, or defect concerning. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Fires during flight and whether the related fire-warning system functioned properly; Fires during flight not protected by a related fire-warning system; False fire warning during flight; An engine exhaust system that causes damage during flight to the engine, adjacent structure, equipment, or components; An aircraft component that causes accumulation or circulation of smoke, vapor, or toxic or noxious fumes in the crew compartment or passenger cabin during flight; Engine shutdown during flight because of flameout; Engine shutdown during flight when external damage to the engine or airplane structure occurs; Engine shutdown during flight due to foreign object ingestion or icing; Engine shutdown during flight of more than one engine;
6. 7. 8. 9.
10. A propeller feathering system or ability of the system to control overspeed during flight; 11. A fuel or fuel-dumping system that affects fuel flow or causes hazardous leakage during flight; 12. An unwanted landing gear extension or retraction, or an unwanted opening or closing of landing gear doors during flight; 13. Brake system components that result in loss of brake actuating force when the airplane is in motion on the ground; 14. Aircraft structure that requires major repair; 15. Cracks, permanent deformation, or corrosion of aircraft structures, if more than the maximum acceptable to the manufacturer or the FAA; 16. Aircraft components or systems that result in taking emergency actions during flight (except action to shut down an engine); and 17. Emergency evacuation systems or components including all exit doors, passenger emergency evacuation lighting systems, or evacuation equipment that are found defective, or that fail to perform the intended functions during an actual emergency or during training, testing, maintenance, demonstrations, or inadvertent deployments. Issue: 02, Revision: 04, Date: 28 NOV 2012 Page 10.12-9

18. In an incorrect installation of parts or components on aircraft that is detected during an inspection or test procedure not intended for that specific purpose; 19. Leakage of hot air which resulted in aircraft structure damage; 20. Any defect in a life controlled part causing retirement before completion of its full life; 21. Any damage or deterioration (i.e. fractures, cracks, corrosion, delaminating, deformation, de-bonding etc.) due to any reason (i.e. vibration, loss of material hardness) of: a. Primary structure or a principal structural element (as defined in the manufacturers Repair Manual) where such damage or deterioration exceeds allowable limits specified in the Repair Manual and requires a repair or complete or partial replacement of the element; b. Secondary structure which consequently has or may have endangered the aircraft; c. Engine, propeller structure. 22. Any failure, malfunction or defect of any system or equipment, or damage or deterioration found as a result of compliance with an Airworthiness Directive or other mandatory instruction issued by a Regulatory Authority, when: a. It is detected for the first time by the reporting organization implementing compliance; b. On any subsequent compliance where it exceeds the permissible limits quoted in the instruction and/ or published repair/ rectification procedures are not available. 23. Failure of any emergency system or equipment, including all exit doors and lighting, to perform satisfactorily, including when being used for maintenance or test purposes. 24. Noncompliance or significant errors in compliance with required maintenance procedures; 25. Products, parts, appliances and materials of unknown or suspect origin; 26. Misleading, incorrect or insufficient maintenance data or procedures that could lead to maintenance errors; 27. Failure, malfunction or defect of ground equipment used for test or checking of aircraft systems and equipment when the required routine inspection and test procedures did not clearly identify the problem when this results in a hazardous situation. 10.12.4.2.2 In addition to the reports required by above-mentioned paragraph, each Authorised staff shall report any other failure, malfunction, or defect in an aircraft that occurs or is detected at any time if, in his/ her opinion, that failure, malfunction, or defect has endangered or may endanger the safe operation of an aircraft. Issue: 02, Revision: 00, Date: 01 FEB 2012 Page 10.12-10

10.12.5
PROCEDURE 1. Any occurrences, defects or malfunctions (specified in 10.12.4) discovered on aircraft, engine, component or part maintained by VAECO and any occurrences, defects or malfunctions reported by flight crew (for VNA aircraft) shall be immediately reported by the Authorized Staff to his team leader and related TPD. The respective TPD gathers necessary information and prepares the Mandatory Occurrence Report (form specified by customer otherwise VAECO Form 2035 will be used) and sends immediately to the related Quality Control Division and VAECO MCC. The VAECO MCC shall report immediately to CEO, Vice President in charge of ramp maintenance, Quality Assurance Director , the Operator/ Air carrier as required by the contract if the occurrences, defects or malfunctions affect the aircraft safety or flight schedule. The MCC shall report to EGD, Safety division of QAD within 12 hours. The related Quality Control Division performs a preliminary investigation with the related TPD to determine the root cause of the occurrence, defect or malfunction and take the necessary corrective actions and then report to Safety Division of QAD within 48 hours. The EGD shall perform an independent investigation. The investigation result and proposed corrective actions shall be reported to Safety Division of QAD within 48 hours.
10.12.5.1 Report sources of occurrences, defects or malfunctions
2.
3.
4. 5.
6.
10.12.5.2 Occurrences, defects or malfunctions reported by QAD 10.12.5.2.1 For any aircraft maintained by VAECO 1. 2. The reportable MOR items specified in 10.12.4.1 (except items marked with Reported to VNA only) shall be reported to CAAV. Safety division of QAD shall review reports, gather all information of occurrences from related division and prepare the statistical MOR (CAAV Form 14) and forward to QA Director or delegated person to review and accept. The accepted MOR is sent to CAAV within 72 hours since the event occurring. The accepted MOR that applicable for VNA (all items specified in 10.12.4.1) is sent to VNA within 72 hours since the event occurring as required by the contract with VNA. The reportable defect, failure or malfunction specified in 10.12.4.2 shall be reported to FAA. Safety Division of QAD shall review reports, gather all necessary information of defect or malfunction and prepare the FAA Service
3. 4.
10.12.5.2.2 For US registered aircraft 1. 2.
Page 10.12-11

Difficulty Report and forward to QA Director or delegated person to review and accept. 3. The report shall include the following information but not limited to: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. 4. Aircraft registration number; Type, make, and model of the article; Date of the discovery of the defect, malfunction; Nature of the defect, malfunction; Time since last overhaul, if applicable; Apparent cause of the defect, malfunction; and Other pertinent information that is necessary for more complete identification, determination of seriousness, or corrective action.
After acceptance of the QA Director the Malfunction or Defect Report is submitted electronically on the FAA Service Difficulty Reporting website within 96 hours since the failure, malfunction or defect discovered. The Malfunction or Defect Report is also forwarded to the air carrier as required by the contract. Safety division of QAD shall review reports, gather all necessary information of occurrence, defect or malfunction and prepare the report in a form acceptable to the respective authority and forward to QA Director or delegated person to review and accept. After acceptance of the QA Director the Malfunction or Defect Report is submitted, within the time-frame specified, to the respective airworthiness authority and/ or to the air carrier, and/or to the manufacturer of the aircraft/ component. Records of all reports submitted to the authorities shall be maintained by QAD for at least 5 years since occurrence date.
5.
10.12.5.2.3 For civil aircraft registered in other countries. 1.
2.
10.12.6
ARCHIVES 1.
Page 10.12-12

PART 10 QUALITY SYSTEM PROC. 10.13 SUSPECTED UNAPPROVED PARTS REPORTING
10.13 10.13.1
SUSPECTED UNAPPROVED PARTS REPORTING PURPOSE To ensure compliance with the regulations and to maintain the highest level of aviation safety, the following guidance is to be followed for the detection of unapproved parts and the actions to be taken upon discovery.
10.13.2
SCOPE This procedure is applied to report all unapproved suspected parts found by VAECO.
10.13.3
RESPONSIBILITY 1. Although, these procedures are primarily implemented as a receiving inspection function, it is the responsibility of every VAECO employee that shall become aware of suspected unapproved parts to notify the Quality Assurance Department (QAD) for further actions. Quality Assurance Director is responsible for reporting the Suspected Unapproved Parts (SUP) to the FAA SFO/IFO, CAAV or other competent Authority and the customer. The receiving inspector is responsible for performing inspection on all received article and report to the QAD for any SUP discovered during receiving process. All employees of VAECO are responsible to report to the QAD for any SUP discovered during maintenance process. In examining parts in inventory and/or receiving inspection the receiving inspectors shall review the item(s) receiving documentation for evidence of production approval to validate the part in accordance with Incoming Material Inspection and Receiving Procedure. If the Staffs of Logistics Department of VAECO has found a part in inventory for which evidence of production approval is not apparent, the Director of the Logistics Department shall request the certificate holder to demonstrate that the part is acceptable for installation on a product maintained by VAECO. In the event that any part is warranted unacceptable based upon receiving inspection procedures, the Receiving Inspectors shall initiate and attach a Discrepancy Report (VAECO Form 4004) to the item(s) and place the item(s) in the quarantine area. All documentation that accompanied the item(s) shall be forwarded to the Quality Assurance Department for future evaluation. The subject item(s) shall be held until QA Director together with EGD Director and the maintenance department concerned and the FAA/ CAAV or other competent Authority has conducted an evaluation to validate the item(s) as an approved part and returned to inventories or for installation.
2.
3.
4. 10.13.4
INVESTIGATION AND REPORTING 1.
2.
3.
4.
Page 10.13-1

5. 6.
Parts for which approval cannot be established shall be properly disposed of to prevent their installation of reentry into inventories Quality Assurance Department shall investigate the origin and condition of the part. When parts are considered unapproved after VAECO evaluation, it is important that the Quality Assurance Department promptly report them by using the Suspected Unapproved Parts Notification Form (FAA Form 8120-11) to the Federal Aviation Administration SUP Program Office, AVR-20, 13873 Park Center Road Suite 165, Herndon, VA 20171, Tel: (703) 668-3720, Fax: (703) 4813002 and a copy is to be forwarded to FAA SFO-IFO and/or FSI Form 32 to CAAV. Parts suspected as being unapproved that are installed on customer aircraft and listed in the customers approved Minimum Equipment List (MEL) authorization or Configuration Deviation List (CDL) approved procedures must be considered inoperable and deferred with the established MEL procedures. The time limitations specified for removal and replacement of the part in question must be complied with. If recall or rework are required for such SUP, the procedures in item 6 shall be followed The following procedures are established to support the Suspected Parts Program to assist in the identity and screening of unapproved parts suppliers. The Logistics Department shall make sure if all vendors, prior to purchase their products for use by VAECO, meet the following standards: a. b. The quoted price of products shall not be significantly lower than the price quoted by other suppliers of the same part. The delivery schedule shall not be significantly shorter than that of other suppliers of the same product when existing stocks are exhausted. The supplier must be able to provide drawings, specifications, overhaul manuals, or substantiating data demonstrating the conformity of the part or parts repair/overhaul. The supplier or repair station (in case of a repair or overhaul) must be able to provide evidence of FAA/ CAAV approval for the part and VAECO. Sales quotes or discussions shall not create the perception that unlimited supplies of parts, components, or materials are available to the end user.
7.
8. 9.
c.
d.
e.
10.13.5
PRODUCT RECALLED AND REWORK PROCEDURES 1. Once VAECO found the deficiencies that can result the un-airworthiness of the products or violate to the current regulations, a recall and rework process must be done to prevent any possible unsafe situation. If the product had been returned to service and installed on the aircraft, the recall process below shall be followed: Page 10.13-2
2.

a.
No Immediately risky Items For the parts that had been installed on the aircraft, the manufacturers and the FAA/ CAAV must be consulted immediately by the Manager of Quality Assurance Audit section, Manager of Quality control section or the maintenance department involved for disposition. If the manufacturer or the authority determined that there is no immediately risk of using such product, the Manager of the Quality control section together with the Director of the maintenance Center involved shall propose a replacement schedule to the FAA/ CAAV and the operator. VAECO shall then recall the parts according to the proposed schedule. After replacement accomplished, the summary report shall be submitted to the FAA/ CAAV and the customer.
b.
Immediately risky items If the products involved are considered risky after consult with the manufacturer and the FAA/ CAAV and must be removed immediately, the customer must be informed right away. The Director of the QAD shall, together with the Director of the maintenance centers and the Director of the Logistics Department, call out the AOG (Aircraft on Ground) meeting to negotiate the parts procurement, manpower, equipment, etc. required for such replacement. VAECO shall then replace the products immediately and after replacement accomplished, the summary report shall be submitted to the FAA/CAAV and the customer.
3.
If the products had been returned to service, but not yet installed on the aircraft, the products are regarded as unserviceable and shall follow the procedures below a. The Director of the QAD shall give a documented notice to the Logistics Department for recall the product or the NHA equipped with the questionable products. The Director of the Logistics Department shall be responsible for attaching the products with the unserviceable tag and removing them from the inventory immediately. The unserviceable parts shall then send to the related maintenance department for re-work according to the corrected method with no deficiency.
b.
c.
4.
For the products that are not yet returned to service, the potion that involved with the deficiencies shall be subjected to rework follow the procedures below A paper notice shall be issued to the maintenance department and the inspection sections involved by the Director of the QAD requiring rework. Page 10.13-3
5.

a.
When received the rework requirement, the inspectors of the inspection shall work with the related shop to perform the rework. It is the intension of the rework to correct any portion of the work involving the deficiencies. The rework shall be clearly denoted on the maintenance record but shall not override the original record. That is, both records of the original work and the rework shall be kept for future references
b.
10.13.6
QUALITY CONTROL RECORDS For reference and records purposes, Quality Assurance Department shall maintain files of all Malfunction and Defect Reports and Suspected Unapproved Parts Reports submitted by VAECO for a period for at least two (2) years.
Page 10.13-4

PART 10 QUALITY SYSTEM PROC. 10.14 MAINTENANCE EVENT/ OCCURRENCE INVESTIGATION
10.14 10.14.1
MAINTENANCE EVENT/ OCCURRENCE INVESTIGATION PURPOSE To establish procedure for investigation of maintenance event/ occurrence with the aims of: 1. 2. Defining root cause of maintenance event/ occurrence to prevent repetitive ones. Defining hazards and associated risks and specify necessary action to mitigate these risk to acceptable level of safety.
10.14.2
SCOPE This procedure is applicable to all maintenance event/ occurrence that affect the safety and quality of the maintenance activities.
10.14.3
RESPONSIBILITY 1. 2. QA Director is responsible for investigation of maintenance event/ occurrence and base on that to specify remedial or preventive actions. Director of maintenance centers/ department are responsible for: a. b. c. d. 3. Providing clearly, timely occurrence to QAD information of maintenance event/
Carrying out initial investigation of maintenance event/ occurrence and sent the investigation report and associated material to QAD Supporting QAD investigation. Performing necessary remedial actions and preventive actions as required.
VAECOs staff is responsible for providing information of maintenance event/ occurrence to his/her manager and QAD, supporting QAD for investigation. Maintenance event/ occurrence in this context is including but not limited to: accident, serious incident, incident, occurrence which happen during maintenance or cause by maintenance. Accident: an unplanned event or series of events that result in death, injury, occupational illness, damage to or loss of equipment or property, or damage to the environment. Incident: a near miss episode with minor consequences that could have resulted in greater loss. An unplanned event that could have resulted in an accident, or did result in minor damage, and indicates the existence of, though may not define a hazard or hazardous condition.
10.14.4
DEFINITIONS 1.
2.
3.
Page 10.14-1

10.14.5
PROCEDURES
10.14.5.1 Initial investigation by Maintenance Centre/ Department 10.14.5.1.1 Information of maintenance event/ occurrence collection and verification. 1. In each Maintenance Centre/ Department, maintenance staff shall report any maintenance event/ occurrence using applicable forms such as Mandatory Occurrence Report (MOR), Safety/Error Report (VAECO Form 2013) or Confidential Safety Report (VAECO Form 2014) to his/her manager and/or related SAG member. The manager and/or SAG Team leader shall initiate an initial investigation of the maintenance event/ occurrence by setting up an investigation team. The SAG member of the center/ department shall be appointed as the leader of the investigation team. The initial investigation shall be carried out by the maintenance center/ department itself or in cooperation with Safety Division or QC Division or other department depended on the nature, complexity of the event/ occurrence. The initial investigation should include but not limit to the followings: a. b. c. d. 2. Check on the scene and keep the original scene (if necessary); Take photo and/or video; Collect concerned evidences; Interview related personnel and witness.
2.
10.14.5.1.2 Carrying out initial investigation 1.
The leader of investigation team issues Investigation Report (VAECO Form 2055) and sends it and supporting document to QAD within 48h from the time of event/ occurrence.
10.14.5.2 Investigation by QAD 10.14.5.2.1 Collection and Verification of information of maintenance event/ occurrence 1. QAD receives information of maintenance event/ occurrence from following sources: a. Information of maintenance event/ occurrence founded during inspection/ maintenance should be timely reported by VAECO staff. Reports of maintenance event/ occurrence may include Mandatory Occurrence Report (MOR), Safety/ Error Report or Confidential Safety Report. Sending by email to sqd.vaeco@vietnamairlines.com Sending via the "Safety Information" on the VAECO website Maintenance event/ occurrence identified through internal audit report and audit report from authority, operator and customer. Repair Reports from Component Maintenance Centre;
b. c. d. e.
Page 10.14-2

f. 2. 3. 4.
Complaints/ feedback from operator/ customer regarding to maintenance quality, which are collected monthly by BDD.
Information of maintenance event/ occurrence may be provided via related Maintenance Center/ Department or directly to QAD. QA Director or delegated personnel shall verify information of maintenance event/ occurrence and initiate an investigation. An investigation team shall be set up with the team leader appointed by QA Director or delegated personnel. If investigation team receive Investigation Report and accompanied document of a maintenance event/ occurrence from maintenance center/ department, then the team shall review the report. The investigation team leader shall decide to conduct additional investigation or just update into safety database. If QAD receive information of maintenance event/ occurrence, then the investigation team shall carry out initial investigation. The initial investigation should include but not limit to the followings: a. b. c. d. Check on the scene and keep the original scene (if necessary); Take photo and/or video; Collect concerned evidences; Interview related personnel and witness.
10.14.5.2.2 Carry out investigation 1.
2. 3.
4.
Initial investigation to determine whether there was a maintenance error/ violation that contributed to the event. If there was no maintenance error/ violation, an engineering/ technical investigation IAW may continue in order to determine why some technical system failure (e.g., from metal fatigue or failure of electronic parts). QAD may request a support from EGD to investigate, if necessary. If there was a maintenance error/ violation that caused or contributed to the event, then a maintenance error/ violation investigation shall be carried out IAW procedure 10.22. In the case an technical investigation must be carried out, an investigation team shall be established with the expert from EGD and/or Maintenance Center. Investigation team may contact the manufacturer to get information, instruction and support. Basing on the nature, complexity of maintenance event/ occurrence, QA Director shall ask for a technical meeting with participation of related personnel and departments. Purposes of the technical comment meeting are:
5.
10.14.5.3 Technical investigation 1.
2. 3.
Page 10.14-3

a. b. c. d. 1.
Analyzing, investigating, determining the engineering/ technical root cause of maintenance event/ occurrence; Evaluating the influence of maintenance event/ occurrence; Proposing methods to remedy maintenance event/ occurrence and preventing recurrence of similar maintenance event/ occurrence; Sharing information and experience.
10.14.5.4 Corrective, preventive and control the remedial action Base on result of the investigation QAD shall carry out the followings but not limited to: a. b. c. d. 2. 10.14.6 Request corrective actions by using Corrective Action Request (VAECO Form 2033). Issuing Quality Notice. Spreading information and experience to all related maintenance staff by using VEACO Web site; Safety and Quality Bulletin. Supply information to VAECO training center to update recurrent training for maintenance staff.
QAD shall follow up all corrective and preventive action and receive feed-back from maintenance center/ department. The initial Investigation Report and supporting document shall be kept in maintenance center/ department 02 years since the closed date of the maintenance event/ occurrence . Record of investigations should be archived in QAD at least 02 years since the closed date of the maintenance event/ occurrence. Time of archives should be extended in case of investigation is in progress.
ARCHIVES 1.
2.
Page 10.14-4

PART 10 QUALITY SYSTEM PROC. 10.15 QUALITY NOTICE
10.15 10.15.1
QUALITY NOTICE PURPOSE To establish the policy and procedure for ensuring that all maintenance staff of VAECO understanding of any requirements from VAECO's QA.
10.15.2
SCOPE This procedure is applied for all personnel in maintenance and quality systems of VAECO.
10.15.3
RESPONSIBILITY 1. The QA Director has responsibility for issuing quality notices and ensures that there is no conflict between the quality notice and current regulations. The Quality Audit Division/ Safety Division has responsibility for updating the quality notice, sending it to related staff via VAECO's website and monitoring the Read and Sign action of the related staff and quality notice system. The related staff has responsibility for understanding and complying with QNs
2.
3. 10.15.4
PROCEDURES 1. QN may be issued base on the following events: a. b. c. d. e. f. 2. 3. Change of regulations, maintenance procedures, quality procedures, VAECO policies; The result of incident investigation; The conclusion of quality, technical meeting; The Customers procedures or inspection programs The findings from internal/external audits; The findings in Safety/ Error Report (VAECO Form 2013);
10.15.4.1 Issuing the Quality notice (QN)
When a QN are referred to related documents, these documents may be attached with the QN. QN will be sent to related staff via VAECOs website by Quality Audit Division or Safety Division. QN system is a part of quality system, which is used by QAD to inform important information to related staff. QN system is monitored in VAECOs website. All VAECOs staff can access to QN system. The related staff will confirm their access and understanding of the QN by Read & Sign acknowledgement/ stamp.
10.15.4.2 QN System 1.
2.
Page 10.15-1

3.
QN is automatically numbered depend on time of issue as issued year, month and ordinal number of every month. In addition, QN is classified by property. QN to explain clarify regulations and/or emphasize the current procedures. QN of important work, new policies, procedures, regulations shall be kept in QN system for at least 2 years, except replaced by other QN, cancelled or another requirement from Quality Assurance Director. QN of temporary amendment of RSQCM/ MOE/ SOP procedures: a. b. QAD shall transfer QNs contents to RSQCM/ MOE/ SOP by the next amendment. After the amendment of RSQCM/ MOE/ SOP is accepted/ approved by FAA/ CAAV or Quality Assurance Director, the related QNs shall be removed from QN system by assigned staff of QAD. When VAECO has maintenance contract with new Operator/ Customer, QN mayl be issued for explaining the requirements of Operator/ Customers procedures. The related Operator/ Customers procedures shall be sent with QN to all departments for researching, performing as well as handling related problems of Operator/ Customers aircrafts. This kind of QN shall be used as an instruction for performing maintenance work of Operator/Customers aircrafts. Quality Assurance Director ensures that QNs contents are according to Operators MME/ document and,approved by customer (if required) The QN for routine maintenance at ramp station should include (but not limited to) the following items: Maintenance document sign-off & related procedure; Work scope; Report of accident/ incident; Technical support procedure; Special request of customer; Other necessary items; d. The QN for base maintenance in the VAECO hangar should include (but not limited) the following items: Introduction; Procedures; Approval data; Non-routine work; Major repair and alteration;
10.15.4.3 QN Management 1.
2.
3.
QN of Operator/Customers procedures, regulations. a.
b.
c.
Page 10.15-2

Certification of work; Required inspection item; Inspection buy back; Job transfer; Aircraft handling; Documentation; Deferrable defect policy; Rob parts policy; Customer parts handling procedure; Technical flight; Aircraft fueling and defueling; Engine run; Customer special operation; Contract agreement; Manual control; Technical support; Aircraft cleaning; Aircraft inventory and preliminary inspection; WP return to customer; Attachment... 10.15.5 ARCHIVES The QN shall be kept at QAD at least 2 years since approval date.
Page 10.15-3

PART 10 QUALITY SYSTEM PROC. 10.16 QUALITY AUDIT
10.16 10.16.1
QUALITY AUDIT PURPOSE To establish and maintain quality audit system to ensure that all maintenance activities are in compliance with applicable regulations.
10.16.2
SCOPE This procedure is applied to the quality control for all activities of VAECO system and its contractors/ suppliers that supply products/ services involved in aircraft/ aircraft component maintenance of VAECO.
10.16.3
RESPONSIBILITY 1. 2. QA Director is responsible for establishing and monitoring Quality Audit Schedule. Quality auditor of QAD shall carry out quality audit according to the approved quality audit schedule. Other staff of QAD/ other Departments could participate in audit activities. Directors of departments/ centers are responsible for co-ordination with QAD in deploying an audit, completing remedial actions, preventing the recurrence of the non-conformities that they involved.
3.
10.16.4
PROCEDURES 1. Annually, audit schedule (VAECO Form 2025) is established by Audit division, reviewed by QA director and approved by President & CEO. Approved audit schedule is uploaded to VAECO website and noticed in homepage of VAECO website. Audit schedule is established to ensure that: a. All departments, maintenance centers are audited for compliance with procedures in RSM&QCM and MOE at interval not exceed 12 months, and Sample products of each maintenance center are checked at interval not exceed 12 months, and Non-certificated contractors are audited at interval not exceed 12 months. All line station are audited at interval not exceed 24 months. Random audit, including nightshift audit for areas that working at night.
10.16.4.1 Audit schedule
2.
b. c. d. e. 3.
The audit schedule could be adjusted provided that the interval of affected subjects depends on quantity, level of NCs items as well as quality of corrective actions for NC detected during previous audits shall not exceed 18 months and approved by QA Director. Audit interval should be define by Audit division base on the result of reviewing, analyzing the records of quality audit and related information. However, extension of audit interval should be approved by CAAV and Page 10.16-1
4.

will not exceed 24 months. Decision for audit frequency interval adjustment include but not limit to following aspect: a. b. c. d. 1. 2. Quantity of Non-conformity (NC) level 1 and 2 of the latest audit; Quantity of NCs, which have been corrected properly as required (time-limit and quality); Quantity of NCs, which have not been corrected properly as required; Tendency (increase or decrease) of quantity of NCs;
10.16.4.2 Audit Performance For the independence and objectiveness of the Audit process, members of Audit Team must not participated in work that they will examine. Auditor in charge of monitoring Audit Schedule is responsible for informing to manager of Audit division for arranging audit scheduled in next month and issuing Audit Notice (VAECO Form 2026). Audit Notice shall be sent by audit Team Leader to all members of the audit team and Director of the related Departments/ Center at least 5 days before an internal audit and 10 days before a Contractors/ Suppliers audit. For audits of new organizations outside VAECO, the audit team Leader shall contact the auditee to get supporting documents as well as related procedures. These documents then shall be sent to all members of the audit team for review. The audit team leader prepares an Audit Checklist. a. b. 6. The Audit Checklist is created base on the contents of the audit. Review NCs found in the previous audits and corrective actions taken, if any.
3.
4.
5.
Audit team leader shall conduct a meeting with all audit team members before performing audit in order to: a. b. c. Inform the duties of the audit team, the schedule and the audit checklist. Divide the team into smaller groups if necessary and assign duties to group leaders as well as its members. Notice highlights during auditing process.
7.
Audit team Leader shall conduct an opening meeting attended by all members of the audit team, representative of auditee and related attendants: a. b. Audit team Leader shall present in the meeting the objectives, scope, schedule and applied documents during audit. If the audit team is divided into groups, the audit team leader shall introduce group leaders to the auditee as well as tasks and the scope of each group for cooperation. Page 10.16-2

c. d.
An auditee representative will be assigned for cooperation with audit team as well as to witness findings during audit time. Auditee representative shall be required to inform clearly the safety regulations applied in audited areas and to prepare necessary safety equipment for the auditors. During auditing process, in case some specialized equipment are needed for approaching the audited areas, the auditee shall be in charge of preparation. Checking the audited items as assigned. Informing the auditees potential problems that might affect the audit schedule. Conducting an internal meeting to review the findings and consent to the main reasons of the NCs. Implementing assigned tasks. Informing audit team Leader the items that are unable to audit or the problems that might emerge and affect the audit schedule.
e.
8.
Audit team leader shall be responsible for: a. b. c.
9.
Auditors shall be responsible for: a. b.
10. During the auditing process, auditors might apply all possible approaches such as interviewing, record review or checking sample in any stage. 11. The sample check shall require auditors to witness any stage of the auditing process. The auditors shall not be allowed to ask to repeat any stages for checking unless findings are found. 12. If any finding is found, the auditors shall have to collect evident then inform to the Representative. 13. When the time for auditing is over and there are still some items do not examine, the audit team Leader could decide to continue auditing or to finish the audit. All remaining item will be reviewed on the next time. 14. Before closing the meeting, audit team Leader shall gather all his members for the internal meeting in order to review all the contents of the checklist, to collect all necessary evidences related to the findings and to clarify the number, the level and the dead life needed to correct these findings. The audit team Leader shall make sure that all information on these findings is sufficient and exact. 15. The findings are classified according to discrepancy levers compared to standards, procedures and applicable regulations as follows: a. Non-conformity Level 1: is significant non-compliance with procedures, applicable regulations. It does not meet safety standards, maintenance standards; hazards seriously the flight safety or is a systematic non-conformity. Refused to be audited by QAD may also be considered as Level 1. Page 10.16-3

b.
Non-conformity Level 2: is non-compliance with procedures, applicable regulations. It does not meet safety standards and possibly hazards the flight safety or lowers the maintenance standard but it is not a systematic non-conformity.
16. After finishing the checking, audit team Leader shall conduct a closing meeting to announce the results of the audit to auditees representatives and related attendants. 17. After audit, team leader will establish Audit report (VAECO Form 2032), complete Corrective action request (VAECO Form 2033) (if any) and send to auditee and relevant departments. 10.16.4.3 Audit Report and Corrective action request 1. Nonconformities found in the audit shall be expressed in detail in Audit Report by Auditors and sent to Director of relevant departments/ center accompanying Corrective action requests. Directors are responsible for deploying corrective actions for NC promptly and send corrective action report to Audit division within 3 days for Non-conformity Level 1 and maximum 30 days for Non-conformity Level 2. The Manager of Audit division is responsible for reporting to QA Director as soon as finding the Non-conformity Level 1. QA Director will initiate Additional Corrective Actions if necessary. When Corrective Actions need a long time to perform, Manager of Audit division will monitor the implementing process until closing. If discrepancies occur, Directors of relevant departments might contact Manager of Audit division to clear the specific Corrective Action Requests. Disagree between auditor and auditee about Requests and Corrective Actions will report to Manager of Audit division or finally to QA Director for final decision. Auditors are responsible for providing information about NC or Instructions to help auditee to identify the root cause of non-conformity but not giving corrective actions. All Departments that have non-conformities and relevant departments must carry out remedial actions for non-conformities and send Corrective Action Report to Audit division before deadline. If the non-conformities could not be resolved by individual department, QA auditor should be inform to Audit manager, QA Director for proper dispositions. In case of manpower shortage or there are discrepancies between departments, QA Director shall report to President & CEO for final decision. In a particular cause, which remedial actions are not performed in time, the related department Director has to send a Remedial Extension Request (VAECO Form 2034) to QAD, pointing out the reason of the delay. a. For Non-conformity Level 2, Audit division Manager responsibility to confirm the reason and issue a new deadline. has
2.
3.
4.
10.16.4.4 Corrective Action Monitoring and Closing 1.
2.
Page 10.16-4

b.
For non-conformity Level 1 or extended Non-conformity Level 2, QA Director shall directly give an extension or report to President & CEO.
3.
Every six months the Audit division will make a report of audit activities and corrective activities to send Quality Assurance Director for review before sending to President & CEO for overall activities of quality system. Audit Record includes: a. b. c. Audit Report (VAECO Form 2032); Corrective Action Request (VAECO Form 2033); Remedial Extension Request (VAECO Form 2034) (if any);
10.16.5
AUDIT RECORD 1.
2.
Audit records have been archived at least 02 years after all NCs were corrected in Audit division.
Page 10.16-5

PART 10 QUALITY SYSTEM PROC. 10.17 SUPPLIER CONTROL
10.17 10.17.1
SUPPLIER CONTROL PURPOSE To establish a policy and method to evaluate and control supplier of VAECO ensuring that all aircraft components/ materials and services provided by suppliers comply with applicable standards and regulations.
10.17.2
SCOPE This procedure is applied for evaluation and control of suppliers who provide VAECO with products/ services.
10.17.3
RESPONSIBILITIES 1. Logistics Manager is responsible for: a. b. Requesting approval for Product supplier, Support service supplier and aircraft component maintenance contractor; Preparing contract, monitoring compliance with contract of VAECO and Product supplier, Support service supplier and aircraft component maintenance contractor
2. 10.17.4
QA Director is responsible for supplier evaluation, approval and control.
PROCEDURES 1. VAECO use only products and services provided from suppliers, who have been evaluated and controlled according to this procedure, to ensure that products and services in accordance with applicable standards and regulations. Supplier is an organization who provides VAECO with products/ services to support aircraft maintenance activities. In order to be convenient for evaluation, approval and control suppliers are classified as product suppliers, calibration service suppliers (calibration agencies) and support service suppliers: Product supplier is organization who provides products including aircraft components and materials. a. Category (CAT) 1 product supplier is: Original equipment manufacturer (OEM) whose products are specified in maintenance data or organization authorized by OEM; Organization approved / recognized by aviation authority such as FAA, EASA, CAAV; Organization approved / recognized by associations include: Aviation Suppliers Association (ASA), American National Standards Institute (ANSI); General Aviation Parts Suppliers Association (GAPSA); Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE); Transonic Aviation Consultants, Inc., European Aviation Suppliers Organisation (EASO).
10.17.4.1 General
2.
3.
Page 10.17-1

b. 4.
CAT 2 product supplier is supplier other than CAT 1 product supplier.
Calibration service supplier is an organization who provides calibration service for tools and equipment of VAECO and is accredited by calibration association following ISO 17025 such as International Laboratory Accreditation Cooperation (ILAC) members or National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). Support service supplier is an organization provides services other than calibration such as: analysis, testing of fuel and hydraulic oil, washing and cleaning of aircraft, etc For CAT 1 product suppliers, QAD do not issue approval certificate. The CAT 2 product suppliers and support service supplier will be evaluated and approved as follows: a. The Director of LGD is responsible for contacting potential organization who expect to be VAECOs suppliers, obtaining and submitting the following documents to QAD: Application For Supplier Approval (VAECO Form 2003); Supplier Evaluation Questionnaires (VAECO Form 2004); Quality manual, if any; Authorized, approved certificates of supplier that are related to the provided product/ service, etc. b. Director of QAD is responsible for making evaluation of these suppliers and pointing out all necessary requirements for each potential product/ service. If any discrepancy or suspicion found between application documents and applicable requirements, QAD should inform to suppliers for clarification or arranging onsite audit if necessary. Result of reviewing supplier records should be record in Supplier/ Contractor record review (Form 2060) for completed and corrected application documents. Supplier approval certificate (VAECO Form 2005) issued for product supplier or support service supplier is valid up to 01 year. The original certificate is sent to supplier, one copy is kept at Audit division.
5.
10.17.4.2 Supplier evaluation and approval 1. 2.
c.
d. e. 3.
For calibration service supplier, based on calibration accreditation certificate granted by NIST or ILAC member and document provided by Logistics or supplier, QAD will verify the supplier information through internet and suppliers website. The calibration service supplier satisfies VAECO requirements will be listed in Recognized Calibration Service Supplier List (VAECO Form 2062).
Page 10.17-2

4.
To avoid AOG aircraft, QA may evaluate to issue one-off approved for organization base on organization record provided by Logistics. Record of these suppliers should be archived 02 years from approval. These supplier is not list in Approval supplier list. Audit division of QA Dept. establishes and maintain Supplier control program to assure the continuous suitability of approved suppliers with requirements of VAECO. Control of supplier is conducted through onsite audit (if necessary); evaluation information provided by Logistic Dept. during operation of supplier and feedback information from supplier. CAT 1 product supplier control: For CAT 1 product supplier, Logistic Dept. issues List of CAT 1 product suppliers (VAECO Form 2006) with information of their products provided for VAECO and documentary evidence sends to QAD quarterly. Audit division shall verify information of these suppliers base on the information provided by Logistic department and the related information from the following sources: Maintenance data (VIM, CML, IPC, CMM, AMM ...); Official website of Manufactures, EASA, and FAA
10.17.4.3 Supplier control program 1.
2.
3.
4.
CAT 2 and support service supplier product supplier control: a. Before suppliers approval overdue, Logistics Dept. should send Supplier Monitoring Sheet (VAECO Form 2011) for that supplier and provide related information send to QAD. Based on information provided by Logistics, Audit division will inform to suppliers to request related document and completion of the following forms: Application for supplier approval (VAECO Form 2003); Supplier evaluation questionnaires (VAECO Form 2004). b. Audit division may propose QA Director for on-site auditing of CAT 2 product supplier if many non-conformity items found such as no certificates and documents attached; delay delivery, wrong/ insufficiency information of products,
5.
Calibration service supplier control: Recognized calibration services supplier list should be reviewed by audit division every 06 months to confirm suppliers capability from that supplier and official website of NIST and ILAC members and information from LGD and Component maintenance centers. To maintain validity of approval, supplier must meet the following conditions: a. b. Products/ Services supplied for VAECO is implemented within validation of supplier approval certificate; All necessary records and documents submitted for renewal process is satisfied as required; Page 10.17-3
10.17.4.4 Renewal, extension and revocation approval 1.

c. 2.
Quality of suppliers requirements;
products/
services
satisfies
VAECO
Approval of a supplier shall be revoked the in the following cases: a. b. Seriously violate on conditions/ terms specified in the contract between supplier and VAECO; Quality of suppliers products/ services supplied for VAECO don't meet requirements specified in the contract.
10.17.4.5 Approval supplier list 1. Approval supplier list (VAECO Form 2009), and Recognized calibration services supplier (VAECO Form 2062) shall be updated after initial, renewal and extension approval for supplier. Audit division prepares these lists then submits to QA Director for approval before being uploaded on the VAECO website. Each record of validity supplier retained at QA at least 02 years since supplier has been approved. Approval supplier list (VAECO Form 2009), and Recognized calibration services supplier (VAECO Form 2062) retained at QA at least 02 years from issued date.
2. 10.17.5
ARCHIVES 1. 2.
Page 10.17-4

PART 10 QUALITY SYSTEM PROC. 10.18 CERTIFICATED AND NON-CETIFICATED FACILITY CONTROL
10.18 10.18.1
CERTIFICATED AND NON-CERTIFICATED FACILITY CONTROL PURPOSE To ensure the certificated facilities and non-certificated facilities (contractors) are properly controlled.
10.18.2
SCOPE This procedure shall be applied for evaluating, approving and monitoring contractors for work contracted to them by VAECO.
10.18.3
RESPONSIBILITIES 1. Planning Director is responsible for: a. b. 2. Requesting approval for aircraft/ aircraft engine maintenance contractor, specialized service contractor; Preparing record of contractor for QA approval and contract, monitoring compliance with; contract of VAECO.
The QA Director is responsible for ensuring that all the contractors are properly evaluated and approved before the maintenance, preventive maintenance, repair and special service being performed by the contractor.
10.18.4
PROCEDURES 1. 2. Certificated contractor is an organization who has an appropriate authorities approval for the work to be contracted with the VAECO. Non-certificated contractor is an organization who does not have an appropriate authorities approval for the work to be contracted with the VAECO. BDD should contact certificated-contractor to get authorities approval certificate related to work to be contract with VAECO. QAD should recognized this organization if its approval certificate is validity and its rating cover work to be contract. BDD should contact non-certificated contractor to be VAECO contractor for collecting the following documents to send to QA, including: a. b. c. d. 3. Application for contractor approval (VAECO Form 2001); Contractor evaluation questionnaire (VAECO Form 2002); Quality manual or equivalent manual; Related Certificates/ Approvals.
10.18.4.1 Classification of contractors
10.18.4.2 Evaluation and approval 1.
2.
Audit division should evaluate the non-certificated contractors document and record evaluation result in Supplier/ Contractor Document Review (VAECO Form 2060).
Page 10.18-1

4.
If non-certificated contractors document is insufficient, a notification with the filled VAECO Form 2060 sheet shall be sent to the applicant for correction or additional information. When necessary, QAD should conduct onsite audit the non-certificated contractor. Onsite audit for non-certificated contractor will be performed IAW procedure 10.16 in this manual to confirm that the non-certificated contractors quality control system is at least equivalent to the VAECO quality system The non-certificated contractor that satisfies all the requirements of VAECO, Audit division issues the Contractor approval certificate (VAECO Form 2007) with following information: a. b. The contractors name, business address; The rating and limitation of the work/ service being supplied to VAECO and expiry date of the approval certificate.
5.
6.
7.
The certificate is valid within one year since the date of issuance. The original certificate will be sent to the contractor and its copy is retained at the Audit division. The staff of Audit division enters all necessary information of the contractors that include certificated contractor and non-certificated contractor approved/recognized by VAECO in supplier/ contractor monitoring program, including: a. b. The contractors name, address and contact information. The approved work/ activities and expiry date of the certificate. Authorized staff when performing verify the work that performed by the contractor before releasing to service; Authorized staff when performing incoming inspection; Random audit at the contractors premises if any.
10.18.4.3 Approved contractor control 1.
2.
Any discrepancies reported to QAD from: a. b. c.
3. 4. 5.
If any non-conformity found, the QA auditor shall send Corrective Action Request (VAECO Form 2033) to the contractor for corrective actions. If the contractor successes to correct the non-conformity the approval certificate will remain validity otherwise it will be revoked. The approval certificate of contractor is also revoked if the contractor violates seriously the conditions/ terms in the signed contract between contractor and VAECO. Before the expiry date of contractors approval, dedicated QA staff sends a notice to contractor to provide document for the renewal or expanding scope of approval certificate. The evaluation and approval process is the same as for a new applicant. Page 10.18-2
10.18.4.4 Approval certificate renewal and approved work scope expansion. 1.
2.

10.18.4.5 Approved contractor list control 1. Audit division enters all necessary information of the contractors in Approved Contractor List (VAECO Form 2008) for QA Director approval , including: a. b. c. d. 2. 3. 10.18.5 Name, address of the contractor; The class of the contractor; Approval certificate: approval number, expiry date; The rating and limitation of the work/ service being supplied to VAECO.
Approved Contractor List it shall be updated when there is any contractor approved, renewed or revoked. The staff of Audit division informs the newly issued list of approved contractors and uploads it on VAECO website. The Supplier/ Contractor Document Review and applicants document will be kept at the Audit division at least 2 years from the review date. The audit report and corrective action request will be kept at the Audit division at least 2 years from the date of corrective action acceptance. The contractors approval certificates and Approved Contractor List will be kept at the Audit division at least 2 years from the approval date.
ARCHIVES 1. 2. 3.
Page 10.18-3

PART 10 QUALITY SYSTEM PROC. 10.19 COMPANY CERTIFICATE APPROVAL HANDLING
10.19 10.19.1
COMPANY CERTIFICATE APPROVAL HANDLING PURPOSE To ensure approval certificates granted for VAECO by the aviation authorities, international organization and customer are handled IAW applicable requirements.
10.19.2
SCOPE This procedure is applied to handle VAECO approval certificate granted by Aviation authorities, international organization and customer.
10.19.3
RESPONSIBILITY 1. 2. Quality Audit section of QAD is responsible for submitting the required data and documents to the jurisdiction unit for approval. Director of BDD is responsible to raise the needs of certificate, and provide the necessary documents. Jurisdiction unit may be the aviation authorities, or other civil organization that is capable to issue certificate of qualify or compliance to some standards or regulations after related surveillance. Initial application a. Evaluation stage When corporation business is needed, BDD will inform QAD the name of jurisdiction unit, scope of certificate, and anticipate date of receiving certificate to QAD. After receiving this requirement, QAD will contact and submit the intention jurisdiction unit, and try to acquire the related procedures and requirements for initial application. If the certified standards and applied procedures need to be purchased, BDD is responsible to purchase the required documents and books. Quality audit section is responsible for contacting the jurisdiction unit to clarify the application procedures and related regulations, then evaluate the prepared operations, and estimate the application cost and schedule. The evaluation results will be submitted with Recommendation Letter. After the Recommendation Letter is approved, Quality audit section will follow the applicable procedure to fill in the necessary forms and collect the related information and documents. Then, apply to the jurisdiction unit with formal letter and the above information. Quality audit section should follow-up this application case until it is approved, and will keep in touch with the jurisdiction unit. If there is need to pay for the application, BDD is responsible for the payment.
10.19.4
PROCEDURES 1.
2.
Page 10.19-1

b.
Preparation stage After the Recommendation Letter is approved, Quality audit section should convene the related departments to precede the preparation process, including the revision of SOP and performance the related training. Quality audit section will ask the related departments to revise the SOP, and add the compliance statements in the contents according to regulations or standards of jurisdiction unit. Quality audit section should arrange and conduct the necessary training about the regulations and procedures of the jurisdiction unit, and request the management department and working personnel to attend the training. If the jurisdiction unit request VAECO to assign the certified personnel to perform the specific job, the head of department should submit the qualified authorized personnel to QAD for reviewing. The Quality audit section will prepare the authorized personnel roster. Quality audit section should provide the required document, and ensure the jurisdiction unit accepts the information. If surveillance is requested by the jurisdiction unit, Quality audit section should negotiate the schedule.
c.
Audit Stage When the jurisdiction unit precedes audit operations, the department should assign the personnel to answer the auditors questions. If there is Non-conformity items raised by the auditor, Quality audit section should record and ask the related departments to resolve it. Quality audit section should notify the related departments to reply the corrective actions within time limit. The actions should be checked and reviewed by Quality audit section first, and then reply to the certificate authority.
d.
Certificate issuance: Quality audit section should apply for the certificate. After receiving the certificate, Quality audit section will copy two sets of the certificate. One is kept in Certificate File, and the other will be sent to Administration department for hanging on the wall of the meeting room or reception area. Those certificates are also scanned and uploaded on VAECO website. start preparing the and apply for the of time as required that the certificate
3.
The renew application: Quality audit section should required document and fill in the application form certificate renewal before the expiration date amount by the respective Authority/ Customer, and confirm authority accepts the application.
Application for change to certificate: If there is change to the name, address, operations specifications of company, Quality audit section Issue: 02, Revision: 04, Date: 28 NOV 2012 Page 10.19-2

should collect the required document, and fill in the application form according to the procedures of certificate authority. Then, formally apply to certificate authority within the time table, and confirm the certificate authority accepts the application. 4. Surrender the certificate: When BDD inform that there is no need to keep the certificate, Quality audit section should write the letter to the certificate authority for certificate surrender and return the certificate as required by the authority.
10.19.5
ARCHIVES Copies of original certificates are archived at Audit and Standard Division.
Page 10.19-3

PART 10 QUALITY SYSTEM PROC. 10.20 CONCESSION FOR DEVIATION FROM ORGANISATIONS PROCEDURES
10.20 10.20.1
CONCESSION PROCEDURES PURPOSE
FOR
DEVIATION
FROM
ORGANISATIONS
To establish the procedure for controlling deviation from VAECO procedures in accordance with applicable regulations. 10.20.2 SCOPE This procedure is applied for deviation from VAECO procedures provide that applicable regulations are still kept compliance with. 10.20.3 RESPONSIBILITY 1. Director of department/ center in VAECO is responsible for applying the concession in some unforeseen circumstance that VAECO procedures cannot be followed. The activities that deviate from VAECO procedures can only be carried out when concession is approved by QA Director. Quality Assurance Director is responsible for concession approval when found that the intended deviation activity is still conforming to applicable regulations.
2.
10.20.4
PROCEDURES 1. When requirements in VAECO procedures cannot be conformed, the Director of related department/ center shall do the following activities and send a Concession Request (VAECO Form 2054) to Quality Assurance Director for approval: a. Completing the Concession Request, in which the following contents shall be described sufficiently and in detail: Detail of deviations and intended deviation activity; Reason for concession; Period requested for concession; Applicable scope of concession; b. 2. Relevant documents, if necessary, such as: working instructions, list of implementation means...
10.20.4.1 Concession Approval
Quality Assurance Director shall sign for concession approval after ensuring that the intended deviation activities is still conform to applicable regulations and the concession is necessary. The copy of approved concession shall be sent to CAAV if the CAAV approved procedure is affected. When concession is not accepted, Quality Assurance Director shall denote the reason and reply to requesting person.
3.
Page 10.20-1

PART 10 QUALITY SYSTEM PROC. 10.20 CONCESSION FOR DEVIATION FROM ORGANISATIONS PROCEDURES
10.20.4.2 Control of the concession after approval 1. After approval, the approved Concession Request shall be sent to the requester. QAD will control the implementation process of conditions and expiry date of the concession. Related department/ center shall provide information related to corrective action of the concession for QAD in sufficiently and timely manner. QAD controls the deadline of the concession and follows up the implementing process of accompanied condition. The approved concessions shall be listed for managing by QAD. The closed concession shall be sent to CAAV if the CAAV approved procedure is affected.
2. 3.
10.20.5
ARCHIVES All documents related to concession approval, control process shall be kept at QAD at least 2 years since approval date.
Page 10.20-2

PART 10 QUALITY SYSTEM PROC. 10.21 QUALITY MONITORING
10.21 10.21.1
QUALITY MONITORING PURPOSE To ensure that all maintenance activities conducting in VAECO are monitor for the compliance with applicable regulations.
10.21.2 10.21.3
SCOPE This procedure is applied to all maintenance activities in VAECO. RESPONSIBILITY 1. QAD is responsible for continuously monitoring all respects of maintenance that conducting by VAECO, and issue necessary corrective action request for any conformity, so that to improve the maintenance quality and safety. All departments/ centers are responsible for implementing any corrective action issued by QAD. Activities and areas that need to be monitored by QC division of QAD include: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. 2. Working procedure/ instruction compliance; Aircraft/ aircraft component maintenance activities; Technical data usage; Tool/Equipment maintenance and calibration; Part/ materials preservation during maintenance; Housing and facility hygienic condition; Safety, security, fire protection and FOD prevention during maintenance.
2. 10.21.4
PROCEDURE 1.
The QC division of the QAD shall arrange QC staff to perform the daily monitoring according to the Monitoring checklist during the maintenance activities. The Non-conformity Report (VAECO Form 2029) will be issued by QC division for any non-conformity and send it to the Directors of department/ centers for implementing remedial actions. The non-conformities are classified IAW para. 15 of 10.16.4.2 and the corrective action must be carried out and reported to QAD within 3 days for Non-conformity Level 1 and maximum 30 days for Non-conformity Level 2. Any problem for which a corrective action is needed to improve the quality and/or safety of maintenance, QC manager shall issue Quality Request (VAECO Form 2059) and send to related department/ center for implementing.
3.
4.
5.
Page 10.21-1

PART 10 QUALITY SYSTEM PROC. 10.21 QUALITY MONITORING
6.
The non-conformities and problems found by QC division will be weekly reported to QA director and informed to QA division for procedure revision if necessary.
10.21.5
ARCHIVES The Non-conformity and report of remedial actions shall be archived at least 3 years at QC division.
Page 10.21-2

PART 10 QUALITY SYSTEM PROC. 10.22 MAINTENANCE ERROR/ VIOLATION DETECT AND RECTIFICATION
10.22 10.22.1
MAINTENANCE ERROR/ VIOLATION DETECT AND RECTIFICATION PURPOSE To establish policy and detective method, remedy and repetition prevention of maintenance error/ violation, in order to improve quality, safety in maintenance activities.
10.22.2
SCOPE This procedure applies for aircraft, components/ engine maintenance activities at all VAECO maintenance centers/ departments.
10.22.3
RESPONSIBILITY 1. 2. QAD is responsible for management of system on detection, remedy and repetitive prevention of maintenance error/ violation. SAGs are responsible for: a. Providing completely, clearly, timely, accurately information of maintenance event/ occurrences to QAD and supporting for investigation. Performing necessary remedial and preventive actions.
b. 3.
Director of BDD is responsible for periodically establishing and sending the statistics report on complaints from Operator/ Customer related to maintenance quality, safety concerns to QAD. VAECO staff is responsible for providing information of maintenance error/ violation to his/ her manager and QAD, co-operating and supporting QAD for investigation.
4.
10.22.4
GENERAL 1. A maintenance error is a human action (or human behavior) that unintentionally deviates from the expected action (or behavior). Example: Part not installed correctly; Part not installed at all, Part installed in the wrong location; Not enough oil added during servicing; Inspector did not see the fault; Tool left in the engine cowling. Maintenance errors are classified to the following categories: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. Installation Error Servicing Error Repair Error Fault Isolation/ Test/ Inspection Error Foreign Object Damage Error Aircraft/ Equipment Damage Error Personal Injury Error. Other. Page 10.22-1
10.22.4.1 Definition

2.
A violation is a human action (or human behavior) that intentionally deviates from the expected action (or behavior). Violations are classified to the following categories: a. Routine violation: These are common practice. Often occur with such regularity that they are automatic. Violating this rule has become a group norm. Routine violations are condoned by management. Exceptional violation: Maintenance Personnel willfully breaks standing rules while disregarding the consequences
b. 3.
Contributing factor to an error/ violation is anything that negatively affects how a Maintenance Personnel does his/her job. Contributing factors are classified into the 10 categories: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. Information (e.g. work cards, maintenance manuals, service bulletins, maintenance tips, non-routines, IPC, etc.) Equipment/ Tools/ Safety Equipment Aircraft Design/Configuration/Parts Job/Task Technical Knowledge/Skills Individual Factors Environment/Facilities Organizational Factors Leadership/Supervision Communication Other.
10.22.4.2 VAECOs policy in maintenance error/ violation detection, rectification 1. VAECO establish and maintain the maintenance error/ violation detection and control system in order to remedy timely maintenance error/ violation and apply preventive actions. VAECO utilizes Maintenance Error Decision Aid (MEDA) of BOEING to process of investigation, rectification and prevention of maintenance error/ violation. When discovering occurrences, maintenance error/ violation or potential risks, VAECO staffs are encouraged to provide the related information to Safety Division of QAD by using the Mandatory Occurrence Report (MOR), Safety/ Error Report (VAECO form 2013) or Confidential Safety Report (VAECO form 2014) and sending it via the "Safety Information" on the VAECO website or email (sqd.vaeco@vietnamairlines.com). VAECO has discipline policy in place to deal with violation aspects of maintenance-caused events. Discipline/ punishment is only effective for intentional acts based on principle: Page 10.22-2
2.
3.
4.

a. b. c. 10.22.5
Dont punish honest errors. Dont punish routine violations. Punish exceptional violations.
PROCEDURES Information related to maintenance errors shall be detected, reported, collected from the sources and by methods as specified in Maintenance event/ occurrence investigation procedure 10.14.
10.22.5.1 Detecting, collecting of maintenance error/ violation information
10.22.5.2 Evaluating and investigating of maintenance error/ violation 1. VAECO maintenance errors/ violation investigation process is based on the Maintenance Error Decision Aid (MEDA) philosophy that is: a. b. c. Maintenance errors are not made on purpose. Maintenance errors/ violation result from a series of contributing factors Most of these contributing factors are part of a VAECO process, and, therefore, can be improved so that they do not contribute to future, similar errors/ violation.
2.
Safety Division shall perform investigation using the MEDA Results (VAECO Form 2016) to define: a. b. The root cause (contributing factors) of maintenance error/ violation. The ideas for improving/ fixing the contributing factors. Carrying out on-site investigation at the area where maintenance error/ violation occurred (if necessary); Collecting concerned evidences such as reports, maintenance records, pictures, video, voice records and additional information; Interviewing related personnel (if necessary); Reviewing, assessing related records and document.
3.
The investigation should include but not limit to the following methods: a. b. c. d.
4.
During the interview with the maintenance personnel investigation team may obtain information that requires follow-up in order to gain full knowledge about the contributing factors or other circumstances. This may include follow-up interviews with other maintenance technicians in the same work group, with production planners. Or, it may include inspecting something like a tool that the maintenance technician said was hard to use or the lighting in a room where the maintenance technician said it hard to see a parts label. In the case Safety Division staff is not available for investigation due to working shift or geographical location, the investigation shall be performed by respective Quality Control Division and/or relative SAG IAW paragraphs 2, 3 and 4 of 10.22.5.2 of this procedure. The MEDA Page 10.22-3
5.

Result and concerning documents shall be sent to Safety Division for reviewing. Safety Division shall request supplemental investigation if necessary. 6. The Investigation report (VAECO form 2055) shall be generated by Safety Division to report the investigation result to VAECO management as well as spreading on VAECO website. Error/ violation level and consequence evaluating a. Error/violation level and consequence shall be evaluated using the Error/ Violation Index matrix specified in Form 2055 completion guidance. Error/violation level and consequence evaluation shall be based on following factors: Consequence; Nature of error/violation; Repetitiveness; Commonality; Voluntary reporting after incident and co-operation attitude of involved staff during investigation. c. d. Error/violation evaluation result will be divided in to 4 levels and specified in Investigation Report. For RTS staff error/violation which requires immediately preventive action, the Investigation report (VAECO form 2055) should be sent to Audit Division for appropriate actions. For other staff error/ violation and RTS staff error/ violation which does not require immediately preventive action, the monthly evaluation result list should be sent to Human Resource for appropriate actions.
7.
b.
e.
8. 9.
Once all of the interviews/ investigation have taken place, Safety Division shall update data to a database. Safety Division does an analysis to find trends in errors or contributing factors. This type of analysis will probably not be that useful until a number of investigations have been done at least 20 times or more because trends might not be visible. Safety Division issues a request corrective actions by using Corrective Action Request (VAECO Form 2033) or Non-conformity Report (VAECO Form 2029) and send to related Centre/ Departments Remedial Action Request for maintenance error/ violation is based upon the following: a. Recommendation, instruction from authorities, operators;
10.22.5.3 Remedying of Maintenance Errors/ Violation 1.
2.
Page 10.22-4

b. c. d. 1.
Repetitive, effect level of maintenance error/ violation; Cause of maintenance error/ violation; Experience in remedial activities.
10.22.5.4 Methods to prevent recurrence of maintenance error/ violation In order to have systematically and synchronously effective methods for preventing recurrence of maintenance errors/ violation, some preventive methods shall be applied as follows: a. b. c. d. e. f. 2. Improving of working environment; Supplying of adequately tools, equipment for maintenance; Revising of SOP procedures, maintenance/ working instructions; Issuing of quality notice IAW procedure 10.15; Revising of human factor recurrence training content; Implementing of technical meeting.
Safety Division shall provide feedback on maintenance error/ violation event/ occurrence to related technicians/ inspector. It is important to provide feedback to the maintenance technicians/ inspectors to let them know what improvements are being made. This will show them that the process is being used to make improvements and is not being used to punish maintenance technicians/ inspector.
10.22.6
ARCHIVES Records related to maintenance error investigation, remedial action, prevention shall be retained at Safety Division of QAD at least 02 years since the closed date of the occurrence/ events.
Page 10.22-5

PART 10 QUALITY SYSTEM PROC. 10.23 ASSESSOR QUALIFYING
10.23 10.23.1
ASSESSOR QUALIFYING PURPOSE To ensure the assessment of assessor candidate is performed in compliance with applicable requirements.
10.23.2
SCOPE This procedure applies for assessment of assessor candidate regarding to technical knowledge and VAECO procedures/ requirements.
10.23.3
GENERAL 1. 2. Assessor is approved to perform qualifying assessment for company authorization in compliance with requirement of quality system. There are two kinds of assessor: a. b. Technical assessor (Aircraft/ Component maintenance, specialized inspection technical assessor). Company/ customer procedure assessor.
10.23.4
ASSESSOR DUTIES 1. 2. To prepare the assessment material and interview questions. To report the assessment result to Examination Board Leader/ Quality Assurance Director.
10.23.5
ASSESSOR AUTHORITIES Within endorsed scope approved rating, independently performing the assessment.
10.23.6
PREREQUISITE REQUIREMENTS 1. Technical Assessor a. b. Being graduated from aeronautical technical college/ university, or being graduated from technical college/ university. Holding authorization at equivalent with or higher than the level of assessing subject for at least 02 years or having at least 04 year experience in assessing subject. Being trained in Human factor. Being trained in Safety Management System. Being graduated from aeronautical technical college/ university, or being graduated from technical college/ university and being trained in basic aeronautic technical course. Being thoroughly familiar with applicable regulations of competent authorities. Being thoroughly familiar with applicable VAECO and customers procedures. Page 10.23-1
c. d. 2. a.
Company/ customer procedure Assessor
b. c.

PART 10 QUALITY SYSTEM PROC. 10.23 ASSESSOR QUALIFYING
d. e. f. 10.23.7 1.
Being trained in Human factor. Being trained in Safety Management System. Having at least 03 years of experience in aviation.
PROCEDURE Assessor assessment and approval process a. b. Anyone may propose an assessor to Quality Assurance Director. The Quality Audit Division shall collect records from the candidate, preliminary assess and schedule an interview (if requested by Quality Assurance Director). The Quality Assurance Director may interview the candidate to evaluate his/her knowledge and ability. If candidates meet the requirements, the Quality Assurance Director will approve the assessor with detail approved rating. The Assessor Roster will revise to update any changes in the approved assessor name and/or ratings. His authorization/ licence have been invalid. Failing to accomplish the functions, duties and responsibilities of an assessor.
c. d.
2.
Assessors approval shall be terminated if: a. b.
10.23.8
ARCHIVES 1. 2. The Assessor Roster and assessor records shall be maintained by the Quality Assurance Department. Assessor records shall be kept on file in Quality Assurance Department for two years after termination of the assessor approval.
Page 10.23-2

PART 10 QUALITY SYSTEM PROC. 10.24 QUALIFYING EXAMINATION
10.24 10.24.1
QUALIFYING EXAMINATION PURPOSE To ensure qualifying examination are performed in compliance with applicable requirements.
10.24.2
SCOPE This procedure applies for the multiple-choice and interview exam preparation and assessment to qualify the maintenance staff.
10.24.3
RESPONSIBILITY The assigned staff of QAD has responsibility for multiple-choice and interview exam preparation and arrangement.
10.24.4
PROCEDURE 1. The Quality Assurance staff should select the questions from, but not limited to, the accepted question banks. The question level is based on ATA 104. The number of question and level for technical exam is as the following: a. For initial and renewal exam of Inspection and RTS staff Category A: A.1 thru A.10: 70 level 2 questions A.1 thru A.18: 100 level 2 questions b. For initial/ supplement exam of Inspection and RTS staff Category B: Airframe systems: 70 level 3 questions + 30 level 2 questions for extension function; Power-plant systems: 70 level 3 questions (including 10 questions for ATA: 25, 26, 35 & 38) + 30 level 2 questions for extension function; Electrical systems: 70 level 3 questions (including 10 questions for ATA: 25, 26, 35 & 38) + 30 level 2 questions for extension function; Avionic systems: 70 level 3 questions (including 10 questions for ATA: 25, 26, 35 & 38) + 30 level 2 questions for extension function ; c. For renewal exam of Inspection and RTS staff Category B: Airframe systems: 20 level 2 questions + 40 level 3 questions + 10 level 2 questions for extension function; Power-plant systems: 20 level 2 questions + 40 level 3 questions (including 10 questions for ATA: 25, 26, 35 & 38) + 10 level 2 questions for extension function;
10.24.4.1 MULTIPLE-CHOICE QUESTIONNAIRE PREPARATION
2.
Page 10.24-1

Electrical systems: 20 level 2 questions + 40 level 3 questions (including 10 questions for ATA: 25, 26, 35 & 38) + 10 level 2 questions for extension function; Avionic systems: 20 level 2 questions + 40 level 3 questions (including 10 questions for ATA: 25, 26, 35 & 38) + 10 level 2 questions for extension function; d. For exam to upgrade from Category A to Category B authorization: using questionnaire for initial/ supplement exam of Inspection and RTS staff Category B. For exam to renew category A and Upgrade to category B authorization: using questionnaire for Inspection and RTS staff category A renewal exam (100 questions) and questionnaire for Inspection and RTS staff category B initial/ supplement exam. For initial and renewal exam of component Inspection and RTS staff: 50 level 4 questions. For initial and renewal exam of Structure repair staff: 70 level 3 questions. For initial and renewal exam of Cabin repair staff: 50 level 2 questions. For initial and renewal exam of IFE repair staff: 50 level 2 questions.
e.
f. g. h. i. 3.
The number of question for regulation and procedure exam is as the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. Inspection and RTS staff Category A: 30 questions Inspection and RTS staff Category B: 50 questions Inspection and RTS staff Category C: 20 questions Component Inspection and RTS staff: 30 questions Structure repair staff: 30 questions Cabin repair staff: 20 questions IFE repair staff: 20 questions Borescope inspection staff: 20 questions
4.
The VAECO staff should use VAECO Form 2040 to prepare questionnaires for multiple choice test. There are 02 type of exams including multiple-choice exam and interview exam. Applicable type of exams shall be decided by QA Director. In case that both multiple-choice and interview exams are required, the candidate has to pass the multiple-choice exam before taking part in interview exam.. In the multiple-choice exam, each candidate is provided a Multiple Choice Test Questionnaires (VAECO Form 2040) and Multiple-choice Answer Sheet (VAECO Form 2041) to record the answer. All multiplePage 10.24-2
10.24.4.2 EXAMINATION 1.
2.

choice questionnaires should be gathered just after the exam completed by the proctor and then returned to QAD. 3. 4. 5. The QAD staff will review the candidate answers. The pass mark of the multiple-choice exam is 75%. The interview exam is not applicable to candidate who apply for renewal authorization only. The interview exam also includes technical subject and regulation and procedure subject: a. The technical interview subject includes incorrect answers in Multiple-choice Answer Sheet and additional questions determined by the assessor based on applied maintenance functions. The regulation and procedure interview subject includes incorrect answers in Multiple-choice Answer Sheet and checklist in Authorized Staff Interview Report (VAECO Form 2046).
b.
6.
If the candidate does not pass all required exams, his/ her pass result will be reserved within 06 months for multiple-choice exam and within 04 months for interview exam. Regulation and procedure exam may be exempted if the candidate is being authorized at equal or higher level to the authorization applied. Technical and regulation & procedure exam for category B authorization renewal is not required if the authorization has been upgraded from category A to category B within 06 months. The exam results will be summarized by QAD staff and informed to Human Resource Department. Multiple Choice Test Questionnaires (VAECO Form 2040) is kept at the QAD for at least 2 years since exam date. Multiple-choice Answer Sheet (VAECO Form 2041) and Authorized Staff Interview Report (VAECO Form 2046) are kept in appropriate maintenance staff record for at least 2 years since exam date.
7. 8.
9. 10.24.5
ARCHIVES 1. 2.
Page 10.24-1

PART 10 QUALITY SYSTEM PROC. 10.25 TEMPORARY AUTHORIZATION (DISPENSATION)
10.25 10.25.1
TEMPORARY AUTHORIZATION (DISPENSATION) PURPOSE To ensure the temporary authorization is granted in compliance with applicable requirements.
10.25.2
SCOPE This procedure applies for the temporary authorization to perform unforeseen event at the out-station.
10.25.3
RESPONSIBILITY The QA Director or delegated person has responsibility for approving the dispensation for appropriate maintenance staff.
10.25.4
PROCEDURE 1. In the unforeseen cases, where an aircraft is grounded and there is no appropriate inspection and return to service personnel available at the out-station, a temporary authorization may be issued to suitable candidate. Candidate shall contact the MCC to inform about the defect of aircraft and request a technical assistance if necessary. If the defect has been determined, the candidate shall contact directly QA Director or delegated person to request a dispensation. QA Director or delegated person should review the experience and license of the candidate. The candidate shall have a valid maintenance license with appropriate category and type/rating for defect(s) rectification or deferment, issued or recognized by the competent authority. The maintenance license is not applied to the candidate who is qualifying without license. QA Director or delegated person may interview candidate via telephone to assure candidates capability to carry out the work(s), if there is doubt about his competence. QA Director or delegated person approve a supplemental authorization by granting dispensation number to satisfied candidate. The condition/ limitation, preventive action, follow up action may be required. The validity of the dispensation is one time accepted otherwise specified in the dispensation. By the supplemental authorization, authorized personnel shall perform maintenance procedures or deferment of defect, complete maintenance records with dispensation number entry. Authorized person is responsible to complete Dispensation sheet (VAECO Form 2052) and send to QC Division within 02 days since approval date.
2. 3. 4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Issue: 02, Revision: 02, Date: 08 MAY 2012
Page 10.25-1

PART 10 QUALITY SYSTEM PROC. 10.25 TEMPORARY AUTHORIZATION (DISPENSATION)
10.25.5
ARCHIVES The approved Dispensation (VAECO Form 2052) is kept at the respective QC Division. Every month all approved Dispensations are sent to QA Division for archive at least 2 years since approval date.
Issue: 02, Revision: 02, Date: 08 MAY 2012
Page 10.25-2

PART 10 QUALITY SYSTEM PROC. 10.26 INSTRUCTOR QUALIFYING
10.26 10.26.1
INSTRUCTOR QUALIFYING PURPOSE To ensure the instructor assessment and qualifying are performed in compliance with applicable VAECO AMOTP/RSTP and authority requirements.
10.26.2 10.26.3
SCOPE This procedure is applied for VAECO instructor qualifying. INSTRUCTOR CATEGORY 1. Instructor categories are defined as following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. 2. Basic aircraft maintenance instructor Aircraft type training instructor Engine run-up instructor Human factors instructor Ground equipment instructor Dangerous goods instructor Aviation security instructor SMS instructor Specialized instructor Regulation and procedure instructor Aviation English instructor ATA 300 instructor
m. AMASIS instructor Basic aircraft maintenance and aircraft type training instructor are classified into two function groups as follows: a. b. 3. Airframe and Power plant Avionic and Electrical
Specialized instructor approval including, but not limited to the following functions: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Components maintenance In-Flight Entertainment maintenance Structure repair ATC transponder and Altimeter test and inspection Borescope inspection Standard practise Ground handling Page 10.26-1

h. i. 10.26.4
EWIS, CDCCL Specific tool/ equipment training
INSTRUCTOR PRIVILEGES AND LIMITATION Within endorsed scope of approved rating and function, instructor is allowed to perform the instruction in accordance with approved training course curriculum.
10.26.5
QUALIFYING PROCEDURE 1. Anyone may apply for instructor approval by sending application (VAECO Form 2067) to Training Director. 2. Training center shall collect records from the candidate, preliminary assess against correspondence instructor PNA before forwarding to Quality Assurance Department for qualifying process.
10.26.5.1 Application process
10.26.5.2 Assessment and qualification process 1. The Quality Assurance Director evaluates the candidate by reviewing documentation, attending demo class, or other means to determine that the individual is capable of imparting information and knowledge as required. Demo instruction for instructor approval shall be organized as following: a. Instructor qualification board: Quality director establish the qualification board which consist of three to five assessors, including at least one assessor holding authorization which compatible with the assessing rating/ function. Demo instruction Demo instruction subjects/ content decided by qualification board, based on the random pickup from the scope of candidates application (at least 04 subjects/ ATAs for basic/ type training). Each candidate shall be assessed in a period of maximum 08 hours. c. Qualification board evaluation Assessors attend the demo instruction for each subject/ ATA and fill out the Instructor Evaluation Sheet (VAECO Form 2068). Quality Audit Division shall collect Evaluation Sheets for each subject from assessors and average the evaluations using Instructor Evaluation Result Sheet (VAECO Form 2069). One criteria in evaluation sheet is considered as acceptable if the average point of all assessors for that criteria is not under 3, and one subject is considered as acceptable when every criteria is acceptable.
2.
b.
Page 10.26-2

3.
When candidate meets all requirements, the Quality Audit Division shall issue the Instructor Approval (VAECO Form 8019) with detail functions to Quality Director for approval. For subjects within CAAV approved rating, QAD will submit a list of instructor together with related records/ certificates (as required) to CAAV for approval. QAD shall update Instructor Roster and make it available to authorities upon request.
4.
5.
10.26.5.3 Maintain proficiency/ Validity of approval To maintain the validity of approval, following conditions shall be satisfied: 1. 2. 3. 4. VAECOs approval is valid, and CAAV approval is valid (if applied), and Applicant is still employed by VAECO, and Applicant shall conduct the privileges in any consecutive 24 months period, or complete the recurrent training on the related subjects every 24 months.
10.26.6
ARCHIVES Instructor qualifying records shall be kept on file in Quality Assurance Department for two years after the termination of instructor approval.
Page 10.26-3

PART 11 HUMAN RESOURCE & TRAINING PROC.
PART 11
HUMAN RESOURCE AND TRAINING PROCEDURES
Page 11-1

PART 11 HUMAN RESOURCE & TRAINING PROC. 11.1 POSITION NEED ASSESSMENT
11.1 11.1.1
POSITION NEED ASSESSMENT PURPOSE To ensure all working positions in VAECO is assessed and controlled in accordance with current applicable requirements.
11.1.2
RESPONSIBILITY 1. Relevant departments and maintenance centers are responsible for making a proposal to Quality Assurance Department for any new job that needs to be created within their unit to ensure their smooth operation. Director of QAD is responsible for determining level of expertise, knowledge, skills and experience required for proposed job. Departments and maintenance centers shall make new job proposal in POSITION NEED ASSESSMENT (VAECO Form 8031) and send to QAD. The proposal for assessment should include the brief description of essential responsibilities and tasks/duties of position. The new job proposal should be ignited in case of a. b. Current employee transfers to a new job, or is assigned a task to which she/he is unfamiliar or has no previous training. Change in factors that affect the Company, including the introduction of a new process, method, material, tool, or aircraft model, system, or component.
2. 11.1.3
PROCEDURE 1.
2.
QAD shall determine the minimum requirements for each position including, but not limited to, following: a. Knowledge required for the job including the introduction of a new process, method, material, tool, or aircraft model, system, or component skill license experience
b. c. d. 3.
QAD shall determine the minimum requirements for each position based on the following factor: a. b. c. Approved RSM/ QCM, MOE and SOP. Requirements in CFR 14 part 145, part 43 and other applicable parts, Applicable requirements specified in VAR parts and other applicable requirements of CAAV...
4.
The approved POSITION NEED ASSESSMENT then send to HRD for Employee need assessment.
Page 11.1-1

PART 11 HUMAN RESOURCE & TRAINING PROC. 11.2 EMPLOYEE NEED ASSESSMENT AND TRAINING RECORD
11.2 11.2.1
EMPLOYEE NEED ASSESSMENT AND TRAINING RECORD PURPOSE 1. Each employee who is assigned to perform or support maintenance, preventive maintenance, or alterations, and inspection functions will be capable of performing the assigned task. The Company ensures that employees are capable by assessing their abilities against job qualifications, and filling any gap with training. This section describes that assessment process. Individual training records will be retained by HRD. Human Resource Department: a. b. Ensuring that these procedures are used appropriately. Developing an Employee Needs Assessment for each employee using the program and ensuring that an appropriate training plan is established for each employee. Ensuring that all records are accurately documented and filed in a timely manner. Establishing the Company needs assessment (Position Needs Assessment). Implementing employee assessment (Further Employee Needs Assessment). Ensuring that the training program and its procedures are used appropriately. Implementing training plan. Assigning current employees suitable job positions. Making employees aware of the program and their responsibilities in it.
2. 11.2.2 1.
RESPONSIBILITIES
c. 2.
Quality Assurance Department: a. b.
3.
Training Center: a. b.
4.
Maintenance Centers and Departments: a. b.
11.2.3
PROCEDURE 1. Needs Assessment is required under the following conditions: a. b. New employee joins the company: HRD must assign each new employee an appropriate job position. Current employee transfers to a new job position or is assigned a task in which she/he is unfamiliar or has no previous training: Maintenance centers/ Departments must update, revise proposed employee assigned roster and send the roster to HRD.
Page 11.2-1

c.
Change in factors that affect the Company, including the introduction of a new process, method, material, tool, or aircraft model, system, or component: QAD must establish, revise, and approve these changing job positions and send it to HRD.
2.
Update changes in personnel and job position. All changes in personnel and job position above will be updated into software by HRD.
3.
Initial employee needs assessment. To determine training needs, each employees abilities will be assessed against the requirements of the job by analyzing: a. Initial evaluation of employee training records will be carried out by the HRD: Evaluate the employee through reviewing records of training provided previously, testing or observation (by QAD, Training center, Maintenance centers, Departments) to determine the skills and knowledge possessed and complete an Employee Assessment form. Use an Employee Assessment Form to document the employees demonstrated capability. Analyze the gap between the employees current skills and knowledge as stated on the Employee Assessment, and the skills and knowledge required for the job as stated on the Position Needs Assessment to determine which courses are required in order to provide the employee with the additional capability to perform his assigned duties. HRD will document the plan for each individual on an Employee Training Plan form. HRD will schedule the employee for classes listed on the Employee Training Plan, make master training plan, and send it to Training center. For employees satisfying skill and knowledge requirements as stated on the position needs assessment, HRD will make general examination plan and send it to QAD.
b.
c.
d.
4.
Implementing training. Training center implements training courses and send training result back to HRD to update database.
5.
Further employee needs assessment. a. QAD in co-operation with Training center, related Maintenance centers and departments carries out further evaluation by testing or observation employees knowledge and skills. Employee remedial training courses after examination must be classified from the training list by training codes, recorded in the comments part of employee needs assessment form, and sent to HRD to rectify an employees demonstrated lack of knowledge or skill.
b.
6.
Updating training and examination result. Page 11.2-2

Training result from Training center and examination result from QAD (including employee remedial training courses) will be updated into individuals training record by HRD. 7. Re-assessing employee training needs again. Employee needs assessment is repeated to analyze and fill the gap with training again. 11.2.4 ARCHIVES 1. Detailed records, relating to individual employee training will be maintained for a period of two years after employee separation by HRD, including: a. Archives in the software including the following forms generated by the training program: Employee Training Record. Employee Needs Assessment. Employee Training Plan. b. 2. Archives in the locked cabinet. Available individual training certificates are managed, updated, and stored in the locked cabinet by HRD.
Page 11.2-3

PART 11 HUMAN RESOURCE & TRAINING PROC. 11.3 TRAINING COURSE ARRANGEMENT
11.3 11.3.1 11.3.2 11.3.3
TRAINING COURSE ARRANGEMENT PURPOSE This procedure stipulates regulations of a training course arrangement. SCOPE This procedure is applied for training course arrangement activities. RESPONSIBILITY The Training Division/ Administrative Division/ Southern Training Division are responsible for arranging training courses.
11.3.4
PROCEDURE Training courses are arranged by the TC based on approved annual training plan or request from HRD or from other departments/centers of VAECO or from Customers.
11.3.4.1
Training course arrangement 1. For arrangement a training courses at the TC, the Training Division/ Southern Training Division shall: a. Evaluate criteria necessary to implement the training course including: timetable, instructors and training location. In some cases, instructors and training location may be outside rented; however, both shall meet current requirements. Prepare a Training Course Plan (VAECO Form 8007) when all necessary criteria to implement the training course are satisfied and submit to the Training Division manager for review, then to the TCD for approval under delegation of the VAECO President and CEO.
b.
2.
The Training Division informs the approved Training Course Plan (VAECO Form 8007) to the HRD/ the other Departments/ Centers of the VAECO/ Customers for providing attendance trainee list and to related instructors for implementation. The HRD is responsible to make sure that all the attendant meet the prerequisite of the training course before providing the properly trainee list to the TC. Any attendant that does not meet the prerequisites will not be qualified as completion of the training course. After receiving attendance trainee list, the Training Division/ Administrative Division/ Southern Training Division implements the training course IAW Procedure 11.5. The Training Division is responsible for controlling of trainees prerequisites. After the training course is completed, the Training Division/ Southern Training Division shall collect/ complete/ store all relevant information/documents to the Training Record IAW Procedure 11.9. Except special cases, within 10 working days after the training course is completed, the Training Division/ Southern Training Division shall prepare a Training Course Report (VAECO Form 8014) and submit to Page 11.3-1
3.
4.
5.
6.

PART 11 HUMAN RESOURCE & TRAINING PROC. 11.3 TRAINING COURSE ARRANGEMENT
the Training Division manager for review then to the TCD for issuing Certificates/ Attestations (VAECO Form 8001/8002) IAW Procedure 11.10, if requested. 7. The TCD shall send a Training Course Report (VAECO Form 8014) and Certificates/ Attestations- VAECO Form 8001/8002 (if any) to the HRD/ Customer. The Administrative Division carries out procedures of selection, negotiation and signing a contract with a training provider (hereafter called as provider). The selected provider must have capability and scope of training IAW current requirements or be accepted by the VAECO President & CEO. After a training contract is signed, the Administrative Division shall cooperate with the contracted provider to implement the training course. After the training course is completed, the Administrative Division shall collect/ complete all relevant information/ documents to Training Records IAW Procedure 11.9. Except special cases, within 10 working days after the training course is completed, the Administrative Division manager shall prepare a Training Course Report (VAECO Form 8014) attached with certificates (if any) and submits to the TCD. The TCD shall send the Training Course Report (VAECO Form 8014) and certificates (if any) to the HRD.
11.3.4.2
Outsourcing training course arrangement 1.
2. 3.
4.
5. 11.3.5
ARCHIVES The records related to training course arrangement are kept IAW SOP 11.9.
Page 11.3-2

PART 11 HUMAN RESOURCE & TRAINING PROC. 11.4 TRAINING COURSES PREPARATION
11.4 11.4.1 11.4.2 11.4.3
TRAINING COURSES PREPARATION PURPOSE This procedure stipulates requirements for training courses preparation. SCOPE This procedure is applied for training courses preparation. RESPONSIBILITY The Training Division/ Administrative Division/ Southern Training Division are responsible for preparing training courses.
11.4.4 11.4.4.1
PROCEDURE Training materials preparation 1. 2. 3. Training materials includes Training Course Curriculums (VAECO Form 8015), training documents and reference documents (if any). The Training Division manager shall assign instructors to prepare training materials. Training Course Curriculums (VAECO Form 8015), Training Worksheet (VAECO Form 8016) are prepared based on followings: a. b. c. 4. Objective/subject of the training course. Regulations for training of Authorities/Company. Training requirements of Authorities/ QAD/ Manufactures/ Companys RSTP/Departments of company/Customer.
Training documents should systematically demonstrate knowledge/skills with level as requirements of the Training Course Curriculum (VAECO Form 8015) and are prepared based on followings: a. b. Training/Maintenance manuals of Manufactures. Manuals/requirements of Authorities/QAD/Customer
5.
Reference documents (if any) which provide trainees more information related to the training course including but not limited to: a. b. c. d. Training software, training aid program such as: CBT, VACBI Video/ picture, illustration, visual training tools for a lecture. Maintenance Manuals such as: AMM, ASM, TSM... Acronym handbooks, safety notices, Flight Deck Procedures, troubleshooting checklists
6. 11.4.4.2
The Training Division shall submit training materials to the TCD for acceptance and/ or approval applying process, if necessary. The Training Division manager shall assign instructors to revise, supplement, and update training materials. Training materials are revised referring to these followings: Page 11.4-1
Training materials revising, supplementing and updating 1.

PART 11 HUMAN RESOURCE & TRAINING PROC. 11.4 TRAINING COURSES PREPARATION
a. b. c.
Changes in Training/maintenance manuals of Manufactures. Changes in actual configuration of A/C or components. Requirements, feedback from actual working experiences, Authorities, manufactures, QAD, Customers, Instructors or trainees
2. 3.
These revised training materials shall be submitted to the TCD for acceptance and/ or approval applying process, if necessary. The original training materials are managed by the Training Division. Copies shall be distributed to the Administrative Division/ Southern Training Division or instructors. The up-to-dated information in training materials shall be presented at a next recurrent training course to people who have been completed the training course. The Training Division/ Southern Training Division shall prepare necessary forms, including: a. b. c. Participant Data Collection (VAECO Form 8006). Training Attendance Record (VAECO Form 8008). Training Course Critique (VAECO Form 8005), if any. Classroom, workshop is tidy, well ventilated and illuminated. The sufficiency of tools, equipment and materials. The sufficiency of training documents and reference documents for each individual trainee.
4.
11.4.4.3
Preparation for training course: 1.
2.
The Administrative Division/ Southern Training Division shall ensure: a. b. c.
3.
If training courses are implemented at a location other than the TC, the Administrative Division/ Southern Training Division cooperates with incharge person authorized to prepare for training as required above.
11.4.5
ARCHIVES The records related to training course preparation are kept IAW SOP 11.9.
Page 11.4-2

PART 11 HUMAN RESOURCE & TRAINING PROC. 11.5 TRAINING COURSE IMPLEMENTATION
11.5 11.5.1 11.5.2 11.5.3
TRAINING COURSE IMPLEMENTATION PURPOSE This procedure stipulates regulations for training course implementation. SCOPE This procedure is applied for training course implementation. RESPONSIBILITY 1. 2. The Training Division/ Administrative Division/ Southern Training Division are responsible for assigning Instructors for training course. Trainees are responsible for obeying regulations in this procedure. Assigned instructors should: a. b. Obey all current regulations of the VAECO and the TC. Present at least 5 minutes prior to training time, checks training facilities. If it is not suitable for training, inform the Administrative Division/ Southern Training Division manager for further actions. Register attendance trainees and ensure trainees sign and fill all information to Participant Data Collection (VAECO Form 8006) and Training Attendance Record (VAECO Form 8008).. Inform trainees of all related regulations including regulation of security, safety, fire protection, warning and caution of maintenance tasks (if any). Manage trainees in the whole time of training IAW current regulations. Halt of all regulation violations then inform to Training Division/ Southern Training Division manager. Return facilities back original status after finishing the training.
11.5.4
PROCEDURE 1.
c.
d.
e. f. g. 2.
For theoretical training, instructors shall lecture on the content of approved Training Course Curriculum and may: a. b. c. Use reference documents and training aid equipment to help trainees easy to acquire knowledge/skill. Give event exercises to trainees for discussion or give questions to evaluate knowledge acquired by trainees. Except Instructors presentation time, trainees can be self-study with training aid equipment. During this time, instructors should be present to guide trainees and answer their questions.
3.
For Practical training/Task training, instructors shall instruct and supervise all tasks performed by each individual trainee. The completion of training shall be indicated by signature in Training Worksheet (VAECO Form 8016) or equivalent. Page 11.5-1

PART 11 HUMAN RESOURCE & TRAINING PROC. 11.5 TRAINING COURSE IMPLEMENTATION
4.
Trainees should: a. b. c. Obey all current regulations of the VAECO and the TC. All cases of regulation violation will result in penalty IAW current regulations Obey all requirements of instructors and the training course. Present at classroom or training location on time. If trainee is late for training up to 15 minutes, he/she will be not permitted to enter the classroom. Ask instructor for leave and the Training Division/ Southern Training Division or the TCD for absence from the training course. If trainee does not attend the training course less than 8 training hours (one day) without permission, he/she will be recorded in a Training Record, forbidden to attend training courses and exams arranged by the TC for 06 months. If trainee does not attend the training course more than 8 training hours (one day) or whole training course (regardless the number of training hours) without permission, he/she will be recorded in a Training Record, forbidden to attend training courses and exams arranged by the TC for 18 months. Forbidden time is calculated from the end of the course that trainee does not attend without leave. e. Sign and fill all necessary information into training course forms.
d.
11.5.5
ARCHIVES The records related to training course implementation are kept IAW SOP 11.9.
Page 11.5-2

PART 11 HUMAN RESOURCE & TRAINING PROC. 11.6 EXAM ARRANGEMENT
11.6 11.6.1
EXAM ARRANGEMENT PURPOSE This procedure stipulates regulations for an exam (including TOEFA) arrangement.
11.6.2 11.6.3
SCOPE This procedure is applied for exam arrangement activities of the TC. RESPONSIBILITY The Training Division/ Southern Training Division are responsible for arranging exams IAW this procedure.
11.6.4 11.6.4.1
PROCEDURE Exam arrangement 1. Exams are arranged IAW the approved Training Course Plan (VAECO Form 8007) or by an order of the TCD to evaluate knowledge/ skill/ experiences. Test of Aviation English-DOCWISE (TOEFA) is arranged in order to evaluate capability of understanding, reading and writing Techinical Aviation English of technicians. In some cases, exam location may be outside of the TC; however, it should meet current requirements. Methods of exam used in TC: a. Multiple choice exam method without using of references, exam marks are decided by percentage of right answers per total number of questions. Pass mark is 75% after taking in to account of penalty for exam regulations violation. For TOEFA, only the Multiple choice exam method is applied. Other exam methods: essay question, interview or practical assessment references can be allowed, results are decided by 10 score scale or pass/fail criteria. Pass mark is 5/10 after taking in to account of penalty for exam regulations violation.
2. 3.
b.
4.
To arrange an exam, the Training Division/ Southern Training Division manager assigns and supervises assessor in charge to prepare exam materials and facilities. Exam implementation is performed IAW procedure 11.8. Trainee can retake failed subjects for one time only. The answers of questions in retaking exam must be different at least 75% from the first exam. Time for exam retaking will be arranged by the Training Division/ Southern Training Division after failed trainee is reviewed by respective instructor(s). If trainee fails the retaking exam, he/she must wait for at least 3 months since the latest exam and report to his/her Director for registration with Page 11.6-1
11.6.4.2
Exam failure and exam retaking 1.
2.
3.

PART 11 HUMAN RESOURCE & TRAINING PROC. 11.6 EXAM ARRANGEMENT
the HRD or TCD and will be arranged by the HRD to learn the failed subjects and take respective exam again. 4. If trainee have learned again but still failed at respective exam (both the first exam and exam retake), he/she must report to his/her Director for registration with the HRD or TCD and will be arranged by the HRD to learn entire the training course for second time. If the trainee cannot pass this training course, the Company leaders will be informed for further action.
5. 11.6.5
ARCHIVES The documents related to exam arrangement are are kept IAW SOP 11.9.
Page 11.6-2

PART 11 HUMAN RESOURCE & TRAINING PROC. 11.7 EXAM PREPARATION
11.7 11.7.1 11.7.2 11.7.3
EXAM PREPARATION PURPOSE This procedure stipulates regulations for exam preparation. SCOPE This procedure is applied for exam preparation activities of the TC. RESPONSIBILITY The Training Division/ Southern Training Division and assigned assessors are responsible for preparing exam materials and location IAW this procedure.
11.7.4 11.7.4.1
PROCEDURE Exam materials preparation 1. 2. 3. Exam materials includes Exam Questions (VAECO Form 8010/8012) and Question Bank (if any). The Training Division manager shall assign assessors to prepare exam materials. Instructors who conduct a subject/ chapter of a training course are responsible for preparation questions of that subject/ chapter. Questions are prepared IAW. following requirements: a. b. c. Quantity, content and level of questions must be based on current training course materials. Multiple choices question shall have at least 3 answers, in which there is only one correct answer. Other questions are prepared for an assay writing, an interview and a practice assessment. All kinds of these questions must have its own answer attached therewith.
4.
Assessor who is assigned to prepare the Question Bank of a training course shall collect questions from instructors of those training course and updates to the Question Bank. Only authorized person can access to the Question Bank. Exam Questions (VAECO Form 8010/8012) are prepared based on principles: a. Each exam must have at least 02 Exam Questionnaires with the same level and number of questions but at least 75% of answers difference. Questions are chosen from the Question Bank of the training course, in such a way that questions stick close to knowledge/skill that trainees have been learnt. For a multiple choice exam, number of questions in must be correlative to training duration and stipulated from 1 to 5 questions for each training hour. Page 11.7-1
5.
b.
c.

PART 11 HUMAN RESOURCE & TRAINING PROC. 11.7 EXAM PREPARATION
d.
For other exams (not multiple choice one), number of questions must be correlative to amount of knowledge/skills/experiences to be evaluated.
11.7.4.2
Preparation for exam implementation 1. The Training Division/ Southern Training Division shall prepare all necessary exam forms, including: a. b. c. d. 2. Exam Questions (VAECO Form 8010/8012). Answer Sheets (VAECO Form 8011/8012). Minutes of Exam (VAECO Form 8009). Participant Data Collection (VAECO Form 8006) (applied for TOEFA)
The Administrative Division/ Southern Training Division shall prepare all conditions for exam as following: a. b. c. Exam room is tidy, well ventilated and illuminated. Equipment and materials (if any) are sufficient as required. Draft papers for examinees (if any) are sufficient as required.
3.
If exam is implemented at a location other than the TC, the Administrative Division/ Southern Training Division cooperate with authorized person of that location to prepare all conditions.
11.7.5
ARCHIVES The records related to exam preparation are kept IAW SOP 11.9.
Page 11.7-2

PART 11 HUMAN RESOURCE & TRAINING PROC. 11.8 EXAM IMPLEMENTATION
11.8 11.8.1 11.8.2 11.8.3
EXAM IMPLEMENTATION PURPOSE This procedure stipulates regulations for implementing of an exam. SCOPE This procedure is applied for exam implementing activities of the TC. RESPONSIBILITY 1. The Training Division/ Administrative Division/ Southern Training Division and assigned assessors are responsible for implementing an exam arranged by the TC IAW this procedure. Examinees attend an exam arranged by the TC, are responsible for obeying relevant regulations in this procedure.
2. 11.8.4 11.8.4.1
PROCEDURE Exam Implementation 1. For implementing an exam, assessors shall: a. Present at least 5 minutes prior to the exam and check exam room, if exam room is not suitable for the exam, inform the Administrative Division/ Southern Training Division Manager of non-conformity for further actions. Register examinees and check staff ID, arrange examinees in exam room, ensure distance between examinees as far as required. Make examinees acknowledge all related regulations. Deliver Exam Questions (VAECO Form 8010/8012) and Answer Sheets (VAECO Form 8011/8012) to examinees in such a principle that adjacent examinees do not receive the same Exam Question (VAECO Form 8010/8012). Manage exam time, always present in exam room to supervise examinees; not permit unauthorized people to enter exam room. Keep strictly exam discipline, deal with exam regulation violated cases, and record to the Minutes of Exam (VAECO Form 8009). Ensure examinees sign and fill all information to training courses forms before leaving exam room. After exam completion, tidy up, return exam room to original status Collect all the Exam Questions (VAECO Form 8010/8012), Answer Sheets (VAECO Form 8011/8012), scratch paper delivered to examinees (if any) and perform mark the exam or interview or assessment. Summarize exam result, submit to the Training Division/ Southern Training Division manager for review and inform to examinees. Explain examinees' questions if any. Page 11.8-1
b. c. d.
e.
f. g. 2. a.
After time for exam/preparation is over, assessors shall:
b. c.

d. 11.8.4.2 1.
Complete and file Exam Records IAW procedure 11.9.
Exam regulations and disciplinary measures Assessors implementing an exam arranged by the TC should: a. b. Obey all current regulations of the VAECO and the TC. An assessor is consider as violated against exam regulations if: he/she discloses the exam questions/ answers, leaves his/her assigned position during exam time, helps examinees to do exam, ignores examinees violation cases. If an assessor is detected to violate exam regulation, he/she will be suspended or revoked his/her assessor approval. Obey all current regulations of the VAECO and the TC. Present at exam room on time. If trainee is late for exam up to 5 minutes, he/she will be not permitted to attend the exam. Obey all requirements of assessors, exam and current regulations. When having questions, examinees shall ask the assessor and only talk if permitted by the assessor. Sign and fill full information in all exam forms as required. An examinee is consider as violated against exam regulations if he/she discusses or makes noises or lets his/her cell phone rings. For this case: he/she will be warned and marked as the first violation by the assessor's signature onto the respective column of the Minutes of Exam (VAECO Form 8009). If examinee continues violation above article for second time, he/she will be marked as the second violation by the assessor's signature onto the respective column of the Minutes of Exam (VAECO Form 8009). For this case: his/her exam result will be deducted 10% of scores of each chapter or subject of the exam. Using electronic devices (including cell phone) in exam room or marking on the Exam Questions (VAECO Form 8010/8012) by examinee are not permitted in any cases, if examinee do so his/her exam result will be deducted 50% of scores of each chapter or subject of the exam. If examinee continues violation above article for third time or brings unauthorized reference documents into exam room or uses cell phone/electronic devices or looks at answer sheet of other examinee, he/she will be marked onto his/her answer sheet and the respective column of the Minutes of Exam (VAECO Form 8009). For this case: his/her exam result will be deducted 100% of scores of each chapter or subject of the exam and recorded into a Training Record. If examinee refuses to conform to assessors' orders or cheats in the exam, he/she will be suspended from the exam and marked onto the Page 11.8-2
c. 2.
Examinees attend an exam arranged by the TC should: a. b. c.
d. e.
f.
g.
h.
i.

respective column of the Minutes of Exam (VAECO Form 8009). For this case: he/she will be cancelled all exam results of the training course, is expelled from the training course, recorded in a Training Record, forbidden to attend any training course or exam arranged by the TC for 12 months. If violated examinee is VAECO staff, he/she will be applied additional disciplinary measures as regulated. An examinee is consider cheat if he/she uses unauthorized reference documents in exam room or copies answer sheet of other examinee or let other examinee copies his/her answer sheet. j. If an exam that have numerous of exam regulation violated cases, the Training Division manager shall assess level of violating and reports to the TCD for cancellation of the exam result if necessary.
11.8.5
ARCHIVES The records related to exam implementation are kept IAW SOP 11.9.
Page 11.8-3

PART 11 HUMAN RESOURCE & TRAINING PROC. 11.9 TRAINING RECORDS COMPLETION AND STORAGE
11.9 11.9.1
TRAINING RECORDS COMPLETION AND STORAGE PURPOSE This procedure stipulates regulations of completion and storage of Training Records.
11.9.2 11.9.3
SCOPE This procedure is applied for training record managing activities of the TC. RESPONSIBILITY The Training Division/ Administrative Division/ Southern Training Division are responsible for completing and storing Training Records IAW this procedure.
11.9.4 11.9.4.1
PROCEDURE Training Records completion 1. Training Records includes: a. b. 2. Training Course Records. Exam (including TOEFA) Records.
The Training Division/ Administrative Division/ Southern Training Division is responsible for collecting/recording information/documents concerned with courses/exams in Training Records. For training courses/exams performed in Ho Chi Minh City Satellite Facility, after collecting/recording, the Southern Training Division shall send the original Training Record to the Training Division for storage; another copy can be kept at the Southern Training Division for reference purpose. For outsourcing training courses, after collecting and recording, the Administrative Division shall send the original Training Record to the Training Division for storage, other copy can be kept at the Administrative Division for reference purpose. Information/documents listed below are collected and recorded in Training Records, except for section b, c, d, e, f which are NOT applied to outsourcing training courses. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. Title, code and date of performed training course. Training Course Critique (VAECO Form 8005), if any Participant Data Collection (VAECO Form 8006). Training Course Plan (VAECO Form 8007). Training Attendance Record (VAECO Form 8008). Exam Result (VAECO Form 8013) Training Course Report (VAECO Form 8014) All documents concerned with training course, if any.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Information listed below are collected and recorded in Exam Record: Page 11.9-1

PART 11 HUMAN RESOURCE & TRAINING PROC. 11.9 TRAINING RECORDS COMPLETION AND STORAGE
a. b. c. d. e. f. 11.9.4.2 1.
Title, code and date of performed training course or title, code and date of performed exam (applied for TOEFA Records). Minutes of Exam (VAECO Form 8009). Exam Question (VAECO Form 8010/8012). Exam Answers (VAECO Form 8011/8012) of examinees. Participant Data Collection (VAECO Form 8006), TOEFA Report (VAECO Form 8004) (applied for TOEFA Record). All documents concerned with performed exam or TOEFA, if any.
Training Records storage The Training Division stores all Training Records of training courses, which has been performed by the TC, as hard-copy and/or soft-copy (if any). Training Records are kept at least 5 years since the training course completion. Storage of Training Course Records: a. b. Training Course Records are stored in cabinet and arranged to files with label of group and time frame of performed training courses. Each Training Course Record file consists of: A list of Training Course Records kept in the file. Training Records kept separately and in a time orderly manner. Each record has all information/documents as described in item 5, section 11.9.4.1 above. 3. Storage of Exam Records: a. Exam Records are stored in file cabinets and arranged to files with label of title and time frame of performed training courses. TOEFA Records are stored in specified file cabinets. Each Exam Record file consists of: A list of Exam/TOEFA Records kept in the file. Exam/TOEFA Records kept separately and in a time orderly manner. Each record has all information/documents as described in item 6, section 11.9.4.1 above. 4. The training/ examination records and related documents are kept in Training Course Record room and Exam Record room of Training Division of the TC.
2.
b.
Page 11.9-2

PART 11 HUMAN RESOURCE & TRAINING PROC. 11.10 ISSUANCE OF CERTIFICATE/ ATTESTATION
11.10 11.10.1 11.10.2
ISSUANCE OF CERTIFICATE/ ATTESTATION PURPOSE This procedure stipulates regulations for issuance of certificates/ attestations. SCOPE This procedure is applied for certificate/ attestation issuing activities of the TC.
11.10.3
RESPONSIBILITY 1. The Training Division/ Southern Training Division Manager are responsible for reporting training course/TOEFA result IAW this procedure. The TCD is responsible for issuing Certificates/Attestations (VAECO Form 8001/8002/8003) IAW this procedure.
2. 11.10.4
PROCEDURE 1. After a training course at the TC has been accomplished, the Training Division/ Southern Training Division prepares a Training Course Report (VAECO Form 8014), prints Certificates/Attestations (VAECO Form 8001/8002) (if any), submits to the Training Division manager for review and then sends to the TCD. Based on the Training Division manager suggestion and Training Course Report, the TCD signs and issues Certificates/Attestations (VAECO Form 8001/8002) (if any) for trainees that are qualified as completion of the training course. Trainees are qualified as completion of the training course and can receive Certificates/Attestations (VAECO Form 8001/8002) depending on requirements of the Training Course Curriculum (VAECO Form 8015), if he/she: a. For the training course is arranged on classroom: is not expelled from the training course, and Attends at least 90% of training duration, and Passes all exams (including retaking exam) required by the training course. b. For the training course is arranged on the workshop/aircraft (practical/task training): Is not expelled from the training course, and Attends at least 90% of training duration, and Performs required tasks in related practical/task training record and is confirmed by instructors of completion of those tasks. c. For the training course is arranged on website (online): Page 11.10-1
11.10.4.1 Issuance of certificates/ attestations for Training courses.
2.
3.

PART 11 HUMAN RESOURCE & TRAINING PROC. 11.10 ISSUANCE OF CERTIFICATE/ ATTESTATION
Does not be expelled from the training course, and Read and understand training document of course, which is post on the Company website, and Confirm on the read and sign form of the training course, which is post on the Company website. 4. If one of the mentioned requirements is not met trainees will not be qualified as completion of the training course and will not receive a Certificate/Attestation (VAECO Form 8001/8002). If a trainee only completes a part of the training course and have get permission of the TCD, his/her training result can be reserved for 12 months from date of training course complete. Before the end of reserved period, he/she must register with the Training Division/ Southern Training Division to learn remaining part of the training course. If all the requirements of the training course are met, he/she will be qualified as completion of the training course and can receive a Certificate/Attestation (VAECO Form 8001/8002). After a TOEFA at the TC has been accomplished, the Training Division/ Southern Training Division prepares a TOEFA Report (VAECO Form 8004), prints Certificates of Achievement (VAECO Form 8003) (if any), submits to the Training Division manager for review and then sends to the TCD. Based on the Training Division manager suggestion and TOEFA Records, the TCD signs and issues Certificates of Achievement (VAECO Form 8003) (if any) for examinees that are qualified as pass the exam. The examinee taking the TOEFA will receive a Certificates of Achievement (VAECO Form 8003) respective with score after pass the exam and a have a validation period of 5 years since exam date.
5.
11.10.4.2 Issuance of certificates for TOEFA 1.
2.
3.
11.10.5
ARCHIVES The original Certificates/ Attestations are sent to HRD. The copy of Certificates/ Attestations shall be kept at Training Division of the TC at least 5 years since the training course completion.
Page 11.10-2

PART 11 HUMAN RESOURCE & TRAINING PROC. 11.11 TRAINING ACTIVITIES REVIEW
11.11 11.11.1 11.11.2 11.11.3
TRAINING ACTIVITIES REVIEW PURPOSE This procedure stipulates the regulations for training activities review. SCOPE This procedure is applied for training activities reviewing of the TC. RESPONSIBILITY The Training Division manager is responsible for reviewing training activities of the TC IAW this procedure.
11.11.4
PROCEDURE 1. Upon receiving the non-conformity report/ recommendations from audits of the Authorities/ QAD/ Customer or poor feedback from Instructors/ Examiner/ Trainees/ Examinees (via the Training course critique-VAECO Form 8005 or equivalent) or the requirement of the TCD, the Training Division manager is responsible for review effective training activities of TC including, but not limited to: a. b. c. d. e. f. 2. TC procedures and obedience to the procedures of divisions and personal via training activities. Training List (VAECO Form 8017). Instructor Roster (VAECO Form 8018). Training Records. Training/exam materials. The condition of facilities, classroom/workshop and equipment.
After review, the Training Division manager makes a review report to define the cause to influence the quality and effect of training activities at the TC and send to the TCD. Based on the review report of the Training Division manager, the TCD will consider and direct the related division/personnel to implement all corrective actions for improving the quality of the training activities in the TC including procedures amendment suggestion (if necessary).
3.
11.11.5
ARCHIVES The records related to training review activities are kept at Training Division of the TC at least 5 years after reviewing completion.
Page 11.11-1

PART 12 PROCEDURES FOR VNA
PART 12
SPECIFIC PROCEDURES FOR VNA
Page 12-1

PART 12 PROCEDURES FOR VNA 12.1 AIRWORTHINESS DIRECTIVE EVALUATION AND IMPLEMENTATION
12.1 12.1.1
AIRWORTHINESS DIRECTIVE EVALUATION AND IMPLEMENTATION PURPOSE To establish the procedure and requirements for evaluating and implementing of Airworthiness Directive and Mandatory/ Alert SB (hereafter called AD) on VNA aircrafts and components.
12.1.2
SCOPE This procedure is applied for evaluating, implementing of AD on VNA aircrafts and components
12.1.3
RESPONSIBILITY 1. Director of EGD is responsible for: a. b. 2. 3. controlling, evaluating and raising orders to implement all ADs related to VNA aircrafts, VNA components. issuing WO to implement AD.
Director of assigned RMC/BMC/CMC is responsible for implementing AD. Director of LGD is responsible for supplying components/ material/ Toolequipment for implementing AD on-wing and ensuring all ADs applicable to VNA components and in stock or shop visit (outside VAECO) shall be implemented. Director of QAD is responsible for monitoring AD compliance to ensure airworthiness of VNA aircrafts, VNA components.
4. 12.1.4 12.1.4.1
PROCEDURES AD acquisition 1. The EGD delegates the qualified engineering staff to check the EASAs website, FAAs website on a daily basis to ensure the on time receiving of emergency ADs. Qualified engineering staff acquires the A320/A321/A330, B777, F70 and ATR72 ADs from the following sources: a. b. EASA: EGD downloads the ADs issued by EASA from its website once every two weeks; FAA: EGD downloads the ADs issued by FAA from its website once every two weeks.
2.
12.1.4.2
AD preliminary evaluation and registration After the acquisition of a new AD, the qualified engineering staff shall: 1. Preliminarily evaluates that AD to determine whether it is: a. b. c. Applicable to VNA aircraft; or Applicable to engines and APUs installed on the above aircraft; or Applicable to aircraft appliances or equipment;
Page 12.1-1

2.
Register that AD on the LIST OF AD if: a. b. It is applicable to VNA aircraft, engines, components; or It has not been clearly classified or its effectively has not been determined yet.
12.1.4.3
AD detailed evaluation 1. 2. Newly received ADs are evaluated by filling in the Form VNA-TE-F60. Qualified engineering staff evaluates in one AD Evaluation Sheet: a. b. The ADs, which are issued by different Authorities but have the same content/requirements. The AD issued by the authority who issues the Type Certificate is the AD to evaluate. ADs issued by other authorities are Related ADs; Different revisions of an AD. The latest revision is the AD to evaluate.
c. 3.
AD Evaluation Sheet will be revised to update information. AD Evaluation Sheet is numbered as follows: A/C type/YYYY.XXX. In which YYYY is year; XXX is ordinal number. Qualified engineering staff follows the following steps in AD detailed evaluation: a. b. Determine which types of aircraft, aircraft components the AD is applicable to; Compare these applicable aircraft, aircraft component types with the list of VNA aircraft, aircraft components to determine which aircraft, aircraft components the AD is applicable to; If the AD is not applicable/closed to any VNA aircraft, aircraft components, write down the reasons and attach the proof to the evaluation form; If the AD is applicable to VNA aircraft, aircraft components, write the affected aircraft model/MSN and/or the affected aircraft components P/N, S/N into Applicable to field.
4.
c.
d.
12.1.4.4
Implementation of an AD applicable to aircraft, on-wing aircraft components 1. Qualified engineering staff shall: a. b. Determine the provisions and compliance time of the AD; Register the AD on AMASIS system: Filling EFFECTIVITY field with A if the AD is applicable to aircraft; Filling effectively field with P if the AD is applicable to on-wing aircraft component. c. Issue Engineering Order (EO) to comply with the requirements of the AD; Page 12.1-2

d.
Issue EO Spare & Tool List (ESTL VAECO Form 3010) to order necessary spare parts, materials and tools; The necessary spare parts, materials and tools used for each EO shall be entered in AMASIS. Update the EO, ESTL number into the correspondent AD Evaluation Sheet, the list of ADs for airframe, engine, equipment, and the AMASIS system; Submit AD Evaluation Sheet, EO and ESTL to EG director or authorized personnel for approval; Forward the approved EO and ESTL to Maintenance Planning Division for monitoring; If an AD requests to update operational manual and AMS: Send a request to update documents to Technical Dept. of VNA or OCC. Clearly indicate the compliance time of the AD and request of the official feedback after completing that document; Update the related information into the list of AD after receiving the official feedback from VNA.
e.
f. g. h.
2.
EGD shall: a. b. c. Schedule to perform an EO for each aircraft, on-wing component; Order spares, materials and tooling; Issue WO and send to MCC for deployment.
3. 4.
Accomplishment of the EO linked to ADs is mandatory and must be on time as authoritys requirements. Results of AD accomplishment will be reported to VNA by EGD. In case an AD cannot be performed, MCC shall notify to EGD to work out appropriate solutions.
12.1.4.5
Implementation of an AD applicable to engines, aircraft equipment in store or in shop visit 1. Qualified engineering staff shall a. Issue and send AD/SB REQUISITION (VAECO Form 3011) sent to LGD, including: Reference of requested AD; List of affected engines, aircraft equipment; Method of compliance and due date, which may be: at the next shop visit, at shop visit when part exposed or send to shop before the deadline. b. Update the AD/SB Requisition reference into the correspondent AD Evaluation Sheet, the list of ADs for airframe, engine, equipment, and the AMASIS system;
2.
If implementing of an AD is out of VAECO capability, LGD shall Page 12.1-3

a. b. 3.
Notify to VNA to work out appropriate solutions, Send the engines, aircraft equipment to the approved agency follow order from VNA.
If implementing of an AD is within the VAECO capability, LGD shall issue a MAINTENANCE/ REPAIR REQUEST (IN-HOUSE REPAIR) (VAECO Form 4002) to related RMC/ BMC/ CMC. Related RMC/ BMC/ CMC shall arrange to complete order, report abnormalities to LGD. AD Evaluation Sheets are archived in EGD for at least 2 years after aircraft out of service. List of ADs is located in VAECO ENGINEERING folder in the host computer of EGD. The printed copy of this list is archived for individual aircraft and is regularly updated.
4. 12.1.5
ARCHIVES 1. 2.
Page 12.1-4

PART 12 PROCEDURES FOR VNA 12.2 SERVICE BULLETIN (SB) EVALUATION AND DEVELOPMENT
12.2 12.2.1
SERVICE BULLETIN (SB) EVALUATION AND DEVELOPMENT PURPOSE To establish the procedure and requirements implementing SB on VNA aircrafts and components. for evaluating and
12.2.2
SCOPE This procedure is applied for evaluating, implementing of SB on VNA aircrafts and components
12.2.3
RESPONSIBILITY 1. Director of EGD is responsible for controlling, evaluating, raising EO, scheduling to implement applicable SB to VNA aircrafts, VNA components. Director of RMC/BMC/CMC is responsible for implementing SB. Director of LGD is responsible for supplying components/ material/ Toolequipment for implementing SB on-wing and ensuring all SB applicable to VNA components in stock or shop visit (outside VAECO) shall be implemented. Director of QAD is responsible for monitoring SB implementation.
2. 3.
4. 12.2.4 12.2.4.1
PROCEDURES SB acquisition 1. AD/SB Control Team Leader acquires SBs from the following sources: a. b. 2. VNA Library; Manufacturers, directly or through their website.
AD/SB Control Team Leader updates the List of New SBs whenever acquires new SBs. The AD/SB Control Team Leader sort the new SBs and forward them to applicable team of Engineering Division. Qualified engineering staff preliminary evaluates the new SBs following the steps below: a. Compare the EFFECTIVITY of the SB to the list of VNA aircraft, aircraft components to determine which aircraft, aircraft components are affected by the SB; Classify SBs into the following categories: Not Applicable (N/A); Open; Closed. c. Fill in and send the SB Preliminary Evaluation Sheet (VAECO Form 3024) to AD/SB Control Team leader. Page 12.2-1
12.2.4.2
SB preliminary evaluation 1. 2.
b.

12.2.4.3
SB detailed evaluation 1. 2. The SBs which classified N/A is not necessary for detailed evaluation. Qualified engineering staff shall define the necessity and advantages of SB implementation basing on maintenance experience, Reliability program, aircraft status, aircraft equipment status and the estimated cost for implementation. When SB is evaluated as to be performed, qualified engineering staff determines: a. b. c. d. 4. 5. The specific aircraft, aircraft components to which the SB will be performed; Means of compliance: on-wing, at VAECO, at shop visit, or roll over campaign within the fleet; Plan and time to implement the SB; Investment on specific materials, tool and equipment.
3.
When SB is evaluated as not to be performed (rejected), qualified engineering staff specifies the reason of rejection. Fill all the above information and evaluation judgment in SB Evaluation Sheet (VNA Form VNA-TE-F64) and send it to EGD Director for approval before sending to VNA. If the SB is a new revision, determine the changes in the requirements of SB and update the related documents if necessary. If the SB is applicable to aircraft components, send a copy of the approved SB Evaluation Sheet to Component Maintenance Center to examine the feasibility.
6. 7.
12.2.4.4
Implementation of an SB applicable to aircraft, on-wing aircraft components 1. After receiving the approved SB Evaluation Sheet form VNA, qualified engineering staff shall a. Register the SB in AMASIS system: Filling effectively field with A if the SB is applicable to aircraft and with P if the SB is applicable to on-wing aircraft component (VSB). In case of modification links with SB applicable to aircraft, create MOD number linked to SB. This MOD number will be closed automatically when the SB is closed. In case of MOD links with a VSB applicable to aircraft component, besides updating VSB (EFFECTIVITY P), qualified engineering staff should update the cover SB (EFFECTIVITY A) issued by aircraft manufacturer and create MOD number linked to this SB. MOD number (SB) will be closed manually when all the components installed on the A/C are incorporated the VSB.
Page 12.2-2

b.
Issue and get approval for EO, ESTL. EO and all spares/ materials and equipment, tools required to perform the EO shall be entered the AMASIS; Forward the approved EO and ESTL to Maintenance Planning Division for monitoring. Record information in List of SBs for Aircraft and List of SBs for Aircraft Component. Schedule to perform an EO for each aircraft, on-wing component; Order spares, materials and tooling; Issue and send to MCC for deployment.
c. d. 2.
Maintenance Planning Division shall: a. b. c.
3.
EGD shall monitor the SB implementation, report the result to the aircraft manufacturer and VNA to update operational and maintenance documents In case an SB cannot be performed in VAECO, EGD shall notify to VNA to work out appropriate solutions.
4. 12.2.4.5
Implementation of an SB applicable to engines, aircraft equipment in store or in shop visit 1. After receiving the approved VNA SB Evaluation Sheet form, qualified engineering staff shall a. Issue AD/SB Requisition (VAECO Form 3011) including: Content of SB; List of affected engines, aircraft; Method of compliance and related maintenance instructions. b. 2. Send the approved AD/ SB Requisition to Logistics Department. If implementing of an SB is in VAECO capability, LGD send a copy of the SB Evaluation and the AD/ SB Requisition to Component Maintenance Center to implement. If implementing of an SB is out of VAECO capability, LGD shall notify VNA to work out appropriate solutions, or send component to other approved agency. Preliminary Evaluation sheet and SB Evaluation Sheet (Form VNA-TEF64) are archived in EGD at least two years after aircraft out of service. List of SBs for Aircraft and List of SBs for Aircraft Components are located in VAECO ENGINEERING folder in the host computer of EGD. Evaluated SBs (paper copy) are collected by AD/SB Control Team and send to VAECO Technical Library for archives.
3.
12.2.5
ARCHIVES 1. 2. 3.
Page 12.2-3

PART 12 PROCEDURES FOR VNA 12.3 AD, SB, MOD AND EO COMPLIANCE CONTROL
12.3 12.3.1
AD, SB, MOD AND EO COMPLIANCE CONTROL PURPOSE To establish the procedure and requirements for controlling of AD, SB, MOD and EO compliance.
12.3.2
SCOPE This procedure is applied for controlling of AD, SB, MOD and EO implementation on VNA aircrafts and components
12.3.3
RESPONSIBILITY 1. 2. EGD director is responsible for monitoring the compliance of AD, SB. LGD director is responsible for updating the AD/SB compliance of components during shop visit into AMASIS.
12.3.4 12.3.4.1
PROCEDURES CONTROL OF AD COMPLIANCE 1. CONTROL OF AD COMPONNENTS a. b. COMPLIANCE FOR AIRCRAFT, ON-WING
When EO is closed, the linked AD will be automatically closed in AMASIS EGD shall monitor status of the applicable AD in AMASIS. For the AD which still OPEN in AMASIS, EGD should monthly check and adjust the AD schedule (if necessary) in order to ensure the AD will be complied on time. Monthly, EGD should send the list of ADs (applied to VNA aircraft) to inform VNA Technical Department the compliance status.
c. 2.
CONTROL OF AD COMPLIANCE FOR AIRCRAFT COMPONENTS DURING SHOP VISIT a. During the incoming inspection of components, store inspector should make sure that the requirement of the AD/SB REQUISITION (VAECO Form 3011) affected to that components was complied with. For the AD was complied, store inspector shall update AD status in AMASIS as follow: Create an WO from AD schedule. Close WO with Complied date, Flight hours, Flight Cycles of components at compliance time. c. For the components which the AD are still OPEN, EGD re-evaluate schedule. If necessary, request LGD adjust schedule in order to ensure the AD will be complied on time for all components. Monthly, EGD send the list of ADs for component to inform VNA Technical Department the compliance status.
b.
d.
Page 12.3-1

e.
The List of ADs needed pay attention when inspecting/receiving engines, components is posted in VAECO website. The list is updated when there is a new concerned AD in order to help store inspectors define the airworthiness of components during acceptance. SB COMPLIANCE FOR AIRCRAFT, ON-WING
12.3.4.2
CONTROL OF SB COMPLIANCE 1. CONTROL OF COMPONENT a. b. c. d. 2.
When EO is closed, the linked SB will be automatically closed in AMASIS. EGD shall monitor status of the applicable SB in AMASIS. For the SB which still OPEN in AMASIS, EGD shall monthly check and adjust schedule if necessary. Monthly, the List of SBs was performed is sent to VNA Technical Department to inform compliance status.
CONTROL OF SB COMPLIANCE FOR AIRCRAFT COMPONENTS DURING SHOP VISIT a. During the incoming inspection of components, store inspector should make sure that the requirement of the AD/SB REQUISITION (VAECO Form 3011) affected to that components was complied with in the shop. One copy of the shop report should be sent to EGD for updating SB status in AMASIS For the SB was complied, store inspector shall update SB status in AMASIS as follow: Create an WO from SB schedule. Close WO with Complied date, Flight hours, Flight Cycles of components at compliance time. c. For the components which the SB are still OPEN, re-evaluate and request LGD to adjust schedule if necessary.
b.
12.3.4.3
CONTROL OF MODIFICATIONS 1. 2. For the modifications linked with aircraft SB, after SB has been closed in AMASIS, modification will be automatically closed. For the modifications linked with VSB applicable to aircraft components, after VSB has been carried out on all the installed component, qualified engineering staff closes the related aircraft SBs by creating and closing WO with reference to VSB. Modification will be automatically closed in AMASIS after aircraft SB is closed. Qualified Engineering staff informs AD/ SB control Team Leader the status of modification. AD/ SB control Team Leader informs status of modification to manufacture in order to update maintenance data.
3. 4.
Page 12.3-2

12.3.4.4
CONTROL OF EO COMPLIANCE EGD is responsible to monitor the compliance of EO IAW the specified deadline. The compliance of EO for each A/C is updated and controlled in AMASIS.
Page 12.3-3

PART 12 PROCEDURES FOR VNA 12.4 ENGINE CONDITION MONITORING
12.4 12.4.1 12.4.2 12.4.3 12.4.4 12.4.4.1
ENGINE CONDITION MONITORING PURPOSE To monitor the condition of Engines installed on VNA aircrafts. SCOPE This procedure is applied for VNA engines. RESPONSIBILITY The Director of EGD is responsible for implementing of this procedure. PROCEDURES ENGINE CONDITION MONITORING PROGRAM Currently, VNA has contracts with the engine manufacturers for the following Engine condition monitoring (ECM) programs: 1. 2. Diagnostic website for CFMI and GE engines ADEM website for IAE and PW engines. The engine operation data is gathered by Aircraft DMU (Data Management Unit) system and generated into REPORTS: a. b. 2. Engine Cruise Report during cruise phase. Engine Take off report during takeoff phase.
12.4.4.2
GATHERING ENGINE DATA 1.
These REPORTS are printed automatically after each flight or sent automatically via ACARS/ATSU system to the server in the airline ground station. These data are forwarded to engine manufacturers for processing.
12.4.4.3
UPDATE DATA INTO ECM PROGRAM and EVALUATE ENGINE OPERATION CONDITION 1. 2. By the contracts, engine manufacturers are responsible for update data to ECM program and evaluate the engine operation condition. When an alert level or abnormal trend (shift) is found, engine manufacturer will issue a maintenance request to VNA and EGD by Email. When receipt a maintenance request, EGD reviews the data and launches the adequate actions (by EO/ER) to carry out the recommendation of the manufacturer. At interval depend on the engine type, qualified engineer of EGD shall trigger the ECTM report and evaluate the engine health. The adequate actions (by EO/ER) should be launched if any abnormal shift is detected. The weekly report (presented by EGTM and SLOATL parameter, engine on-watch list) shall be generated every Friday in designed forms. These Page 12.4-1
3.
4.
12.4.4.4
WEEKLY REPORT AND BACK UP ENGINE DATA BASE 1.

PART 12 PROCEDURES FOR VNA 12.4 ENGINE CONDITION MONITORING
reports are also archived in PDF file and numbered in according to the week order. 2. 3. The weekly report will be sent to VNA Technical department. Engine manufacturers are responsible for backing-up the data.
Page 12.4-2

PART 12 PROCEDURES FOR VNA 12.5 ESTABLISHMENT AND CONTROL OF A/C CONFIG
12.5 12.5.1
ESTABLISHMENT AND CONTROL OF AIRCRAFT CONFIGURATION PURPOSE To establish a procedure to set up and control of aircraft configuration (KARDEX) in AMASIS system for VNA.
12.5.2 12.5.3
SCOPE This procedure is applied for all VNA aircraft. RESPONSIBILITY 1. Director of EGD is responsible for: a. b. c. 2. 3. Creating structure of the A/C, assembly/subassembly in AMASIS IAW the definition of VNA. Entering all control required components installed on the newly received A/C, engine, APU and landing gear in to AMASIS. Updating (adding/ removing/ replacing) sub-assemblies/ components of engine assemblies, landing gear assemblies after shop visits.
RTPD is responsible for removing/ installing the components during the ramp maintenance. BTPD is responsible for removing/ installing the components during the base maintenance.
12.5.4 12.5.4.1
PROCEDURES CREATE KARDEX STRUCTURE 1. 2. 3. For a new Aircraft configuration, Technical Department of VNA shall establish a KARDEX structure. Based on KARDEX structure established by Technical Department of VNA, EGD shall updated it into AMASIS. KARDEX structure of aircraft is built as follows: a. b. c. d. 4. a. Create equipment Reference Card. Create assemblies structure. Create KARDEX structure in accordance with ATA 100 system. Create equipment position bases on aircraft structure. XX-YYYY is the position of equipment that is not belongs to any assemblies, in which: XX- is ATA number; YYYY- is order number of equipment in ATA; Example: the KARDEX position of AIRCON PACK in ATA 21 is 21-0003. b. XXYYYKZ is the position of equipment that is belong to an assemblies, in which:
Equipment position is represented by 7 digits:
Page 12.5-1

PART 12 PROCEDURES FOR VNA 12.5 ESTABLISHMENT AND CONTROL OF A/C CONFIG
XX- is ATA number; YYY- is the order number of equipment in assemblies K- is the order number of assembly in the ATA (if in an ATA has some assemblies) Z- position characteristic number (left:1; center: 0; right: 2) Example: position 3200121 is of UPPER CARDAN that is belong to SIDE STAY assembly of Left Landing Gear, ATA 32 c. When equipment positions are created, the following parameters must be updated Part number and Description of equipment. FIN number and aircraft zone (if possible) The structure number of assembly 12.5.4.2 INSTALL THE EQUIPMENT TO THE KARDEX POSITION When the KARDEX structure is available, based on Aircraft Delivery Document and the A/C Acceptance Certificate, EGD shall determine the equipments data and input the S/N, TSN, CSN, date of installation of the Hard time and life-limit part/ component into the KARDEX position; 12.5.4.3 AIRCRAFT CONFIGURATION AND ASSEMBLIES CONTROL 1. EGD shall monitor KARDEX system to detect discrepancies. The discrepancies may be: a. b. 2. Equipment is not installed in its position. Installed Equipment in KARDEX has P/N or S/N different from the actual P/N and S/N on the A/C.
When the discrepancies are identified, EGD requests the related department correction to eliminate the discrepancies.
Page 12.5-2

PART 12 PROCEDURES FOR VNA 12.6 SET UP TECHNICAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM FOR NEW AIRCRAFT
12.6 12.6.1
SET UP TECHNICAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM FOR NEW AIRCRAFT PURPOSE To establish a procedure to set up technical management system for new aircraft of VNA.
12.6.2 12.6.3 12.6.4 12.6.4.1
SCOPE This procedure is applied for all VNA aircraft. RESPONSIBILITY The Director of EGD is responsible for implementing of this procedure. PROCEDURES RESEARCH, DEFINE THE REQUIRED RESOURCES TO MAINTAN NEW AIRCRAFT Once VAECO is planning to maintain a new aircraft, Project Development Manager of EGD will: 1. 2. Take part in defining the maintenance work scope that VAECO is responsible for the new aircraft. Based on assigned work scope for VAECO, combine with VAC Technical Department and contact A/C, engine manufacturer to determine the required resources, such as: a. b. c. d. 3. 4. Requirements of ground support equipment and shops, Requirements of man power, Requirements of spare part, materials and specific/standard tools, Requirements of maintenance data.
Evaluate the capability of VAECO and propose the investment. Forward a summarized report to EGD Director and VAECO President & CEO
12.6.4.2
UPDATE TECHNICAL INFORMATION OF AICRAFT INTO SYSTEM Once receiving new aircraft, System Team Leader shall carry out the followings: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Receive aircraft technical documents (Aircraft delivery document, AD/SB list, Mod List, Structure Repair Document) from operator. Set up AD/SB monitoring system, Set up ECM system for engines, Establish a control system of structure repair, Establish a control system of Loadable software on the A/C, Create aircraft structure into AMASIS system. Inform LPD to add on-wing the component into AMASIS system. For other requirements, report to the EGD Director for solution. Page 12.6-1

PART 12 PROCEDURES FOR VNA 12.6 SET UP TECHNICAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM FOR NEW AIRCRAFT
12.6.4.3
TECHNICAL DOCUMENT CONTROL When receiving new aircraft, upon request from Project Development Manager and Engineering Manager, Hanoi Library Leader will: 1. 2. 3. Contact the Operator to establish a system of receiving and purchasing technical document. Distribute technical document to the user as needed. Set up a technical document updating system.
Page 12.6-2

PART 12 PROCEDURES FOR VNA 12.7 CONDITION MONITORING OF AIRCRAFT SYSTEM
12.7 12.7.1 12.7.2 12.7.3 12.7.4 12.7.4.1
CONDITION MONITORING OF AIRCRAFT SYSTEM PURPOSE To establish a procedure to monitor the system condition of VNA aircraft. SCOPE This procedure is applied to system condition monitoring for all VNA aircraft. RESPONSIBILITY The Director of EGD is responsible for implementing of this procedure. PROCEDURES EVALUATION OF AIRCRAFT SYSTEM CONDITION 1. 2. The evaluation of aircraft system condition is carried out by relevant team of EGD. GARTHER INFORMATION Bi-weekly, the following information is collected for evaluation: a. b. c. d. e. 3. AOG reports, delay or cancellation reports, MOR reports from maintenance centers; Post Flight Reports received from SITA, AHM, DMA; PIREPs and MAREPs in Tech Log; Information in the AMASIS system. Defect T/S Information from maintenance centers; concessions which are applying for the A/C. Reliability program, if available.
EVALUATION OF SYSTEM CONDITION Based on the above information, condition of each aircraft system is evaluated by: a. b. c. Reliability of the system or equipment (indicate by the rate of delay, cancellation, AOG related to system/ equipment); Repetitive defects that havent been rectified for long time; Same defects that occurs on several aircraft
4.
IDENTIFYING OF DETERIORATIVE ROOT CAUSE For the deteriorated systems, based on maintenance data (SIL, TFU, OIT and SB) or recommendations from manufacturer, the reason of deterioration shall be figure out and identical defect that may occur in the fleet can be focused.
12.7.4.2
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS TO IMPROVE THE RELIABLITY OF AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS 1. When the reason of system deterioration is identified, the Team Leaders shall figure out the solution to improve the reliability of aircraft systems. The solutions can be: Page 12.7-1

PART 12 PROCEDURES FOR VNA 12.7 CONDITION MONITORING OF AIRCRAFT SYSTEM
a. b. c. d. e.
Implementation of modifications. Recommendation of troubleshooting to maintenance centers. Request to inspect or replace equipment if needed to detect and prevent defects. Request to change AMS to compromise with aircraft operation condition. Request to increase stock level if needed.
Page 12.7-2

PART 12 PROCEDURES FOR VNA 12.8 CONTROL OF PRELOAD REQUIREMENTS
12.8 12.8.1
CONTROL OF PRELOAD REQUIREMENTS PURPOSE To ensure all necessary spare parts, materials, tools and equipment (preload requirements) are adequate before performing of any maintenance activities.
12.8.2
SCOPE This procedure is applied to prepare preload requirements for the maintenance of VNA aircrafts.
12.8.3
RESPONSIBILITY 1. Director of EGD is responsible for: a. b. c. Establishing and updating preload requirements to perform routine maintenance tasks referred from AMS and CMS tasks; Determining and updating Engineering Order (EO). preload requirements to perform
Evaluating new technology/ method to perform current maintenance works that affect the requirements of tools/ equipment and/or spare/materials for updating in AMASIS and giving instruction/ support to all related department/ center for preparation and application.
2. 3.
[Deleted] Director of RMC/ BMC are responsible for determining preload requirements for any non-routine tasks (SRO, NRC, ADD rectification) that arising during maintenance. Director of LGD is responsible for preparing preload of spare parts and materials. Director of CMC is responsible for: a. b. Preparing preload of tools and equipment for A/C maintenance. Determining preload requirements to maintain A/C component listed in the applicable chapter of Capability list manuals.
4. 5.
12.8.4 12.8.4.1
PROCEDURE General 1. Spare parts/ materials, tools and equipment to perform any maintenance activities on Aircraft/ Aircraft component should be entered in AMASIS system. The following type are used to defined spare part/ materials, tools and equipment required or may be required to perform a maintenance tasks in the AMASIS: a. b. CO: material (including Oil, Fuel, Hydraulic fluid, lock wire, cloth) mandatory item. EP: non-chemical material/ spare (including seal/ filters...) mandatory item. Page 12.8-1
2.

c. d. e.
TO: tool mandatory item. AR: spare as required (only need when theres defect). TA: tool as required (only need when theres defect).
Note: Mandatory item is material, spare or tool which must be used to carry out the task (including removal/installation for access if it is mandatory). 12.8.4.2 Definition of preload requirements 1. For routine tasks, Maintenance planner of EGD bases on AMS and CMS manuals and the related maintenance data such as AMM, IPC to define the requirements of spares/ materials and tools/ equipment (preload requirements) for each AMS and CMS tasks and enter the AMASIS. For EO, Engineering engineer bases on related maintenance data such as AD, SB, AMM, IPC, EM to define preload requirements and enter the AMASIS. For SRO and other defect rectification work. the assigned staff of respective RMC/ BMC where issues SRO, NRC or raises ADD bases on related maintenance data such as SRM, AMM, IPC to define preload requirements and enter the AMASIS. For component maintenance follow-up sheet, the workshop engineering staff bases on CMM and other related maintenance data to define preload requirements and enter the AMASIS. The Engineering engineer of EGD shall evaluate the change in technology/ method lead to change in the requirements of tools/ equipment and/or spare/materials to perform the maintenance work and update in AMASIS. Relevant engineering staff shall monitor the performance of issued EOs. Whenever there is a change of spares/ materials and/or tools/ equipment specified in relevant maintenance data such as AD, SB, AMM, SRM, CMM, EM that affected to any opening or repeated EO, the EGD must revise the affected EO and update the changes in the AMASIS. For WPs/ WOs issued by EGD, the Maintenance planner of EGD shall review preload requirements if the AMS, CMS or related maintenance data are revised then update all the changes in tools/ equipment and/ or part/ materials in AMASIS. EGD shall re-issue lists of spares/ materials and tools/ equipment and inform to LGD and/or respective CMC for preparing. For WOs issued by MCC, the Maintenance planner of MCC shall review preload requirements if the AMM, IPC and other maintenance data are revised then update all the changes in tools/ equipment and/ or part/ materials in AMASIS. MCC shall inform all concerning changes to LGD and/or respective CMC for preparing..
2.
3.
4.
12.8.4.3
Preparation and update of preload requirements 1.
2.
3.
4.
Page 12.8-2

5. 12.8.4.4
Refer to SOP 9.5.4.2 for procedure of issuance of spares/ materials to perform the maintenance work. After the WP/ WO are completed, if there is a difference between prepared spares/ materials with the real maintenance need, respective maintenance center will report all discrepancies to MCC. The MCC shall review WOs issued by itself and forward to EGD for review WOs/ task cards issued by EGD: a. b. c. d. e. If the discrepancy is due to incorrect issuance of spares/ materials, the MCC/ EGD will inform to LGD for correction. If the discrepancy belongs to a routine task, the correction will be performed by the maintenance planner. If the discrepancy belongs to an opening/ repeated EO, correction will be performed by the engineering staff. If the discrepancy belongs to a repeated SRO, EGD/ MCC will inform respective BMC for correction. If the discrepancy belongs to a WO for ADD rectification the correction will be performed by MCC staff in connection with the RTS staff.
Correction of preload requirements after the work completion 1.
2.
Maintenance planner of EGD shall re-issue all affected list of preload requirements, upload on VAECO website and inform LGD and/or respective CMC for preparing (if necessary).
Page 12.8-3

PART 12 PROCEDURES FOR VNA 12.9 COMPLIANCE OF AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
12.9 12.9.1
COMPLIANCE OF AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS PURPOSE To ensure all aircraft maintenance requirements are controlled IAW the applicable regulation requirements.
12.9.2 12.9.3
SCOPE This procedure is applied to all maintenance activities on the VNA A/C. RESPONSIBILITY 1. The Director of EGD is responsible for controlling the AMS and CMS; preparing and scheduling to perform work packs (WPs); issuing Work Order to MCC for deploying.. The Director of MCC is responsible for controlling the performance of all line maintenance and other assigned WOs and scheduling to perform. The Director of RMC is responsible for performing all assigned line maintenance and other WOs/ WPs. The Director of BMC is responsible for performing base maintenance work packs and other assigned WOs.
2. 3. 4. 12.9.4 12.9.4.1
PROCEDURE General 1. 2. VAECO controls VNA aircraft maintenance requirements based on the AMS and CMS as specified in the contract between VAECO and VNA. AMASIS system is used to control the performance of the AMS and CMS tasks. If there is a difference between the information in AMASIS and the paper records the information in paper records is considered as priority. The maintenance requirements in AMS and CMS are categorized as below: a. b. c. 4. 5. 6. Line checks, Base checks, Out-of-phase maintenance tasks (other than line checks).
3.
The line checks are defined as Pre-flight/ Transit check, Terminal/ Daily check, Weekly check, Line 1 check The base check is defined as check 2A, 4A, 6A, C, 2C The Out of Phase Maintenance (OPM) requirements specified in AMS/ CMS include: a. b. AMS/ CMS tasks of which the interval is different to any base checks' interval; Tasks requested to maintain/ replace life-limit part & time-control items (hard-time components);
7.
The OPM maintenance requirements raised by EGD/ RMC/ BMC include, but not limited to: Page 12.9-1

a. b. 12.9.4.2
Engineering Orders; Structure Repair Orders;
Control of Line check and other OPM requirements performed at ramp maintenance (line maintenance) 1. Monthly, EGD maintenance planner must forecast all OPM requirements (with interval more than or equal A check) for each A/C within 6 months (or equivalent flight hours and flight cycles). MCC maintenance planner must forecast all OPM requirements (with interval less than A check) for each A/C within 3 months. The list of spares/ materials required to perform those OPM requirements is also created and sent to LGD for preparation. All maintenance tasks of a line check is listed in relevant AMS by the VNA. Whenever there is a new revision of the AMS. EGD shall inform the MCC about the effective date of new AMS. The MCC will request the relevant RTPD for replacing the applicable Line Check forms in the technical log book of respective A/Cs. MCC shall control all line checks (except preflight, transit and terminal/ daily checks) and all assigned OPM requirements (AMS/ CMS OPM tasks, SROs...). EGD shall assign all OPM requirements which have interval less than A check to MCC for managing. EGD shall control all OPM requirements with interval more than A check and issue WO to MCC 10 days prior to the deadline for deployment. MCC shall issue WO to perform all line checks (except line checks to be performed every flight or daily) and managed OPM requirements with interval more than daily. MCC shall check preload requirements and schedule all issued or assigned WOs and send to appropriate maintenance center for performance. Assigned TPD shall control all daily/ terminal checks and other OPM requirements with interval not more than daily and ensure that they are not due at outstation where does not have capability to perform. MCC shall determine which line checks and another OPM requirements for each A/C to be entered in OPM Requirement Control Sheet (VAECO Form 1003) and issue the prepared Control Sheet to relevant RTPD for placing on technical log book of respective A/C. Daily, the schedule of all WOs to be performed on the following day for for each A/C shall be prepared by the MCC and send to HAN and HCM and DAD RTPD. MCC shall ensure that all WOs are not due at outstation where does not have capability to perform those WOs. At the shift beginning the respective RSTP shall send the daily schedule to squad manager/ shift leader for assigning the work to maintenance team/ staff. The RTS staff shall perform the assigned line check and record in the relevant technical log page and WO (if any) and then enter date,
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Page 12.9-2

technical log page number, next due and stamp in the OPM Requirement Control Sheet (if the requirement is specified in the Control Sheet). 10. The RTS staff shall review all line check deadlines before release the A/C to service to ensure they have enough time for the A/C returned to the station that can perform the due line check. The RTS staff shall immediately notify the respective RTPD and MCC of any line checks that could not be performed as requested due to any reason. 11. When an OPM requirement needs to be performed but there is not a WO RTS staff shall inform to respective TPD and MCC for issuing WO for performance. 12. Only inspection/ maintenance due to any deferred defects shall be entered in OPM Requirement Control Sheet by the RTS staff during ramp maintenance. 13. When an OPM Requirement is closed or raised the RTS staff shall fill in VAECO Form 5004 (Out of Phase Maintenance Requirement Notice) and send to MCC by hand/ fax/ scan and e-mail to assigned message box mcc on VAECO Website. 12.9.4.3 Control of Base check and OPM requirements performed in base maintenance 1. The EGD shall contact VNA for the information of 4 month base check plan, request changes to the plan if the plan is not suitable with the VAECO and update the plan to the VAECO website. The work pack of a base check is prepared by EGD including: a. All tasks with respective letter check and/or routine tasks (in the AMS/ CMS) with interval/ threshold required to perform same as the interval of the base check. OOP maintenance requirements (EO/ SRO) with interval/ threshold required to perform same as the interval of the base check.
2.
b. 3.
The maintenance planning division of EGD uploads the work pack on VAECO website and informs the MCC for receiving. MCC will evaluate and add additional work in to the WP before assigning the relevant Maintenance Center to perform. The assigned BTPD must inform the MCC whenever there is any problem occurred lead to a change of the planned check date. The respective TPD must enter performance date and all necessary information of each task/ WO in the AMASIS as soon as possible and no later than 12 hours after the task/ WO is completed. If a WP or some task could not be performed due to any reason, the respective TPD must notify MCC for further action as follows: a. MCC shall determine whether a task is withdrawn from the WP or not. If the task is not due it can be withdrawn from a WP. MCC shall control all tasks/ WO with the due date less than next A check and issue WO to relevant RMC at appropriate time for performance Other tasks/ WOs will be transferred to EGD for controlling. Page 12.9-3
4.
5.

b.
If the task is due and could not be withdrawn from the WP or whole WP could not be performed before the deadline, the MCC shall inform to EGD for composing variation/ concession request IAW SOP 12.11.
6.
When an OPM requirement is closed/ raised/ revised the respective RTS staff fill in VAECO Form 5004 (Out of Phase Maintenance Requirement Notice) and send to respective TPD for summary and forwarding to MCC via message box mcc on VAECO Website. MCC shall create new OPM Control Sheets and send to the TPD for printing out and replacing the old one keeping in the technical log book when A/C is released to service.
12.9.5
ARCHIVE The Out-Of-Phase Maintenance Requirement Control Sheets are removed from the Technical Log book when a next base check of the A/C is performed and kept in the respective work package.
Page 12.9-4

PART 12 PROCEDURES FOR VNA 12.10 CONTROL OF VNA MAINTENANCE RECORD IN AMASIS
12.10 12.10.1
CONTROL OF MAINTENANCE ACTIVITIES IN AMASIS PURPOSE To ensure the information of maintenance activities and spares is updated into AMASIS adequately, accurately and in time IAW VAECO and VNA requirements.
12.10.2
SCOPE This procedure is applied for controlling maintenance activities and spares information of VNA aircraft and component in AMASIS.
12.10.3
RESPONSIBILITY 1. EGD Director is responsible for: a. Cooperating with VNA to establish the VAECO computer network system, including software, connections to AMASIS to support maintenance information control; Cooperating with VNA Technical Department to define the appropriate authorized functions of VAECO staff. Setting up the monitoring system and maintaining to ensure stable operation of the VAECO computer network system. Ensuring that only authorized staffs are update the AMASIS; Ensuring that maintenance and spare information is updated adequately, accurately and timely into AMASIS IAW VAECO and VNA requirements;
b. c. 2.
Director of departments/ centers are responsible for: a. b.
12.10.4
PROCEDURE VAECO utilizes AMASIS of VNA to support maintenance operation information control. 1. The server of AMASIS is located at Aviation Informatics & Telecommunication Joint Stock Company (AITS). AITS is responsible for maintaining, developing and ensuring safe operation of the whole system in VNA. AMASIS combines several Modules, which are used to support maintenance operation control of aircraft and aircraft components as follows: a. b. c. d. Controlling aircraft maintenance schedule; Keeping track of aircraft flight hours, flight cycles and maintenance information in the Technical Log; Controlling removal/ installation of aircraft components, aircraft configurations, landing gears, engines, APU and life limit parts; Controlling materials and spare parts, tools and equipment in store, stock level etc; Page 12.10-1
12.10.4.1 General
2.

e. 3. 1.
Controlling the implementation of ADs and SBs.
AMASIS data are daily backed up by AITS . Each department/ center is responsible for updating and processing maintenance information in each MODULE of AMASIS according to authorized functions. EGD shall a. Enter information about ADs, SBs, EOs, AOTs applied for VNA aircraft/ aircraft components into AMASIS, including reference numbers, titles, due dates, manpower, requirements of tools/ equipment and spare parts/ materials, and related information. Set up configurations of KARDEX for each aircraft and assemblies. Control aircraft configurations and update information of subassemblies/ components into AMASIS. Update information of maintenance activities and close Work Orders after finishing Work packs performed by other maintenance organizations contracted with VNA. Update the requirements of materials and spare parts, tools and equipment required for carrying out task cards specified in the AMS, CMS.
12.10.4.2 Updating and processing maintenance information in AMASIS
2.
b. c. d.
e.
3.
MCC shall issue WO in AMASIS to assign a maintenance work (OPM requirements and ADD rectification) to appropriate maintenance center and control all its opened WOs to ensure that are performed as schedule. LGD shall a. b. Update the information of approved Suppliers, including: Name, address, provided services Enter the information of materials and spare parts to be stored, including: part number/ serial number, quantity, shelf time, inspection date, overhaul, certificate number into AMASIS basing on attached component documents and lists of maintenance required components that are issued by EGD and CMC. Update the stock of materials and spare parts after issuing materials and spare parts for maintenance/ production. Specify additional work and WO such as implements of ADs, modifications and other technical recommendations when issuing repair order. Update the implements of AD, SB. Update sufficient information such as supplier name, priority, delivery date, cost when issuing purchase order.
4.
c.
d. e.
Page 12.10-2

f.
Update information such as part number, serial number, quantity, date, time, flight number if delivering materials/ spares to third partner. Update information of components installed on aircraft during base maintenance. Update information of maintenance task performance and close work order after completion. Update information of Structure Repair Order including: reference number, work requirement, due date, required manpower, tools and equipment, materials/ spare parts and other related information. Daily update information of route, flight time, landing cycle, engine oil uplift and fuel uplift for each flight Update information of aircraft component repair/ replacement. Update information of defect rectification and Out-Of-Phase task performance. Close WO/ WP after accomplishing. Update parts/ materials used for component maintenance/ repair. Close Follow-up sheet and reset the accumulated times/ cycles/ days corresponding to the work performed on the component which are managed in AMASIS after maintenance/ repair completion. Update information of status, quantity, location, borrowing of specific tools and equipment.
5.
BMC shall a. b. c.
6.
RMC shall a. b. c.
7.
CMC shall a.
b. 8.
The AMASIS user shall ensure that the information updated in AMASIS is adequate and accurate as specified in the maintenance record. Department/ Center Directors on necessity of work send a request to Engineering Director for issuing AMASIS user account. It is necessary to specify the full name, division, and detail authorities in the request. When the request is approved by the Engineering Director, IT Team shall create AMASIS user accounts within 24 hours since the time of receipt. The whole list of AMASIS user in VAECO (VAECO Form 3002) is controlled by IT Team. Only trained and authorized staffs have the right to access the AMASIS. Each authorized staff access AMASIS by his/her own USER NAME and PASSWORD. Regulations on using AMASIS module are specified in Regulations on assigned access rights in AMASIS document issued by VNA.
12.10.4.3 Control of access right 1.
2.
3. 4. 5.
Page 12.10-3

12.10.4.4 Backing up data and managing the operation 1. The data on AMASIS system is automatically backed up, preserved and controlled by the contract between VNA and Aviation Informatics & Telecommunication Joint Stock Company (AITS). When the AMASIS is broken down, IT Team must check step by step: a. Check WAN connection between Gialam and Noibai or Gialam and Tansonnhat by pinging to 10.1.4.181 to make sure that WAN is not disconnected. In case of disconnection, IT Team must inform to number 2911 or email to get support. Check the AMASIS user account to make sure that it is enable. If not, IT Team must enable the disabled users by command WRKUSRPRF User Account.
2.
b.
Page 12.10-4

PART 12 PROCEDURES FOR VNA 12.11 VNA VARIATION/ CONCESSION CONTROL
12.11 12.11.1
VNA VARIATION/ CONCESSION CONTROL PURPOSE To establish the procedure for proposing and controlling variation/ concession for VNA A/C.
12.11.2
SCOPE This procedure is applied for proposing and controlling of variation/ concession in maintenance for VNA A/C.
12.11.3
RESPONSIBILITY 1. EGD is responsible for: a. b. 2. 3. proposing a variation/ concession to extend the time interval in AMS, CMS. proposing a concession for deviation from current approved/ accepted maintenance data
Director of MCC is responsible for proposing the need for variation/ concession to extend the rectification due date of ADD. Director of QAD is responsible for assessing the necessary of concession and forwarding request to VNA for approval.
12.11.4
PROCEDURES
12.11.4.1 Variation/ concession request 12.11.4.1.1 Variation for maintenance task cannot be completed within AMS, CMS time limit. 1. If task(s) cannot be completed within AMS time limit caused by VAECO, the EGD shall: a. b. Negotiate with VNA to maintenance re-scheduling. Create and send the VARIATION REQUEST (Form CAAV/FSSDAIR 042) associated with supporting documents to the Safety Division of QAD, include but not limited to: Spare part/ tool confirmation, Aircraft current status: flight hours, flight/engine cycle, Expected tasks performing date. c. 2. Make the plan for tasks performing after concession approved. Safety Division manager confirms correct information then send the Variation Request and associated documentations to VNA SQS department for approval. If an ADD is not rectified on time caused by VAECO, MCC shall
12.11.4.1.2 Concession for extending the ADD time limit 1.
Page 12.11-1

a.
Inform to VNA about the need of a concession and get documented request (Such as SITA, Fax, Email) from the MOC of VNA for creating a Concession Request. Create and send the CONCESSION REQUEST (Form CAAV/FSSDAIR 040) associated with supporting documentations to the relevant QC Division, include but not limited to: Spare part information confirmation provided by LGD Equipment/ tool information confirmation provided by CMC, Intended action and Troubleshooting have been carried out, Aircraft current status: flight hours, flight/engine cycle, quantity the outstanding ADD type B, Expected rectification date.
b.
c. 2.
Make the plan for ADD rectification after concession approved.
QC Division manager confirms correct information then send the Concession request and associated documentations to VNA SQS department for approval. A copy of concession shall be sent to Safety Division for monitoring.
12.11.4.1.3 Concession for deviation from current approved/ accepted maintenance data. 1. EGD shall a. Inform to VNA about the need of a concession and get a documented request (Such as SITA, Fax, Email) from the MOC of VNA for creating a Concession Request. Create and send CONCESSION REQUEST (Form CAAV/FSSD-AIR 040) associated with supporting documentations to the relevant QC Division, include but not limited to: Proposed solutions: Design drawings, working instruction or technical procedure Related document/ letter from manufacturer, if any 2. QC Division manager evaluates the proposed solution, confirms correct information then send the Concession Request and associated documentations to VNA SQS department for approval. The concession and related documentations are sent to Safety Division of QAD for monitoring. After receiving the approved variation/ concession from VNA SQS department, Safety Division will announce and send a copy of this concession to MCC. MCC shall send to EGD the approved variation/ concession of the WP/ OPM requirements under controlled by EGD for monitoring.
b.
12.11.4.2 Variation/ concession condition and compliance control 1.
2.
Page 12.11-2

3.
MCC control the condition and time limits of the approved variation/ concessions of the OPM requirements under its control as following: a. b. c. d. If the concession is open, monitor the concession information (reference, condition and compliance time). Follow the variation/ concession conditions. Carry out necessary action to close concession. When task(s) or ADD(s) related to the approved variation/ concession are completed or cleared, MCC must send immediately CLOSED version of the variation/ concession to Safety Division no later than 12 hours since closed time. All Information such as completed date; related technical log page or work pack reference; name and stamp number of the personnel who returns the A/C to service must be filled in the approved variation/ concession.
4.
Safety Division updates the status of the variation/ concession, archives and reports CLOSED version of variation/ concession to VNA SQS dept. no later than 24 hours (ref MME 3.25) since closed time.
12.11.5
ARCHIVES The approved variation/ concession and supporting documents are archived at QAD at least two years after the aircraft out of service.
Page 12.11-3

PART 12 PROCEDURES FOR VNA 12.12 CONTROL OF HOLD COMPONENT
12.12 12.12.1
CONTROL OF HOLD COMPONENT PURPOSE To control and confirm the status of an in-service component that is involved in a defect system in compliance with applicable requirements.
12.12.2
SCOPE This procedure is applied for a component removed from VNA aircraft, for which the serviceability of the part is to be verified during trouble shooting.
12.12.3
RESPONSIBILITY 1. 2. 3. Inspection& RTS staff is responsible for sending component that need to be held with attached necessary documents to related TPD. BTPD is responsible for transfer component need to be held to RTPD after completing base maintenance. RTPD is responsible for: a. b. Monitoring to determine status of the hold component and returning component to VAECO store. Keeping hold components in Hold area with storage conditions as required by component manufacturer.
12.12.4
PROCEDURE 1. Hold item is component removed from defective system during trouble shooting and temporary quarantined waiting for its status to be confirmed. To confirm status of hold item, it is replaced with other serviceable component and monitoring result of defect rectification on relevant system. The authorized staff shall make a decision for holding component in following circumstances: a. The defect with fault message related to various components and/or various cause. The defect rectification was carried out by fault elimination method. Defect is intermittent fault, which is hard to confirm cause, replacement of components have to be carried out repetitively. There is a suspicion about the reliability of replaced components.
12.12.4.1 General
2.
3.
b. c. 1.
12.12.4.2 Controlling of Hold Item When a component needed to be held, Inspection & RTS staff shall: a. b. c. Remove component from aircraft IAW. related AMM, Perform component preservation and packaging as required, Complete and attach Hold Item Tag (VAECO Form 0022) to the component, then sends component to related RTPD/ BTPD. The Page 12.12-1

PART 12 PROCEDURES FOR VNA 12.12 CONTROL OF HOLD COMPONENT
right hand side of VAECO Form 0005 shall be used to remark as Hold item and sent to Technical Record staff together with Technical log page. 2. For ramp maintenance, RTPD shall register component to the monitoring program then send the component to Hold area for keeping; The technical record staff of respective RMC shall remove that hold item from A/C as type 5 (cannibalization). For base maintenance, BTPD shall send the component to RTPD for monitoring and keeping as specified in item 2 above. The RMC shall ensure the Hold components to be kept IAW conditions required by component manufacturer. Base on related technical information provided from MCC, The hold item will be monitored by RTPD as follows: a. b. Monitor the existence of defect on aircraft system related to the Hold item; Confirm status of Hold item: The Hold item is confirmed unserviceable if the defect is not recurred in minimum of 3 flights but not excess 3 flight days. The Hold item is considered serviceable if the defect is recurred in minimum of 3 flights but not excess 3 flight days. c. Return the component right after hold period (not later than 3 hours since the status is confirmed).
3. 4. 5.
12.12.4.3 Returning a component after a hold period 1. 2. The Inspection & RTS staff reviews information related to the Hold item which provided by related RTPD. If the Hold item was considered serviceable, the Inspection & RTS staff issues the Re-certified certificate (Form 5001) and sends to VAECO store together with the completed Hold Item Tag and evidences confirming serviceable status of component. If the Hold item was confirmed unserviceable, the Inspection & RTS staff raises and sends Unserviceable Tag (Form 0005/ right hand portion) to VAECO store together with the completed Hold Item Tag and evidences confirming unserviceable status of component. LGD shall perform the incoming inspection as per specified in 9.1 or receiving of defective component as per specified in 9.6 accordingly.
3.
4.
Page 12.12-2

PART 12 PROCEDURES FOR VNA 12.13 CONTROL OF EMERGENCY EQUIPMENTS
12.13 12.13.1
CONTROL OF EMERGENCY EQUIPMENTS PURPOSE To ensure that status of emergency equipment installed on aircraft is valid and controlled to meet the applicable requirements.
12.13.2
SCOPE This procedure applies for the emergency equipment installed in the cockpit, cabin, galleys and lavatories that have hard time limitation or life limit on the VAECO managed aircrafts.
12.13.3
RESPONSIBILITY 1. EGD is responsible for: a. b. 2. Monitoring maintenance time limits and life limits of emergency equipment being installed on appropriate aircraft; Issuing WO to maintain and replace the emergency equipment being installed on appropriate aircraft. Monitoring maintenance time limits and life limits of emergency equipment being preserved in the stores; Tagging the Inspection tag (VAECO Form 0014) for emergency equipment when performing incoming inspection of the emergency equipment.
Director of LGD is responsible for: a. b.
3.
Component Maintenance Centers (CMCs) are responsible for tagging (VAECO Form 0014) on the emergency equipment after performing scheduled inspection, maintenance specified in the maintenance data (CMM) or List of aircraft component required maintenance (VAECO Form 1001). RMCs and BMCs are responsible for maintaining/ replacing emergency equipment being installed on the A/C as specified in WO. Administration Department is responsible for tagging the Inspection tag (VAECO Form 0014) for emergency equipment when supplementing/ substituting medicine in the First Aid Kit. Basing on Aircraft Maintenance Schedule (AMS), the EGD creates (and updates) the List of aircraft component required maintenance and send to the LGD and the Maintenance Centers (this List is also uploaded in the Technical Report of the EGD on the VAECO website). List of emergency equipment together with all work type to be tagged with Inspection tag is enumerated in the appendix #1. For newly received A/C, basing on its delivery documents, the EGD issues WO with information of manufacture date, maintain/ overhaul date, next maintenance/ overhaul date and life-limit (if applicable) and
4. 5.
12.13.4
PROCEDURE 1.
2. 3.
Page 12.13-1

send to the appropriate maintenance centers to complete the Inspection Tags and stick on the appropriate emergency equipment. 4. For the operating A/C, EGD controls maintenance deadlines and life limit of the emergency equipment IAW intervals specified in appropriate AMS. When issuing WO to maintain/ replace the emergency equipment the EGD must provide information to determine the next due date of the work performed. If an equipment has many different maintenance time limits, each maintenance time limit will show on one Inspection tag. When performing incoming inspection of any emergency equipment specified in Appendix 1, if any type of work has not been tag with VAECO Inspection Tag (VAECO Form 0014), the LGD shall complete an Inspection Tag basing on List of aircraft component required maintenance (VAECO Form 1001) issued by the EGD. When deliver an emergency equipment to install on the A/C, the LGD must ensure that all necessary Inspection Tags are affixed on the equipment and all stamp/ tag/ label showing the shelf life (storage life) are removed. When checking the status of the use of emergency equipment being installed on aircraft, the staff of Line and Base Maintenance Centers must ensure the maintenance deadline/ Life limit specified in all Inspection Tags are valid. If an Inspection Tag found blurred or lost the maintenance center may request the MCC for the necessary information to complete another tag and affixed on the equipment. In the case that the expiry date of the equipment cannot be determined, related equipment is considered unserviceable.
5. 6.
7.
Page 12.13-2

Appendix 1: List of emergency equipment required to affix VAECO Inspection Tag

Description Portable fire extinguisher Portable O2 cylinder Portable O2 mask Smoke hood (PBE) First aid kit Medical Kit Megaphone Portable ELT Infant life-vest Work type Weight check Hydrostatic test Manufacture Hydrostatic test Manufacture Manufacture Medicine supplement Manufacture Discard batteries Discard batteries Restoration Dept./ Center LGD CMC LGD LGD LGD LGD LGD Administration Dept. LGD RMC or BMC LGD LGD CMC LGD CMC LGD CMC LGD Remark Tagging after incoming inspection Tagging after weighing Tagging after incoming inspection Tagging after incoming inspection Tagging after incoming inspection Tagging after incoming inspection Tagging after incoming inspection Tagging after supplement or replacement of medicine Tagging after incoming inspection Tagging after replacing the battery (on Megaphone) Tagging after incoming inspection Tagging after incoming inspection (on ELT) Tagging after maintenance Tagging after incoming inspection Tagging after maintenance Tagging after incoming inspection Tagging after maintenance Tagging after incoming inspection Tagging after maintenance Tagging after weighing Tagging after incoming inspection Tagging after incoming inspection Tagging after incoming inspection Tagging after incoming inspection Tagging after maintenance Tagging after incoming inspection Tagging after incoming inspection (on CVR or DFDR) Tagging after replacing ULB battery (on CVR or DFDR)
Passenger and spare Restoration life-vest Crew life-vest Slide raft Lavatory fire extinguisher bottle Crew O2 cylinder O2 generator Survival kit Restoration
Hydrostatic test and CMC restoration CMC Weight check LGD Manufacture LGD Hydrostatic test LGD Manufacture LGD Overhaul CMC LGD Replace ULB Battery LGD RMC or BMC
CVR, DFDR
Page 12.13-3

PART 12 PROCEDURES FOR VNA 12.14 COMPONENT ROBBERY/SWAPPING ON VNA AIRCRAFT
12.14 12.14.1
COMPONENT ROBBERY/SWAPPING ON VNA AIRCRAFT PURPOSE To ensure the robbery/ swapping of component on VNA aircraft meet all applicable requirements.
12.14.2
SCOPE This procedure is applied for controlling of activities related component robbery (cannibalization)/ swapping on VNA aircraft.
12.14.3
RESPONSIBILITY 1. Director of related MCC is responsible for: a. Evaluating the defect and A/C status, proposing solution and requesting the relevant maintenance center to rob/swap aircraft components; Requesting for robbery permission from VNA,
b. 2.
Directors of relevant maintenance center are responsible for component robbery/swapping IAW related approved maintenance data and VNA procedures. In case of components cannot be supplied on time, robbery/ swapping of aircraft components may be considered as alternative solution. Robbery/ swapping of aircraft components shall be always conformed to VNA MME manual and Line maintenance manual. Robbery of components from other aircraft should only be applied when agreed by VNA Technical Department. Robbery of aircraft components is not recommended if the robbed component has existing defects and/ or maintenance/ inspection requirement. In case that an aircraft component with repaired structure defects is robbed the P/N, S/N, description, old and new position of the component shall be reported to EGD for updating structure damage map and records. The related dent & buckle charts shall be updated (if the damage has been existing on the dent and buckle chart of robbed A/C). When having the demand for robbery of aircraft components, MCC shall a. b. c. d. Evaluate the relevant aircraft defect status, logistics information and flight plan, Propose aircraft component robbery to VNA Technical Department, Inform the related RMC/BMC to request co-operation. Assign appropriate maintenance center to rob component upon receiving the order from VNA Technical Department. The Page 12.14-1
12.14.4
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1. 2. 3. 4.
5.
12.14.5
PROCEDURE 1.

assignment determination is based on time, workload and location of the A/C to be robbed and the A/C to be installed the component. e. 2. [deleted]. The RTS staff of relevant maintenance centers must follow procedure 10.10 to issue Re-certified Certificate for the robbed component/ part. However, its not necessary to issue Re-certified certificate if the robbed aircraft component is directly installed on the other aircraft at same location and by same Inspection & RTS staff. In this case, all related information to confirm the serviceability of robbed components is recorded in Technical Log. If there is the need of sending robbery component to another location, the component is sent to LGD by the respective maintenance center.. The LGD shall perform packaging and deliver to requested station. For robbery/ swapping of components from aircrafts: a. Inspection & RTS staff should Open, safety and attach the Warning tag (VAECO Form 0006) to the switch/ CB, Remove component IAW relevant AMM, Attach Warning tag to position of removed component. Perform liquid drainage and preservation as required by relevant AMM, Cap the tube/lines ends with blanking caps/plugs to prevent contamination. Cover connectors and stow loose wires. b. The Inspection & RTS staff shall record into Technical Log of robbed aircraft the following contents: The first entry related to robbery/ swapping work: + Defect block: the reason and required place. For robbery of component, the reference number of order from VNA Technical Department; + Action taken block: the component name, position and aircraft registration number which shall install the removed component. + Nomenclature, P/N, S/N off blocks: information of removed component. + C.R.S block: signature and authorization number. The second entry related to robbery/ swapping work in Defect block: Request for installation back of component. c. On Technical Log of aircraft install the robbed component, Inspection & RTS staff records aircraft registration number which removed that component into GRN ON block. Page 12.14-2
3.
4.

d.
For swapping of aircraft components for trouble shooting, Inspection & RTS staff records the last installation information (P/N, S/N and position) into Technical Log; Performing system function test to confirm the swapping do not affect the related systems. After robbery of component, Inspection & RTS staff should order the spare parts. When having spare parts, Inspection & RTS staff shall install back component and record to Technical Log. He shall also remove the related warning tag and inform to maintenance team leader who is working in same area/ system. If BMC Inspection & RTS staff carried out the component robbery, they should raise NRC to record the work performed instead of record to Technical log. If RMC Inspection & RTS staff carried out the component robbery, they should raise NRC and send to the TPD who manages the A/C. The NRC handover should be documented.
e. f.
5.
Rob component from aircraft undergoing maintenance: a.
b.
6.
The maintenance center who performs the robbery of component from the A/C shall update status of the component in AMASIS, issue Request for Supply and update information on the AIRCRAFT EVENT of Technical Information menu of VAECO website. MCC shall monitor the order status for further action.
Page 12.14-3

PART 12 PROCEDURES FOR VNA 12.15 HANDLING OF VNA AIRCRAFT EVENTS
12.15 12.15.1
HANDLING OF VNA AIRCRAFT EVENTS PURPOSE To ensure occurrences (incidents/ accidents) and maintenance events of VNA A/C are handled IAW applicable requirements of Authorities and VNA.
12.15.2
SCOPE This procedure is applied for handling VNA aircraft occurrences (incidents/ accidents) and maintenance events..
12.15.3
RESPONSIBILITY 1. Director of related maintenance center is responsible for: a. b. c. 2. Performing the necessary job in emergency situation, isolating, keeping the A/C and doing the preliminary assessment; Gathering information and making the preliminary reports about incident/ accident and sending to MCC. Providing resources, planning and processes for the assigned WP/WO. managing maintenance
MCC Director is responsible for: a. b. c. Issuing WP/WO to rectify the A/C undergone an occurrence Creating and deploying maintenance plan to rectify or preserve the A/C during AOG period. Assigning the appropriate maintenance center for managing the aircraft and carrying out the rectification/ preservation maintenance plan; Issuing WP/WO to perform a maintenance event (other than cases mentioned in 12.15.3 (2.a) above). Contacting manufacturer for technical solution as requested from MCC; providing the approved/ acceptable technical data required to perform the work. Issuing the EO (if needed) for rectifying the A/C. Obtaining any required approvals from the local Aviation Authority (For the work to be performed outside of Vietnam); Ensuring that all maintenance performed in accordance with the requirements of concerned Authorities.
3.
EGD Director is responsible for: a. b.
c. 4. a. b. 12.15.4
QAD Director is responsible for:
PROCEDURE 1. Whenever an A/C get an occurrence the appropriate RTS staff shall perform necessary inspection in order to discover all visual damage and report to his/ her TPD. Page 12.15-1
12.15.4.1 Aircraft occurrences happened at VAECO facilities/ stations

2.
The respective TPD shall make all necessary report such as delay report/ AOG report, defect report, initial MOR and sent to MCC with necessary documents. The respective TPD shall gather related information/ report and make new entry in Aircraft Event of Technical Information Menu in VAECO Website. For incident that the rectification is within RMC capability, the respective RMC shall perform defect rectification. If there is a difficulty RMC shall notify to MCC for further action. Basing on the workload and situation of the RMC, MCC shall determine to assign the A/C to appropriate BMC for rectification. For incident/ accident which is out of RMC capability, MCC shall assign the A/C to appropriate BMC for rectification. Based on the workload the assigned BMC shall determine to nominate a foreman and/ or production planner to manage/ control all rectification activities. Each WO performed during rectification will be made an entry in the technical log and certified accordingly. If a WP is created, all WOs issued to rectify the A/C shall be added to the WP by the issuer and additional work during maintenance process shall be added by the maintenance center. After completion of all rectification activities the assigned authorized staff shall perform all necessary inspections to ensure A/C is serviceable before releasing the A/C to service.. The TPD shall enter the performance information in AMASIS and A/C Event of Technical Information menu of VAECO website to close WO/ WP when rectification process is accomplished. All rectification records are gathered by respective TPD and transferred to Technical Record Section of EGD for keeping.. For aircraft occurrences happen at non-VAECO station, MOC of VNA is main responsible for taking over the aircraft, giving request to rectify defects, contacting MCC for technical support. The MCC will cooperate with related maintenance centers, EGD and LGD to prepare man powers, materials/ spares, tools/ equipment, maintenance data, maintenance documents and transfer to the A/C position for rectification. The MCC shall make new entry in Aircraft Event of Technical Information Menu of VAECO Website. The required materials/ spare parts and tools/ equipment for rectification shall be ordered by the MCC. The number of Request for Supply shall be updated in VAECO website. MCC will create a WP in AMASIS for gathering rectification work and assign appropriate maintenance center to control the WP and close it when rectification process is accomplished.
3.
4. 5.
6.
7.
8.
12.15.4.2 Aircraft occurrences happened at non-VAECO stations 1.
2.
3.
4.
Page 12.15-2

5.
Each WO performed during rectification will be made an entry in the technical log and certified accordingly before the A/C is released to service. Aircraft maintenance event is a WP performance other than occurrence rectification and base maintenance such as a group of tasks... EGD shall prepare a WP of the maintenance event and send to MCC for deploying. MCC shall check the WP, add appropriate WOs for OPM performance or ADD rectification and assign an appropriate maintenance center for performance based on: a. b. c. Capability of maintenance center, The location of aircraft, Workload (standard WP and added WOs).
12.15.4.3 Aircraft maintenance events 1. 2. 3.
4.
The assigned maintenance center shall, based on the workload, determine to assign production planner to control the performance of WP and foreman to manage aircraft and maintenance activities. The assigned maintenance center shall assign an appropriate RTS staff to carry out the preliminary inspection of whole aircraft to determine nonroutine tasks prior to performing maintenance. All defects found during preliminary inspection and in-process inspection shall be transferred to NRC for rectification. After all the tasks and additional work are completed and signed by appropriate authorized staff, the production planner/ assigned staff shall check and gather all task cards and additional worksheets (WO, EO, SRO, NRC) of the WP for final inspection. The assigned RTS staff shall perform final inspection IAW paragraph 10.5.7.3 and certify the completion of the maintenance event into technical log. The production planner/ assigned staff shall update the performance of the WP in AMASIS and transfer the WP to Technical Records section of EGD for keeping.
5.
6. 7.
8.
9.
10. The hand-over of the A/C is performed IAW SOP 6.3.4.17. 12.15.5 ARCHIVES Maintenance records are kept at least 2 years since the A/C is released to service..
Page 12.15-3

PART 12 PROCEDURES FOR VNA 12.16 STRUCTURE DAMAGE REPAIR
12.16 12.16.1
STRUCTURE DAMAGE REPAIR PURPOSE To ensure structure damage repair is performed and controlled in accordance with current applicable regulations.
12.16.2 12.16.3
SCOPE This procedure is applied for structure repairs on VNA aircraft. RESPONSIBILITY 1. Ramp maintenance Director is responsible for: a. b. Detecting structure damages occurring at ramp maintenance, Evaluation the damages and release aircraft to service with deferrable structure damages in accordance maintenance data (SRM, AMM) and customer procedures, Detecting structure damages in base maintenance, Evaluating and performing structure damage repairs which are mentioned in SRM, Repairing structure damages which are not mentioned in SRM in accordance with instructions from EGD. Sending Technical Assistance Request together with the SDR to EGD in case the damage repair is not given in the SRM. Contact manufacturer or approved designed organizations to get approval of repair scheme in case of structure damages are not mentioned in SRM; Control structure repair status and update the structure repair map.
2.
Base maintenance Director is responsible for: a. b. c. d.
3.
Engineering Director is responsible to: a.
b. 4. 12.16.4
Director of QAD is responsible for verifying repair scheme and contacting CAAV to get approval if necessary. EVALUATE STRUCTURAL DAMAGES IN RAMP
DETECT AND MAINTENANCE 1.
If structure damage is detected in Ramp maintenance, Inspection & RTS staff shall: a. b. Evaluate the damage according to SRM, AMM, etc.; Make a Structure Damage Report - SDR (VAECO Form 3016) describing in details the damage with attached picture if necessary and send it to the RTPD. The SDR should include, but not limited to: Damage description and damaged structure parts. Dimensions of damages (length, width, depth),
Page 12.16-1

Location of damage in correlated to main aircraft structure (the distance from damage edges to primary aircraft structure, etc.). c. 2. Request Non-destructive inspection (NDI), if required by SRM, AMM
If the damage shall be repaired before flight, the Inspection & RTS staff shall immediately inform to respective RTPD for contacting with local BMC (HAN and SGN) for assistance. To prevent from AOG status the local BMC shall support the RMC to bring the A/C back to airworthy status for operation. The RTPD completes the SDR and sends to MCC via assigned message box mcc of VAECO website. MCC shall review the SDR and send to EGD for update structure damage map and control list and assign relevant BMC for issuing SRO.. If the damage is within SRM/ AMM allowable limit or can be deferred, location of the damage if visible from outside A/C is recorded in DENT AND BUCKLE CHART. The deferred structure repair shall be controlled IAW 12.16.8. In case the repair is required within a time limit, MCC will assign a BMC shall evaluate to determine whether the damage mention in SRM or not. a. b. If the damage is mentioned in SRM, the assigned BMC shall follow instruction in 12.16.6. If the damage is not mentioned in SRM, the BMC will send a TAR to EGD to follow instruction in 12.16.7. EVALUATE STRUCTURAL DAMAGE IN BASE
3.
4.
5.
12.16.5
DETECT AND MAINTENANCE 1.
During base maintenance, when structure damages are found, Inspection & RTS staff shall: a. Make a Structure Damage Report - SDR (VAECO Form 3016) describing in details the damage with attached picture if necessary. The SDR should include, but not limited to: Damage description and damaged structure parts. Dimensions of damages (length, width, depth); Location of damage in correlated to main aircraft structure (the distance from damage edges to primary aircraft structure, etc.); Non-destructive inspection (NDI) results, if required by SRM, AMM b. c. Raise a NRC with attached SDR and send to the Dock Control room. One copy of the SDR is sent to EGD. If the damage is within SRM/ AMM allowable limit or the repair is not performed but can be deferrable, location of the damage if visible from outside A/C is recorded in DENT AND BUCKLE CHART. The deferred structure repair shall be controlled IAW 12.16.8. Page 12.16-2

2.
Based on SDR, Inspection & RTS staff shall evaluate the structure damage according to SRM, AMM, etc. a. b. If the damage is mentioned in SRM, BMC shall follow instruction in 12.16.6. If the damage isnt mentioned in SRM, BMC shall send a TAR to EGD to follow instruction in 12.16.7.
12.16.6
REPAIR OF STRUCTURE DAMAGE WITHIN SRM LIMIT 1. If the repair instruction covered by SRM, AMM, the assigned BMC issues Structural Repair Order (SRO - VAECO Form 6009) and Request for Supply (VAECO Form 4023) to carry out the repair. All the information of SRO and the Request for Supply must be entered in AMASIS. If the repair is deferred, the SRO and Request for Supply must be issued before the due time and within 3 days since the reporting date. The BMC forwards the SRO and the Request for Supply to MCC. For structure damages risen during a work pack performance (to be lasted more than 3 days), BMC could send the deferred SRO to MCC just before the A/C is released to service. The damage rectification deferment is controlled IAW 12.16.8. When receiving the TAR of structure damage, qualified structure engineer of EGD shall: a. b. c. Based on SRM, AMM, re-evaluate the damage and request further inspections if necessary. Update the related information into Structure Repair Control List. Send the following information to manufacturer for repair scheme: Detailed description, location(s), dimension(s) of damage; Results of performed inspections; Aircraft data: MSN, Registration, Flight hours, Flight cycles; Suggest a preliminary repair scheme, which is capable to VAECO (if possible). 2. When receiving the repair scheme from manufacturer, EGD issue EO and Spares and tool list. All the information of EO and Spares/ Materials and Tools must be entered in AMASIS, EGD shall issue WO and send to MCC with the EO for deploying to perform.. MCC shall schedule and assign relevant BMC at suitable time to carry out the repair. After accomplishment of the repair, one copy of EO sign-off sheet should be sent to EGD for reporting the result to manufacturer. Repair approval:
2.
3. 12.16.7 1.
REPAIR OF STRUCTURE DAMAGE WHICH IS OUT OF SRM LIMIT
3. 4. 5.
Page 12.16-3

a.
For the A/Cs which the primary airworthiness Authority is EASA (AIB aircrafts, F70, ATR 72), the repairs should be approved by a Design Organization Approval (DOA) office in the relevant forms (RAS, RDAS, SRAS). For the A/Cs which the primary airworthiness Authority is FAA (Boeing aircrafts), the major repairs should be approved by FAA in form 8100-9, the minor repairs follow manufacturer instructions are acceptable.
b.
6. 12.16.8
In case of complicated structure repairs which are out of VAECO capability, EGD shall report to VNA to work out the appropriate solutions. If the EO/ SRO for the repair are issued before releasing the aircraft to service, no more action is required. If the EO/ SRO for the repair cannot be issued before releasing the aircraft to service, the RTS staff shall raise an ADD type B for the damage. The ADD number should be recorded in the SDR, EO/SRO for tracking purpose. If the repetitive inspection is required, the inspection requirement, interval and due should be recorded in OOP Maintenance Requirement Control Sheet (VAECO Form 1003). When EO/SRO is issued, EGD/BMC shall send the EO/SRO to MCC. The MCC shall inform appropriate RTPD to clear the ADD: Assigned Inspection & RTS staff shall write down a following statement in action taken box of the technical log: The deferred structure defect was transferred to SRO No. SRO/xxx/xx/xxx. ADD Bxxx is cleared, or The deferred structure defect was transferred to EO No. EOxxx. ADD Bxxx is cleared Note: All repetitive maintenance required for the deferred structure defect specified in OOP Maintenance Requirement Control Sheet (if any) is still open until the SRO is performed.
CONTROL OF DEFERRED STRUCTURE REPAIR 1. 2.
3.
4.
5.
MCC shall monitor and schedule the repair IAW the EO/ SRO for the EO/ SRO with deferred time limit less than A check interval. MCC shall send the EO/ SRO with deferred time limit not less than A check interval to EGD for control. EGD shall update list of structure repair for each A/C and upload on VAECO website whenever there is new structure damage found/ repaired. The numbering system of SDR as follow: SDR/xxx/yy/zzz. In which: a. xxx is the code of maintenance center Maintenance center Code Page 12.16-4
6.
12.16.9
REPAIR DOCUMENTS 1.

HAN Base Maintenance Center HAN Ramp Maintenance Center HCM Base Maintenance Center HCM Ramp Maintenance Center DAD Ramp Maintenance Center b. c. 2. yy is the year zzz is the order number of SDR
HBM HLM SBM SLM DLM
In order to monitor the repair, the SRO and SRR should be numbered as the same reference of SDR. For example: with the same repair, SDR/SLM/11/005 should have SRO/SLM/11/005 and SRR/SLM/11/005.
3.
If damage has a temporary repair and then followed by a permanent repair, Item 1 and Item 2 should be added in the references of the SRO and SRR. For example: with the same damage SDR/SLM/11/005, temporary repair documents are SRO/SLM/11/005 Item 1 and SRR/SLM/11/005 Item 1, permanent repair documents are SRO/SLM/11/005 Item 2 and SRR/SLM/11/005 Item 2.
4.
After completing the SRO, BMC shall complete STRUCTURAL REPAIR REPORT (SRR) (VAECO Form 6010) with the details of performed repair The BMC shall send the records of structure damaged repair to EGD via assigned message box haneng of VAECO website just after repair completion and no later than 24 hours since completion time: a. b. Completed SRO, SRR, Detail drawings or sketch of the repair, or Completed EO.
5.
6.
EGD reviews the repair document and updates the information into Structure Repair Control List and upload the List on VAECO website. If any discrepancy is found, request BMC to rectify it. The SDR, SRO, SRR, EO and all related document are transferred and kept IAW Aircraft maintenance record handling procedure. EGD controls and stores the copy of repair documents for at least 2 years since aircraft withdraw from service.
12.16.10 ARCHIVES 1. 2.
Page 12.16-5

PART 12 PROCEDURES FOR VNA 12.17 CONTROL OF ACCEPTABLE DEFERED DEFECT
12.17 12.17.1
CONTROL OF ACCEPTABLE DEFERED DEFECT PURPOSE To ensure acceptable deferred defects (ADD) and arising maintenance requirements are performed IAW applicable regulatory requirements.
12.17.2
SCOPE This procedure is applied for controlling of ADD and arising maintenance requirements including re-inspection after rectification.
12.17.3
RESPONSIBILITY 1. Director of MCC is responsible for: a. b. 2. Controlling ADD type B limitations. Planning and issuing WO to perform ADD rectification;
Director of RMC/ BMC is responsible for performing assigned WO. When a defect is discovered and need to be deferred, appropriate authorized staff shall raise ADD IAW VNA LMM, procedure 2.3 (for a structure damage, refer to SOP 12.16 for additional requirements). The RTS staff of related maintenance center shall carry out troubleshooting and related maintenance as specified in the maintenance data; issue Out of Phase Maintenance Requirement Notice (VAECO Form 5004) for any arising maintenance requirements. If the ADD has the operation limit or causes ETOPS, RVSM to be downgraded, authorized staff shall report to respective TPD. The TPD staff should update the information to web VAECO and notify to MCC. Respective TPD staff shall enter the information of the defect into AMASIS, create a deferred WO and enter all requirements of part/ materials, tool/ equipment in the Ingredients of the deferred WO. Staff of Respective TPD shall generate requisition for all item in the ingredients to issue Request for Supply (VAECO Form 4023). The Request for Supply of part/ materials is sent to LGD for handling. The Request for Supply of tool/ equipment is informed to respective CMC for handling. The handling action shall be entered in AMASIS. Staff of respective TPD shall update the information of ADD and required part/ materials in Acceptable Deferred Defects item of Technical Information menu on VAECO website. MCC shall control all ADDs, plan, issue WO and assign appropriate maintenance center to clear the ADD before due date. The RTS staff shall clear the ADD as requested work in the WO. If the WO are performed but does not help to clear the ADD, the RTS staff shall notify to respective TPD for deleting all no-longer needed part/ materials and/or T&E that have been declared in Ingredients of the deferred WO and issuing Request for closure of requisite item (VAECO Page 12.17-1
12.17.4
PROCEDURE 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7. 8. 9.

PART 12 PROCEDURES FOR VNA 12.17 CONTROL OF ACCEPTABLE DEFERED DEFECT
Form 4025). The respective TPD staff shall send the Request for closure of requisite item to LGD for cancelling the order. 10. If the ADD is cleared the RTS staff shall certify in the WO and transfer the records to the TPD to close all requisition item and close the WO in the AMASIS.
Page 12.17-2

PART 12 PROCEDURES FOR VNA 12.18 AIRCAFT SOFTWARE MANAGEMENT
12.18 12.18.1
AIRCRAFT SOFTWARE MANAGEMENT PURPOSE To establish a procedure for controlling of the loadable software configuration, for VNA aircrafts.
12.18.2 12.18.3
SCOPE This procedure is applied for VNA Airbus and Boeing aircrafts. RESPONSIBILITY 1. Director of EGD is responsible for: a. b. 2. 3. Set up and control of the aircraft software configuration. Duplicate the software for VNA aircraft IAW instruction of manufacturer.
Director of LGD is responsible for procuring the software spare disks IAW the Request for Supply of the EGD or maintenance staff. Director of RMC, BMC are responsible for updating the software disk and the software list stow on the cockpit; report any lost, discrepancy of software disk on the aircraft to EGD for further action. Software Back-up: a. General requirements: a personal computer with an updated virus protection, security protected and not networked can be used to copy software media. The duplicated software media should be identically labeled to the original software media and stamped. The software back-up is only performed if it is allowed to copy by the vendor. Source of the software: Purchase from the vendor. Download from the vendors website in accordance with the technical instructions. Software disks accompanied with the aircraft at the time of delivery. c. The assigned EGD staff will copy/download the software to the server. The software stored in the folder of the server with the name is identical for each aircraft type, ATA, part number of the software. For Airbus aircraft, the software disk allowed to duplicate is indicated in SIL 00-063. For Boeing aircraft, the software disk (Boeing and Supplier Furnished Equipment) can be duplicated using Disk Copy Tool P/N D6-82505. Page 12.18-1
12.18.4
PROCEDURE 1.
b.
2.
Duplicate the software disk: a. b.

PART 12 PROCEDURES FOR VNA 12.18 AIRCAFT SOFTWARE MANAGEMENT
c. 3.
For software of BFE (Buyer Supply Equipment), it is necessary to have the permission from the vendor before duplicating. For Airbus aircraft, the loadable software disks and the VAECO Form 3028 Cockpit stowed media . For Boeing aircraft, the loadable software disks and the VAECO Form 3029 Loadable Software Diskette/ Media Binders is stowed in the cockpit. Software configuration monitor/ update: If the modification result in the software part number changes, the software disk and the new VAECO Form 3028 or VAECO Form 3029 will be provided together with EO. When the EO is accomplished, the technical staff should update the software disk and new list on the cockpit according to EO requirement. During the maintenance which a new software part number required (not followed by EO), technical staff must notify EGD to provide new software disk and update the software list of subjected aircraft.
Aircraft Software Configuration Management: a. b.
c.
4.
Software configuration review schedule: The software list of each aircraft will be checked at 2A check interval. The technical staff should inform EGD any discrepancy for rectification.
12.18.5
ARCHIVES The software list of each aircraft will be kept at the EGD. One copy of the list is stored together with the software disk on the aircraft.
Page 12.18-2

PART 13 FORMS
PART 13
FORMS
Page 13-1

PART 13 FORMS 13.1 VAECO FORM AND GUIDANCE TO COMPLETION
13.1
VAECO FORM AND GUIDANCE FOR COMPLETION VAECO forms and guidance to complete each form are separated in VAECO Form manual.
Page 13.1-1

PART 13 FORMS 13.2 AUTHORITY AND CUSTOMER FORM AND GUIDANCE TO COMPLETION
13.2
AUTHORITY AND COMPLETION
CUSTOMER
FORM
AND
GUIDANCE
FOR
Authority and Customer forms used by VAECO and guidance to complete those forms are separated in VAECO Form manual.
Page 13.2-1

Sop I2r5

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sop I2r5

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Vietnam Airlines Corporation VIETNAM AIRLINES ENGINEERING COMPANY LTD.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES

A: Noi Bai International Airport, Hanoi, Vietnam T: 84-4-38843290 F: 84-4-38865176 W: www.vaeco.com.vn

VIETNAM AIRLINES ENGINEERING CO. LTD.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES

Issue: 02, Revision: 00, Date: 01 FEB 2012

VIETNAM AIRLINES ENGINEERING CO. LTD.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES

TABLE OF CONTENT GENERAL ................................................................................................... 1-1

PROCESSES .............................................................................................. 3-1

GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS ...................................................... 4-1

AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE CONTROL PROCEDURES .......................... 5-1

RAMP AND BASE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ................................. 6-1

Issue: 02, Revision: 05, Date: 25 APR 2013

VIETNAM AIRLINES ENGINEERING CO. LTD.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES

COMPONENT MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ........................................ 7-1

MAINTENANCE SUPPORT PROCEDURES .............................................. 8-1

LOGISTICS PROCEDURES ....................................................................... 9-1

PART 10 QUALITY SYSTEM PROCEDURES ......................................................... 10-1

Issue: 02, Revision: 05, Date: 25 APR 2013

VIETNAM AIRLINES ENGINEERING CO. LTD.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES

PART 11 HUMAN RESOURCE AND TRAINING PROCEDURES ........................... 11-1

PART 12 SPECIFIC PROCEDURES FOR VNA ...................................................... 12-1

Issue: 02, Revision: 05, Date: 25 APR 2013

VIETNAM AIRLINES ENGINEERING CO. LTD.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES

12.13 12.14 12.15 12.16 12.17 12.18

PART 13 FORMS ...................................................................................................... 13-1

Issue: 02, Revision: 05, Date: 25 APR 2013

VIETNAM AIRLINES ENGINEERING CO. LTD.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES

Issue No. Revision No. 01 01 02 02 02 02 02 02 00 01 00 01 02 03 04 05

Issue: 02, Revision: 05, Date: 25 APR 2013

VIETNAM AIRLINES ENGINEERING CO. LTD.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES

6.1-1 to 6.1-9 6.2-2

9.1-1 to 9.1-11 9.2-1

Issue: 02, Revision: 05, Date: 25 APR 2013

VIETNAM AIRLINES ENGINEERING CO. LTD.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES

Part. Chapter - Page

10.26-1 to 10.26-2 12.8-1 to 12.8-3 12.9-2 to 12.9-4 12.15-1 to 12.15-4

Issue: 02, Revision: 05, Date: 25 APR 2013

VIETNAM AIRLINES ENGINEERING CO. LTD.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES

Issue: 02, Revision: 00, Date: 01 FEB 2012

VIETNAM AIRLINES ENGINEERING CO. LTD.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES

Issue: 02, Revision: 04, Date: 28 NOV 2012

VIETNAM AIRLINES ENGINEERING CO. LTD.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES

Issue: 02, Revision: 04, Date: 28 NOV 2012

VIETNAM AIRLINES ENGINEERING CO. LTD.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES

Buy-back Critical task

Dock Control Room

Engineering engineer Foreman

Issue: 02, Revision: 05, Date: 25 APR 2013

VIETNAM AIRLINES ENGINEERING CO. LTD.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES

Production planner Store inspector Supervisor Sign-off